009 11279 R14.0 - IPS System Manual

A Publication of
NEC PHILIPS Unified Solutions Nederland B.V.

HILVERSUM, THE NETHERLANDS
Order No :
3522 009 11279
Date
September 2007
Great care has been taken to ensure that the information

contained in this handbook is accurate and complete.
Should any errors or omissions be discovered or should any users
wish to make suggestions for improving this handbook, they are
invited to send the relevant details to:
NEC PHILIPS Unified Solutions Nederland B.V.
P.O. BOX 32
1200 JD HILVERSUM
THE NETHERLANDS
NEC PHILIPS Unified Solutions Nederland B.V. 2007.

All rights are reserved. Reproduction in whole or in part is
prohibited without the written consent of the copyright owner. All
brand names and product names in this document are trademarks
or registered trademarks of their respective companies.
PREFACE
This manual is valid for the SOPHO 2000 IPS telephone system.
In this manual the term NEAX 2000 IPS or NEAX PBX telephone system represents the
SOPHO 2000 IPS system.
This book might refer to products not included in the SOPHO portfolio.
Certain items in this manual do not apply to the European market.
In case of doubt, please contact your supplier.
LIST OF TERMS
Abbr. NEC Description
NEC
(Trunk) Route Restriction Class
AIMWorX
Authorization Code
Background music (feature)
Abbr. PBC Description / Remarks

PBC
TRFC
Boss/Secretary dialing
Broker's call
Busy in/busy out - ACD
Class of Service
Coin lines
Consecutive Speed Dialing
Consultation hold
Development table
Dial conversion
Dynamic Dial Pad
Executive calling
Ground Start
Hearing Aid Compatibility
Home side trunk
User side
trunk
Legacy
Location number
Loop Start
Mate side trunk
Network
side trunk
MATWorX
Multi line terminal
Multiple Call Forwarding
My Line
Nailed down connection (data)
Night Connection - fixed
Night connection - fixed
Night Connection - flexible
Office Code
PLE
CLID
One touch key

OpenWorX
Operator
Party lines
Peer to peer
Pilot number
Preset dialing
Prime Line
Restriction Class
Route Advance
Route Pattern
Save and Repeat
Secondary appearance
ii
TRFC
LNR
Traffic Class
SMDR & CTI based management platform
PID code
When phone is idle, user can have
background music on speaker
Executive/Secretary
Shuttle : alternate between 2 parties
occupying one line
Group - Absent/Present switching
Facility Class Mark (sometimes traffic class)
Common number can be speed dial,
individual choice dialed manually
Enquiry
Analysis tree : table within numbering plan
Conversion from pulse to DTMF
Pressing numeric keys grabs a line as well.
VIP status assigned to a station.
Earth calling : analog trunk protocol
Voice volume control on terminals
For ISDN trunks
TDM based equipment (non IP)
Division based on capabilities or priorities in
the IP system
Subscriber signalling e.g. an ATU-SS
For ISDN trunks
Operational Maintenance interface tool
SOPHO Set / ErgoLine : digital terminal with
soft key assignment possible
Multi hop (maximum 5 hops allowed)
Users own station number.
Fixed connection between two data
adapters.
Permanent Line Extension
Permanent Line Extension
CF on night extension
Cluster Identity used for Open Numbering
Plans
Dterm keys, work (and programmed) like
speed dial function
CTI Application platform
PSTN operator / provider
Peer to peer : one to one relation on
functional level
Group number
En-block dialing : prepare number and send
it in one go (versus overlap dialing)
Seized line (trunk line or extension) when
going off-hook (or speaker)
Traffic Class
Alternative routing when trunk(s) busy
Tree : part of the number analysis table
Last Number Redial
park position / sub line

NEC
Single line terminal
Software Line Appearance
Split Call Forwarding
Stack Dial
Stack Dial
Station
Station Class
Sub Line
Tenant
Trunk Route
Voice Call
Whisper page
Account Code (Client Billing Code)
Authorization Code Facility
AC
ACF
ADF
ALM DSPP (External) Alarm Display Panel
ANI
Automatic Number Identification
ANS
AOC
AP
AP
ATND
AttCon
BATTM
BGM
BHCA
BK
BSY
BT
CAMA
CAS
CAT
CCIS
CCT
CF-D
Answer
Advice of charge
Application Card
Analog Port
Attendant
Attendant console
Battery Module
Back Ground Music service
Busy Hour Call Attempts
Black
Busy
Busy Tone
Centralized Message Accounting
Centralized Attendant Service
Customer Administration terminal
Common Channel Interoffice
Signalling
Common Control Switching
arrangement
CCIS Trunk
Call Forwarding - Destination
CFT
CIC
Conference trunk
Circuit Identification Code
CID
CIR
CIS
CM
CNP
CO
COT
CPN
CPN
CPU
CRD
CS
CSU
DAT
Call ID Display
Caller ID Receiver
Call Information System
Command
Closed Numbering Plan
Central Office
Central Office Trunk
Calling Party Number
Calling Party Number
Central Processing Unit
Call Redirect
Cell Station
CCSA

PBC
LNNR
Analog Phone
Virtual Extension
Separate CF for internal and external calls.
Last Number/Number Repetition
Outgoing calling list (5 entries)
Redial List : maximum 5 numbers
Extension /
DNR
FCM
Facility Class Mark
Lines on the stations, other then the prime
line
Analysis group : multi company on one PBX
Route
PID
Announcement without 3rd party hearing it.

Password integrated dialing
OAI related.
OAI related.
Caller subscriber number coming in with MF
signaling on T1 trunks
Operator console
A standard related to 911 service

Dterm used as programming device for PBX
Comparable to IMP
Customer specific leased lines/network, US
only
Call Forwarding Destination : no
preparation on originator necessary.
Trunk channel ID for virtual IP trunk
channels (Line number)
See Commands Manual
ISDN calling party number
Digital Announcement Trunk

iii

NEC

PBC
DBM
DCH
DD key
DDD
DDI
DDOVR
DeskCon
DID calls
D-Channel Handler
Do not Disturb Key
Direct Distance Dialing
Direct Digital interface
Do not Disturb Override
Desk Console
Direct Inward Dialing calls
DISA
DIT
Direct Inward System Access

DID trunk / Direct Inward Termination PLE
DLC
DM
DMS
DNIS
DOD
Digital Line Circuit

Distributed Module
Distributed Module Small
Dialed number Identification Service
Direct Outward Dialing
DDO
DP
DPC
DPC
DRS
(Rotary) Dial Pulse

Data Port Controller
Destination Point Code
Device Registration Server
DS
DSS/BLF
Differential Services (DiffServ)

Direct Station Select / Busy Lamp
Field
Device Server WorX
Dial Tone
Data Terminal Equipment
Digital (or IP) terminal
Digital Tone Generator
Digital Trunk Interface
Forced Account Code
Federal Communications
Commission
Floppy Disk
Forwarded - All calls
Forwarded - Busy
Forwarded - No answer
Frame Ground
Feature Group D format
Free Location Facility
DSW
DT
DTE
Dterm
DTG
DTI
FAC
FCC
FD
FDA
FDB
FDN
FG
FGD
FLF
FP
FX
HDT
HWT
ICH
ICI
ICM
IEC
ILC
IP
IPM
IPS
IPT
IPX
IVS
iv
Commands Manual - AP00 card
Firmware Processor
Foreign Exchange
Hold Tone
howler tone
ISDN channel handler
Incoming Call Identification
Intercom
International Electro-technical
Commission
ISDN line card
Internet Protocol
Indications per minute
Internet Protocol Server
IP trunk
Internet Protocol eXchange
Integrated Voice Server
T1/E1 interface to public network

SV
DDI
SuperVisor / Operator Console

Direct dialing in : not for FX and WATS
trunk (USA only)
Remote access to system
Permanent Line Extension(s) : for limited
direct inward dialing: 1/more trunk(s) related
to 1 station
For Dterm, Attendant and Desk Console.
Direct Dialing Out : setting up external calls

without attendant assistance
Pulse dialing
Kind of Cluster ID; for terminating office
Compare with Gatekeeper function:
registering endpoints
For Dterm assistant software
Dterm
Desktop Telephone (analog or digital)
American regulation office
Signalling format for ANI.

OIA related, Desksharing look-a-like.
NOT available for IPS 2000
Compare with PMC
Specific part of PSTN; US only
Alarm tone
IP
Internet Protocol
For flashing lamps / LEDs

NEC

PBC
KF
Key Feauture (registration)
KTF
LAN
LCR
Key Transfer Facility

Local Area Network
Least Cost Routing
LAN
LCCR
LDN
LDT
LEN
Listed Directory Number

Loop Dial trunk
Line Equipment Number
EHWA
LT
MAT
Line/Trunk
Maintenance Administration Terminal OMM
MB
Make Busy
MCI
MEM
MFG
MFR
MIB
MIC
MIS
MJ
MLDT
MN
MOC
MP
MRF
MSF
MSG
NEAX
NS
NTF
NTS
OAI
ODT
ODT
ONP
OPC
OPR
PAD
Message Center Interface

Main Memory
SETOUT
MF receiver / MFC receiver/sender

management Information Base
Microphone
management Information System
Major (alarm)
Melody Trunk
Minor (alarm)
PBR
PBSND
PC
PCK
PFT
PIM
Main Processor
Mode Reset Facility
Mode Set Feature
Message
NEC PBX
Network Station
Number Transfer Facility
Night Transfer Station
Open Application Interface
OD Trunk
Outband Dialing Trunk
Open Numbering Plan
Origional Point Code
Operator
(IP) Packet Assembler /
Disassembler
Push Button Receiver
Push Button Sender
Point Code
Pickup
Power Failure Transfer
Port Interface Module
PLO
PMS
Phase Locked Oscillator

Property Management System
PN
PNA
PPS
PROTIMS
PRT
PS
PS
QoS
Part Number
Phone line Network Alliance
Pulses per second
ISDN primary rate interface trunk
Personal Station
Portable Station
Quality of Service
Key systems are operating directly on

outside lines.
OAI related.
Local Area Network
Least cost call routing : number analysis
development manner
Equipment hardware Address : PIM nbr (0 ~

7)+ Port nbr (00 ~ 63) LEN = (000 ~ 763)
Operation Maintenance module : PC
needed in terminals mode
Set to Out Of Service : Out of Service / Not
installed situation for reset or maintenance
Interface for Voice Mail system
Microphone or its key
OM terminal window, part of MATWorX

Compare with CPU
OAI related.
OAI related.
SOPHO
OAI related.
Night Extension
CTI interface
2/4 wire E&M
Kind of Cluster ID; for originating office

Attendant
Used for TDM / IP translation
DTMF receiver
DTMF sender
Shelf : comparable with CSM and PM

shelves
PMS
Property Management System (in hotel

environments)
For example PN-8DLCC board
Used in pulse dialing
Proprietary protocol, used for building CCIS
NEC wireless system

NEC
RAS
RBT
RC
REN
RLS
ROT
RPIM
RSC
RST
RTP
SCF
SDT
SLT
SMDR
SMFN
SMFR
SOC
SP
SPID
SPN
SSFM
SSFR
SST
STA
STN
TAH
TAS
TCF
TCM
TDM
TDS
TDSW
TIC
TMF
TMSF
TNT
TRF
TSW
UAP
UCD
UNP
USOC
VC
VCT
VDSL
VM
VOIP
WAN
WATS
WCS
WH
WU
ZT
vi

PBC
Registration Admission Status

Ringback Tone
Room Cutoff
Ring Equivalence Number
Release
Reorder Tone
Remote PIM
Route restriction Class
Restricted
Real Time Protocol
Switch Control Facility
Special Dial Tone
Single Line Telephone
Station Message Detail Recording
FDCR
Status Monitor Facility (Notification)
Status Monitor Facility (Request)
System on chip
Soft Phone
Service Profile ID (ISDN)
BSP-ID
Special Part Number
Service Set facility Monitor
Service Set Facility Request
Service Set Tone
Station
Station
Trunk Appearance Hold
Trunk Answer Any Station
Terminal Control Facility
(Deluxe) Travelling Class Mark
Time division multiplexing
Time division switching
Time Division Switch
(Individual) Trunk identification Code
Terminal Multi-information transfer
Facility
(Terminal) Mode Set Facility
Tone/Music source interface
Transfer
Time Switched
User Application Processor
Uniform Call Distribution
Uniform Numbering Plan
User Service Order Code
Voice Compression
Voice CODEC circuit card
Very high data rate Digital Subscriber
Line
Voice Mail
Voice over IP
VOIP
Wide Area Network
WAN
Wide Area Telephone Service
Wireless Communication System
White
Wake up
Zone Transceiver
Registration Admission Status
OAI related.
Analog telephone
Full Detailed Call Recording
OAI related.
Basic Service Profile ID (ISDN)

OAI related.
OAI related.
Pickup incoming calls in night mode

OAI related.
Line numbers of trunk lines

OAI related.
OAI related.
Basic ACD. Distribution of calls based on

longest idle.
(Network) numbering plan
Other word for REN
Voice over IP
Wide Area Network
Specific part of PSTN, US only
"Analog DECT"
For Wireless system
Dterm icon
Meaning
Hold
Transfer
Speaker
Answer
Redial
Conf(erence)
Recall
Feature
MIC
Message
Directory
-/+
Help
Exit
vii
viii
NEAX 2000 IPS

System Manual
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION ..................................................................................................................
PURPOSE ....................................................................................................................
OUTLINE OF THIS MANUAL ......................................................................................
TERMS IN THIS MANUAL ...........................................................................................
1
1
1
3
PBX System Designation ...................................................................................................

Terminal Name ....................................................................................................................
3
3
REFERENCE MANUAL ...............................................................................................
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION ...........................................................................

SYSTEM OUTLINE ......................................................................................................
STATION-TO-STATION CONNECTION ......................................................................
PUBLIC NETWORK/TIE LINE NETWORK CONNECTION ........................................
CCIS CONNECTION ....................................................................................................
H.323 CONNECTION ...................................................................................................
REMOTE PIM OVER IP SYSTEM OUTLINE ...............................................................
EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION ........................................................................
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
16
Module .................................................................................................................................
Card ......................................................................................................................................
16
18
SYSTEM CONDITIONS ...............................................................................................
23
Conditions for Overall System ..........................................................................................

Conditions for DtermIP ........................................................................................................
Conditions for Peer-to-Peer Connection ..........................................................................
Conditions for Public Network/Tie Line Network Connection ........................................
Common Conditions for CCIS Connection and H.323 Connection ................................
Conditions for CCIS Connection .......................................................................................
Conditions for H.323 Connection ......................................................................................
Conditions for IP-PAD ........................................................................................................
Conditions for DRS .............................................................................................................
Conditions for Legacy Interface (LT/AP) ..........................................................................
Conditions for Maintenance ..............................................................................................
Conditions for Remote PIM over IP System .....................................................................
23
24
28
28
28
29
30
30
31
32
32
32
SYSTEM CAPACITY ...................................................................................................

SERVICE FEATURES .................................................................................................
52
71
Business/Hotel/Data/CCIS/ISDN/WCS ..............................................................................
OAI .......................................................................................................................................
Voice over IP (H.323) ..........................................................................................................
71
71
72
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9ptoc001.fm
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION .............................................................................................
PRECAUTIONS ...........................................................................................................
73
74
Grounding Requirements ..................................................................................................

Static Electricity Guard ......................................................................................................
Cautions for Unplugging/Plugging IP-PAD/16VCT/IPT/4VCT Card ................................
Turning Power ON ..............................................................................................................
Turning Power OFF ............................................................................................................
74
75
77
79
80
REQUIRED EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ...................................................................................
81
85
Mounting ETHER Card/MP Card ........................................................................................

Mounting IP-PAD Card .......................................................................................................
Mounting 16VCT Card ........................................................................................................
BUS Cable Connection between IP-PAD and 16VCT Cards ...........................................
LAN Cable Connection of IP-PAD Card ............................................................................
LAN Cable Connection of ETHER Card ............................................................................
87
88
93
94
95
96
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR H.323 CONNECTION .......................................
97
Mounting IPT Card .............................................................................................................. 97

Mounting 4VCT Card .......................................................................................................... 98
Mounting Conditions of IPT/4VCT Card ........................................................................... 99
BUS Cable Connection between IPT and 4VCT Cards .................................................... 101
LAN Cable Connection of IPT Card ................................................................................... 102
CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING ................................................................ 103

HOW TO READ THIS CHAPTER ................................................................................ 104
PRECAUTIONS ........................................................................................................... 105
System Data Backup .......................................................................................................... 105
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE ................................................................................. 106

BASIC DATA SETTING ............................................................................................... 107
Office Data Conversion ......................................................................................................
System Data Memory All Clear ..........................................................................................
Key FD Data Loading ..........................................................................................................
Setting System Clock .........................................................................................................
Setting Nation Code ...........................................................................................................
Setting A-law/-law .............................................................................................................
Setting DTG/Music on Hold/Tone ......................................................................................
LAN Data Assignment ........................................................................................................
VLAN Data Assignment ......................................................................................................
108
109
111
112
113
114
115
119
120
REMOTE PIM OVER IP DATA ASSIGNMENT ........................................................... 122

Remote PIM over IP System Setup ................................................................................... 122
Programming Procedure for Remote PIM over IP ........................................................... 124
Setting A-law/-law for Remote PIM over IP ..................................................................... 127
ii
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9ptoc001.fm
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Remote PIM over IP LAN Data Assignment .....................................................................
Remote PIM over IP VLAN Data Assignment ...................................................................
Survival Mode Assignment ................................................................................................
Setting Office Data Copy ....................................................................................................
Main Site/Remote Site Constitution Data Assignment ....................................................
Remote PIM over IP Feature Programming ......................................................................
ISDN Alternative Routing in Remote PIM Survival Mode ................................................
Remote Site Number Assignment .....................................................................................
128
130
132
133
134
146
151
156
SYSTEM CONSTITUTION DATA ASSIGNMENT ....................................................... 157

DtermIP DATA ASSIGNMENT ..................................................................................... 164
DtermIP Station Data Assignment ...................................................................................... 164

DtermIP Login/Logout Data Assignment ........................................................................... 167
DtermIP SETUP ............................................................................................................ 178

DtermIP LOGIN/LOGOUT OPERATION ...................................................................... 184
DtermIP Login ....................................................................................................................... 184
DtermIP Logout .................................................................................................................... 187
IP-PAD DATA ASSIGNMENT ..................................................................................... 188

CCIS VIRTUAL IPT DATA ASSIGNMENT .................................................................. 201
Programming Procedure for CCIS Virtual IPT ................................................................. 201
Virtual IPT Data Assignment .............................................................................................. 202
LOCATION DATA ASSIGNMENT ............................................................................... 221

IP FEATURE PROGRAMMING ................................................................................... 235
Automatic Program Download for IP Enabled Dterm/DtermIP ..........................................
Bandwidth Control ..............................................................................................................
Call Forwarding-Logout (DtermIP) ......................................................................................
FAX over IP ..........................................................................................................................
Modem over IP ....................................................................................................................
SNMP ...................................................................................................................................
Terminal Login via NAT ......................................................................................................
236
245
250
259
270
277
292
H.323 IP TRUNK DATA ASSIGNMENT ...................................................................... 301

Programming Procedure for H.323 IP Trunk .................................................................... 301
H.323 IPT Data Assignment ............................................................................................... 302
SYSTEM DATA BACKUP ........................................................................................... 323

SYSTEM RESET .......................................................................................................... 325
CHAPTER 4 CIRCUIT CARD INFORMATION ................................................................... 327
HOW TO READ THIS CHAPTER ................................................................................ 328
MOUNTING LOCATION OF CIRCUIT CARDS ........................................................... 329
Regular PIM ......................................................................................................................... 329
PIM for Backup CPU System ............................................................................................. 332
LIST OF REQUIRED CIRCUIT CARDS ....................................................................... 335
iii
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9ptoc001.fm
JULY/01/2006
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PN-CP24-A/PN-CP24-B/PN-CP24-C/PN-CP24-D (MP) ......................................................
PN-CP27-A/PN-CP27-B (MP) ..............................................................................................
PZ-M606-A (ETHER) ............................................................................................................
PN-32IPLA (IP-PAD) ............................................................................................................
PN-32IPLA-A (IP-PAD) ........................................................................................................
PN-16VCTA/PN-16VCTA-A (16VCT) ..................................................................................
PN-8IPLA (IP-PAD) ..............................................................................................................
PN-IPTB (IPT) ......................................................................................................................
PN-4VCTI (4VCT) .................................................................................................................
336
342
347
349
353
357
359
362
366
APPENDIX A SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS .......................................................................

SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................................
IP SPECIFICATIONS ...................................................................................................
A1
A2
A4
APPENDIX B LEN ASSIGNMENT .....................................................................................

LOCATION OF EACH LEN .........................................................................................
B1
B2
LEN of CM14 ........................................................................................................................ B4

LEN of CM10 ........................................................................................................................ B14
APPENDIX C REMOTE PIM OVER IP SAMPLE SETUP .................................................. C1

SAMPLE SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ....................................................................... C2
CONDITIONS FOR SAMPLE SYSTEM ....................................................................... C4
LIST OF COMMANDS ................................................................................................. C5
SETUP THE SYSTEM .................................................................................................. C11
APPENDIX D VOICE QUALITY MEASURES IN IP-PAD ..................................................
COUNTERMEASURES FOR ECHO ...........................................................................
COUNTERMEASURES FOR OTHERS .......................................................................
D1
D2
D8
APPENDIX E TCP/UDP/RTP PORT NUMBER CONDITIONS ..........................................

TCP/UDP/RTP PORT NUMBER CONDITIONS ..........................................................
E1
E2
APPENDIX F FULL-DUPLEX/HALF-DUPLEX CONDITIONS OF LAN INTERFACE .......

FULL-DUPLEX/HALF-DUPLEX CONDITIONS OF LAN INTERFACE .......................
F1
F2
iv
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9ptoc001.fm
JULY/01/2006
INTRODUCTION
PURPOSE/OUTLINE OF THIS MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
PURPOSE
This manual explains the system description, the hardware installation and the programming procedure for
the NEAX 2000 IPS INTERNET PROTOCOL SERVER.
OUTLINE OF THIS MANUAL

This manual consists of four chapters and two appendixes. The following paragraphs summarize Chapters
1 through 4 and Appendixes A, B, C, D, E and F.
CHAPTER 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
This chapter explains the system outline, the equipment name and function of
module and circuit cards, system capacity, system conditions and service features
for the system.
CHAPTER 2
INSTALLATION
This chapter explains the required equipment and hardware installation procedure
such as mounting cards and connecting cables for the system.
CHAPTER 3
SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

This chapter explains the programming procedure of the system data, DtermIP setup
procedure and DtermIP login/logout procedure.
CHAPTER 4
CIRCUIT CARD INFORMATION

This chapter explains the mounting location, the meaning of lamp indications and
the switch settings of each circuit card for the system.
APPENDIX A SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS

This appendix explains the specifications of the system.
APPENDIX B LEN ASSIGNMENT
This appendix contains the location of Line Equipment Number (LEN) for each
system configuration and the data assignment.
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch0001.fm
JANUARY/20/2006
INTRODUCTION
OUTLINE OF THIS MANUAL
APPENDIX C REMOTE PIM OVER IP SAMPLE SETUP

This appendix explains the required data and the procedure of the data setting for
Remote PIM over IP system, using a sample system configuration.
APPENDIX D VOICE QUALITY MEASURES IN IP-PAD
This appendix describes how to reduce echoes in 2000 IPS and the setup method.
APPENDIX E TCP/UDP/RTP PORT NUMBER CONDITIONS
This appendix explains the default TCP/UDP/RTP port number and range of the
available TCP/UDP/RTP port numbers used in 2000 IPS.
APPENDIX F
FULL-DUPLEX/HALF-DUPLEX CONDITIONS OF LAN INTERFACE

This appendix explains the Full-Duplex/Half-Duplex conditions of the LAN
Interface cards.
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch0001.fm
INTRODUCTION
TERMS IN THIS MANUAL
TERMS IN THIS MANUAL

PBX System Designation
PBX system is designated as PBX or system usually.
When we must draw a clear line between the PBX systems, they are designated as follows.
2000 IPS : NEAX 2000 IPS INTERNET PROTOCOL SERVER
2400 IPX: NEAX 2400 IPX Internet Protocol eXchange
IMX
: NEAX 2400 IMS (IMX)/NEAX 7400 ICS M140MX or more/NEAX 7400 IMX M240 or more
DMR
IPS
: NEAX IPSDMR INTERNET PROTOCOL SERVERDMR
IPSDM : NEAX IPSDM INTERNET PROTOCOL SERVERDM
Terminal Name
The following IP terminals are designated as DtermIP usually, unless we need to mention the type of terminal in particular.
DtermIP (IP Adapter Type) [For North America Only]
DtermIP (IP Bundled Type)
DtermIP INASET
DtermSP20
DtermSP30
NOTE 1: Dterm75 (Series E)/Dterm85 (Series i) terminal can be used as the IP terminal by attaching the
IP Adapter (IP Enabled Dterm). This terminal provides users with all features currently available in DtermIP.
NOTE 2: In regard to the China market, we have not released NEAX 2000 IPS INTERNET PROTOCOL
SERVER but NEAX 2000 is released.
NOTE 3: In regard to the China market, we have not released NEAX 2400 IPX Internet Protocol
eXchange but NEAX 2400 is released.
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch0001.fm
INTRODUCTION
REFERENCE MANUAL
REFERENCE MANUAL
During installation, refer also to the manuals below:
Installation Procedure Manual:
Contains the installation procedure for the PBX system.
Command Manual:
Contains the Customer Administration Terminal (CAT) operation, command functions and data required for programming the system and the Resident System Program.
Office Data Programming Manual:
Contains the Customer Specifications Sheets and the Office Data Programming Sheets.
Feature Programming Manual:
Contains procedure for programming each business and hotel feature.
Maintenance Manual:
Contains the maintenance service features and the recommended troubleshooting procedure.
CCIS System Manual:
Contains the system description, hardware installation procedure, programming procedure and the
operation test procedure for the CCIS System.
ISDN System Manual:
Contains the system description, hardware installation procedure, programming procedure and the
operation test procedure for the ISDN System.
WCS System Manual:
Contains the system description, hardware installation procedure and the programming procedure for
the Wireless (WCS) System.
Remote PIM System Manual: NOTE
Contains the system description, hardware installation procedure and the troubleshooting procedure
for the TDM based Remote PIM System.
Q-SIG System Manual:
the Q-SIG System.
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch0001.fm
OCTOBER/14/2005
INTRODUCTION
REFERENCE MANUAL
OAI System Manual:

Contains the system description, installation procedure, programming procedure and the troubleshooting information for providing the Open Application Interface (OAI) to the NEAX 2000 IPS
System.
IM-16 System Manual:
Contains the hardware installation procedure and the programming procedure for the NEAXMail
IM-16 Voice Mail System.
AD-8 System Manual:
Contains the hardware installation procedure and the programming procedure for the NEAXMail
AD-8 Voice Mail System.
SMDR/MCI/PMS Interface Specifications:
Contains the interface specifications for Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR), Message Center Interface (MCI), Property Management System (PMS) and the PMS operation.
WLAN System Manual:
the WLAN System.
NEAX IPSDM Hardware Installation Guide:
Contains the general information and the installation procedure for the NEAX IPSDM (Internet Protocol Server Distributed Model)/NEAX IPSDMR (Internet Protocol Server Distributed Model Remote) System.
NOTE:
TDM based Remote PIM system is not available from Series 3200 R6.2 software.
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch0001.fm
JANUARY/20/2006
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY.
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch0001.fm
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
CHAPTER 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
This chapter explains the system outline, equipment name and function of
module and circuit cards, system capacity, system conditions and service features for the system.
SYSTEM OUTLINE ....................................................................

STATION-TO-STATION CONNECTION ...................................
PUBLIC NETWORK/TIE LINE NETWORK CONNECTION ......
CCIS CONNECTION ..................................................................
H.323 CONNECTION .................................................................
REMOTE PIM OVER IP SYSTEM OUTLINE ............................
EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION ......................................
SYSTEM CONDITIONS .............................................................
SYSTEM CAPACITY .................................................................
SERVICE FEATURES ...............................................................
8
9
10
11
12
13
16
23
52
71
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch1001.fm

SYSTEM OUTLINE
SYSTEM OUTLINE
2000 IPS is an IP communication system that integrates voice terminals through Peer-to-Peer connection
to the IP network.
The system is a hybrid system to accommodate both IP multiline terminals (DtermIP) and the Legacy
PBXs terminals (Legacy terminal).
Line/Trunk cards and Application Processor cards can be mounted in the system to provide the Legacy
PBX features that use the Time Division Switch (TDSW).
The illustration below shows the typical system outline.
System Outline of 2000 IPS

2000 IPS
PBX
PSTN/
GSTN
TRK
SLT/D
term
C.O.
TRK
TIE
LC/DLC
IP-PAD
TDSW
INTERNET/
INTRANET
IPT
(H.323
Handler)
H.323 GK
1 board MP
Router
Switching HUB (100 Mbps)
LAN
DtermIP
Router
Switching HUB
Router
MAT (via LAN)
DtermIP
Client PC
DtermIP
Client PC
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch1001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

STATION-TO-STATION CONNECTION
STATION-TO-STATION CONNECTION
Station-to-Station connection is available on the LAN.
For DtermIP-to-DtermIP connection (Peer-to-Peer connection), the voice data is transmitted and received
directly between DtermIPs on the LAN.
For DtermIP-to-Legacy terminal connection, the IP-PAD card is required to transmit and receive the voice
data. This card is used to control and convert the voice data.
The MP card manages control signals in both types of connections.
The illustration below shows a system outline of Station-to-Station Connection.
System Outline of Station-to-Station Connection

Control Signal
2000 IPS
TDSW
Legacy Terminal
LC/DLC
Voice Data
IP-PAD
(PROTIMS over IP)
Control Signal
MP
LAN
DtermIP
DtermIP
DtermIP
Voice Data
(Peer-to-Peer Connection)
IP-PAD: PN-32IPLA/
PN-32IPLA-A/
PN-8IPLA
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch1001.fm

PUBLIC NETWORK/TIE LINE NETWORK CONNECTION
PUBLIC NETWORK/TIE LINE NETWORK CONNECTION

The system can be connected with a Public Network or Tie Line Network.
When the DtermIP communicates with the DtermIP/Legacy terminal in the destination office via Public Network or Tie Line Network, the IP-PAD card and the trunk card are required to transmit and receive the
voice data.
The illustration below shows a system outline of Public Network/Tie Line Network Connection.
System Outline of Public Network/Tie Line Network Connection

2000 IPS/
2400 IPX
2000 IPS
TDSW
Voice Data
IP-PAD
TDSW
LC/DLC
IP-PAD
*TRUNK
*TRUNK
Legacy Terminal
PSTN/GSTN/
TIE LINE
MP
MP
Control
Signal
Control
Signal
LAN
LAN
DtermIP
DtermIP
Legacy Terminal
*TRUNK
For ISDN-PRI
: PRT
For ISDN-BRI
: BRT
For GSTN
: COT
For Tie Line (Digital) : CCT/DTI
For Tie Line (Analog): LDT/ODT
IP-PAD: PN-32IPLA/
PN-32IPLA-A/
PN-8IPLA
10
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch1001.fm

CCIS CONNECTION
CCIS CONNECTION
The system can be connected with the IP network by No. 7 Common Channel Inter-office Signaling
(CCIS) via the Virtual IPT, when the destination office is 2000 IPS or 2400 IPX.
For DtermIP-to-DtermIP connection via CCIS (Peer-to-Peer connection), the voice data is transmitted and
received directly between DtermIPs via the IP network (CCIS via IP).
For DtermIP-to-Legacy terminal connection via CCIS, the IP-PAD card is required to transmit and receive
the voice data. This card is used to control and convert the voice data.
The MP card has a built-in Virtual IPT and the Virtual IPT manages control signals in both types of connections.
The illustration below shows a system outline of CCIS Connection.
System Outline of CCIS Connection

Legacy Terminal
2000 IPS/
2400 IPX
2000 IPS
Voice Data
TDSW
LC/DLC
TDSW
IP-PAD
IP-PAD
Legacy Terminal
LC/DLC
INTERNET/
INTRANET
(CCIS via IP)
MP
MP
Control Signal
LAN
LAN
ROUTER
DtermIP
ROUTER
DtermIP
DtermIP
Voice Data
(Peer-to-Peer Connection)
NOTE:
IP-PAD: PN-32IPLA/
PN-32IPLA-A/
PN-8IPLA
When the destination office uses the physical IPT card, for example, when connecting to the
former PBX system, the IPT card and 4VCT card are required in both offices.
In this case, refer to the NEAX 2000 IVS2/NEAX 2000 INTEGRATED VOICE SERVER/NEAX
7400 ICS M100MX IP System Manual.
11
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch1001.fm

H.323 CONNECTION
H.323 CONNECTION
The system can be connected with the IP network by ITU-T recommendation H.323 protocol. The system
can be connected to the terminal and network equipment according to H.323 protocol.
For DtermIP-to-DtermIP connection via the IP network with H.323 protocol, the IPT card and IP-PAD card
are required to transmit and receive the control signal and voice data. For voice compression, the 4VCT
card is required.
For Legacy terminal connection via the IP network with H.323 protocol, the IPT card is required. For voice
compression, the 4VCT card is required.
The illustration below shows a system outline of H.323 Connection.
System Outline of H.323 Connection

Gatekeeper
2000 IPS/
2400 IPX
2000 IPS
TDSW
IP-PAD
Voice Data
4VCT
4VCT
H.323 IPT
H.323 IPT
TDSW
Legacy Terminal
LC/DLC
IP-PAD
INTRANET
MP
MP
Control
Signal
LAN
LAN
ROUTER
ROUTER
DtermIP
DtermIP
IP-PAD: PN-32IPLA/
PN-32IPLA-A/
PN-8IPLA
H.323 Terminals/Gateway etc.
12
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch1001.fm

REMOTE PIM OVER IP SYSTEM OUTLINE

[Series 3200 R6.2 software required]
When IPSDMR/IPSDM and 2000 IPS PIM are installed at Remote Site, and connected to a Main Site over
IP network, the Main Site system controls and maintains the operation of Remote Sites as one single system. If a communication failure occurs between the Main Site and Remote Site, the Remote Site automatically changes over to a survival mode and operates as a stand-alone system.
IPSDMR: IPS Distributed Model Remote (with PN-CP31-A/PN-CP31-B/PN-CP31-C/PN-CP31-D)
IPSDM : IPS Distributed Model (with PN-CP24-A/PN-CP24-B/PN-CP24-C/PN-CP24-D)
Following figure shows an image of Remote PIM over IP system.
System Outline of Remote PIM over IP

PSTN/
GSTN
Remote Site-1
PSTN/
GSTN
Main Site
Remote Site-2
IP Network
LAN/
WAN
Remote Site-3
13
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch1001.fm
JULY/01/2006

Outline of System Operation

The MP card of Main Site controls call processing, and Remote Site follows the Main Site in normal
operation mode.
Remote Site can accommodate analog Single Line telephones, Dterm, PS, DtermIP, and LT/AP cards.
Local Switch (TDSW) at Remote Site connects an outside party when the Remote Site is directly
connected to the PSTN/GSTN (Remote Site-1 in the above figure).
In the case of connections between Main Site and Remote Site, or Remote Site and Remote Site, the
voice path is connected via Peer-to-Peer or IP-PAD.
If the communications between Main Site and Remote Site are interrupted, the Remote Site starts a
survival mode operation after the system reset.
Outline of Survival Mode Operation
Remote Site system watches a Keep Alive signal sent from Main Site regularly.
If a line failure occurs (Keep Alive signal is not received), Remote Site resets the own system and
starts survival mode operation as a stand-alone system to control the call processing within the Remote Site.
During survival mode operation, Remote Site system checks regularly whether the communications
with Main Site is possible or not. When the Remote Site regards that the communications are possible, the Remote Site will change over to the normal mode to communicate with the Main Site automatically or manually.
Survival Mode Operation Outline
1. Detect link down to Main Site
Remote
PSTN/
GSTN
Router
Main
DOWN!
2. System reset and change over

Dterm
Router
IP
Network
to survival mode
3. Auto registration of
DtermIP to Remote Site
14
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch1001.fm
JANUARY/20/2006

Outline of Link Down Notice

This feature allows to display the link state between Main Site and Remote Site on the designated Dterm
or DtermIP at both sites, and allows users at both sites to notice the link failure.
Link Down Notice Outline
Remote
PSTN/
GSTN
Router
Main
DOWN!
Router
IP
Network
Remote Office
Administrator
Main Office
Administrator
1. Notice button is flashing

2. Press the button and the message
is display on LCD: Link Down
to Site xx
1. Notice button is flashing

2. Press the button and the message
is display on LCD: Link Down
to Site xx
Outline of User Mobility

[Series 3500 software required]
In a Remote PIM over IP system, when a DtermIP user and DtermIP or only a DtermIP user moves to another
site, in the destination site (visitor site) this feature allows the DtermIP user to use the station number that
had been used in the original site (home site).
15
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch1001.fm

EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION

This section explains the names and functions of the equipment (modules, circuit cards) used in the system.
Module
This table shows the names and functions of the modules.
For the installation hardware, refer to the Installation Procedure Manual.
Module Name and Function

EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL
NAME
NAME
FUNCTION
SN1617
PIMMD
PIM
Port Interface Module (PIM)

Maximum 64 physical ports per PIM.
Houses two batteries for protection from short power interruption
(for 30 minutes).
At maximum configuration, the system consists of eight PIMs,
and provides a total of 512 physical ports (64 ports 8).
SN1663
PIMMG
[For EU]
PIM
Port Interface Module (PIM)

(for 30 minutes).
At maximum configuration, the system consists of eight PIMs,
and provides a total of 512 physical ports (64 ports 8).
SN1658
PIMMF
PIM
Port Interface Module (PIM) for Backup CPU System

(for 30 minutes).
One PIM is required per Backup CPU system.
SN1664
PIMMH
[For EU]
PIM
Port Interface Module (PIM) for Backup CPU System

(for 30 minutes).
One PIM is required per Backup CPU system.
Continued on next page
16
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch1001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

Module Name and Function

NAME
NAME
FUNCTION
COVER
PARTS
ASSEM-A
COVER PARTS
ASSEM
Cover Parts Assembly

One cover parts assembly is required for each PIM.
SN1545
BASERE
BASE/TOP
ASSEM
Base/Top Cover Assembly

One base and top cover assembly is required for each stack.
SN1619
BATTMB
BATTM
Battery Module for housing PIM or CS (ZT) backup batteries

Houses two pairs of batteries for protection from long power interruption (for 3 hours).
SN1671
BATTMG
[For EU]
BATTM
Battery Module for housing PIM backup batteries

Houses two pairs of batteries for protection from long power interruption (for 3 hours).
TOP COVER
ASSEM
17
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch1001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

Card
This table shows the names and functions of circuit cards exclusively used in 2000 IPS.
For other legacy Control cards, Application Processor cards and Line/Trunk cards, refer to the Installation
Procedure Manual.
NOTE 1: PZ-M537 (EXPMEM) card is not required for the MP (PN-CP24-A/PN-CP24-B/PN-CP24-C/
PN-CP24-D/PN-CP27-A/PN-CP27-B) card.
NOTE 2: PN-AP01 (AP01) card and PN-CC01 (ETHER) card cannot be mounted in 2000 IPS.
Card Name and Function

NAME
NAME
PN-CP24-A/
PN-CP24-B/
PN-CP24-C/
PN-CP24-D
NOTE:
MP
FUNCTION
Main Processor Card
Provides LAN control function, System-based Device Registration Server (DRS), built-in FP, Virtual FP, built-in OAI, built-in
SMDR on RS-232C, built-in SMDR on IP*, built-in PMS on IP*,
Virtual IPT, Virtual CSH, 33 MHz PCI BUS, Memory (SDRAM
32MB, Flash ROM 9MB), TDSW (1024CH 1024CH), 16-line
CFT, PB sender, Clock, 2-line PLO (receiver mode/source mode),
two RS-232C ports, 2-line DAT (Recording duration: Maximum
128 seconds), DK, 4-line PB receiver, Modem for remote maintenance (33.6 Kbps), internal Music-on-Hold tone, BUS interface.
BUS interface functions as a driver/receiver of various signals,
adjusts gate delay timing and cable delay timing, monitors I/O Bus
and PCM BUS, MP Program Download (FTP)**.
NOTE
One card is required per system.
* : Series 3400 software enhancement
**: Series 3500 software enhancement
MP Program Download (FTP) is available for PN-CP24-C/PN-CP24-D.

18
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch1001.fm
JULY/01/2006


NAME
NAME
FUNCTION
PN-CP27-A/
PN-CP27-B
MP
Main Processor Card for Backup CPU System

Provides LAN control function, System-based Device Registration Server (DRS), built-in FP, Virtual FP, built-in OAI, built-in
SMDR on RS-232C, built-in SMDR on IP*, built-in PMS on IP*,
Virtual IPT, Virtual CSH, 33 MHz PCI BUS, Memory (SDRAM
32MB, Flash ROM 9MB), TDSW (1024CH 1024CH), 16-line
CFT, PB sender, Clock, 2-line PLO (receiver mode/source mode),
two RS-232C ports, 2-line DAT (Recording duration: Maximum
128 seconds), DK, 4-line PB receiver, Modem for remote maintenance (33.6 Kbps), internal Music-on-Hold tone, BUS interface.
BUS interface functions as a driver/receiver of various signals,
adjusts gate delay timing and cable delay timing, monitors I/O Bus
and PCM BUS.
Two cards are required per Backup CPU system.
One card for active MP [MP0] and another card for stand by MP
[MP1].
*: Series 3400 software enhancement
PZ-M606-A
ETHER
Ethernet Control Card

Mounted on MP card to accommodate the Ethernet and transmit/
receive a signal of TCP/IP protocol.
Provides Auto Negotiation function.
Always set to ON.
[For Series 3300 software or before]
Set to ON/OFF by the office data setting.
[For Series 3400 software or later]
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX twisted pair cable is connected directly
to this card.
19
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch1001.fm
JULY/01/2006


NAME
NAME
PN-32IPLA/
PN-32IPLA-A
IP-PAD
PN-16VCTA/
PN-16VCTAA
16VCT
FUNCTION
32-channel IP-PAD Card
Provides LAN Interface, Packet Assembly/Disassembly to accommodate Legacy Line/Trunk interface.
Provides voice compression DSP control functions such as voice
compression control, DTMF relay.
Voice compression protocol: G.711 (64 Kbps)
FAX protocol: Pass-through (G.711)
NOTE 1
Provides Auto Negotiation function (Set to ON/OFF by the switch
setting).
Used together with maximum two 16VCT cards.
Two cards can be accommodated per built-in FP/FP card, maximum 8 per system.
to this card.
16-channel CODEC Card for 32-channel IP-PAD Card
compression control, DTMF relay and FAX relay.
Voice compression protocols:
G.711 (64 Kbps), G.723.1 (5.3 Kbps/6.3 Kbps), G.729a
(8 Kbps)
NOTE 2
FAX protocol: T.30, Pass-through (G.711, G.726)
NOTE 1
Used together with IP-PAD (PN-32IPLA/PN-32IPLA-A) card.
Two cards can be accommodated per IP-PAD (PN-32IPLA/PN32IPLA-A) card, maximum 16 per system.
NOTE 1: IP-PAD (PN-32IPLA) card and 16VCT (PN-16VCTA) card do not support FAX relay.
NOTE 2: When using G.723.1, 5.3 Kbps is available for the receiving bit rate.
20
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch1001.fm


NAME
NAME
PN-8IPLA
IP-PAD
FUNCTION
Provides LAN Interface, Packet Assembly/Disassembly to accommodate Legacy Line/Trunk interface. And provides voice compression DSP control functions such as voice compression control,
DTMF relay.
(8 Kbps)
NOTE 1
FAX protocol: Pass-through (G.711, G.726)
Provides Auto Negotiation function.
NOTE 2
Always set to ON.
Set to ON/OFF by the switch setting.
When mounting 24DSP (PZ-24IPLA) card, this card can provides
up to 32-channel of IP-PAD (When using G.723.1, provides up to
24-channel of IP-PAD).
Two cards can be accommodated per built-in FP/FP card, maximum 8 per system.
to this card.
NOTE 1: When using G.723.1, 5.3 Kbps is available for the receiving bit rate.
NOTE 2: When using the firmware program of SC-3330 IPS IPADT PROG-B1 or later for the PN-8IPLA
card, you may set the Auto Negotiation ON/OFF settings by the SW0-3. When using the
firmware program of SC-3213 IPS IPADT PROG-A1 for the PN-8IPLA card, Auto Negotiation
function is always set to ON.
21
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch1001.fm
JULY/01/2006


NAME
NAME
PZ-24IPLA
24DSP
PN-IPTB
IPT
PN-4VCTI
4VCT
NOTE:
FUNCTION
24-channel DSP Card for 8-channel IP-PAD Card
Provides Packet Assembly/Disassembly to accommodate Legacy
Line/Trunk Interface. And provides voice compression DSP control functions such as voice compression control, DTMF relay
same as IP-PAD (PN-8IPLA) card.
Used to expand the IP-PAD channel up to 32-channels.
IP Trunk Card
Provides LAN Interface, transmitting/receiving compressed voice
or signals over IP network.
Provides Auto Negotiation function (Set to ON/OFF by the switch
setting).
Used together with maximum of three 4VCT (PN-4VCTI) cards
(12-channels).
to this card.
4-channel CODEC Card for IP Trunk Card
compression control, DTMF relay and FAX relay.
NOTE
(8 Kbps)
FAX protocol: T.30
Used together with IP Trunk (PN-IPTB) card.
Four cards can be accommodated per IP Trunk (PN-IPTB) card,
maximum 32 per system.
When using 4VCT card for H.323, FAX relay is not available.
22
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch1001.fm

SYSTEM CONDITIONS
SYSTEM CONDITIONS
Conditions for Overall System
To connect the MP (PN-CP24-A/PN-CP24-B/PN-CP24-C/PN-CP24-D/PN-CP27-A/PN-CP27-B)
card to the LAN, ETHER (PZ-M606-A) card is required on the MP card.
When you set or change the system data, the system data backup must be executed by CMEC Y=6>0:
0. If the system is turned off or MP card is reset without the backup, the data that has been set or
changed is cleared.
System data can be saved to the flash memory on the MP card on a daily basis. The data setting to
execute the regular system data backup is required.
While saving the system data to the flash memory, the SYSD lamp on the MP card flashes. Do not
turn off or reset the system while the SYSD lamp is flashing.
After executing the system data memory all clear, FP No. 00 is set to MP built-in FP and FP No. 0103 are set to Signaling Converter (Virtual FP) in default.
One Virtual FP/AP card provides 64 ports to connect the Line/Trunk cards.
The DTMF sender signal width of Dterm/DtermIP is 112-128 ms.
When upgrading the software of the system from Series 3200 R6.2 or before to Series 3300 or later,
the office data conversion is required. For details, see
Page 108.
When connecting the MP card/IP-PAD card/IP terminal and the switching HUB which Spanning
Tree (IEEE 802.1d) is available, communication failures shown below may occur. Set up the Spanning Tree invalid by the switching HUB.
IP terminal fails to connect to 2000 IPS.
IP terminal cannot communicate with the IP terminal.
IP terminal cannot communicate with the SLT/Dterm.
Remote Site cannot change over to the normal mode in the Remote PIM over IP system.
When connecting the MP card/IP-PAD card/IP terminal and the switching HUB which LACP (Link
Aggregation Control Protocol: IEEE 802.3ad) function is available, communication failures shown
below may occur. Set up the LACP function invalid by the switching HUB.
Remote Site cannot change over to the normal mode in the Remote PIM over IP system.
23
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch1001.fm
JULY/01/2006

SYSTEM CONDITIONS
Conditions for DtermIP

For the DtermIP, an AC-DC adapter or inline power patch panel is required.
The DtermIP cannot be accommodated in the TDM based Remote PIM. NOTE
The hold tone for DtermIP is only Minuet. The hold tone set by CM48 Y=3 is not effective for
DtermIP.
The DtermSP30 can be used as the information desk console that provides the Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) function. When using the DtermSP30 as the information desk console with ACD, the
DtermSP30 that provides the firmware G version 8.0 or later is required.
NOTE:
TDM based Remote PIM system is not available from Series 3200 R6.2 software.
DtermIP login
(1)
For the DtermIP login, there are three types of method as shown below.
Automatic Login Mode (Authentication by MAC Address)
DtermIP is registered by MAC Address Authentication.
Used when using other terminals to log in is not necessary.
Protected Login Mode
DtermIP is registered by Password Authentication.
Used when using other terminals to log in is necessary.
Fixed Connection Mode
DtermIP is registered by both MAC Address and Password Authentication.
Used when using such as shared terminals (e.g. conference room phone) to log in is necessary.
Automatic Login Mode is used to register DtermIP usually, but with this mode, Login Mode can be
used to register DtermIP if needed.
24
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch1001.fm
JULY/01/2006

SYSTEM CONDITIONS
Examples of Using Fixed Connection Mode

When a shared DtermIP as station number 300 is used in Fixed Connection Mode in a conference
room, and also the shared DtermIP is used as station number 200 on the users desk in Login Mode.
STEP1: Logout from the shared DtermIP as station number 300.
STEP2: Login to the shared DtermIP with station number 200 as the users desks station number.
NEAX 2000 IPS
After logging in to Conference Room

(Shared Terminal) with STN 200,
login screen is displayed.
Conference Room
(Shared Terminal)
User's Desk
DtermIP STN 300

(Protected Login Mode)
DtermIP STN 200

(Login Mode)
Logout from STN300

Login with STN 200
NOTE:
Logout from the shared DtermIP to return to the former status. The shared DtermIP is reconnected as station number 300 automatically. The DtermIP on the users desk is needed to login manually.
25
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch1001.fm
JULY/01/2006

SYSTEM CONDITIONS
When DtermIP on the users desk is used as station number 200 in Fixed Connection Mode, and also
DtermSP30 out of the office is used as station number 200.
STEP1: Connect NEAX 2000 IPS from DtermSP30, and login to DtermSP30 with station number 200.
NEAX 2000 IPS
IP Network
After logging with SoftPhone,

login screen is displayed.
Out of Office
User's Desk
SoftPhone
DtermSP30 STN 200
DtermIP STN 200

(Login Mode)
Login with STN 200
NOTE:
(2)
Logout from the DtermSP30 or power off the PC to return to the former status. The DtermIP on
the users desk is reconnected as station number 200 automatically.
For the common conditions of the three types of DtermIP login method are shown below.
Register Automatic Login Mode (Authentication by MAC Address) for DtermSP20 by CM15
Y=480.
Registering Protected Login Mode for DtermSP30 by CM15 Y=480 is recommended.
When these login methods are used between the sites of Remote PIM over IP, use User Mobility
simultaneously. Protected Login Mode and Fixed Connection Mode can be used on User Mobility.
The terminal which has registered MAC Address for Fixed Connection Mode can not be registered
to other site.
To change login method, do the following operation.
Change from Automatic Login Mode (Authentication by MAC Address) to Protected Login Mode
1. Change login method by CM15 Y=480.
2. Logout or clear the MAC Address by CM12 Y=90.
3. Login again.
Change from Fixed Connection Mode to Automatic Login Mode (Authentication by MAC
Address)/Protected Login Mode
1. Clear the MAC Address of Fixed Connection Mode by CM12 Y=92.
26
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch1001.fm
JULY/01/2006

SYSTEM CONDITIONS
3. Logout or clear the MAC Address by CM12 Y=90.

4. Login again.
Change from Automatic Login Mode (Authentication by MAC Address)/Protected Login Mode
to Fixed Connection Mode
2. Clear the MAC Address of Fixed Connection Mode by CM12 Y=92.
3. Restart the terminal.
After changing login method, Office Data Backup by CMEC Y=6 is needed. Also, when login
method of the terminal in Remote Site is changed, Office Data Copy by CMEC Y=8 is needed.
When the terminal station number registered as Automatic Login Mode (Authentication by MAC
Address)/Fixed Connection Mode is cleared, the registered MAC Address assigned by CM12
Y=90, 92 is cleared. After that, Office Data Backup by CMEC Y=6 is needed. Also, if the terminal
is in Remote Site, Office Data Copy by CMEC Y=8 is needed.
(3)
For the conditions of Fixed Connection Mode are shown below.

DtermIP and DtermSP30 (provides the firmware I version 10.2.0.0 (Rev.3.0) or later is required) can
be used for Fixed Connection Mode. DtermSP20 is not available.
Fixed Connection Mode is not available on the conditions as follows.
Dterm75 (Series E) with IP adapter and Dterm85 (Series i) with IP adapter
16 One Touch keys terminal and 24 One Touch keys terminal
There are two ways to register MAC Address as follows.
Automatic MAC Address registration by CM12 Y=90:0
Manual MAC Address registration by CM12 Y=92
The password to login in Fixed Connection Mode is set by CM2B Y=00 (same programming data
as Protected Login Mode). Password setting is needed.
The maximum number of terminals used in Fixed Connection Mode is 256.
When logging out from the terminal registered to Fixed Connection Mode and logging in to the
terminal with other station number, register Protected Login Mode or Fixed Connection Mode.
Automatic Login Mode (Authentication by MAC Address) can not be registered.
When the terminal logged in with Fixed Connection Mode logs out and [Cancel] key + [Exit] key
(soft key) are pressed with the login screen displaying, the terminal is reconnected with the
registered station number. For DtermSP30, restart the terminal is required after pressing [Cancel]
key (soft key).
When logging out from the terminal registered to Fixed Connection Mode and operating the
following when the terminal is logged in with other station number, the terminal is reconnected
with the registered station number. The login screen is not displayed.
System Initialization
DtermIP setup
Unplugging cable and unplugging terminal detection
27
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch1001.fm
JULY/01/2006

SYSTEM CONDITIONS
Logout
When re-registering the terminal is needed (e.g. terminal failure), do the following operation to
register MAC Address.
Automatic MAC Address registration by CM12 Y=90
1. Disconnect the terminal from the network
2. Clear the MAC Address of the terminal by CM12 Y=92:CCC and then by CM12 Y=90:CCC.
3. Connect a new terminal to the network and login.
4. Register a MAC Address for the new terminal by CM12 Y=90:0.
5. Execute Office Data Backup by CMEC Y=6>0:0. When the terminal is accommodated in a
remote site, execute Office Data Copy by CMEC Y=8 to the remote site.
Manual MAC Address registration by CM12 Y=92
1. Disconnect the terminal from the network
2. Clear the MAC Address of the terminal by CM12 Y=92:CCC and then by CM12 Y=90:CCC.
3. Register a MAC Address for a new terminal by CM12 Y=92:XXXXXXXXXXXX.
4. Execute Office Data Backup by CMEC Y=6>0:0. When the terminal is accommodated in a
remote site, execute Office Data Copy by CMEC Y=8 to the remote site.
5. Connect the new terminal to the network.
Conditions for Peer-to-Peer Connection

For the communication between DtermIPs, the voice data is transmitted and received directly, without
converting voice packets into PCM and voice compression in the system.
Conditions for Public Network/Tie Line Network Connection

For the DtermIP communication between offices, the IP-PAD card is required.
Peer-to-Peer connection is not available in this connection.
Common Conditions for CCIS Connection and H.323 Connection

The service features requiring continuous voice transmission such as Background Music should not
be used because the traffic may reduce overall performance of the LAN.
In the voice communication via the Internet, the connection and communication delay may occur and
the voice quality may deteriorate.
The Virtual IPT and IPT card does not support Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) service.
28
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch1001.fm
JULY/01/2006

SYSTEM CONDITIONS
Conditions for CCIS Connection

Peer-to-Peer connection between DtermIPs via CCIS is available only when the destination office is
2000 IPS or 2400 IPX.
The Virtual IPT can be connected to a maximum of 127 trunks.
The Virtual IPT provides only Point-to-Multipoint connection.
When a call over Peer-to-Peer connection via CCIS is put on hold and then answered at the same
station, Elapsed Time Display returns to 0:00:00.
When the destination office uses the physical IPT card, for example, when connecting to the former
PBX system, the IPT card and 4VCT card are required in both offices.
Conditions for Link Down Notice for CCIS connection are shown below.
Link Down Notice is available only for Dterm and DtermIP accommodated in the 2000 IPS and
IPSDM/IPSDMR. This is not available for a single line telephone and Attendant Console.
For message display, Dterm/DtermIP with 24-digit or more LCD is recommended. 16-digit LCD
may not display all messages properly.
Notification message can be displayed regardless of idle or busy state of Dterm/DtermIP, writing the
message over the present display. After six seconds, the display returns to the time display
automatically.
The system detects a Link Down on the condition that TCP connection between offices is
interrupted. The Link Down is notified to the Dterm/DtermIP at 15-20 seconds later from the system
detects the Link Down.
Link Down Notice is available only for the CCIS connection via Virtual IPT. CCIS connection with
CCT/DTI card or LDT/ODT card is not available.
When the link between offices connected by CCIS via Virtual IPT is interrupted, the lamp of Dterm/
DtermIP button becomes the state as shown below. Then press the button, the LCD of the Dterm/
DtermIP displays the following.
COLOR AND STATE

OF BUTTON
STATE AND
OPERATION
Red/Flashing
(Momentarily)
0.125 seconds ON0.125 seconds OFF
Link Down occurrence
Red/Flashing
(Slowly)
Press the button after

OFF
Link restoration
OFF
Press the button after

Link restoration
LCD DISPLAY
Link Down to CCIS
Normal Condition:
CCIS
When the link between offices recovers, the flashing lamp of the button goes out.
The 6/10-party conference is not available for peer-to-peer connection via CCIS using CFTA/CFTB
card.
29
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch1001.fm

SYSTEM CONDITIONS
Conditions for H.323 Connection
When connecting to the IP network with H.323 protocol, the IPT card and 4VCT card are required.
When connecting DtermIP to the IP network with H.323 protocol, the IP-PAD card is required.
Peer-to-Peer connection between offices is not available.
Connection via the Intranet is only supported.
For Voice over IP (H.323), a H.323 Gatekeeper is required for converting between IP address and
station number.
Confirmation test is required for connection to H.323 terminals (Gatekeeper, Gateway, IP terminal,
etc.) of other venders.
The supplementary service defined by H.450 standard is not supported.
The IP trunk provides only Point-to-Point connection.
Conditions for IP-PAD

The IP-PAD is required for the following connections.
DtermIP-to-Legacy terminal connection
DtermIP-to-Public Network/Tie Line Network connection
External hold tone connection
Conference Trunk (CFT) connection
Digital Announcement Trunk (DAT) connection
The IP-PAD card number depends on the mounting location on the PIM.
The IP-PAD card uses 32 channels/ports, even if mounting one or no 16VCT card per IP-PAD card.
When pulling out the 16VCT card from the PIM or IPTRK BUS CA cable from the IP-PAD/16VCT
card, set the MB switch of the IP-PAD card to UP position and in Make Busy state. If not, the IPPAD card operates abnormally.
When mounting no 16VCT card, the DTMF signal is not supported to the communication from the
IP-PAD to the DtermIP. (In-band (DTMF) tone will be used for the communication between the IPPAD and the DtermIP.)
When mounting no 16VCT card, the CODEC for IP-PAD is fixed to G.711 and the payload size for
IP-PAD is fixed to 40 ms.
When mounting no 16VCT card and the destination IP terminal does not support the G.711 CODEC,
you cannot connect to the terminal via IP-PAD.
By the office data setting (CM0A Y=73), the used ports for IP-PAD card can be changed to 8/16/24/
32 ports. As PN-32IPLA/PN-32IPLA-A (IP-PAD) card requires two physical slots, PN-32IPLA/PN32IPLA-A (IP-PAD) card cannot be used with 8 ports.
30
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch1001.fm
JULY/01/2006

SYSTEM CONDITIONS
When PZ-24IPLA (24DSP) card is not mounted on the PN-8IPLA (IP-PAD) card or the PN-8IPLA
(IP-PAD) card is used with 8/16/24 ports, do not assign the IP-PAD channel No. (CM14) that exceeds
the port number of PN-8IPLA (IP-PAD) card or you cannot use it normally.
PN-8IPLA (IP-PAD) card does not support T.30. Using the PN-8IPLA (IP-PAD) card in 2000 IPS,
when the destination office is 2400 IMX, the facsimile transmission is not available. When the destination office is 2000 IPS/IPSDM/IPSDMR (Using PN-32IPLA-A (IP-PAD) card), the facsimile
transmission by G.711 pass-through is available.
PN-8IPLA (IP-PAD) card does not support T.30. Using the PN-8IPLA (IP-PAD) card in 2000 IPS,
when the destination office is 2400 IMX, the facsimile transmission is not available. When the destination office is 2000 IPS/IPSDM/IPSDMR (Using PN-32IPLA-A (IP-PAD) card)/2400 IPX, the facsimile transmission by G.711/G.726 pass-through are available in the following condition.
G.711 pass-through : IP-PAD card (SPN-8IPLA IP PAD-A/SPN-8IPLA IP PAD-B) is mounted.
G.726 pass-through : IP-PAD card (SPN-8IPLA IP PAD-B) is mounted.
PN-32IPLA (IP-PAD) card does not support FAX communication.
When providing the FAX communication (T.30) with the PN-32IPLA-A card, following condition
is required.
16VCT card (SPN-16VCTAA IP PAD-A/SPN-16VCTAA IP PAD-B) is mounted.
When providing the FAX communication (G.711 pass-through) with the PN-32IPLA-A card, following condition is required.
IP-PAD card (SPN-32IPLA IP PAD-D) is mounted.
16VCT card (SPN-16VCTAA IP PAD-B) is mounted.
(When mounting two 16VCT cards, both 16VCT cards should be SPN-16VCTAA IP PAD-B.)
IP-PAD card (SPN-32IPLA IP PAD-E) is mounted.
When providing the FAX communication (G.726 pass-through) with the PN-32IPLA-A card, following condition is required.
16VCT card (SPN-16VCTAA IP PAD-B) is mounted.
Conditions for DRS

DRS=Device Registration Server
The System-based DRS executes DtermIP registration.
The Network-based DRS is not available for the DtermIP registration.
31
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch1001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

SYSTEM CONDITIONS
Conditions for Legacy Interface (LT/AP)

All Application Processor cards used in NEAX 2000 IVS2/NEAX 7400 ICS M100MX/NEAX 2000
INTEGRATED VOICE SERVER except AP01 and CC01 cards are available for the system.
All Line/Trunk cards used in NEAX 2000 IVS2/NEAX 7400 ICS M100MX/NEAX 2000 INTEGRATED VOICE SERVER are available for the system.
When the Virtual FP/AP is set by CM05 Y=6, Line/Trunk cards cannot operate even though the card
is mounted on the corresponding PIM.
Conditions for Maintenance

MATWorX can be used as the maintenance program for 2000 IPS. Direct connection (RS-232C),
Modem connection and LAN (TCP/IP) connection are available to connect to the Maintenance Administration Terminal (MAT).
[Not used in North America]
When using the MATWorX version 3 or former version, the message (OK) for completion of system data memory all clear is not displayed on the MOC window.
[Not used in North America]
You can check the condition of LAN cable connection by transmitting the ping packet to the ETHER
card from PC on the LAN.
Conditions for Remote PIM over IP System

General Conditions
The MP software versions have to be same in Main Site and Remote Sites.
The way of loading and conditions of Key FD are follow.
The same number of Key FD for remote site license as the number of remote sites are required for
Remote PIM over IP system.
The required Key FD for the whole system must be loaded to the Main Site. If the Key FD is loaded
to the Remote Site, the Key FD data is invalid.
Total number of terminals that can be accommodated in the Remote Site depends on the number
of port and number of license allocated from total Key FD data of Main Site. The number of port
for Key FD is loaded to Main Site and divided between Main Site and Remote Sites as following
examples.
Example 1: When 256-port Key FD is loaded to the Main Site and 64 ports are used in the
Remote Site
Remote Site: 64 ports are allocated from the Main Site
Main Site : 192 ports are available
Example 2: When 128-IP license Key FD is loaded to the Main Site
The license is allocated in order of connecting IP telephone regardless of Main Site
or Remote Site.
32
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch1001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

SYSTEM CONDITIONS
When the number of port and number of license of Key FD data are insufficient, it causes the FP
operation failure or the IP telephone connection failure.
After Key FD data is loaded to the Main Site, the service feature, number of port, and number of
license to be used by each Remote Site are sent to the flash memory of each Remote Sites MP card
automatically. When Remote Sites operate with survival mode, this data is used.
Data to be used by each Remote Site is stored in the flash memory every 10 minutes. When a
Remote Site starts operating with survival mode within 10 minutes from starting up, the system
does not operate normally because the data is not stored in flash memory. The system should be
observed for more than 10 minutes after starting up.
The number of accommodated terminals/trunks in Main Site and Remote Site should be a maximum
of 1020 ports in the whole system.
The TCP/IP network is required between Main Site and Remote Site. The closed and bandwidth
guaranteed network is preferable, such as IP-VPN (Layer 3 VPN) or wide area Ethernet service (Layer 2 VPN). The following table shows the permissible delay time in the network.
Recommended/
Maximum Value
Recommended Value
Maximum Value
Permissible delay time

One-way
Return-way
100 ms.
120 ms.
200 ms.
240 ms.
If the network is short of the requirement, it may cause the delay operation of system, the delay and
deterioration of voice packets, disconnection of calls, and frequent changeover to survival mode at
Remote Site.
The MP card of Remote Site has the same system data as that of Main Site, because Remote Site
automatically gets the data from Main Site when Remote Site starts. In normal operation, Main Site
automatically copies the system data to Remote Site through the network at the time set by CM43
Y=7 once a day.
This feature is available in the Retrofit System (used as Main Site). The system that uses the following MP cards can be mixed used in Remote PIM over IP system in any combination.
Main Site : PN-CP24-A/PN-CP24-B/PN-CP24-C/PN-CP24-D, PN-CP27-A/PN-CP27-B, PNCP26-A, PN-CP28-A
Remote Site: PN-CP31-A/PN-CP31-B/PN-CP31-C/PN-CP31-D, PN-CP24-A/PN-CP24-B/PNCP24-C/PN-CP24-D, PN-CP27-A/PN-CP27-B, PN-CP26-A, PN-CP28-A
NOTE: PN-CP27-A/PN-CP27-B/PN-CP28-A cannot be used as Backup CPU system in Remote
Site.
This feature is not compatible with Fusion service of 2400 IPX.
The RUN lamp of Remote Sites MP card flash at 60 IPM in normal mode and 120 IPM in survival
mode.
33
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch1001.fm
JULY/01/2006

SYSTEM CONDITIONS
Conditions for System Configuration

The number of Remote Sites is a maximum of 30.
The total number of FP/AP at Main Site and all Remote Sites should not exceed 64 [Series 3700
R12.2 software or before]/94 [Series 3800 software or later] including the MP built-in FP,
Virtual FP, and Virtual IPT.
The number of FP/AP accommodated at one Remote Site should be a maximum of eight including
the MP built-in FP.
Remote Site can accommodate the following FP/AP/LT cards.
FP
One MP built-in FP and two Virtual FP
AP
CSH NOTE, BRT, 24PRT/30PRT (ISDN), 24DTI/30DTI (ACIS), 24CCT/30CCT (No. 7 CCIS),
CIR (for PN-4RSTC-A only) [Series 3800 software or later], Virtual CSH for IP-CS, Virtual
CSH for WLAN
NOTE:
Be sure to mount CSH in the Site where CSI is installed. For North America, the CSH
and CSI cards for wireless system cannot be used at Remote Site according to UTAM
regulation.
LT
IP-PAD (32IPLA-A/8IPLA)/16VCTA-A or 16VCTA, DLC NOTE, LC, COT, LDT, ODT, CSI
NOTE:
Attendant Console, Desk Console, Add-On Module, are not mountable at Remote Site.
Remote Site cannot accommodate the following FP/AP/LT cards.

FP
FP card (CP15/CP19) is not mountable at Remote Site.
AP
AP00 (SMDR), AP00 (DBM), ICH, CCH, DCH (ISDN/Q-SIG/Q931a), 4RSTB (MFC/T1-ANI/
E911), 4RSTC/D (Caller ID trunk), CS00 (ATI), CFTC (32-party conference), CIR (PN-4RSTC/
PN-4RSTC-A), IPT, SIP
LT
8RSTA/G (PBR) NOTE, ILC (ISDN Terminal), 4RSTE/F (Caller ID station), CFTA/B (6/10-party
conference), AMP, 4VCT, DK00, DAT
NOTE:
Four-line built-in PBR on the MP card is available at Remote Site.
When Remote Site is IPSDMR, in addition to the above conditions, the following LT cards are restricted.
PN-4LDTA (LDT), PN-4LLCB (LLC), PN-8PFTB (PFT)
MP built-in FP must be set to each Remote Site.
34
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch1001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

SYSTEM CONDITIONS
The FP number to which a virtual station number for PS is assigned must be set to the Main Site.
When the FP number is set to the Main Site, even if the Remote Site is survival mode, PSs are available in the Remote Site.
128 ports are assigned per FP card/MP built-in FP in default, but the port allocation for FP card/MP
built-in FP can be changed by the programming (CM05 Y=3). The port for FP card/MP built-in FP
must be assigned with every 8 port from the lead port. If the assignment value cannot be divided by
8, the value of the remainder is omitted and not assigned to the FP card/MP built-in FP automatically.
The port that is not assigned to the FP card/MP built-in FP cannot be used (the port assigned is from
the lead port).
The available IP-PAD card in the Remote Site is only PN-32IPLA-A/PN-8IPLA.
For the system capacity of ISDN system or CCIS system, refer to the system capacity of each system
manual. Set the whole Remote PIM over IP system within the system capacity and be sure to mount
the handler card in the Site where the interface card is installed.
The number of terminals/trunks accommodated at one Remote Site should be a maximum of 256.
This is the sum of maximum 128 physical ports (one built-in FP), maximum 128 IP ports (two Virtual
FP), and AP ports such as ISDN, etc.
Following is connected to the LAN port of the MP card at Main Site.
Peer-to-Peer CCIS, OAI, MAT
The highway channel for LT card is allocated to the Main Site with 512 ports and each Remote Site
with 128 ports.
Conditions for Survival Mode at Remote Site
Remote Site starts survival mode operation in the following cases.
a. When the communications (Keep Alive signal) in every 30 seconds between Main Site and Remote Site are interrupted for the predetermined time set by CM0B Y=31-60>50 on normal mode
operation.
b. When Remote Site cannot be connected to Main Site or is not allowed to connect to Main Site after
the system reset of the Remote Site.
Remote Site is reset automatically to change the operation from normal mode to survival mode when
it detects an interruption of the communications from/to Main Site.
When Remote Site starts the survival mode operation, the fault information Initialize by CAT or
MAT (Fault occurrence kind No. 01) is registered to the MP card of Remote Site. In addition, Communication error occurrence between Main Site and Remote Site (Fault occurrence kind No. 42) is
registered to the MP card of Main Site at 20 seconds later from the predetermined time set by CM0B
Y=31-60>50.
Remote Site on survival mode checks at every 30 seconds if the communications to Main Site are
possible. When the Remote Site regards that the communications are possible, Communication error restoration between Main Site and Remote Site (Fault occurrence kind No. 52) is registered to
the MP card of Main Site at 20 seconds later from the predetermined time set by CM0B Y=31-60>51.
35
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch1001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

SYSTEM CONDITIONS
When Remote Site on survival mode regards that the communications to Main Site are possible,
manual changeover (system reset) is required. Automatic changeover (re-connection to Main Site)
is also selectable in system data programming (CM0B Y=31-60>51, 53). At the automatic
changeover, Remote Site system is initialized and the calls on going are disconnected due to the reset
of terminals.
During survival mode operation, it is not possible to originate/terminate calls to/from stations at other
sites.
Service Conditions
Set the unique location number to each location group for proper setting of the IP-PAD channel selection and CODEC for voice compression (setting of Site Location).
The system clock at Remote Site synchronizes with the system clock at Main Site. If the communications to Main Site are interrupted, Remote Site does not synchronize and operates at the hardware
clock on the MP card of Remote Site.
Remote Site cannot accommodate the Virtual IPT and the IPT card (H.323).
A different metering area at each Remote Site is not available because Main Site corrects all call metering through the whole system. If a call is originated from the COT at Remote Site, it is charged as
the call originated from the COT at Main Site.
The service features requiring continuous voice transmission such as Background Music and Internal
Zone Paging should not be used at Remote Site considering the traffic on the network.
Multiple line service should not be used among different sites considering the traffic on the network.
Unavailable services at Remote Site are as follows.
Attendant Console, Desk Console, Add-On Module, and ISDN Terminal are not mountable.
Caller ID - Station is not available.
CCIS (CCH with digital and analog trunk interface) is not available. CCIS (CCT) is available.
All services using MP built-in DK or DK card are not available.
All services using DAT card are not available.
When Remote Site is IPSDMR, in addition to the above conditions, the following services are restricted due to the PN-CP31-A/PN-CP31-B/PN-CP31-C/PN-CP31-D hardware conditions.
MP built-in Modem communications are not available.
RS Port No.1 is not available.
MP built-in Digital Announcement Trunk (DAT) service is not available.
Station number of the stations accommodated in Remote Sites should be divided with the Tenant
(CM12 Y=04) according to the PSTN/GSTN or private line to be connected, or each service feature
to be used.
Set the unique trunk route to each Site.
Different numbering plan for every site must not be assigned.
Since Main Site controls OAI, OAI terminals cannot be used at Remote Site during survival mode
operation.
Stations at Remote Site cannot participate in the 6/10-party conference using CFTA/CFTB card.
36
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch1001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

SYSTEM CONDITIONS
Each Remote Site must provide a hold tone to the station at the Remote Site.
External hold tone (using Jack on the MP card): Tone source is required for each site.
Internal hold tone: Available
Hold tone using DAT: Not available
The maximum station number which can be used in SMDR or PMS Interface is as follows.
MP built-in SMDR/PMS on IP: 1020 stations
SMDR/PMS with AP00 on RS-232C: 504 stations
Maintenance Conditions
You can connect MAT to Remote Site via RS-232C or LAN.
Do not set and change the system data at Remote Site, except setting the Remote Site number by
CM0B Y=00>90. If the system data is set and changed at Remote Site, normal operation is not guaranteed. In addition, the system data copy from Main Site overwrites the system data in Remote Site
once a day.
SNMP is not available at Remote Site.
MP program download is available via RS-232C at each site.
Resident system programming must not be used.
The IPSDMR at Remote Site does not have DHCP server and client function.
AP program download is not available for the AP cards at Remote Site.
The MJ/MN alarm indications are not available at Remote Site.
If a fault occurs at Remote Site, the fault is notified to the Main Site and MJ/MN alarm is indicated
at the Main Site.
On-line expansion for LC/DLC/COT cards is supported and it enables the tone/path connection even
if the system data copy is not activated to the Remote Site. After completing all expansions for LC/
DLC/COT cards, be sure to execute the system data copy to the Remote Site (CMEC Y=8). Note that
the expanded data will not be added if the Remote Site starts survival mode operation before the system data copy.
After changing the IP address (CM0A Y=01) and TCP base port number (CM0A Y=10-17/30-37/
100-115) of IP-PAD, the changed data is reflected when the Make Busy key of the corresponding IPPAD card is set to ON then OFF, even if the system data copy is not executed. This is only available
for change of IP address and TCP base port number of IP-PAD.
37
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch1001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

SYSTEM CONDITIONS
Conditions for Link Down Notice

Link Down Notice is available only for Dterm and DtermIP accommodated in 2000 IPS and IPSDM/
IPSDMR. This is not available for a single line telephone and Attendant Console.
For message display, Dterm/DtermIP with 24-digit or more LCD is recommended. 16-digit LCD may
not display all messages properly.
Notification message can be displayed regardless of idle or busy state of Dterm/DtermIP, writing the
message over the present display. After six seconds, the display returns to the time display automatically.
The system detects a Link Down on the condition that UDP connection between Main Site and Remote Site is interrupted. The Link Down is notified to the Dterm/DtermIP at 20 seconds later from the
time set by CM0B Y=31-60>52. If the time is not set by CM0B Y=31-60>52, the Link Down is notified to the Dterm/DtermIP at 20-50 seconds later from the system detects the Link Down.
When the link between Main Site and Remote Site is interrupted, the lamp of Dterm/DtermIP button
becomes the state as shown below. Then press the button, the LCD of the Dterm/DtermIP displays the
following.
COLOR AND STATE

OF BUTTON
STATE AND
OPERATION
Red/Flashing
(Momentarily)
Red/Flashing
(Slowly)
Press the button after Link

Down occurrence
Green/Flashing
(Intermittently)
0.125 seconds ON0.125 seconds OFF0.125 seconds ON0.625 seconds OFF
Remote Site is survival

mode after Link restoration
Green/Flashing
(Intermittently)
0.125 seconds ON0.125 seconds OFF0.125 seconds ON0.625 seconds OFF
Press the button with

Remote Site is survival
OFF
Remote Site is normal

OFF
Press the button with

Remote Site is normal
38
LCD DISPLAY
Link Down to Site xx
(xx: Site No.)
-
Link Down to Site xx

(xx: Site No.)
Normal Condition:
R-PIM
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch1001.fm

SYSTEM CONDITIONS
Link restoration is notified to the Dterm/DtermIP 20 seconds later from the time set by CM0B Y=3160>51. If the time is not set by CM0B Y=31-60>51, the Link restoration is notified to the Dterm/
DtermIP 110-150 seconds later from the system detects the Link Ready.
After the link is ready, the lamp of Dterm/DtermIP button keeps flashing during the Remote Site operates on survival mode. Since the color of lamp and the indication interval changes, an administrator
at the Remote Office can changeover the system operation from survival mode to normal remote
mode according to this indication.When the link between Main Site and Remote Site recovers and
the Remote Site starts subordinate operation to the Main Site (normal mode), the flashing lamp of
the button goes out.
Conditions for User Mobility
This service is available when only a DtermIP user moves to the visitor site and uses the DtermIP that
is established there, or a DtermIP user and DtermIP move to the visitor site.
This service can be used for only DtermIP. However, this service cannot be used for the DtermSP30
which PS is used as a wireless handset.
DtermIP users of this service can move to a Remote Site from the Main Site, from the Main Site to
Remote Sites, or between Remote Sites. Furthermore, they can move from a visitor site to another
site.
This service is available for only the DtermIP registered with Protected Login Mode. It cannot be used
for the DtermIP registered with Automatic Login Mode.
In the visitor site also, an IP license for each DtermIP operated (one port per unit) is required.
To operate visitor stations at the visitor site, a virtual station port for visitor for each visitor station
must be assigned by CM05 Y=9. A virtual station port for visitor uses a virtual FP port, from the
oldest port number.
39
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch1001.fm
JULY/01/2006

SYSTEM CONDITIONS
The table below shows the maximum number of DtermIP stations and virtual stations for visitor in
the Main Site/Remote Sites.
Main Site/
Remote Site
Main Site
DtermIP station/
Virtual station for visitor
DtermIP
Maximum number
of stations
Total
956
956

Remote Site
(IPSDM/IPSDMR)
DtermIP
Remote Site
(2000 IPS)
DtermIP
128

64
You can assign the station number that the login to a visitor site is allowed/restricted by CM15
Y=196.
If a DtermIP user and DtermIP move to a visitor site, manually set the address of the visitor site in
advance to primary/secondary DRS with the DtermIP or, after moving to the visitor site, change the
setting of the primary DRS to the address of the visitor site. You cannot automatically change this
setting with 2000 IPS (auto-setting is possible if using a DHCP server).
Also, after moving to the visitor site, change the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway.
For the way of setting with DtermIP, refer to DtermIP SETUP.
Page 178
Even if you execute the system data backup/office data copying after moving to a visitor site, when
the system is initialized, the settings of the DtermIP revert to the settings used before moving. In that
case, do the login operation again (enter station number/password). For the login operation, refer to
DtermIP LOGIN/LOGOUT OPERATION.
Page 184
Visitor stations can be operated even at a Remote Site that changes from a normal mode to a survival
mode due to a network failure, etc. In this case, do the login operation again.
If you do the logout operation in the visitor site, the visitor station is released from its visitor site. If
the visitor station is logged out without doing the logout operation, it is released from the visitor site
after 1-2 minutes from DtermIP power off or cable disconnection, or when the station logs into the
original site (home site) or another site, or the MAC Address of the station is cleared by CM12 Y=90.
If all virtual station ports for visitor assigned by CM05 Y=9 are being used, PH Unavailable is displayed when you log into the system.
When changing/deleting the data of CM14 while DtermIP logs into the visitor site, WAIT, BUSY
NOW is displayed. Change/delete the data of CM14 after doing the logout operation with the
DtermIP or clearing the MAC Address by CM12 Y=90.
40
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch1001.fm

SYSTEM CONDITIONS
If only a DtermIP user moves to a visitor site without doing the logout operation, the user can log into
a visitor site in which the second data of CM08>516 is set to 0 (To override). If the second data is set
to 1 (Not overridden), Double Assignment is displayed, and login to the visitor site is restricted.
If you set Call Forwarding-Logout when moving to another site, calls can be forwarded to the destination (station/outside party/Attendant Console). However, if only a DtermIP user moves to the visitor site, you must do the logout operation to enable Call Forwarding-Logout.
For Call Forwarding-Logout, refer to Call Forwarding-Logout (DtermIP).
Page 250
The table below shows the call forwarding available/unavailable when moving to another site according to the DtermIP moving condition.
DtermIP Moving
Condition
Call Forwarding
When the Destination of Call
Forwarding-Logout is set
When the Destination of Call

Forwarding-Logout is not set
Moving to Visitor Site
Available
Depends on CM15 Y=481 NOTE
Logging in at Visitor Site
Available
Logged in at Visitor Site
Unavailable
Moving to Home Site
Available
Logging in at Home Site
Available
Logged in at Home Site
Unavailable
NOTE:
By setting CM15 Y=481, you can select ROT sending, RBT sending, or forwarding to Digital Announcement Trunk.
For the visitor station in the visitor site, the location number set by CM0B Y=00>40/CM0B Y=3160>40 is effective, even if the location number has been set by CM12 Y=39/50.
For the visitor station in the visitor site, the tenant number set by CM0B Y=00>41/CM0B Y=3160>41 is effective, even if the tenant number has been set by CM12 Y=04.
After moving to a Remote Site, the DtermIP operates according to the conditions of the Remote Site.
The last number redial and stack dial data of DtermIP is lost when moving to another site.
If only a DtermIP user moves to a visitor site, you cannot use this service with setting of Line/Trunk
Feature Key (number of keys originally provided with DtermIP, and data setting of 16/24 Line/Trunk
Feature keys) differing between the home site and visitor site.
For example, if you use Dterm85 (Series i) with IP adapter (16 Line/Trunk Feature keys + 16 One
Touch keys) at the home site, you cannot use DtermSP30 (24 Line/Trunk Feature keys + 8 One Touch
keys) at a visitor site.
41
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch1001.fm

SYSTEM CONDITIONS
Operating Procedure for User Mobility

When a DtermIP user and DtermIP move to a visitor site
1. Log out with the logout operation.
2. Move to the visitor site.
3. Manually change the primary DRS address, IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway address with the DtermIP, or automatically set them with the DHCP server. NOTE 1
4. Do the login operation (enter station number, password).
You can log into the visitor site.
When only a DtermIP user moves to a visitor site
2. Move to the visitor site.
3. Do the login operation (enter station number, password) at the visitor site with a DtermIP that is
not logged in.
When a DtermIP user and DtermIP move to a visitor site without doing the logout operation
1. Without doing the logout operation, move to a visitor site.
After 1-2 minutes from DtermIP power off or cable disconnection, you are logged out.
When only a DtermIP user moves to a visitor site without doing the logout operation NOTE 2
1. Without doing the logout operation, move to a visitor site.
2. Do the login operation (enter station number, password) at the visitor site with a DtermIP that is
not logged in.
Override? is displayed on the LCD of the DtermIP.
3. Press the Yes key.
The DtermIP at the original site is logged out.
NOTE 1: For the primary address, set the IP address of MP card of the destination site.
NOTE 2: At the destination site, the second data of CM08>516 must be set to 0.
42
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch1001.fm

SYSTEM CONDITIONS
When a DtermIP user and DtermIP move to a visitor site, and then return to the home site
2. Move to the home site.
You can log into the home site.
When only a DtermIP user moves to a visitor site, and then returns to the home site
2. Move to the home site.
3. Do the login operation (enter station number, password) with your own DtermIP at the home site.
When a DtermIP user and DtermIP move to a visitor site, and then return to the home site without doing the logout operation
1. Without doing the logout operation, move to the home site.
After 1-2 minutes from DtermIP power off or cable disconnection, you are logged out.
When only a DtermIP user moves to a visitor site, and then returns to the home site without doing the logout operation NOTE 2
1. Without doing the logout operation, move to the home site.
2. Do the login operation (enter station number, password) with your own DtermIP at the home site.
Override? is displayed on the LCD of the DtermIP.
3. Press the Yes key.
The DtermIP at the visitor site is logged out.
NOTE 1: For the primary address, set the IP address of MP card of the destination site.
NOTE 2: At the destination site, the second data of CM08>516 must be set to 0.
43
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch1001.fm

SYSTEM CONDITIONS
Conditions for ISDN Alternative Routing in Remote PIM Survival Mode

This service is available only when the ISDN trunk is accommodated in the site where this service
is used. Both the Basic Rate Interface (BRI) and the Primary Rate Interface (PRI) can be used.
This service is available only when the tenant is assigned in each site.
When the site in survival mode returns to normal mode while an ISDN Alternative Routing connection is established, the call is disconnected.
The table below shows the operational availability of ISDN Alternative Routing by terminal combination of originating and terminated side.
/: Available NOTE : Not available
Dterm,
DtermIP,
SoftPhone, SLT
PS,
WLAN station
ATTCON,
ISDN terminal,
Virtual station
Dterm, DtermIP, SoftPhone, SLT
PS, WLAN station
Virtual station
(Sub-line origination)
DID trunk
Ring down
ATTCON
ISDN terminal
Terminated Side
Originating Side
NOTE:
When the destination is PS/WLAN station, register each PS/WLAN station number (assigned by
CM14) to the specified site by CM12 Y=64. This service is not available when the destination
PS/WLAN station is locating to other site.
This service is available between the remote site and the main site, and between remote site and remote site.
There are following conditions to perform this service.
When a call is originated from a station to a station within own office (VM is included in a station
within own office)
When a station places a call on hold and originates a call to another station
When a call terminates from DID trunk to a station
This service is not available when the destination is a virtual station, a station in another office, a
network station, or with trunk origination via other sites.
This service is available when the destination is trunk termination via other sites.
44
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch1001.fm
JULY/01/2006

SYSTEM CONDITIONS
This service is performed when the site of the originating station is in survival mode, or when the site
of the terminated station is in survival mode. Even if the communication between the main site and
the remote site is unavailable, this service is not performed until the mode returns to survival mode.
Only the ISDN trunk origination is supported for this service. As transmission methods, route origination, route advance, and LCR are available.
Trunk access code must be assigned for each originating tenant by CM64 Y=11. The trunk to be hunt
by the assigned access code specifies trunk in own office.
When the entire ISDN trunks are busy, the originating party receives ROT.
Only the ISDN trunk can be set as the destination of ISDN Alternative Routing.
You can count the number of the origination of ISDN Alternative Routing by CMB0 Y=0>088.
The origination trunk is selected as follows.
When a call originated from a station to other station: depends on the tenant setting of the
originated station
When a call originated from a trunk to other station : depends on the tenant setting of the
terminating trunk
The area code restriction and call charge on an origination of ISDN Alternative Routing are performed in the terminating station. However, charging for the remote site in survival mode is not possible.
ISDN CPN (Calling Party Number) of ISDN Alternative Routing is as follows.
When a call originated from a station to other station: sends the calling party number of the
originated station
When a call originated from a trunk to other station : sends the calling party number of the
terminating station
Priority of ISDN CPN (Calling Party Number) is as follows.
ISDN CPN
(Calling Party Number)
Programming
Sent Calling Party Number
Priority
CM12 Y=12, 13/CM50 Y=05

ISDN subscriber number
Calling party number of station
High
CM30 Y=19, 34/CM50 Y=05

ISDN subscriber number
Calling party number of trunk
No data
Not sent
Low
45
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch1001.fm
JULY/01/2006

SYSTEM CONDITIONS
This service is available with the features as follows:

Last Number Call (Last Number Redial)
Stack Dial
One Touch Key
Speed Calling-System (System Speed Dialing)/Speed Calling-Station (Station Speed Dialing)
Dial By Name
Message Reminder
Voice Mail Key
Hotline/Delayed Hot Line
Destination number assigned for ISDN Alternative Routing by CM64 Y=12 as follows.
(a) Destination number setting for each station
DID number setting is required to each destination station.
Destination number of each station is assigned by CME5 Y=51. When Mobile Access is
operating in the system, a call terminates to a Mobile phone via C.O. line because this data is
shared with Mobile Access destination number.
If office data of destination number of each station is not copied to origination station site,
ISDN Alternative Routing is not performed.
Virtual station is not appropriate for the destination station.
(b) Destination number setting for each tenant
DID number setting is required to each tenant of destination station.
Destination number of each tenant is assigned by CM64 Y=13.
If office data of destination number of each tenant is not copied to origination station site,
(c) Destination number setting for each tenant and Subaddress
DID number setting to each tenant of the destination station and called party subaddress setting
to each station as the station number are required. The operation of the trunk of destination
depends on the setting of destination subaddress assigned by CM08>401.
ISDN network in which called party subaddress is available is required.
Destination number of each called party subaddress is assigned by CM64 Y=13. Also whether
or not to use the called party subaddress is assigned for each tenant of destination.
If office data of destination number of each tenant is not copied to origination station site,
46
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch1001.fm
JULY/01/2006

SYSTEM CONDITIONS
The priority of this service and other service features are as follows. When Mobility Access is operating parallel, the priority depends on CM15 Y=484.
Function Name
Restriction of Inter-tenant Connection
Priority
High
Mobile Access
Alternative ISDN Connection when Remote PIM in survival mode
(CID Call Routing per each station)
Alternative ISDN Connection when Remote PIM in survival mode
(CID Call Routing per each tenant)
Call Forwarding-Logout (DtermIP)
Call Forwarding-All Calls/Split Call Forwarding-All Calls
UCD (Uniform Call Distribution)
Do Not Disturb
Station Hunting
Call Forwarding-Busy Line/Split Call Forwarding-Busy Line
Call Forwarding-No Answer/Split Call Forwarding-No Answer
Low
The features with lower priority than ISDN Alternative Routing are performed in the site after
trunk termination by ISDN Alternative Routing.
Even if the transfer destination of each tenant for DID call assigned by (CM51) is in survival mode,
ISDN Alternative Routing is available.
When the calling party is in Main Site, the origination is charged as a normal trunk origination. When
the calling party is in Remote Site, the call charge is not performed.
The number of the origination is counted only in Main Site.
47
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch1001.fm
JULY/01/2006

SYSTEM CONDITIONS
Conditions for accommodation expansion of the PRT card in the Remote PIM over IP system
In Remote PIM over IP system, the number of the PRT cards accommodated can be expanded up to 20 in
the whole system.
Maximum of 32 PRT cards can be accommodated in the whole system.
Maximum of 8 PRT cards can be accommodated in Main Site.
Maximum of 6 PRT cards can be accommodated in each Remote Site.
When using the PRT card in Remote PIM over IP system, up to 512 ports can be used in the whole
system. However, 256 of the 511 ports are available only for the PRT cards accommodated in the
Remote Site.
When setting the office data (CM05) for the site that accommodates the PRT card, the combination
of the AP number and the site number are as follows.
AP NUMBER
SITE NUMBER
REMARKS
04-15, 20-31
00: Main Site No.

a. Use when accommodating the PRT card to the
01-30: Remote Site No.
Main Site or Remote Site.
b. The SENSE and SW-1 switch of the PRT card
must be set according to the AP number (04-15,
20-31) set by CM05.
c. Multiple PRT cards can be accommodated in each
site. Refer to the above conditions.
64-93
01-30: Remote Site No. a. Use when accommodating the PRT card in each
remote site (for accommodation expansion).
b. Be sure to set the switch number of the SENSE
and SW-1 switch of all the PRT cards accommodated to 31, and to assign any one number from
the AP numbers 64-93 with CM05 per PRT card
(same even if the site that accommodates the PRT
card is different).
c. AP number (64-93) and Remote Site number (0130) correspond one-on-one (example: AP number
64 corresponds to Remote Site number 01).
d. Only one PRT card can be accommodated for
each Remote Site.
e. PRT card can not be accommodated with CIR
card (PN-4RSTC-A).
48
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch1001.fm
JUNE/01/2007

SYSTEM CONDITIONS
When the PRT card is accommodated in a Remote Site with AP numbers 64-93, AP number 31 is
not available to use for any AP card within the same site.
When the PRT card is accommodated in a Remote Site with AP numbers 64-93, to accommodate the
CIR card to the Remote Site, assign the AP number 04-15 for the CIR card.
The PRT cards that can be accommodated with AP numbers 64-93 are as follows.
PN-DTA/PN-DTB (PRT)
PN-24PRTA (PRT)
PN-30PRTA (PRT)
49
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch1001.fm
JUNE/01/2007

SYSTEM CONDITIONS
Conditions for the CIR card accommodation to the Remote Site

The CIR card can be accommodated in each Remote Site of the Remote PIM over IP system.
Maximum of 34 CIR cards can be accommodated in the whole system.
Maximum of 4 CIR cards can be accommodated in Main Site.
One CIR card can be accommodated in each Remote Site.
The CIR card can be used only within the site that accommodates the card.
The CIR card accommodated in a Remote Site can be operated even during survival mode operation
of the Remote Site.
When setting the office data (CM05) for the site that accommodates the CIR card, the combination
of the AP number and the Site number are as follows.
AP NUMBER
SITE NUMBER
REMARKS
04-15
00: Main Site No.

a. Use when accommodating the CIR card to the
Main Site or Remote Site.
b. The SENSE switch of the CIR card must be set
according to the AP number (04-15) set by CM05.
c. Multiple CIR cards can be accommodated in
Main Site. Refer to the above conditions.
d. One CIR card can be accommodated for each
Remote Site.
64-93
01-30: Remote Site No. a. Use when accommodating the CIR card in each
remote site.
b. Be sure to set the switch number of the SENSE
switch of all the CIR cards accommodated to 15,
and to assign any one number from the AP numbers 64-93 with CM05 per CIR card (same even if
the site that accommodates the CIR card is different).
c. AP number (64-93) and Remote Site number (0130) correspond one-on-one (example: AP number
64 corresponds to Remote Site number 01).
d. Only one CIR card can be accommodated for each
Remote Site.
e. CIR card can not be accommodated with PRT
card (PN-DTA/PN-DTB/PN-24PRTA/PN30PRTA).
50
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch1001.fm
JUNE/01/2007

SYSTEM CONDITIONS
When the CIR card is accommodated in a Remote Site with AP number 64-93, AP number 15 is not
available to use for any AP card within the same site.
When the CIR card is accommodated in a Remote Site with AP number 64-93, to accommodate the
PRT card to the Remote Site, assign the AP number 04-14, 20-31 for the PRT card.
The CIR card that can be accommodated with AP number 64-93 is only PN-4RSTC-A.
51
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch1001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

SYSTEM CAPACITY
SYSTEM CAPACITY
The table below shows the system capacity of the Remote PIM over IP system.
When the system does not provide the Remote PIM over IP feature, the capacity is the same as the capacity
of MAIN SITE (NEAX 2000 IPS). As for the capacity of MAIN SITE (NEAX IPSDM), refer to
NEAX IPSDM Hardware Installation Guide.
IPSDM (6 Slot version)
[For Series 3200 R6.2 software or Series 3300 software]
System Capacity
N/A: Not Available
MAXIMUM CAPACITY
ITEM
Number of sites
PIM
FP
2000 IPS
IPS
/IPS
30
30
Physical PIM
2/Site
2/Site
Virtual PIM
2/Site
2/Site
Built-in FP (on MP)
FP card
(PN-CP15/PN-CP19)
Virtual FP for DtermIP
IPT Card
Virtual IPT
4
8
NOTE 1
CCH Card
CCT Card
CSH Card
Other Major
AP Card
Virtual CSH
ETHER
DM
Virtual FP for PS
AP
REMOTE SITE
MAIN SITE
1/Site
1/Site
N/A
N/A
2/Site
2/Site
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
8/
Site
N/A
24
3/Site
3/Site
NOTE 2
24
DTI
6/Site
PRT
6/Site
6/Site
BRT
24
6/Site
6/Site
NOTE 2
ETHER Card NOTE 3
6/
Site
8/Site
1/2
1/2/Site
31
NOTE 8
31
8/
Site
N/A
6/Site
NETWORK
CAPACITY
60
N/A
6/Site
DMR
64
24
6/
Site
6/Site
1/Site
1/Site
24
64
52
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch1001.fm
JULY/01/2006

SYSTEM CAPACITY
System Capacity
N/A: Not Available
MAXIMUM CAPACITY
ITEM
REMOTE SITE
MAIN SITE
2000 IPS
IPS
DM
/IPS
NETWORK
CAPACITY
DMR
IPPAD
IP-PAD Card
2/Site
2/Site
32
IPT
IPT Card
N/A
N/A
4VCT Card
32
N/A
N/A
32
16VCT Card
16
4/Site
4/Site
64
VCT
LT
Port
Physical PIM Port

for Line/Trunk
NOTE 4
512
128/
Site
128/
Site
512
Physical PIM Port

for IP-PAD
256
64/Site
64/Site
256
Physical PIM Port

for CS/ZT NOTE 5
512
96/Site
80/Site
512
Physical PIM Port

for CCIS IPT (Pointto-Point Connection)
NOTE 4
136
N/A
N/A
136
Physical PIM Port

for CCIS IPT (Point135
to-MultiPoint ConNOTE 7
nection) NOTE 4
Physical PIM Port
for H.323 IPT
NOTE 4
IP
Port
Virtual PIM Port for

448
DtermIP
448
IP-CS
NOTE 5
448
PS
Port

PS
AP
Port

128
CCIS Virtual IPT
NOTE 7
NOTE4
Physical PIM Port
for AP Card
NOTE 4
1020
96
256
1020
N/A
N/A
135
N/A
N/A
96
128/
Site
128/
Site
448
64/Site
64/Site
448
256
256
256/Site
NOTE 6
256/Site
NOTE 6
512
1020
784
80/Site
80/Site
N/A
N/A
1020
256
256
256/Site
NOTE 6
256/Site
NOTE 6
53
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch1001.fm
JANUARY/20/2006

SYSTEM CAPACITY
System Capacity
N/A: Not Available
MAXIMUM CAPACITY
ITEM
Terminal
LAN
Interface
REMOTE SITE
MAIN SITE
Analog TEL.
512
Legacy Stations
(Dterm85/Dterm75/
Dterm70/Dterm65/
Dterm60*, Single Line
Telephone)
512
DtermIP
PS
2000 IPS
IPS
DM
/IPS
DMR
NETWORK
CAPACITY
96/Site
64/Site
512
96/Site
72/Site
512
448
128/Site
128/Site
448
256
80/Site
80/Site
256
512
512
DSS Console
32
N/A
N/A
32
DESKCON
N/A
N/A
24/Site
20/Site
128
64/Site
16/Site
112
CS/ZT
128
IP-CS
112
128
When using IP-PAD card
When using Virtual IPT/

IPT card
128
32
Number of Virtual PIM for Virtual

IPT
NOTE 10
Number of Channel for Virtual IPT

NOTE 10
127
127
Number of Destination IP Address

NOTE 10
255
255
Number of VCT Channel for

simultaneous communication per
system
NOTE 11
96
96
Number of Channel for Virtual

IPT
NOTE 11
127
127

NOTE 11
255
255
*Dterm85: Series i
Dterm75: Series E
Dterm70: Elite Terminal
Dterm65: Series III
Dterm60: Electra Terminal
54
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch1001.fm

SYSTEM CAPACITY
NOTE 1: The maximum number of Virtual IPT is as follows.

When counting within 8 (Total number of IPT/ Virtual IPT/ CCH/CCT) 1
When counting within 24 (Total number of AP) 2
NOTE 2: The total number of CSH and Virtual CSH is maximum 24.
NOTE 3: When providing Backup CPU system, two cards are required.
NOTE 4: The total number of ports of the following trunks is maximum 256.
COT/LDT/ODT
PRT/BRT/DTI/CCT
CCIS Virtual IPT/CCIS IPT (Point-to-Point connection/Point-to-Multipoint connection)/
H.323 IPT
NOTE 5: The total number of ports of CS and IP-CS is maximum 512.
NOTE 6: The total number of the following ports is maximum 256 per Remote Site.
Physical PIM Port (Line, Trunk, IP-PAD, CS/ZT)
Virtual PIM Port (DtermIP, IP-CS)
Physical PIM Port (AP card)
NOTE 7: The total number of voice channel of the following trunk is maximum 127.
CCIS Virtual IPT
CCIS IPT Port (Point-to-Multipoint connection)
NOTE 8: Since maximum of 64 FP/AP in whole system are divided into Remote Sites, and one Remote
Site accommodates multiple FP/AP cards generally, the actual number of Remote Sites should
be 20.
NOTE 9: The wireless system is not available at the Remote Site according to the UTAM regulation in
North America.
NOTE 10: For CCIS via Virtual IPT Point-to-Multipoint connection.
NOTE 11: For H.323 connection.
55
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch1001.fm
OCTOBER/14/2005

SYSTEM CAPACITY
System Capacity
N/A: Not Available
MAXIMUM CAPACITY
ITEM
2000 IPS
IPSDM/IPSDMR
30
30
Physical PIM
2/Site
2/Site
Virtual PIM
15
2/Site
2/Site
Number of sites
PIM
FP
Built-in FP (on MP)
1/Site
1/Site
FP card
(PN-CP15/PN-CP19)
N/A
N/A
15
2/Site
2/Site
Virtual FP for PS
N/A
N/A
Virtual FP for WLAN

station
NOTE 14
NOTE 16
N/A
N/A
IPT Card
N/A
N/A
NOTE 1
N/A
N/A
NOTE 15
Virtual IPT
SIP Card
CCH Card
CCT Card
CSH Card
AP
REMOTE SITE
MAIN SITE
Other Major
AP Card
NOTE 2
16
N/A
8/
Site
N/A
24
24
3/Site
PRT
6/Site
6/Site
BRT
24
6/Site
6/Site
ETHER
ETHER Card NOTE 3
IPPAD
IP-PAD Card
64
24
3/Site
6/
Site
6/Site
Virtual CSH for WLAN

NOTE 2
NOTE 14
NOTE 16
8/
Site
N/A
31
N/A
DTI
Virtual CSH for IP-CS

NOTE 2
31
NOTE 8
60
6/Site
6/Site
NETWORK
CAPACITY
6/
Site
6/Site
8/Site
1/Site
N/A
N/A
1/2
1/2/Site
1/Site
64
2/Site
2/Site
32
56
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch1001.fm
JULY/01/2006

SYSTEM CAPACITY
System Capacity
N/A: Not Available
MAXIMUM CAPACITY
ITEM
REMOTE SITE
MAIN SITE
2000 IPS
DM
IPS
/IPS
NETWORK
CAPACITY
DMR
IPT
IPT Card
N/A
N/A
VCT
4VCT Card
32
N/A
N/A
32
16VCT Card
16
4/Site
4/Site
64
LT
Port
IP
Port
Physical PIM Port

for Line/Trunk
NOTE 4
512
128/
Site
128/
Site
1020
Physical PIM Port

for IP-PAD
256
64/
Site
64/
Site
256
Physical PIM Port

for CS/ZT NOTE 5
512
96/
Site
80/
Site
512
Physical PIM Port

NOTE 4
136
N/A
N/A
136
1020
512
Physical PIM Port

nection) NOTE 4
N/A
Physical PIM Port

for H.323 IPT
NOTE 4
N/A
96
N/A
96
1020
N/A
N/A

DtermIP/Virtual PIM
Port for Virtual Station for Visitor
956
128/
Site
128/
Site

IP-CS
NOTE 5
512
64/
Site
64/
Site

WLAN Terminal
NOTE 14
NOTE 16
135
1020
NOTE 8
2

PS
256/Site
NOTE 6
N/A
Physical PIM Port

for SIP (Dch)
NOTE 4
NOTE 15
956

128
CCIS Virtual IPT
NOTE 7
NOTE 4
PS
Port
256/Site
NOTE 6
512
NOTE 9
956
N/A
N/A
512/Site
512/Site
512
64
N/A
N/A
512
NOTE 9
57
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch1001.fm
JULY/01/2006

SYSTEM CAPACITY
System Capacity
N/A: Not Available
MAXIMUM CAPACITY
ITEM
AP
Port
Terminal
Virtual PIM Port for SIP

(Bch)
NOTE 4
NOTE 15
2000 IPS
64
IPS
DM
/IPS
DMR
N/A
N/A
256/Site
NOTE 6
NETWORK
CAPACITY
256
256
Physical PIM Port for AP

Card
NOTE 4
256
256/Site
NOTE 6
Analog TEL.
512
96/Site
64/Site
980
Legacy Stations
(Dterm85/Dterm75/
Dterm70/Dterm65/
Telephone)
512
96/Site
72/Site
980
80/Site
80/Site
N/A
NOTE 13
N/A
NOTE 13
512
128/Site
128/Site
956
PS
512
WLAN Terminal
NOTE 14
NOTE 16
64
DtermIP
LAN
Interface
REMOTE SITE
MAIN SITE
1020
512
956
1020
DSS Console
32
8/Site
8/Site
32
DESKCON
N/A
N/A
24/Site
20/Site
128
64/Site
16/Site
128
N/A
N/A
20
CS/ZT
128
IP-CS
128
Virtual CS/ZT for WLAN

NOTE 14
NOTE 16
20
128

IPT card
128
32

IPT
NOTE 11

NOTE 11
127
127
*Dterm85: Series i
Dterm75: Series E
Dterm65: Series III
58
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch1001.fm
JULY/01/2006

SYSTEM CAPACITY
System Capacity
MAXIMUM CAPACITY
ITEM
REMOTE SITE
MAIN SITE
2000 IPS
IPS
DM
/IPS
DMR
NETWORK
CAPACITY

NOTE 11
255
255

system
NOTE 12
96
96

NOTE 12
127
127

NOTE 12
255
255

NOTE 2: The total number of CSH, Virtual CSH for IP-CS and Virtual CSH for WLAN is maximum 24.
COT/LDT/ODT
PRT/BRT/DTI/CCT
H.323 IPT/SIP
NOTE 5: The total number of ports of CS/ZT and IP-CS is maximum 512.
CCIS Virtual IPT
59
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch1001.fm
JULY/01/2006

SYSTEM CAPACITY
NOTE 8: The number of virtual lines assigned on Dterm=1020-number of Dterm/DtermIP.

NOTE 9: The number of visitor PS for wireless roaming is included.
(The number of Visitor Location Register is maximum 512 per system.)
be 20.
NOTE 13: Roaming from Main Site to Remote Site is available.
NOTE 14: WLAN is available from Series 3600 software.
NOTE 15: SIP is available from Series 3600 software.
NOTE 16: The system capacity for software of the system is as follows.
MAXIMUM CAPACITY
ITEM
Series 3700 R12.1

or before
Series 3700 R12.2

or later
FP
Virtual FP for WALN station
AP
PS Port
Virtual PIM Port for WLAN

Terminal
64
128
64
128
20
32
Terminal WLAN Terminal

60
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch1001.fm
JULY/01/2006

SYSTEM CAPACITY

[For Series 3700 R12.1 software or Series 3700 R12.2 software]
System Capacity
N/A: Not Available
MAXIMUM CAPACITY
ITEM
Number of sites
PIM
FP
REMOTE SITE
MAIN SITE
DM
2000 IPS
IPS
/IPS
30
30
Physical PIM
2/Site
2/Site
Virtual PIM
15
2/Site
2/Site
Built-in FP (on MP)
1/Site
1/Site
FP card
(PN-CP15/PN-CP19)
N/A
N/A
15
2/Site
2/Site
Virtual FP for PS
N/A
N/A
Virtual FP for WLAN

station
NOTE 14
N/A
N/A
IPT Card
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Virtual IPT
NOTE 1
SIP Card
CCH Card
CCT Card
CSH Card
AP
Other Major
AP Card
NOTE 2
16
N/A
8/
Site
N/A
24
24
3/Site
PRT
6/Site
6/Site
BRT
24
6/Site
6/Site
ETHER
ETHER Card NOTE 3
IPPAD
IPT
64
24
3/Site
6/
Site
6/Site

NOTE 2
NOTE 14
31
8/
Site
N/A
31
NOTE 8
N/A
DTI

NOTE 2
NETWORK
CAPACITY
60
6/Site
6/Site
DMR
6/
Site
6/Site
8/Site
1/Site
N/A
N/A
1/2
1/2/Site
1/Site
64
IP-PAD Card
2/Site
2/Site
32
IPT Card
N/A
N/A
8
61
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch1001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

SYSTEM CAPACITY
System Capacity
N/A: Not Available
MAXIMUM CAPACITY
ITEM
VCT
LT
Port
REMOTE SITE
MAIN SITE
2000 IPS
/IPS
32
N/A
N/A
32
16VCT Card
16
4/Site
4/Site
64
Physical PIM Port

for Line/Trunk
NOTE 4
512
128/
Site
128/
Site
1020
Physical PIM Port

for IP-PAD
256
64/
Site
64/
Site
256
Physical PIM Port

for CS/ZT NOTE 5
512
96/
Site
112/
Site
512
Physical PIM Port

NOTE 4
136
N/A
N/A
136
1020
512
N/A
256/Site
NOTE 6
N/A
Physical PIM Port

for H.323 IPT
NOTE 4
96
Physical PIM Port

for SIP (Dch)
NOTE 4
N/A
N/A

DtermIP/Virtual PIM
956
128/
Site
128/
Site

IP-CS
NOTE 5
512
64/
Site
64/
Site
1020
NOTE 8
956

128
CCIS Virtual IPT
NOTE 7
NOTE 4
PS
Port
IPS
NETWORK
CAPACITY
DMR
4VCT Card
Physical PIM Port

nection) NOTE 4
IP
Port
DM

PS
WLAN Terminal
NOTE 14
512
NOTE 9
N/A
256/Site
NOTE 6
N/A
96
1020
2
956
N/A
N/A
512/Site
512/Site
512
64
135
N/A
N/A
512
NOTE 9
62
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch1001.fm
JULY/01/2006

SYSTEM CAPACITY
System Capacity
N/A: Not Available
MAXIMUM CAPACITY
ITEM
AP
Port
Terminal

(Bch)
NOTE 4
2000 IPS
64
256
IPS
DM
/IPS
DMR
N/A
N/A
256/Site
NOTE 6
NETWORK
CAPACITY
256

Card
NOTE 4
256
256/Site
NOTE 6
Analog TEL.
512
96/Site
64/Site
980
Legacy Stations
(Dterm85/Dterm75/
Dterm70/Dterm65/
Telephone)
512
96/Site
72/Site
980
PS
WLAN Terminal
NOTE 14
DtermIP
LAN
Interface
REMOTE SITE
MAIN SITE
1020
1020
512
512
64
956
80/Site
80/Site
N/A
NOTE 13
N/A
NOTE 13
512
128/Site
128/Site
956
DSS Console
32
8/Site
8/Site
32
DESKCON
N/A
N/A
24/Site
20/Site
128
64/Site
16/Site
128
N/A
N/A
20
CS/ZT
128
IP-CS
128

NOTE 14
20
128

IPT card
128
32

IPT
NOTE 11

NOTE 11
127
127

NOTE 11
255
255
*Dterm85: Series i
Dterm75: Series E
Dterm65: Series III
63
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch1001.fm
JULY/01/2006

SYSTEM CAPACITY
System Capacity
MAXIMUM CAPACITY
ITEM
REMOTE SITE
MAIN SITE
2000 IPS
IPS
DM
/IPS
NETWORK
CAPACITY
DMR

system
NOTE 12
96
96

NOTE 12
127
127

NOTE 12
255
255

COT/LDT/ODT
PRT/BRT/DTI/CCT
H.323 IPT/SIP
CCIS Virtual IPT
64
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch1001.fm
JANUARY/20/2006

SYSTEM CAPACITY
NOTE 9: The number of visitor PS for wireless roaming is not included.

be 20.
NOTE 14: The system capacity for software of the system is as follows.
MAXIMUM CAPACITY
ITEM
Series 3700 R12.1

or before
Series 3700 R12.2

or later
FP
Virtual FP for WALN station
AP
PS Port
Virtual PIM Port for WLAN

Terminal
64
128
64
128
20
32
Terminal WLAN Terminal

65
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch1001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

SYSTEM CAPACITY

System Capacity
N/A: Not Available
MAXIMUM CAPACITY
ITEM
Number of sites
PIM
FP
REMOTE SITE
MAIN SITE
DM
2000 IPS
IPS
/IPS
30
30
Physical PIM
2/Site
2/Site
Virtual PIM
15
2/Site
2/Site
1/Site
1/Site
N/A
N/A
15
2/Site
2/Site
Virtual FP for PS
N/A
N/A
Virtual FP for WLAN

station
N/A
N/A
IPT Card
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Built-in FP (on MP)
FP card
(PN-CP15/PN-CP19)
Virtual IPT
NOTE 1
SIP Card
CCH Card
CCT Card
CSH Card
AP
Other Major
AP Card
16
N/A
8/
Site
6/Site
DTI
6/Site
BRT
24
6/Site
PRT
6/Site
6/Site
1/Site
1/Site
CIR
MFR

NOTE 2

NOTE 2
ETHER ETHER Card NOTE 3
24
3/Site
31
NOTE 8
31
8/
Site
6/Site
24
NETWORK
CAPACITY
60
N/A
NOTE 2
DMR
24
94
NOTE
15
3/Site
6/
Site
6/Site
6/
Site
6/Site
32
N/A
N/A
8/Site
1/Site
N/A
N/A
34
1/2
1/2/Site
1/Site
64
IP-PAD IP-PAD Card
2/Site
2/Site
32
IPT
N/A
N/A
IPT Card
66
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch1001.fm
JUNE/01/2007

SYSTEM CAPACITY
System Capacity
N/A: Not Available
MAXIMUM CAPACITY
ITEM
VCT
LT
Port
IP
Port
PS
Port
REMOTE SITE
MAIN SITE
2000 IPS
DM
IPS
/IPS
NETWORK
CAPACITY
DMR
4VCT Card
32
N/A
N/A
32
16VCT Card
16
4/Site
4/Site
64
Physical PIM Port

for Line/Trunk
NOTE 4, NOTE 5
512
128/
Site
128/
Site
1020
Physical PIM Port

for IP-PAD
256
64/
Site
64/
Site
256
Physical PIM Port

for CS/ZT NOTE 6
512
96/
Site
112/
Site
512
Physical PIM Port

NOTE 4, NOTE 5
136
N/A
N/A
136
Physical PIM Port

for CCIS IPT (Pointto-MultiPoint Connection)
NOTE 4, NOTE 5
135
NOTE 8
Physical PIM Port

for H.323 IPT
NOTE 4, NOTE 5
96
Physical PIM Port

for SIP (Dch)
NOTE 4, NOTE 5
1020
512
N/A
1020
NOTE 9
256/Site
NOTE 7
N/A
256/Site
NOTE 7
135
N/A
N/A
96
N/A
N/A

DtermIP/Virtual PIM
956
128/
Site
128/
Site

IP-CS
NOTE 6
512
64/
Site
64/
Site

CCIS Virtual IPT
NOTE 4, NOTE 5
128
NOTE 8

512
PS
NOTE 10
Physical PIM Port
for WLAN Terminal
956
956
N/A
N/A
512/Site
512/Site
N/A
N/A
512
64
1020
512
NOTE 10
67
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch1001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

SYSTEM CAPACITY
System Capacity
N/A: Not Available
MAXIMUM CAPACITY
ITEM
AP
Port
Terminal

(Bch) NOTE 4, NOTE 5
2000 IPS
64
256
IPS
DM
/IPS
DMR
N/A
N/A
256/Site
NOTE 7
NETWORK
CAPACITY
256

Card NOTE 4, NOTE 5
256
256/Site
NOTE 7
Analog TEL.
512
96/Site
64/Site
980
Legacy Stations
(Dterm85/Dterm75/
Dterm70/Dterm65/
Telephone)
512
96/Site
72/Site
980
PS
WLAN Terminal
DtermIP
LAN
Interface
REMOTE SITE
MAIN SITE
1020
1020
512
512
64
956
80/Site
80/Site
N/A
NOTE 14
N/A
NOTE 14
512
128/Site
128/Site
956
DSS Console
32
8/Site
8/Site
32
DESKCON
N/A
N/A
24/Site
20/Site
128
64/Site
16/Site
128
N/A
N/A
20
CS/ZT
128
IP-CS
128
20
128

IPT card
128
32

IPT
NOTE 12

NOTE 12
127
127

NOTE 12
255
255
*Dterm85: Series i
Dterm75: Series E
Dterm65: Series III
68
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch1001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

SYSTEM CAPACITY
System Capacity
MAXIMUM CAPACITY
ITEM
REMOTE SITE
MAIN SITE
2000 IPS
IPS
DM
/IPS
DMR
NETWORK
CAPACITY

system
NOTE 13
96
96

NOTE 13
127
127

NOTE 13
255
255

COT/LDT/ODT
PRT/BRT/DTI/CCT
H.323 IPT/SIP
NOTE 5: When accommodating the PRT card in Remote Site, maximum of 512 ports can be used. However, 256 of the 512 ports are available only for the PRT card accommodated in Remote Sites.
69
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch1001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

SYSTEM CAPACITY
CCIS Virtual IPT
NOTE 10:The number of visitor PS for wireless roaming is not included.
be 20.
NOTE 15: 30 FP/AP numbers (from among 94 in total) are available only for the PRT/CIR cards accommodated in Remote Sites.
70
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch1001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

SERVICE FEATURES
SERVICE FEATURES
[Series 3000 or later software required]
Business/Hotel/Data/CCIS/ISDN/WCS
All Business/Hotel/Data/CCIS/ISDN/WCS features are available except the following service features
that require the PN-AP01 card.
Authorization Code with AP01
Forced Account Code with AP01
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) with AP01 [For North America]/
Remote Access to System with AP01 [For other than North America]
Call Forwarding set by DISA with AP01
NOTE:
Add-On Module (For North America)/Add-On Module-Dterm (For other than North America)
is not available for DtermIP.
OAI
Built-in OAI is available on the MP card, excluding the following interface and facility.
NOTE:
The port number of 2000 IPS for OAI is 60030 in initially. The port number 1024, 1025, 1039
are available by CM0B Y=00>98.
Maximum four applications can be connected to the system at the same time, using the port
number above-mentioned.
OAI with AP01 card/CC01 card

OAI with RS-232C
FLF [For North America]
71
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch1001.fm
JULY/01/2006

SERVICE FEATURES
Voice over IP (H.323)

The following service features are available when connecting with H.323 terminal (NEC product).
For other vender products, confirmation test is required.
Call Forwarding-All Calls

Call Forwarding-Busy Line
Call Forwarding-Dont Answer
Split Call Forwarding
Call Transfer-All Calls
Hotline
Do not Disturb-Dterm
Calling/Called Number Display
Digital Display-Trunk
Speed Calling-System
Speed Calling-Station
Bearer Service
Tandem Switching of TIE Trunks-2/4-Wire
The Line Connection with PAD Control
Outgoing Trunk Busy Announcement
Brokerage Hot Line-Outside
Least Cost Routing-3/6-Digit
LCR-Time of Day Routing
Attendant Manual Override
Echo Canceler Control
72
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch1001.fm
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
CHAPTER 2
INSTALLATION
This chapter explains the required equipment and hardware installation procedure such as mounting cards and connecting cables for the system.
PRECAUTIONS .........................................................................
REQUIRED EQUIPMENT ..........................................................
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .................................................
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR H.323 CONNECTION .....
73
74
81
85
97
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch2001.fm
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
Grounding Requirements
The system grounding must have a specific ground resistance and AC noise level, and is to be connected
to a predetermined terminal in the PBX. Standard grounding requirements are as shown below:
Communication grounding : Less than 10
Protective ground for PIM : Less than 10
NOTE:
The AC ripple on these various grounds should be less than 0.5 Vp-p.
CAUTION
Grounding circuit continuity is vital for safe operation of telecommunication equipment.
Never operate this equipment with the grounding conductor disconnected.
The following specific requirements apply to ground wiring.
Install an equipment-grounding conductor that is at least as large as the ungrounded branch-supply
conductors as part of the circuit that supplies the PBX. Bare, covered, or insulated grounding
conductors are acceptable. Individually covered or insulated equipment grounding conductors shall
have a continuous outer finish that is either green, or green with one or more yellow stripes. The
equipment grounding connector is to be connected to ground at the service equipment.
The attachment-plug receptacles near the PBX are all to be of a grounding type, and the equipment
grounding conductors serving these receptacles are to be connected to earth ground at the service
equipment.
74
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch2001.fm
PRECAUTIONS
Static Electricity Guard

You must wear a grounded wrist strap to protect circuit cards from static electricity.

WHEN PLUGGING/UNPLUGGING A CIRCUIT CARD
PBX
FRAME GROUND SCREW

WRIST STRAP
WHEN HOLDING A CIRCUIT CARD

NEVER TOUCH THE COMPONENTS OR
SOLDERED SURFACE WITH BARE HANDS.
CARD FRONT
75
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch2001.fm
PRECAUTIONS

WHEN MAKING A SWITCH SETTING ON A CIRCUIT CARD
CIRCUIT
CARD
WEAR A WRIST STRAP AND PERFORM
THE WORK ON A GROUNDED
CONDUCTIVE WORK SURFACE.
WHEN CARRYING A CIRCUIT CARD
CIRCUIT
CARD
CONDUCTIVE
POLYETHYLENE
BAG
WHEN CARRYING A CIRCUIT
CARD AROUND, KEEP THE
CARD IN A CONDUCTIVE
POLYETHYLENE BAG.
The mark shown below is attached to the sheet for the work in which circuit cards are handled. When
engaging in such work, the installer must be careful not to cause damage by static electricity.
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required
76
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch2001.fm
PRECAUTIONS
Cautions for Unplugging/Plugging IP-PAD/16VCT/IPT/4VCT Card
CAUTION
The IP-PAD/IPT card must be plugged in or unplugged under Make Busy condition or
power off to prevent damage to the card or other system circuitry.
Turn ON the MB switch on the IP-PAD/IPT card before the following operations:
Resetting the MP (MP built-in FP)/FP card controlling the IP-PAD/4VCT cards
Inserting or extracting the 16VCT/4VCT cards during data transmission
Plugging or unplugging the BUS cable (IPT TRK BUS CA) between the IP-PAD and
16VCT/IPT and 4VCT cards
After the above operations, turn OFF the MB switch.
Be sure to insert all of the 16VCT/4VCT cards firmly into their slots, which are connected to
the IP-PAD/IPT card by the BUS cable. Otherwise, the IP-PAD/IPT card connected to the
16VCT/4VCT card will not operate normally.
77
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch2001.fm
PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
1. You must hold the edge of a circuit card when plugging or unplugging the circuit card.
If you touch another area, you may be exposed to hazardous voltages.
PBX
NEVER TOUCH THE COMPONENTS OR SOLDERED SURFACE WITH BARE HANDS.
CARD FRONT
2. You must wait for 30 seconds before plugging the circuit card again when unplugging the
circuit card while the operating power is being supplied.
78
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch2001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
PRECAUTIONS
Turning Power ON
CAUTION
1. When the operating power is being supplied to the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card, do not plug/
unplug this circuit card into/from its mounting slot.
2. When the system is configured with two or more PIMs, the BUS cable is providing gang control for the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card of PIM0 and other PIMs. Therefore, if the power of
PIM0 is off, no power is supplied to the whole system even when the power switches of other
PIMs are left on. Note, however, that the battery charging is continuing even under these circumstances.
3. Do not turn off the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card on PIM1 to PIM7 when the system is operating.
(1)
Check the switch position of each PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card before turning power on.
Make sure that the AC120 V/240 V selector switch is positioned to the appropriate voltage for each
country (AC120 V or AC240 V).
NOTE:
PZ-PW126 card does not have this switch.

SW2
100 V/120 V
240 V
Make sure that the battery mode selector switch is positioned as shown below to match the kind
of battery being used:
SW101
OFF
1 : Not used
1
2 : ON (SEAL/FLOAT2)
2
OFF (OPEN/FLOAT1)
ON
(2)
Turn the SW1 switches of all the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 cards to ON. First, turn ON PIM1 to PIM7.
Then, turn ON PIM0.
79
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch2001.fm
PRECAUTIONS
Turning Power OFF

(1)
Before turning power off, inspect all line/trunk cards busy lamps to verify that no cards are
operating.
(2)
Turn the SW1 switches of all the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 cards to OFF. First, turn OFF PIM0. Then,
turn OFF PIM1 to PIM7.
80
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch2001.fm
REQUIRED EQUIPMENT
REQUIRED EQUIPMENT
This table shows the required equipment.
Required Equipment
EQUIPMENT
DESCRIPTION
QUANTITY
REMARKS
PN-CP24-A/PN-CP24-B/
PN-CP24-C/PN-CP24-D
(MP)
MP Card
One card per system

Mount on PIM0
PN-CP27-A/PN-CP27-B
(MP)
MP Card for Backup CPU

System
Two cards per system

Mount on PIM0
PZ-M606-A (ETHER)
Ethernet Control Card
Mount on PN-CP24-A/
CP24-B/CP24-C/
CP24-D card
One card per MP
Mount on PN-CP27-A/
CP27-B card
One card per MP
10BASE-T Cable
(TIA/EIA category 3 or
larger)*
100BASE-TX Cable
(TIA/EIA category 5)*
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
Cable between Ether Card
and Ethernet, IP-PAD Card
and Ethernet, IPT Card and
Ethernet
As required
Cable length:
Maximum 100m (328 ft.)
Router*
NOTE:
Cisco Router is
recommended.
As required
HUB*
NOTE:
Switching HUB
is required for
ETHER and IPPAD.
As required
IPW-2U UNIT**/
IPW-2UA UNIT**
IP Adapter for Dterm75
1-956
One per Dterm75
IP-R UNIT**/
IP-RA UNIT**
IP Adapter for Dterm85

(Series i)
1-956
One per Dterm85 (Series i)
For IP-PAD, 100BASE-TX

is recommended.
*: Should be provided by customer.

**: AC-DC Adapter or inline power patch panel must be provided.
81
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch2001.fm
JULY/01/2006
REQUIRED EQUIPMENT
Required Equipment
EQUIPMENT
DESCRIPTION
QUANTITY
REMARKS
For Legacy Line/Trunk Connection

PN-32IPLA/
PN-32IPLA-A
(IP-PAD)
1-8
PN-16VCTA /
PN-16VCTA-A
(16VCT)
16-channel CODEC Card
1-16
IPTRK BUS CA
Set of 3 BUS Cables

between IP-PAD and
16VCT Cards
PN-8IPLA
(IP-PAD)
1-8
PZ-24IPLA
(24DSP)
24-channel DSP Card

for 8-channel IP-PAD Card
1-8
LT Card
Line/Trunk Card for Legacy Terminal/Interface
As required
128 ports per FP

512 ports per system
AP Card
Application Processor
Card
As required
PN-CP15/
PN-CP19 (FP)
FP Card
1-8 sets
1-3
For maximum 128 Legacy

terminals, FP card is not
required.
For more than 128 Legacy
terminals
1: PIM2
2: PIM2, 4
3: PIM2, 4, 6
82
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch2001.fm
REQUIRED EQUIPMENT
Required Equipment
EQUIPMENT
DESCRIPTION
QUANTITY
REMARKS
For DtermIP-to-Legacy terminal/Dterm/DtermIP connection via CCIS, IP-PAD
card is required.
For CCIS Connection

PN-32IPLA/
PN-32IPLA-A
(IP-PAD)
1-8
PN-16VCTA /
PN-16VCTA-A
(16VCT)
1-16
IPTRK BUS CA
Set of 3 BUS Cables

between IP-PAD and
16VCT Cards
PN-8IPLA
(IP-PAD)
1-8
PZ-24IPLA
(24DSP)
24-channel DSP Card

1-8
1-8 sets
83
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch2001.fm
REQUIRED EQUIPMENT
Required Equipment
EQUIPMENT
DESCRIPTION
QUANTITY
REMARKS
For DtermIP H.323 connection, IP-PAD card must be
installed.
For H.323 Connection

PN-32IPLA/
PN-32IPLA-A
(IP-PAD)
1-8
PN-16VCTA /
PN-16VCTA-A
(16VCT)
1-16
IPTRK BUS CA
Set of 3 BUS Cables

between IP-PAD and
16VCT Cards
PN-8IPLA
(IP-PAD)
1-8
PZ-24IPLA
(24DSP)
24-channel DSP Card

1-8
PN-IPTB (IPT)
IP Trunk Card
1-8
PN-4VCTI (4VCT)
1-32
IPTRK BUS CA
Set of 3 BUS Cables

between IPT and 4VCT
Cards
1-8 sets
Gatekeeper*
Gatekeeper for H.323
1-8 sets
For H.323 connection, IPT

card and 4VCT card are
required.
As required
*: Should be provided by customer.
84
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch2001.fm
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
Install the equipment according to the procedure below.
For module and Legacy interface card installation, refer to the Installation Procedure Manual.
Installation Procedure
START
Mounting ETHER Card/MP Card
Page 87
Mounting IP-PAD Card
Page 88
Mounting 16VCT Card
Page 93
BUS Cable Connection

between IP-PAD and 16VCT Cards
Page 94
LAN Cable Connection of

IP-PAD Card
Page 95
LAN Cable Connection of ETHER Card
Page 96
H.323 connection is
required?
Yes
No
To Installation Procedure for H.323
Connection on next page
END
85
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch2001.fm
Installation Procedure for H.323 Connection

START
Mounting IPT Card
Page 97 NOTE
Mounting 4VCT Card
Page 98 NOTE
BUS Cable Connection

between IPT and 4VCT Cards
Page 101
LAN Cable Connection of IPT Card
Page 102
END
NOTE:
See Mounting Conditions of IPT/4VCT Card.
86
Page 99
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch2001.fm
Mounting ETHER Card/MP Card

(1)
Before mounting the Ether (PZ-M606-A) card, set the switches of the MP (PNCP24-A/PN-CP24-B/PN-CP24-C/PN-CP24-D/PN-CP27-A/PN-CP27-B)
card to the appropriate position. See CHAPTER 4.
Page 336, Page 342
(2)
To provide LAN interface, mount the ETHER card on the MP card.

See CHAPTER 4.
Page 347
(3)
Mount the MP card in the MP slot of PIM0.
87
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch2001.fm
JULY/01/2006
Mounting IP-PAD Card

(1)
Before mounting the IP-PAD (PN-32IPLA/PN-32IPLA-A/PN-8IPLA) card,

set the MB switch to UP position, and set the other switches to appropriate
position. See CHAPTER 4.
Page 349, Page 353, Page 359
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
(2)
Mount the PZ-24IPLA card on the IP-PAD (PN-8IPLA) card, if required.

See CHAPTER 4.
Page 359
(3)
Mount the IP-PAD card in the following LT slots of PIM0-PIM7.

For the retrofit system, see
Page 91.
Maximum of two IP-PAD cards per built-in FP on MP card/FP card, maximum of eight per system
can be mounted.
For PN-32IPLA/PN-32IPLA-A
LT01 in PIM0/2/4/6: IP-PAD No. 0
For PN-8IPLA
88
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch2001.fm
NOTE 1: One IP-PAD (PN-32IPLA/PN-32IPLA-A) card requires two physical slots and two vacant
slots.
When you mount IP-PAD card in LT01 slot:LT00 physical slot is required.
LT02 and LT03 must be vacant except the
16VCT card.
When you mount IP-PAD card in LT05 slot:LT04 physical slot is required.
LT06 and LT07 must be vacant except the
16VCT card.
PIM1/3/5/7
PIM0/2/4/6
IP-PAD
L/T must not

be mounted
IPPAD
No. 3
IP-PAD
PFT
IP-PAD
IPPAD
No. 2
LT11
LT10
LT09
LT08
LT07
LT06
LT05
LT04
LT03
LT02
LT01
LT00
VM
IP-PAD
IPPAD
No. 1
PFT
MP12/FP12
LT11
LT10
LT09
LT08
LT07
LT06
LT05
LT04
LT03
LT02
LT01
LT00
VM
IPPAD
No. 0
L/T must not

be mounted
*must be vacant except the 16VCT card.
*must be vacant except the 16VCT card.
NOTE 2: Do not mount any other L/T cards in LT08-LT11 slots (for Backup CPU system, LT08-LT10
slots) when you mount the IP-PAD (PN-32IPLA/PN-32IPLA-A) card in LT05 slot (AP cards are
mountable in AP08-AP11 slots [for Backup CPU system, AP08-AP10 slots]).
89
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch2001.fm
NOTE 3: When using Series 3300 software or later in the system, mount the IP-PAD (PN-8IPLA) card as
shown below.
The required slot for the IP-PAD (PN-8IPLA) card depends on the number of channels used in
the IP-PAD card.
Do not mount any other L/T cards in LT08-LT11 slots (AP cards are mountable in AP08-AP11
slots).
When using IP-PAD (PN-8IPLA) card with 8-channel
Required slot: LT00/LT04
Required slots: LT00/LT04 and one adjoining slot (LT01/LT05)
Only AP cards are mountable in LT01/LT05.
Required slots: LT00/LT04 and two adjoining slots (LT01/LT02, LT05/LT06)
Only AP cards are mountable in LT01/LT02, LT05/LT06.
Required slots: LT00/LT04 and three adjoining slots (LT01/LT02/LT03, LT05/LT06/LT07)
Only AP cards are mountable in LT01/LT02/LT03, LT05/LT06/LT07.
PIM1/3/5/7
PIM0/2/4/6
IP-PAD
PFT
IP-PAD
L/T must not

be mounted
LT11
LT10
LT09
LT08
LT07
LT06
LT05
LT04 IP-PAD No.3
LT03
LT02
LT01
LT00 IP-PAD No.2
VM
IP-PAD
PFT
MP12/FP12
LT11
LT10
LT09
LT08
LT07
LT06
LT05
LT04 IP-PAD No.1
LT03
LT02
LT01
LT00 IP-PAD No.0
VM
IP-PAD
L/T must not

be mounted
NOTE 4: When using Series 3200 R6.2 software or before in the system, mount the IP-PAD (PN-8IPLA)
card in LT01/LT05 slot.
90
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch2001.fm
JULY/01/2006
For the IP-PAD card, the IP-PAD serial number must be assigned by the system data programming according to the PIM and slot that accommodates the card. See CM0A Y=00 of IP-PAD DATA ASSIGNMENT in CHAPTER 3.
Page 188
(4)
After mounting the card, set the MB switch to DOWN position to put the card in service.
For the retrofit system, mount the IP-PAD card in one of the following LT slots.
<48-port PIM: NEAX 1000 IVS>

LT01-LT04 in PIM0: IP-PAD No. 0
PIM1
LT06
LT07
LT08
BUS
LT06
LT07
LT08
MP
LT05
LT04
LT03
LT02
LT01
LT00
IP-PAD
No. 2
* * * *
PIM0
LT05
LT04
LT03
LT02
LT01
LT00
IP-PAD
No. 0
* * * *
* must be vacant except the IP-PAD card.
NOTE:
The number of channels used in the IP-PAD card depends on the office data (CM0A Y=73).
Also the required slot for the IP-PAD card depends on the number of channels used in the IPPAD card. For details, see Mounting IP-PAD Card (3).
Page 88
Illustrations shown above explain the case of using 32 channels in the IP-PAD card.
91
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch2001.fm
JULY/01/2006
<64-port PIM: NEAX 2000 IVS/NEAX 7400 ICS Model120/Model100>

LT01-LT07 in PIM0/2/4/6: IP-PAD No. 0
PIM1/3/5/7
FP
MP/FP
BUS
FP
MP/FP
BUS
LT15
LT14
LT13
LT12
LT11
LT10
LT09
LT08
LT07
LT06
LT05
LT04
LT03
LT02
LT01
LT00
IP-PAD No. 2
IP-PAD No. 3
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
PIM0/2/4/6
LT15
LT14
LT13
LT12
LT11
LT10
LT09
LT08
LT07
LT06
LT05
LT04
LT03
LT02
LT01
LT00
IP-PAD No. 0
IP-PAD No. 1
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
NOTE:
Page 88
<72-port PIM: NEAX 2000 IVS Small Platform System/

NEAX 7400 ICS Model110/Model80VS>
PIM0
MP
AP
LT10
LT09
LT08
LT07
LT06
LT05
LT04
LT03
LT02
LT01
LT00
IP-PAD
No.0
IP-PAD
No.1
* * * * * * * *
NOTE:
Page 88
92
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch2001.fm
JULY/01/2006
Mounting 16VCT Card

(1)
Set the card number to each 16VCT (PN-16VCTA/PN-16VCTA-A) card by

SW1 setting. And confirm the correct switch settings.
See CHAPTER 4.
Page 357
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
(2)
Mount the first 16VCT (VCT0) card in the following LT slots, next to the IPPAD (PN-32IPLA/PN-32IPLA-A) card mounted in the previous procedure.
When IP-PAD card is mounted in LT01 slot: Mount VCT0 in LT02
(3)
Mount the second 16VCT (VCT1) card in the following LT slots, next to the VCT0 card, if another
16-channel PAD is required.
16VCT Mounting Slot

PIM0-7
16VCT
PFT
IP-PAD
MP12/FP12
* ** ** *
LT11
V
C
T
1
LT10
V
C
T
0
LT09
IPPAD
LT08
LT07
LT06
LT03
V
C
T
1
LT05
LT02
V
C
T
0
LT04
LT01
LT00
VM
IPPAD
* ** **
IP-PAD
16VCT
L/T must not

be mounted
*must be vacant except the IP-PAD card.

**must be vacant except the 16VCT card.
NOTE:
Do not mount any other L/T cards in LT08-LT11 slots (for Backup CPU system, LT08-LT10
slots) when you mount the 16VCT card in LT06 and LT07 slots (AP cards are mountable in
AP08-AP11 slots [for Backup CPU system, AP08-AP10 slots]).
93
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch2001.fm
BUS Cable Connection between IP-PAD and 16VCT Cards

(1)
Connect the VCTB/VCTA connector on the IP-PAD (PN-32IPLA/PN-32IPLA-A) card and the
VCT1A/VCT0A connector on the 16VCT card by the IPTRK BUS CA, as shown below.
(2)
When two 16VCT cards are mounted, connect the VCT1B/VCT0B connector on the 16VCT card
with the VCT1A/VCT0A connector on the next 16VCT card, one after another.
IP-PAD (PN-32IPLA/PN-32IPLA-A) Card BUS Cable Connection

IP-PAD
VCTB
VCTA
LAN
IPTRK BUS CA [0.1 m (0.33 ft.)]

NOTE
16VCT
(VCT0)
SW1 Switch Setting:
SW1-1: OFF
SW1-2: OFF
To DtermIP via LAN

To Internet/Intranet via LAN
VCT1B
VCT0B
VCT1A
VCT0A
IPTRK BUS CA [0.1 m (0.33 ft.)]

NOTE
16VCT
(VCT1)
SW1 Switch Setting:
SW1-1: OFF
SW1-2: ON
VCT1B
VCT0B
VCT1A
VCT0A
NOTE:
The IPTRK BUS CA consists of a set of three identical cables. Make sure to connect the IP-PAD
and 16VCT cards by using this set of cables, confirming that connecting location of each cable
must be matched in both IP-PAD and 16VCT cards, as shown in the above figure.
94
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch2001.fm
LAN Cable Connection of IP-PAD Card

Connect the LAN connector on the IP-PAD card and the Switching HUB by using a 100BASE-TX cable.
IP-PAD-Switching HUB Cable Connection
IP-PAD
100BASE-TX Cable
LAN
Maximum 100 m (328 ft.)
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Switching HUB
Not used
Not used
RD
Not used
Not used
RD+
TD
TD+
Pins (RJ-45 Connector)
95
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch2001.fm
LAN Cable Connection of ETHER Card

Connect the LAN connector on the ETHER card and the Router/Switching HUB by using a 10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX cable.
When the system provides DtermIP/OAI terminal/MAT/SMDR/PMS on the LAN, connect them to the
Switching HUB that is connected to the LAN connector on the ETHER card.
ETHER-Router/Switching HUB Cable Connection

ETHER
Router/Switching HUB
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Cable
LAN
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Not used
Not used
RD
Not used
Not used
RD+
TD
TD+
term
D IP
OAI
MAT
SMDR
PMS
NOTE:
The port number of 2000 IPS for OAI is 60030 in initially. The port number 1024, 1025, 1039
are available by CM0B Y=00>98.
The port number of 2000 IPS for MAT is fixed to 60000.
The port number of 2000 IPS for SMDR is fixed to 60010.
The port number of 2000 IPS for PMS is fixed to 60050.
96
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch2001.fm
JULY/01/2006
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR H.323 CONNECTION

Mounting IPT Card
(1)
(2)
(3)
Before mounting the IPT (PN-IPTB) card, set the MB switch to UP position,
and set the other switches to appropriate position.
See CHAPTER 4.
Page 362
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Mount the IPT card in the following AP slots of PIM0-PIM7.
Handling
One IPT card is mountable per PIM.
PIM0-7: AP00-11 slots
PIM0 (for Backup CPU): AP00-AP10 slots
After mounting the card, set the MB switch to DOWN position to put the card in service.
IPT Mounting Slot

PIM0-7
PFT
MP12/FP12
AP11
AP10
AP09
AP08
AP07
AP06
AP05
AP04
AP03
AP02
AP01
AP00
VM
IPT card mountable slots

(Only one IPT card is mountable per PIM)
97
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch2001.fm
Mounting 4VCT Card

(1)
(2)
(3)
Set the card number to each 4VCT (PN-4VCTI) card by SW1 setting.
And, confirm the correct switch settings. See CHAPTER 4.
Page 366
Mount the first 4VCT (VCT0) card in the following LT slots, next to the IPT
ATTENTION
Contents
card mounted in previous procedure.
Static Sensitive
Handling
PIM0-7: LT00-LT11 slots
PIM0 (for Backup CPU): LT00-LT10 slots
Mount the second to fourth 4VCT (VCT1-3) cards into the LT slots, next to the
4VCT card mounted above. Maximum of four 4VCT cards are mountable per PIM.
NOTE:
See Mounting Conditions of IPT/4VCT Card on next page.
4VCT Mounting Slot

PIM0-7
PFT
MP12/FP12
LT11
LT10
LT09
LT08
LT07
LT06
LT05
LT04
LT03
LT02
LT01
LT00
VM
4VCT card mountable slots

(Maximum four 4VCT cards are mountable per PIM)
98
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch2001.fm
Mounting Conditions of IPT/4VCT Card

When accommodating the IPT and the 4VCT card, you must provide vacant slots as shown below. Those
vacant slots can be located in any LT/AP slots on the PIM and are not available for any line/trunk or application processor cards.
Mounting Conditions of IPT/4VCT Card
PIM
No. OF
CHANNEL
No. OF CARD
IPT
4VCT
12
16
12
16
PIM0
PIM1-7
REQUIRED
SLOTS
IPT : 1
4VCT : 1
Vacant: 2
IPT : 1
4VCT : 2
Vacant: 3
IPT : 1
4VCT : 3
Vacant: 4
IPT : 1
4VCT : 4
Vacant: 5
IPT : 1
4VCT : 1
Vacant: 0
IPT : 1
4VCT : 2
Vacant: 1
IPT : 1
4VCT : 3
Vacant: 2
IPT : 1
4VCT : 4
Vacant: 3
AVAILABLE SLOTS FOR

OTHER LT/AP CARDS
8 (7)
6 (5)
4 (3)
2 (1)
10
4
NOTE 1: The number in the parentheses shows the available slots in Backup CPU system.
99
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch2001.fm
NOTE 2: When a 8-port or 16-port Line/Trunk card is mounted in the LT04-LT07 slots, a 4VCT card cannot be mounted in the LT08-LT11 slots (for Backup CPU system, LT08-LT10 slots) of the same
PIM.
NOTE 3: When the IP-PAD card is mounted in the LT05 slot, a 4VCT card cannot be mounted in the
LT08-LT11 slots (for Backup CPU system, LT08-LT10 slots) of the same PIM.
100
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch2001.fm
BUS Cable Connection between IPT and 4VCT Cards

(1)
(2)
Connect the VCTA/VCT connector on the IPT card and the IPTA/IPT connector on the 4VCT card
by the IPTRK BUS CA, as shown below.
When two or more 4VCT cards are mounted, connect the EXPA/EXP connector on the 4VCT card
with the EXPA/EXP connector on the next 4VCT card, one after another.
IP Trunk BUS Cable Connection

IPT
VCTA/
VCT
4VCT
(VCT0)
SW1 Switch Setting:

SW1-1: OFF
SW1-2: OFF
IP
CONN
To ROUTER/HUB
IPTA/
IPT
4VCT
(VCT1)
SW1 Switch Setting:

SW1-1: ON
SW1-2: OFF
EXPA/
EXP
IPTA/
IPT
SW1 Switch Setting:
SW1-1: OFF
SW1-2: ON
4VCT
(VCT2)
EXPA/
EXP
IPTRK BUS CA [0.1 m (0.33 ft)]
IPTA/
IPT
SW1 Switch Setting:
SW1-1: ON
SW1-2: ON
4VCT
(VCT3)
EXPA/
EXP
IPT
IPTA/
IPT
VCTA
EXPA/
EXP
VCT
IPCONN
IPTRK BUS CA
NOTE
4VCT
IPTA
IPT
EXPA
EXP
NOTE:
The IPTRK BUS CA consists of a set of three identical cables. Make sure to connect the IPT and
4VCT cards by using this set of cables, confirming that connecting location of each cable must
be matched in both IPT and 4VCT cards, as shown in the above figure.
101
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch2001.fm
LAN Cable Connection of IPT Card

Connect the IPCONN connector on the IPT card and the Router/HUB by using a 10BASE-T/100BASETX cable.
IPT-HUB/Router Cable Connection

IPT
LAN
VCT
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Cable
IPCONN
HUB/Router
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Not used
Not used
RD
Not used
Not used
RD+
TD
TD+
102
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch2001.fm
CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING
CHAPTER 3
SYSTEM DATA
PROGRAMMING
This chapter explains the programming procedure of the system data,

DtermIP setup procedure and DtermIP login/logout procedure.
HOW TO READ THIS CHAPTER ..............................................

PRECAUTIONS .........................................................................
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE ...............................................
BASIC DATA SETTING .............................................................
REMOTE PIM OVER IP DATA ASSIGNMENT .........................
SYSTEM CONSTITUTION DATA ASSIGNMENT .....................
DtermIP DATA ASSIGNMENT ...................................................
DtermIP SETUP ..........................................................................
DtermIP LOGIN/LOGOUT OPERATION ....................................
IP-PAD DATA ASSIGNMENT ...................................................
CCIS VIRTUAL IPT DATA ASSIGNMENT ................................
LOCATION DATA ASSIGNMENT .............................................
IP FEATURE PROGRAMMING .................................................
H.323 IP TRUNK DATA ASSIGNMENT ....................................
SYSTEM DATA BACKUP .........................................................
SYSTEM RESET ........................................................................
103
104
105
106
107
122
157
164
178
184
188
201
221
235
301
323
325
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm

HOW TO READ THIS CHAPTER

In the programming procedure, the meanings of (1), (2) and markings are as follows.
(1)
(2)
: 1st Data
: 2nd Data
: Initial Data
With the system data clear command (CM00, CM01), the data with this marking is
automatically assigned for each command.
INITIAL
: A reset of the MP card is required after data setting.

Press SW1 switch on the MP card.
IP-PAD INITIAL
: A reset of the IP-PAD card is required after data setting.

Set the Make Busy switch to UP and then DOWN.
IPT INITIAL
: A reset of the IPT card is required after data setting.

Set the Make Busy switch to UP and then DOWN.
OFF LINE
: Command with this marking can be used only under Off-Line mode of the MP card.
To set Off-Line mode,
(1) Set SW3 on the MP card to 2 or 3.
(2) Press SW1 on the MP card.
104
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm

PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
System Data Backup
CAUTION
If you operate as follows without system data backup after system data setting or service
memory setting (registration of the features such as Call Forwarding and Speed Calling
[Speed Dialing] from a station), the data that has been set is invalid.
You must execute the system data backup before the following operations.
-Turning Off the system
-System Initialization (reset of MP card)
-Changing the MP card to Off-Line Mode
-Changing the MP card to On-Line Mode after system data setting under Off-Line Mode
You can execute the system data backup by the following two ways.
-Executing the system data backup once a day at the time set by CM43 Y=5>00
(If no data is set, the default setting is 3:00 a.m.)
-Executing the system data backup from MAT/CAT by CMEC Y=6>0:0
Do not reset the MP card while SYSD lamp on the MP card is flashing.
105
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
OCTOBER/14/2005

PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE
Program the system data according to the following procedure.
Programming Procedure
START
BASIC DATA SETTING
Office Data Conversion
System Data Memory All Clear
Key FD Data Loading
Setting System Clock
Setting Nation Code
Setting A-law/-law
Setting DTG/Music on Hold/Tone
LAN Data Assignment
VLAN Data Assignment
Yes
Remote PIM over IP

provide?
Remote PIM over IP Data Assignment
Page 122
Page 107
No
System Constitution Data Assignment
Page 157 NOTE 1
DtermIP Data Assignment
Page 164 NOTE 1
IP-PAD Data Assignment
Page 188 NOTE 1
CCIS Connection
H.323 Connection
Connection Type?
CCIS Virtual IPT Data Assignment
Station-to-Station
Connection
Public Network/
Tie Line Network
Connection
Page 201
H.323 IP Trunk Data Assignment
Page 301
Location Data Assignment
Page 221 NOTE 1
IP Feature Programming
Page 235 NOTE 1
Feature Programming of each service
NOTE 1, NOTE 2
System Data Backup
Page 323 NOTE 1
System Reset
Page 325 NOTE 1
END
106
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm

PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE/BASIC DATA SETTING
NOTE 1: The data assignment can be executed under Off-Line mode or On-Line mode of the MP card.
When setting the data under Off-Line mode, system reset is required after data setting.
NOTE 2: For feature programming of each service, refer to the Feature Programming Manual or each
System Manual.
BASIC DATA SETTING

For initial system setup, you must execute the following.
Page 108
Page 109
Key FD Data Loading
Page 111
Page 112
Setting Nation Code
Page 113
Setting A-law/-law
Page 114
Page 115
LAN Data Assignment
Page 119
Page 120
107
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm

BASIC DATA SETTING

When upgrading the software of the system from Series 3300 or before to Series 3400 or later, the office
data conversion by CM00>90 is required. The office data that has been converted and the office data in
Series 3400 software or later are incompatible with the software of Series 3300 or before. We recommend
to execute the system data backup before the office data conversion.
NOTE:
START
CM00
When upgrading the software in Retrofit system to Series 3400 or later, convert the office data
using Office Data Converter in the MATWorX CD-ROM and then execute the office data
conversion by CM00>90.
DESCRIPTION
DATA
Execute the office data conversion.

OFF LINE
(1) 90
(2) 0: Start conversion
1: Always displayed after first data 90 is
typed NOTE 1
NOTE 1: When first data 90 is typed, second data 1 is displayed. Also while converting the
office data, 1 is displayed.
NOTE 2: There is no problem even if the office data conversion is executed repeatedly.
END
108
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
OCTOBER/14/2005

BASIC DATA SETTING

You can select the system memory clear data according to the system configuration.
START
DESCRIPTION
CM00
Clear all system data memory for the TDSWbased PBX system.
OFF LINE
(1) 1 NOTE
(2) CCC
Clear all system data memory for the IP-based

PBX system.
OFF LINE
(1) 11, 12, 13, 14 NOTE

(2) CCC
NOTE:
After clearing all system data memory of the system, the initial data of CM05 is set according to the table below.
Clear
Command
CM00>1
(8 PIMs)
CM05
CM05
Y=0
(Setting
of FP/AP
Card
Type)
DATA
CM00>11
(1 PIM +
7 Virtual
PIMs)
FP/AP No.
CM00>12
(2 PIMs +
6 Virtual
PIMs)
CM00>13
(3 PIMs +
5 Virtual
PIMs)
CM00>14
(4 PIMs +
4 Virtual
PIMs)
Card Type (NONE: No data)
00
00 (FP)
00 (FP)
00 (FP)
00 (FP)
00 (FP)
01
00 (FP)
00 (FP)
00 (FP)
00 (FP)
00 (FP)
02
00 (FP)
00 (FP)
00 (FP)
00 (FP)
00 (FP)
03
00 (FP)
00 (FP)
00 (FP)
00 (FP)
00 (FP)
16
NONE
00 (FP)
NONE
NONE
NONE
17
NONE
00 (FP)
00 (FP)
00 (FP)
NONE
18
NONE
00 (FP)
00 (FP)
00 (FP)
00 (FP)
19
NONE
00 (FP)
00 (FP)
00 (FP)
00 (FP)
04-15,
20-59
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
60-63
00 (Virtual FP
for PS Station/
WLAN Station)
00 (Virtual FP
for PS Station/
WLAN Station)
00 (Virtual FP
for PS Station/
WLAN Station)
00 (Virtual FP
for PS Station/
WLAN Station)
00 (Virtual FP
for PS Station/
WLAN Station)
109
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm

BASIC DATA SETTING
DESCRIPTION
A
CM00
Clear
Command
CM00>1
(8 PIMs)
CM05
CM05
Y=4
(PIM No.
controlled by
each FP/
PIM No.
accommodates
Virtual
IPT)
CM05
Y=6
(Type of
FP/AP)
NOTE 1
NOTE 2
DATA
CM00>11
(1 PIM +
7 Virtual
PIMs)
CM00>12
(2 PIMs +
6 Virtual
PIMs)
CM00>13
(3 PIMs +
5 Virtual
PIMs)
CM00>14
(4 PIMs +
4 Virtual
PIMs)
PIM No./Virtual PIM No. (NONE: See NOTE 3.)
FP/AP No.
00
NONE
00 (PIM0)
NONE
NONE
NONE
01
NONE
02 (PIM2)
02 (PIM2)
02 (PIM2)
NONE
02
NONE
04 (PIM4)
04 (PIM4)
04 (PIM4)
04 (PIM4)
03
NONE
06 (PIM6)
06 (PIM6)
06 (PIM6)
06 (PIM6)
16
NONE
01 (PIM1)
NONE
NONE
NONE
17
NONE
03 (PIM3)
03 (PIM3)
03 (PIM3)
NONE
18
NONE
05 (PIM5)
05 (PIM5)
05 (PIM5)
05 (PIM5)
19
NONE
07 (PIM7)
07 (PIM7)
07 (PIM7)
07 (PIM7)
04-15,
20-63
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
FP/AP No.
Type of FP/AP (NONE: No data)
00
2 (Built-in FP) 2 (Built-in FP) 2 (Built-in FP) 2 (Built-in FP) 2 (Built-in FP)
01
NONE
0 (Virtual FP)
0 (Virtual FP)
3 (PN-CP15)
3 (PN-CP15)
02
NONE
0 (Virtual FP)
0 (Virtual FP)
0 (Virtual FP)
0 (Virtual FP)
03
NONE
0 (Virtual FP)
0 (Virtual FP)
0 (Virtual FP)
0 (Virtual FP)
16
NONE
0 (Virtual FP)
3 (PN-CP15)
3 (PN-CP15)
3 (PN-CP15)
17
NONE
0 (Virtual FP)
0 (Virtual FP)
0 (Virtual FP)
3 (PN-CP15)
18
NONE
0 (Virtual FP)
0 (Virtual FP)
0 (Virtual FP)
0 (Virtual FP)
19
NONE
0 (Virtual FP)
0 (Virtual FP)
0 (Virtual FP)
0 (Virtual FP)
04-15,
20-63
NONE
3 (AP Card)
3 (AP Card)
3 (AP Card)
3 (AP Card)
110
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm

BASIC DATA SETTING
DESCRIPTION
B
CM00
Clear
Command
CM00>1
(8 PIMs)
CM05
CM05
Y=8
(Site No.
+
PIM No.
controlled by
each FP/
PIM No.
accommodates
Virtual
IPT)
DATA
CM00>11
(1 PIM +
7 Virtual
PIMs)
CM00>12
(2 PIMs +
6 Virtual
PIMs)
CM00>13
(3 PIMs +
5 Virtual
PIMs)
CM00>14
(4 PIMs +
4 Virtual
PIMs)
PIM No./Virtual PIM No. (NONE: See NOTE 3.)
FP/AP No.
00
NONE
0000 (PIM0)
NONE
NONE
NONE
01
NONE
0002 (PIM2)
0002 (PIM2)
0002 (PIM2)
NONE
02
NONE
0004 (PIM4)
0004 (PIM4)
0004 (PIM4)
0004 (PIM4)
03
NONE
0006 (PIM6)
0006 (PIM6)
0006 (PIM6)
0006 (PIM6)
16
NONE
0001 (PIM1)
NONE
NONE
NONE
17
NONE
0003 (PIM3)
0003 (PIM3)
0003 (PIM3)
NONE
18
NONE
0005 (PIM5)
0005 (PIM5)
0005 (PIM5)
0005 (PIM5)
19
NONE
0007 (PIM7)
0007 (PIM7)
0007 (PIM7)
0007 (PIM7)
04-15,
20-63
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
END
NOTE 1: Built-in FP is used for controlling Legacy line/trunk cards. Only FP No. 00 is available.
NOTE 2: Virtual FP is used for controlling Peer-to-Peer connection between DtermIPs on intra-office
and via CCIS.
NOTE 3: CM05 Y=4/8 NONE data are as follows.
FP No. 00
: PIM0 and PIM1
FP No. 01
: PIM2 and PIM3
FP No. 02
: PIM4 and PIM5
FP No. 03
: PIM6 and PIM7
FP No. 04-63
: No data
AP No. 04-15, 20-63: No data
NOTE 4: For the location of each LEN, see APPENDIX B.
Page B1
Key FD Data Loading

The Key FD data must be loaded into the MP card to activate the system.
Refer to the Key FD Operation Guide for details. [For other than North America]
111
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm

BASIC DATA SETTING

START
CM02
DESCRIPTION
DATA
Assign the system clock data.
(1) 0: Calendar Year

(2) 2000-2099 (Ex. 2005)
(1) 1: Date
(2) MM DD WW
MM : 01-12 (Month)
DD : 01-31 (Date)
WW: 00 (Sun)
01 (Mon)
02 (Tue)
03 (Wed)
04 (Thu)
05 (Fri)
06 (Sat)
(1) 2: Time
(2) HH MM SS
HH : 00-23 (Hour)
MM : 00-59 (Minute)
SS : 00-59 (Second)
END
112
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm

BASIC DATA SETTING
Setting Nation Code

START
CM31
DESCRIPTION
DATA
Specify the nation code.

INITIAL
Y=0
(1) 0
(2) 01: Australia
02: UK
03: North America
04: Asia/Africa/Europe/Latin America/
Middle East/Russia/EU NOTE 2
15: New Zealand
NONE : Nation code by Key ROM
END
NOTE 1: The initial data of CM31 Y=0>0 depends on each nation code of the MP program.
For Australia/NZ: 01
For UK: 02
For North America: 03
For Asia/Africa/Europe/Latin America/Middle East/Russia: 04
NOTE 2: In case of EU, the initial data of CM31 Y=0>0 is same as North America (nation code 03).
Therefore, you must set the nation code to 04 by this command.
113
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

BASIC DATA SETTING
Setting A-law/-law
[For EU]
START
CM04
DESCRIPTION
DATA
Specify the A-law/-law for the main site.

NOTE 1: When using PN-CP24-A/PN-CP24B/PN-CP24-C/PN-CP24-D/PNCP27-A/PN-CP27-B, set the 2nd
data to 3 and set the A-law/-law by
the SW2-1.
NOTE 2: When using PN-CP31-A/PN-CP31B/PN-CP31-C/PN-CP31-D, the system is set to -law automatically. Set
the 2nd data to 0 for A-law.
Y=10
(1) 00
(2) 0 : A-law
1 : -law
2 : Not used
3 : Depends on the SW2-1 on PN-CP24A/PN-CP24-B/PN-CP24-C/PNCP24-D/PN-CP27-A/PN-CP27-B or
the Key ROM (SP-3722 IPS KYUS
PROG-A1) on PN-CP31-A/PN-CP31B/PN-CP31-C/PN-CP31-D
NOTE 3: Set the same value as remote site

(CM04 Y=11-40). You cannot set
both of A-law and -law in the same
Remote PIM over IP system.
END
114
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

BASIC DATA SETTING

(1)
DTG
DTG (Digital Tone Generator) is decided to the combination of CM48 Y=3 and the DTG program.
To select the DTG pattern for each country, set the data below.
NOTE:
When the Nation Code of Key ROM program is for North America or Australia, DTG is set to
the country automatically.
This data setting is not required for the combination of the DTG program and the countries
marked with * (asterisk) in the table on next page.
START
DESCRIPTION
DATA
CM48
Set the DTG (Digital Tone Generator) for your

country.
[Not used in Australia/North America/
UK]
Y=3
(1) 00
(2) 00-07: See the table on next page.
115
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm

BASIC DATA SETTING
A
CM48
DESCRIPTION
2nd Data of
CM48
DTG Program
SP-3643 IPS
DTG-A1
SP-3644 IPS
DTG-B1
SP-3645 IPS
DTG-C1
SP-3758 IPS
DTG-D1
[Series 3200
R6.2 software
required]
SP-3774 IPS
DTG-E1
[Series 3200
R6.2 software
required]
00
DATA
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
Japan*
North Austra- A-law Mexico Brazil
America* lia* Standard*

A-law
New
AustraUK*
Russia South
Standard Zealand
lia*
Korea
Hong Taiwan China Thailand Malaysia SinA-law
North
Kong
gapore Standard America
Nether- Germany Italy
Austria Belgium Spain Sweden
UK
lands
Denmark Greece Switzerland
South
Africa
116
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
JUNE/01/2007

BASIC DATA SETTING
DESCRIPTION
B
CM04
DATA
Set the DTG for DtermIP (System-basis).

NOTE:
Second data 16 to 26 are

available only for EU.
Y=00
(1) 01
(2) 01: Japan
02: North America
03: Australia
04: A-law countries
05: Hong Kong
06: Malaysia
07: Singapore
08: UK
09: Mexico
10: Taiwan
11: New Zealand
13: China
14: Thailand
15: Brazil
16: Netherlands
17: Germany
18: Italy
19: Austria
20: Belgium
21: Spain
22: Sweden
23: UK
24: Denmark
25: Greece
26: Switzerland
27: South Africa
NONE : Not used
END
117
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

BASIC DATA SETTING
(2)
Music on Hold
To provide Internal Hold Tone source on the MP card, set the data below.
NOTE 1: Do not use CM08>183 for music selection in this system. If CM48 Y=0 is set, CM08>183 is
disregarded.
NOTE 2: This data setting is effective only for the legacy terminal.
For DtermIP, this data setting is not effective. DtermIP uses the tone source in IP Adapter
(Minuet).
START
CM48
DESCRIPTION
DATA
Set the music for Internal Hold Tone.

NOTE 1: Set CM48 Y=0>00/01/02>1400 after this data setting.
NOTE 2: When PN-CP24-D/PN-CP26-B/PNCP27-B/PN-CP31-D is used in MP
card, the following tone sources are
not available: Its a small world
(2nd data 05), Let it be (2nd data
07), and If you love me (2nd data
09). Minuet will be set instead
of those tone sources.
Y=3
(1) 01
(2) 00: Nocturne
01: Minuet
02: Fur Elise
03: The Maidens Prayer
04: When the saints go marching in
05: Its a small world
06: Spring (by four seasons)
07: Let it be
08: Ich bin ein Musikante (German folk
song)
09: If you love me
10: Amaryllis (French folk song)
NONE : Minuet
END
(3)
Periodic Time Indication Tone

To provide Periodic Time Indication Tone, set the data below.
START
DESCRIPTION
DATA
CM41
Specify the timing interval for Periodic Time

Indication Tone.
Y=0
(1) 09
(2) 01-17: 32-548 seconds
(32 second increments)
If no data is set, the default setting is 192-196
seconds.
END
118
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
JULY/01/2006

BASIC DATA SETTING
LAN Data Assignment

LAN data assignment is required for the MP card to connect the DtermIP/MAT/OAI terminal/SMDR/PMS
to the system on the LAN.
NOTE:
When the system is initialized by setting the SW3 on MP card to B (All clear), IP Address and
Subnet Mask will be set automatically as follows.
IP Address : 192.168.1.36
Subnet Mask : 255.255.255.0
START
DESCRIPTION
DATA
CM0B
Assign the IP Address for the system.

INITIAL
Y=00
(1) 00
(2) 000000000000-255255255255:
IP Address for the system
NONE : No data
Assign the Subnet Mask for the system.

INITIAL
Y=00
(1) 01
(2) 000000000000-255255255255:
Subnet Mask for the system
NONE : No data
Assign the Default Gateway Address for the

system.
INITIAL
Y=00
(1) 02
(2) 000000000000-255255255255:
Default Gateway Address for the system
NONE : No data
Assign the communication mode and the communication speed for the LAN Interface of the
MP card.
INITIAL
Y=00
(1) 05
(2) 0 : 100 Mbps (Full-Duplex) fixed
1 : Auto Negotiation
END
119
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm

BASIC DATA SETTING

NOTE 1: The system supports only Tag VLAN.
NOTE 2: Switching HUB that supports VLAN is required to provide the VLAN function.
DESCRIPTION
START
CM0B
DATA
Provide the VLAN with the system.

INITIAL
NOTE:
Clear the IP Address and the Subnet

Mask for the system that have been
set by CM0B Y=00>00, 01.
Specify the priority of the VLAN.

INITIAL
NOTE:
Y=02
(1) 00
(2) 0 : To provide
1 : Not provided
Y=02
(1) 01
(2) 0-7 : Priority 0-7 NOTE
The higher number has higher priority.
Assign the VLAN ID to the system.

INITIAL
NOTE 1: One VLAN ID can be set per system.
Y=02
(1) 02
(2) 0001-4094: VLAN ID 1-4094 NOTE 2
NONE : No data
NOTE 2: VLAN ID 0 is not available.

Assign the IP Address for the VLAN.
INITIAL
NOTE:

Mask for the system that have been
set by CM0B Y=00>00, 01.
Assign the Subnet Mask for the VLAN.

INITIAL
Y=02
(1) 03
(2) 000000000000-255255255255:
IP Address for the VLAN
NONE : No data
Y=02
(1) 04
(2) 000000000000-255255255255:
Subnet Mask for the VLAN
NONE : No data
120
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm

BASIC DATA SETTING
DESCRIPTION
CM0A
Specify the LAN Interface of the IP-PAD card

to provide with the VLAN.
IP-PAD INITIAL
Y=51
(1) 00-31: LAN Interface No.
(2) 0 : To provide
1 : Not provided
Specify the priority of the VLAN to each LAN

Interface of the IP-PAD card.
IP-PAD INITIAL
Y=52
NOTE:
DATA
Assign the VLAN ID to each LAN Interface of

the IP-PAD card.
IP-PAD INITIAL
Y=53
(2) 0001-4094: VLAN ID 1-4094 NOTE 2
NONE : No data
NOTE 1: One VLAN ID can be set to each

LAN interface of the IP-PAD card.
Assign the IP Address for the VLAN to each
LAN Interface of the IP-PAD card.
IP-PAD INITIAL
NOTE:
Clear the IP Address for each IPPAD card that has been set by
CM0A Y=01.
Assign the Subnet Mask for the VLAN to each

IP-PAD INITIAL
NOTE:
Clear the Subnet Mask for each IPPAD card that has been set by
CM0A Y=02.
Y=54
(2) 000000000000-255255255255:
NONE : No data
Y=55
(2) 000000000000-255255255255:
NONE : No data
END
121
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm

REMOTE PIM OVER IP DATA ASSIGNMENT

Remote PIM over IP System Setup
(1)
Procedure of Initial Operation
STEP1: Assign all required system data to the MP card of Main Site, including the required data for Remote Site (CM0B Y=31-60).
STEP2: Load all Key FD data to the Main Site.
For details, refer to Key FD Operation Guide. [For other than North America]
STEP3: Execute the system data backup to the Flash ROM of MP card by CMEC Y=6>0:0.
STEP4: Save the system data of Main Site by MATWorX.
STEP5: Clear the system memory of Remote Site by CM00>1.
STEP6: Load the system data saved in STEP4 to all Remote Sites using MATWorX.
STEP7: Assign the Remote Site numbers to each MP card of Remote Sites by CM0B Y=00>90.
Page 156
STEP8: Confirm that the link between Main Site and Remote Site is established.
If not, connect the Main Site and Remote Site by LAN.
The required system data is copied to each Remote Site from the Main Site, and Remote Sites
starts.
122
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm

(2)
Procedure for Remote Site Increase
STEP1: Assign all required system data to the MP card of Main Site, including the required data for Remote Site (CM0B Y=31-60).
STEP2: Load all Key FD data to the Main Site.
For details, refer to Key FD Operation Guide. [For other than North America]
STEP3: Execute the system data backup to the Flash ROM of MP card by CMEC Y=6>0:0.
STEP4: Clear the system memory of Remote Site by CM00>1.
STEP5: Assign the IP address of Main Site and own IP address to the MP card of Remote Site to be
increased.
Page 119
STEP6: Assign own Remote Site number to the MP card of Remote Site to be increased by CM0B
Y=00>90.
Page 156
STEP7: Execute the system data backup to the Flash ROM of MP card of Remote Site.
STEP8: Confirm that the link between Main Site and Remote Site is established.
If not, connect the Main Site and Remote Site by LAN.
The required system data is copied to the Remote Site from the Main Site. It takes 3-4 minutes
to copy the system data from the Main Site to the Remote Site.
The Remote Site starts.
123
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm

Programming Procedure for Remote PIM over IP

For the Remote PIM over IP data, there are three types of office data as shown below.
Program the office data according to each of programming procedure.
Office data set to the MP card of Main Site
(1) Data for Main Site Operation
(2) Data for Remote Site Operation
Office data set to the MP card of Remote Site
Office data set to the MP cards both of Main Site and Remote Site NOTE
(1) LAN Data for Main Site
(2) LAN Data for Remote Site
NOTE:
LAN Data for Main Site and Remote Site must be set to the MP cards both of Main Site and
Remote Site when a Remote Site is increased.
124
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm

(1)
Programming Procedure to Main Site

Program the office data to the MP card of Main Site according to the following procedure.
Before the office data setting, confirm the following contents.
(a) Remote PIM over IP system (Number of Remote Site, IP network etc.)
(b) FP/AP type and FP/AP number which will be installed in the Main Site and Remote Site
(c) IP address of the Main Site and Remote Site
Programming Procedure to Main Site

START
Setting A-law/-law for Remote PIM over IP
Page 127
Remote PIM over IP LAN Data Assignment
Page 128
Remote PIM over IP VLAN Data Assignment
Page 130
Survival Mode Assignment
Page 132
Setting Office Data Copy
Page 133
Main Site/Remote Site

Constitution Data Assignment
Page 134
Remote PIM over IP

Feature Programming
Page 146
END
125
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm

(2)
Programming Procedure to Remote Site

Program the office data to each MP card of remote sites according to the following procedure.
Programming Procedure to Remote Site

START
Remote Site Number Assignment
Page 128 NOTE

Page 156
END
NOTE:
Set this data to the MP card of Remote Site only when the Remote Site is increased.
126
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm

Setting A-law/-law for Remote PIM over IP

(1)
Setting A-law/-law for Main Site

See Setting A-law/-law.
Page 114
(2)
Setting A-law/-law for Remote Site

[For EU]
START
CM04
DESCRIPTION
DATA
Specify the A-law/-law for the remote site.

NOTE 1: When using PN-CP24-A/PN-CP24B/PN-CP24-C/PN-CP24-D/PNCP27-A/PN-CP27-B, set the 2nd
data to 3 and set the A-law/-law by
the SW2-1.
NOTE 2: When using PN-CP31-A/PN-CP31B/PN-CP31-C/PN-CP31-D, the system is set to -law automatically. Set
the 2nd data to 0 for A-law.
Y=11-40 (Remote Site No. 01-30)

(1) 00
(2) 0 : A-law
1 : -law
2 : Not used
3 : Depends on the SW2-1 on PN-CP24A/PN-CP24-B/PN-CP24-C/PNCP24-D/PN-CP27-A/PN-CP27-B or
PROG-A1) on PN-CP31-A/PN-CP31B/PN-CP31-C/PN-CP31-D
NOTE 3: Set the same value as main site

(CM04 Y=10). You cannot set both
of A-law and -law in the same Remote PIM over IP system.
END
127
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006


(1)
LAN Data Assignment for Main Site

In addition to the programming LAN Data Assignment
START
DESCRIPTION
CM0B
Assign the common port number of Device

Handler Manager (DHM) Self port which is
the communication port between the main site
and remote sites, if required.
INITIAL
Page 119, assign the following data.

DATA
Y=10
(1) 70
(2) 01024-65534: DHM Self Port No. 102465534
NONE
: DHM Self Port No. 3300
NOTE 1: Follow the initial data setting usually.

NOTE 2: The DHM self port is the communication port between main site and
remote site. One port is used to communicate with one remote site.
With this command, the common
port of DHM self port is specified.
And the following DHM self port is
automatically assigned to each remote site.
Port No. for each remote site
=Common Port (Setting Data) +
Remote Site No.
And, set the port number that is not
used by other purposes.
END
128
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
JANUARY/20/2006

(2)
LAN Data Assignment for Remote Site

START
DESCRIPTION
DATA
CM0B
Assign the IP Address for the remote site.

INITIAL

(1) 00
(2) 000000000000-255255255255:
IP Address for the remote site
NONE : No data
Assign the Subnet Mask for the remote site.

INITIAL

(1) 01
(2) 000000000000-255255255255:
Subnet Mask for the remote site
NONE : No data

remote site.
INITIAL

(1) 02
(2) 000000000000-255255255255:
Default Gateway Address for the remote
site
NONE : No data
Assign the communication mode and the communication speed for the LAN Interface of the
MP card in the remote site.
INITIAL
Y=31-60 (Remote Site No.01-30)

(1) 05
(2) 0 : 100 Mbps (Full-Duplex) fixed
1 : Auto Negotiation
NOTE 1: Assign the communication mode

and the communication speed of the
LAN Interface before you connect to
the main site.
NOTE 2: Be sure to assign the communication
mode and the communication speed
of the LAN Interface for the MP card
in the main site (CM0B Y=00>05).
END
129
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm

Remote PIM over IP VLAN Data Assignment

(1)
VLAN Data Assignment for Main Site

See VLAN Data Assignment.
Page 120
(2)
VLAN Data Assignment for Remote Site

START
DESCRIPTION
DATA
CM0B
Provide the VLAN with the remote site.

INITIAL

(1) 30
(2) 0 : To provide
1 : Not provided
Specify the priority of the VLAN.

(1) 31
INITIAL
NOTE:
Assign the VLAN ID to the remote site.

INITIAL
NOTE 1: One VLAN ID can be set per remote
site.

(1) 32
(2) 0001-4094: VLAN ID 1-4094 NOTE 2
NONE
: No data

NOTE 3: Clear the IP Address and the Subnet
Mask for the remote site that have
been set by CM0B Y=31-60>00, 01.
A
130
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm

DESCRIPTION
CM0B
Assign the IP Address for the VLAN.

INITIAL
NOTE:
DATA

Mask for the remote site that have
been set by CM0B Y=31-60>00, 01.
Assign the Subnet Mask for the VLAN.

INITIAL

(1) 33
(2) 000000000000-255255255255:
NONE : No data

(1) 34
(2) 000000000000-255255255255:
NONE : No data
END
131
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm

Survival Mode Assignment

START
DESCRIPTION
DATA
CM0B
Specify the start time for the automatic

changeover to survival mode from normal
mode after the disconnection between the main
site and remote site is detected.
INITIAL

(1) 50
(2) 00 : Not execute the automatic
changeover to survival mode
01-99: 0-2970 seconds
seconds.
Provide the system with the automatic

changeover to normal mode from survival
mode after the connection between the main
site and remote site returned to normal condition.
INITIAL

(1) 53
(2) 0 : To provide
1 : Not provided
NOTE:
When providing the system with the

automatic changeover to normal
mode (second data 0), the
changeover of modes may occur frequently under the heavy traffic network.
Specify the start time for the automatic

changeover to normal mode from survival
mode after the connection between the main
site and remote site returned to normal condition.
INITIAL

(1) 51
(2) 00 : Not execute the automatic
changeover to normal mode
01-99: 0-2970 seconds
seconds.
END
132
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
JULY/01/2006

Setting Office Data Copy

(1)
To copy the office data from the Main Site to Remote Sites automatically once a day;
DESCRIPTION
START
CM43
DATA
Assign the start time for copying the office

data from the main site to remote sites.
NOTE 1: The state of automatic office data
copy can be read by CMEC Y=8.
NOTE 2: Office data copy is executed from
the low remote site number to high
remote site number.
Y=7
(1) 00
(2) HH MM
HH
: 00-23 (Hour)
MM
: 00-59 (Minute)
9999
: Not copy the office data automatically
NONE : 0200 (2:00 a.m.)
NOTE 3: The start time for office data copy

may gain/loss about three minutes
from the time you set.
END
(2)
To copy the office data from the Main Site to Remote Sites manually/To read the state of office data
copy;
START
DESCRIPTION
DATA
CMEC
Specify the site number that is executed the office data copy /read the state of office data
copy.
Y=8
(1) 00 : All remote sites
(2) 0 : Start Office Data Copy
1 : Now copping/Office data copy state
can be read
3 : Stand by/Office data copy state can be
read
NOTE:
1 is displayed in the second data

while the office data being copied.
END
133
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm

Main Site/Remote Site Constitution Data Assignment

This system constitution data assignment (setting of FP/AP type, controlled PIM by FP) is required to control DtermIPs, IP-PADs, Virtual IPTs.
When setting up the system for the first time, you must clear all system data memory by CM00.
After clearing all system data memory, do the following programming according to the system configuration.
For how to clear the system data memory, see System Data Memory All Clear.
Page 109
The available value of first data of CM05 (FP/AP number) depends on the software version used in the
system.
Assign the correct FP/AP number to each FP/AP, referring to the tables below.
[For Series 3200 R6.2 software]
: Available : Not available
FP/AP No.
00
01-03
04-15
16-19
20-31
32-59
60-63
FP card (PN-CP15)
MP built-in
FP
Main Site
Remote Site
Virtual FP
for DtermIP
Main Site/
Remote Site
AP card
Virtual AP (Virtual IPT)
FP/AP TYPE
134
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm

[For Series 3300 software]

FP/AP No.
00
01-03
04-15
16-19
20-31
32-59
60-63
FP card (PN-CP15)
MP built-in
FP
Main Site
Remote Site
Virtual FP
for DtermIP
Main Site
Remote Site
AP card
Virtual AP (Virtual IPT/Virtual CSH [For PHS])
Virtual FP for PS Station
FP/AP TYPE
NOTE:
Although FP/AP number marked with is available to use, we recommend FP/AP number
marked with .
135
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm

[For Series 3400/3500/3600/3700 R12.1/3700 R12.2 software]

/: Available NOTE 1 : Not available
FP/AP No.
00
01-03
04-15
16-19
20-31
32-59
60-63
FP card (PN-CP15)
MP built-in
FP
Main Site
Remote Site
Virtual FP
Main Site
term
for D IP/
Remote Site
Virtual FP
for User
Mobility
NOTE 3
AP card
Virtual AP (Virtual IPT/

[For PHS]/Virtual CSH for
WLAN)
NOTE 4
Virtual FP for PS Station/

Virtual FP for WLAN Station
NOTE 4
FP/AP TYPE
NOTE 2
NOTE 1: Although FP/AP number marked with is available to use, we recommend FP/AP number
marked with .
NOTE 2: We recommend the setting of the FP number (60-63), when providing 256 PS stations/WLAN
stations or less and setting of the FP number (56-63), when providing 257 PS stations/WLAN
stations or more.
NOTE 3: Virtual FP for User Mobility is available for Series 3500 software or later.
NOTE 4: Virtual CSH for WLAN and Virtual FP for WLAN Station are available for Series 3500 software
or later.
136
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006


FP/AP No.
00
01-03
04-15
16-19
20-31
32-59
60-63
64-99
FP card (PN-CP15)
MP built-in
FP
Main Site
Remote
Site
Virtual FP
for DtermIP/
Virtual FP
for User
Mobility
Main Site
Remote
Site
AP card
Main Site
Remote
Site
FP/AP TYPE
NOTE
3

[For PHS]/Virtual CSH
for WLAN)
Virtual FP for PS Station/Virtual FP for

WLAN Station
NOTE
2
NOTE
2
marked with .
stations or more.
NOTE 3: Available only for the PRT card or CIR card accommodated in a Remote Site.
137
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

(1)
Main Site Constitution Data Assignment
START
DESCRIPTION
DATA
CM05
Assign the FP number to the FP (Virtual FP/FP

card/MP built-in FP) or AP number to the AP
(Virtual IPT).
INITIAL
Y=0
(1) 00-59: FP No.
(2) 00
: FP (Virtual FP/FP card/MP builtin FP)
NONE : No data
NOTE 1: To control a DtermIP, assign the second data 00 to the FP number of

Virtual FP.
(1) 04-15, 20-59: AP No.

(2) 38
: Virtual IPT
NONE : No data
NOTE 2: To control an IP-PAD, assign the

second data 00 to the FP number
of FP card/MP built-in FP.
NOTE 3: To control a Virtual IPT, assign the
second data 38 to the AP number
of Virtual IPT.
NOTE 4: Two Virtual AP numbers for the virtual IPT can be set to the system.
Assign the main site number 00 and the
Physical PIM/Virtual PIM number controlled
by the FP or Virtual PIM number that accommodates the Virtual IPT to the FP/AP number
assigned by CM05 Y=0.
INITIAL
NOTE 1: When the number of PIM controlled
by FP for Main Site is set to 2 PIMs,
set the second data to NONE.
Y=8
(1) 00-59: FP/AP No.
(2) XX ZZ (Site No. + PIM No.)
XX
: 00: Main Site
ZZ
: 00-07: Physical PIM No.
: 00-15: Virtual PIM No.
: 99: AP card
NONE : See System Data Memory All
Clear.
Page 109
NOTE 2: For Virtual IPT, set the Virtual PIM

number 12, 13 to the Virtual AP
number.
After setting the Virtual PIM number
12, set the number 13, if required.
A
138
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

DESCRIPTION
DATA
CM05
Assign the accommodation type of the FP/AP

to the FP/AP number assigned by CM05 Y=0.
INITIAL
NOTE 1: To accommodate a DtermIP, assign
the second data 0 to the FP number of Virtual FP.
Y=6
(1) 00-59: FP/AP No.
(2) 0 : Virtual FP/Virtual AP
2 : MP built-in FP
3 : FP card (PN-CP15)/AP card
NOTE 2: To accommodate an IP-PAD, assign

the second data 2 or 3 to the
FP number of FP card/MP built-in
FP.
NOTE 3: To accommodate a Virtual IPT, assign the second data 0 to the AP
number of Virtual IPT.
NOTE 4: To accommodate a PS Virtual station, assign the second data 3
(FP card).
B
139
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

DESCRIPTION
DATA
CM05
Assign the number of LT port that is controlled

by the FP card/MP built-in FP.
INITIAL
Y=3
(1) 00-59: FP No.
(2) 000-128 : Number of port (every 8 port)
NOTE 2
NONE : See the table below
NOTE 1: This data can be set to the FP number of FP card/MP built-in FP.
NOTE 2: Be sure to set the number of port every 8 port. If the setting value of second data cannot be divided by 8, the
value of the remainder is omitted
and not assigned to the FP number.
FP No.
Number of Port
(Initial Data)
00-03
128
(for FP card/MP built-in FP)
04-59
NOTE 3: The port number can be used from

the port number 000 up to the value
set by this command. For example,
when setting the number of ports to
64 by this command, the port number can be used from 000 to 063.
END
140
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
JULY/01/2006

(2)
Remote Site Constitution Data Assignment
START
DESCRIPTION
DATA
CM05
Assign the FP number to the FP (Virtual FP/

MP built-in FP), or AP number to the AP card.
INITIAL
Y=0
(1) 00-93: FP No.
(2) 00
: FP (Virtual FP/MP built-in FP)
NONE : No data
NOTE 1: To control a DtermIP, assign the second data 00 to the FP number of

Virtual FP.
NOTE 2: To control an IP-PAD, assign the
of MP built-in FP.
NOTE 3: Assign the FP/AP number 64-93 to
be set to the first data only when accommodating the PRT card or CIR
card in Remote Site.
A
141
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

DESCRIPTION
DATA
CM05
Assign the remote site number that the FP/AP

is accommodated and the Physical PIM/Virtual
PIM number controlled by the FP.
INITIAL
[For Series 3200 R6.2 software or Series

3300 software]
Y=8
(1) 00-59: FP/AP No.
(2) XX ZZ/ZZZZ (Site No. + PIM No.)
XX
: 01-15: Remote Site No.
ZZ
: 00, 01: Physical PIM No.
: 99: AP card
ZZZZ : 0001: Physical PIM No. for 2
PIMs designation
Clear.
Page 109
NOTE:
Set the remote site number assigned

by CM0B Y=00>90.
[For Series 3400/3500/3600/3700 R12.1/

3700 R12.2 software]
Y=8
(1) 00-59: FP/AP No.
XX
ZZ
: 00, 01: Physical PIM No.
: 99: AP card
PIMs designation
Clear.
Page 109
NOTE 2: Set the Remote Site number assigned by CM0B Y=00>90.

Y=8
(1) 00-93: FP/AP No.
XX
ZZ
: 00-15: Physical PIM No./Virtual
PIM No.
: 99: AP card
PIMs designation
: 9931/9915: When accommodating the PRT/CIR card to the remote site with FP/AP No.64-93
Clear.
Page 109
142
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

DESCRIPTION
DATA
CM05
Assign the accommodation type of FP/AP to

the FP/AP number assigned by CM05 Y=0.
INITIAL
Y=6
(1) 00-93: FP/AP No.
(2) 1 : Remote Site
3 : AP card
NOTE 1: When the AP card is accommodated

to the remote site, assign the second
data 1 (Remote Site) and set the
second data 3 (AP card) to the
CM05 Y=7.
Assign the type of FP/AP that is accommodated in the Remote Site.
INITIAL
Y=7
(1) 00-93: FP/AP No.
(2) 0 : Virtual FP
2 : MP built-in FP
3 : AP card
NOTE 1: Be sure to set one MP built-in FP

(second data 2) per remote site.
NOTE 2: To accommodate a DtermIP to remote sites, assign the second data
0 to the FP number of Virtual FP.
NOTE 3: To accommodate an IP-PAD to remote sites, assign the second data
2 to the FP number of MP built-in
FP.
C
143
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

DESCRIPTION
DATA
CM05
Assign the number of port that is controlled by

the MP built-in FP.
INITIAL
Y=3
(1) 00-59: FP No.
(2) 000-128 : Number of port (every 8 port)
NOTE 2
NONE : See the table below.
NOTE 1: This data can be set to the FP number of MP built-in FP.

NOTE 2: Be sure to set the number of port every 8 port. If the setting value of second data cannot be divided by 8, the
value of the remainder is omitted
and not assigned to the FP number.
FP No.
Number of Port
00-03
128
(for MP built-in FP)
04-59
NOTE 3: The port number can be used from

the port number 000 up to the value
set by this command. For example,
when setting the number of ports to
64 by this command, the port number can be used from 000 to 063.
D
144
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

DESCRIPTION
DATA
CM05
NOTE 4: When setting this command for

NEAX IPSDM/IPSDMR, the number
of ports should be assigned in
consideration of the port number for
the virtual LEN as shown below.
For example, when using the
physical LEN up to 00087, the
number of port should be assigned
as 088.
For NEAX IPSDM (6 Slot version)
Physical LEN
(for LT slot)
MC2: 01000-01039
MC1: 00064-00103
MC0: 00000-00039
Virtual LEN
01040-01063
00104-00128
00040-00063
LEN: XXYYY
XX : 00/01 (FP No.)
YYY: 000-128 (Port No.)
For NEAX IPSDMR (6 Slot version)
Physical LEN Virtual LEN
(for LT slot)
MC1: 00064-00103 00104-00128
MC0: 00000-00039 00040-00063
LEN: XXYYY
XX : 00/01 (FP No.)
YYY: 000-128 (Port No.)
For NEAX IPSDM/IPSDMR
(8 Slot version)
Physical LEN Virtual LEN
(for LT slot)
MC1: 00064-00119 00120-00128
MC0: 00000-00055 00056-00063
LEN: XXYYY
XX : 00/01 (FP No.)
YYY: 000-128 (Port No.)
END
145
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

Remote PIM over IP Feature Programming

Remote PIM over IP Link Down Notice Assignment
When the main site and remote site are disconnected due to a fault occurrence, the link down can be notified to the Dterms/DtermIPs that are connected to both sites.
To provide the link down notice with the Dterms/DtermIPs, in addition to the programming of Survival
Mode Assignment, do the following programming.
START
DESCRIPTION
CM90
Assign the Event Occurrence Notice button to

the Dterms/DtermIPs.
NOTE:
CM0B
Assign this data only to the station

number of Dterm/DtermIP that the
link down is notified.
Specify the start time to notify the link down to

the Dterm/DtermIP after the disconnection between main site and remote site is detected.
INITIAL
NOTE:
CM9B
DATA
Assign the shorter time than the time

for automatic changeover to survival mode assigned by CM0B Y=3160>50.
If the longer time is set, the link
down cannot be notified.
Assign the link down notice for Remote PIM

over IP to the Event Occurrence Notice button.
Y=00
(1) My Line No. + , + Key No.
(2) F1364-F1399: Event Occurrence Notice
button No. 01-36
NONE : No data
(1) 52
(2) 00: Not notify the link down
01-99: 0-2970 seconds
seconds.
Y=0
(1) XX ZZ
XX: 01-36: Event Occurrence Notice button No.
ZZ : 01-30: Remote Site No. to be notified
(2) 0 : To notify
1 : Not notified
END
146
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
JULY/01/2006

Time Zone/Daylight Saving Time Data Assignment

To enable remote connection of stations regardless of nation and area with multiple time zone, do the following programming.
START
DESCRIPTION
DATA
CM0B
Assign the Location number to each remote

site.

(1) 40
(2) 00-63: Location No.
CM67
Assign the Time Zone to the location number

assigned by CM0B Y=00>40/CM0B Y=3160>40.
Y=10
(2) Time Zone (See the table below)
NONE : No Time Zone
+15 minute increments
2nd Data
-15 minute increments
Time Zone
2nd Data
Time Zone
A2345
System Clock +23:45
B0015
System Clock -00:15
A2330
System Clock +23:30
B0030
System Clock -00:30
A2315
System Clock +23:15
B0045
System Clock -00:45
A2300
System Clock +23:00
B0100
System Clock -01:00
A0100
System Clock +01:00
B2300
System Clock -23:00
A0045
System Clock +00:45
B2315
System Clock -23:15
A0030
System Clock +00:30
B2330
System Clock -23:30
A0015
System Clock +00:15
B2345
System Clock -23:45
NONE
No Time Zone (No time

difference)
CCC
Time Zone data clear
NOTE 1: System clock should be assigned by CM02.

NOTE 2: After changing the data, office data copy to Remote Site by CMEC Y=8 is required.
Assign the Daylight Saving Time to the location number assigned by CM0B Y=00>40/
CM0B Y=31-60>40.
NOTE:
Y=30
(2) 0: Daylight Saving Time (+1 hour)
NONE : No Daylight Saving Time
After changing the data, office data

copy to Remote Site by CMEC Y=8
is required.
END
147
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm

User Mobility Assignment

In Remote PIM over IP system, when a DtermIP user and DtermIP or only a DtermIP user moves to another
site, in the destination site (visitor site) to use the station number of DtermIP user that had been used in the
original site (home site), do the following programming.
DESCRIPTION
START
CM05
DATA
Assign the number of ports that are used by

visitor station in the visitor site to the Virtual
FP number.
NOTE 1: The Virtual station port for visitor
can be set to only the Virtual FP.
Y=9
(1) 00-59: Virtual FP No.
(2) 000-064 : Number of Virtual Station Ports
for Visitor NOTE 1
NONE : No data
NOTE 2: The number of ports set by this data

are used from the older number port
as the virtual station port for visitor.
For example, when setting the first
data 16 and second data 008, port
number 56-63 of FP number 16 is
used as the virtual station port for
visitor.
CM0B
Assign the location number for stations accommodated in the main site.
NOTE:
For the visitor station in the visitor

site, the location number set by this
data is effective, even if the location
number has been set by CM12
Y=39/50.
Assign the location number for stations accommodated in each remote site.
NOTE:

site, the location number set by this
data is effective, even if the location
Y=39/50.
Y=00
(1) 40
(2) 00-63 : Location No. 00-63
NONE : Location No. 00

(1) 40
(2) 00-63 : Location No. 00-63
148
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm

DESCRIPTION
CM0B
Assign the tenant number for stations accommodated in the main site.
NOTE:
DATA

site, the tenant number set by this
data is effective, even if the tenant
Y=04.
Assign the tenant number for stations accommodated in each remote site.
NOTE:

site, the tenant number set by this
data is effective, even if the tenant
Y=04.
Y=00
(1) 41
(2) 00-63 : Tenant No. 00-63
NONE : Tenant No. 01

(1) 41
(2) 00-63 : Tenant No. 00-63
NONE : Tenant No. 01
END
To read the virtual station port for visitor set by CM05 Y=9, do the following programming.
START
CM14
DESCRIPTION
DATA
Read the virtual station port for visitor.

NOTE 1: When changing/deleting this data
while a DtermIP logs into the visitor
site, WAIT BUSY NOW is displayed.
Change/delete this data, after doing
the logout operation with DtermIP or
clearing the MAC Address by CM12
Y=90.
(1) XX ZZZ: LEN

XX : 00-59: Virtual FP No.
ZZZ: 000-063: Port No. of Virtual PIM
(2) FX-FXXXXXXXX: Station No. for
DtermIP NOTE 1
CF00 : Virtual station port for visitor
NOTE 2
NONE : No data
NOTE 2: Second data CF00 is displayed

when reading the virtual station port
for visitor. You cannot write/clear
this data
END
149
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm

To log out the DtermIP from the visitor site, clear the MAC Address of DtermIP by the following programming.
START
CM12
DESCRIPTION
DATA
Clear the MAC Address of the DtermIP that

logs into the visitor site.
Y=90
(1) X-XXXXXXXX: DtermIP Station No. (ID)
(2) CCC
END
150
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm

ISDN Alternative Routing in Remote PIM Survival Mode

START
DESCRIPTION
DATA
Assign the site number to ISDN Alternative

Routing Site for virtual PS/WLAN station
number in Remote PIM survival mode.
Y=64
(1) X-XXXXXXXX: Virtual PS/WLAN station No. assigned by
CM14
(2) 00
: Main Site
01-30 : Remote Site No. 01-30
NONE : No data
Assign Service Restriction Class A to the required stations.
Y=02
(1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A
CM15
Allow ISDN Alternative Routing in Remote

PIM survival mode.
Y=217
(1) 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02
(2) 0: Allow
CM35
Allow ISDN Alternative Routing in Remote

PIM survival mode when trunk call is received
to the required trunk routes.
Y=276
(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 0: Allow
CM12
Assign a Tenant number to each station.
Y=04
(2) 00
: Tenant No. 00
01 -63: Tenant No. 01-63
CM30
Assign a Tenant number to each trunk.
Y=01
(1) 000-255: Trunk No.
(2) 00
: Tenant No. 00
01 -63: Tenant No. 01-63
CM64
Assign a trunk access code for ISDN Alternative Routing in Remote PIM survival mode.
Y=11
(1) 00-63: Tenant No. of Originating Site assigned by CM12 Y=04/CM30 Y=01
(2) X-XXXX: Trunk Access Code (1-4 digits)
NONE : ISDN Alternative Routing disabled
CM12
151
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
JULY/01/2006

DESCRIPTION
A
CM64
Assign the destination of ISDN Alternative

Routing method to the required tenants.
NOTE:
CME6
DATA
When the 2nd data is set to 0 and

CME6 Y=51 is set to NONE, this
command operates as well as 2nd
data is set to 1.
Y=12
(1) 00-63: Tenant No. of Terminating Site assigned by CM12 Y=04
(2) 0 : Destination station No. of each station
1 : Destination station No. of each tenant
2 : Destination station No. of each tenant
+ Subaddress
3 : ISDN Alternative Routing disabled
Assign the destination of each tenant for ISDN

Alternative Routing in Remote PIM survival
mode if the 2nd data of CM64 Y=12 is set to 1/
2.
Y=13
(1) 00-63: Tenant No. of Terminating Site assigned by CM12 Y=04
(2) X-XXXX: Destination C.O. line number
(Maximum 26 digits)
NONE : No data
Assign the destination of each station for ISDN

Alternative Routing in Remote PIM survival
mode if the 2nd data of CM64 Y=12 is set to 0.
Y=51
(2) X-XXXX: Destination C.O. line number
(Maximum 26 digits)
NONE : No data
NOTE:
When the system operates both

CME6 Y=50 and CME6 Y=51, set
the same number of the 2nd data of
CME6 Y=50 as the 2nd data.
END
152
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
JULY/01/2006

Example of Programming for ISDN Alternative Routing in Remote PIM Survival Mode
The following shows example of data programming for ISDN Alternative Routing in Remote PIM survival
mode.
Outgoing Trunk
Trunk Route No.03
Main Site
(Tenant 01)
Remote Site 1
(Tenant 02)
ISDN Network
DID No.
214-555-1234
CS
PHS
(STN 100)
PRI
TRK=000-022
RT No.01
DID No.
214-555-5000
Outgoing Trunk
Trunk Route No.04
BRI
TRK=100-101
RT No.02
Dterm
CS
Dterm
(STN 300)
IP Network
PS
(STN 400)
DID No.
214-555-4210
DtermIP
(STN 200)
DtermIP
COMMAND
CODE
CM20 Y=0
1ST DATA
2ND DATA
MEANING
803
3 digits station number for the station number first

digit 1
803

digit 2
803

digit 3
803

digit 4
90
101
Route Access (RT=01) for trunk access code 90
91
102
Route Access (RT=02) for trunk access code 91

153
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
JULY/01/2006

COMMAND
CODE
1ST DATA
2ND DATA
300
1515
Service Restriction Class for station No. 300
100
1515
200
1515
400
1515
300
01
Tenant number 01 for station No. 300
100
01
200
02
400
02
100
00
ISDN Alternative Routing Site 00 (Main Site) for

station No. 100
400
01
ISDN Alternative Routing Site 01 (Remote Site 1)

for station No. 400
CM15 Y=217
15
Allow ISDN Alternative Routing
CM30 Y=01
000-022
01
Tenant number 01 for PRI trunk (Main Site)
100
02
Tenant number 02 for BRI trunk (Remote Site)
03
Allow ISDN Alternative Routing for Incoming trunk

route 03
04
Allow ISDN Alternative Routing for Incoming trunk

route 04
01
90
Trunk access code for tenant 01
02
91
Trunk access code for tenant 02
01
Destination station number of each station for tenant

01
02
Destination station number of each tenant +

Subaddress for tenant 02
CM12 Y=02
CM12 Y=04
CM12 Y=64
MEANING
101
CM35 Y=276
CM64 Y=11
CM64 Y=12
154
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
JULY/01/2006

COMMAND
CODE
CM64 Y=13
CME6 Y=51
1ST DATA
2ND DATA
MEANING
01
NONE
02
2145551234
Destination number 2145551234 for tenant 02
300
2145554210
Destination number 2145554210 for station No. 300
100
2145555000
Destination number 2145555000 for station No. 100
No destination for tenant 01
155
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
JULY/01/2006

Remote Site Number Assignment

Assign the following data to each MP card of remote sites.
START
DESCRIPTION
CM0B
Assign the remote site number to each remote

site.
OFF LINE
NOTE:
DATA
Since this data is written to the

Flash ROM of MP card directly, the
data cannot be saved/loaded/verified. But the data can be cleared by
the system data memory all clear.
Y=00
(1) 90
(2) 01-30
: Remote Site No. 01-30 assigned

by CM05 Y=8
NONE : Main Site
END
156
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm

SYSTEM CONSTITUTION DATA ASSIGNMENT

This system constitution data assignment (setting of FP/AP type, controlled PIM by FP) is required to control DtermIPs, IP-PADs, Virtual IPTs in the system without Remote PIM over IP feature.
When setting up the system for the first time, you must clear all system data memory by CM00.
After clearing all system data memory, CM05 Y=0/4/6/8 data is set to the initial data according to the system configuration.
For how to clear the system data memory, see System Data Memory All Clear.
Page 109
Usually, you do not have to assign CM05 Y=0/4/6/8. However if you change the initial data in order to
provide more DtermIPs, assign CM05 Y=0/4/6/8 according to the system constitution.
157
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm

The available value of first data of CM05 (FP/AP number) depends on the software version used in the
system.
Assign the correct FP/AP number to each FP/AP, referring to the tables below.
[For Series 3200 R6.1 software or before]
FP/AP No.
00
01-03
04-15
16-19
20-31
32-59
60-63
FP card (PN-CP15)
MP built-in FP
DAIA/DAID card
AP card
FP/AP TYPE
[For Series 3200 R6.2 software]

FP/AP No.
00
01-03
04-15
16-19
20-31
32-59
60-63
FP card (PN-CP15)
MP built-in FP
AP card
FP/AP TYPE
158
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm

[For Series 3300 software]

FP/AP No.
00
01-03
04-15
16-19
20-31
32-59
60-63
FP card (PN-CP15)
MP built-in FP
AP card
Virtual AP (Virtual IPT/Virtual CSH [For PHS])
Virtual FP for PS Station
FP/AP TYPE
NOTE:
Although FP/AP number marked with is available to use, we recommend FP/AP number
marked with .
159
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm


FP/AP No.
00
01-03
04-15
16-19
20-31
32-59
60-63
FP card (PN-CP15)
MP built-in FP
AP card

[For PHS]/Virtual CSH for
WLAN)
NOTE 3
Virtual FP for PS Station/

Virtual FP for WLAN Station
NOTE 3
FP/AP TYPE
NOTE 2
marked with .
stations or more.
NOTE 3: Virtual CSH for WLAN and Virtual FP for WLAN Station are available for Series 3500 software
or later.
160
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm

START
DESCRIPTION
DATA
CM05
Assign the FP number to the FP (Virtual FP/FP

card/MP built-in FP) or AP number to the AP
(Virtual IPT).
INITIAL
Y=0
(1) 00-59: FP No.
(2) 00
: FP (Virtual FP/FP card/MP builtin FP)
NONE : No data
NOTE 1: To control the DtermIP, assign the

of Virtual FP.
(1) 04-15, 20-59: AP No.

(2) 38
: Virtual IPT
NONE : No data
NOTE 2: To control the IP-PAD, assign the

of FP card/MP built-in FP.
NOTE 3: To control the Virtual IPT, assign the
second data 38 to the AP number
of Virtual IPT
NOTE 4: Two Virtual AP numbers for the virtual IPT can be set to the system.
Assign the Physical PIM/Virtual PIM number
controlled by the FP or the Virtual PIM number that accommodates the Virtual IPT to the
FP/AP number assigned by CM05 Y=0.
INITIAL
Y=4
(1) 00-59: FP/AP No.
(2) 00-15 : Physical PIM/Virtual PIM No.
Clear.
Page 109
NOTE 1: We recommend the setting of PIM

number by CM05 Y=8, when using
Series 3200 R6.2 software or later.
number.
A
161
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm

DESCRIPTION
DATA
CM05
Assign the main site number 00 and the

Physical PIM/Virtual PIM number controlled
by the FP or Virtual PIM number that accommodates the Virtual IPT to the FP/AP number
assigned by CM05 Y=0.
INITIAL
Y=8
(1) 00-59: FP/AP No.
(2) XX ZZ (Site No. + PIM No.)
XX
: 00: Main Site
ZZ
: 00-07: Physical PIM No.
: 99: AP card
Clear.
Page 109
NOTE 1: Set the main site number 00, even

if the system does not provide the
Remote PIM over IP feature.
NOTE 2: When the number of PIM controlled
by FP for Main Site is set to 2 PIMs,
set the second data to NONE.
number.
162
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

DESCRIPTION
DATA
CM05
Assign the accommodation type of the FP/AP

to the FP/AP number assigned by CM05 Y=0.
INITIAL
NOTE 1: To accommodate a DtermIP, assign
the second data 0 to the FP number of Virtual FP.
Y=6
(1) 00-59: FP/AP No.
(2) 0 : Virtual FP/Virtual AP
2 : MP built-in FP
3 : FP card (PN-CP15)/AP card
NOTE 2: To accommodate the IP-PAD, assign

the second data 2 or 3 to the
FP number of FP card/MP built-in
FP.
NOTE 3: To accommodate the Virtual IPT, assign the second data 0 to the AP
number of Virtual IPT.
NOTE 4: To accommodate a PS Virtual station, assign the second data 3
(FP card).
END
163
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
DtermIP DATA ASSIGNMENT

DtermIP station data and DtermIP Login/Logout data is shown below.
DtermIP Station Data Assignment

In addition to the system constitution data for DtermIP, do the following programming.
START
DESCRIPTION
CM14
Assign the DtermIP station number accommodated to the Virtual PIM.

NOTE:
CM12
DATA
To assign the allocation data for the

Virtual PIM by CM14, CM05 Y=4/8
must have been already assigned.
DtermIP station number cannot be
assigned to the Virtual PIM number
unless CM05 Y=4/8 setting.
Specify the kind of DtermIP.

NOTE 1: After changing the second data, pull
out and reconnect the modular connector of the DtermIP.
(1) XX ZZZ
XX : 00-59: FP No.
(2) FX-FXXXXXXXX: DtermIP Station No.
X: 0-9, A (*), B (#)
NONE : No data
Y=24
(2) 0 : 24 Line/Trunk/Feature keys + 8 One
Touch keys
7 : 16 Line/Trunk/Feature keys + 16 One
Touch keys
NOTE 2: Set the second data to 0 (24 Line/

Trunk/Feature keys + 8 One Touch
keys) for DtermSP20/DtermSP30.
CM20
Assign the number of digits for station number.
Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3

(1) X-XXXX: Access Code
(2) 801: 1 digit Station
802: 2 digits Station
CM90
Assign a My Line key on the DtermIP, if required.
Y=00
(2) X-XXXXXXXX: DtermIP Station No.
164
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
DESCRIPTION
DATA
CM93
Assign a Prime Line to the DtermIP.
(1) X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.

CM0B
Assign the port number of the PROTIMS port

(which is NEC original UDP port) to each Virtual FP number.
INITIAL
Y=10
(2) 01024-65534: UDP Base Port No.
NONE
: See below.

NOTE 2: When using Series 3200 R6.2 software or later in the system, assign
the UDP Base Port number with
CM0B Y=11.
Virtual FP No.
00
01
02
03
:
:
31
UDP Base Port No.

50000
50064
50128
50192
:
:
51984
NOTE 3: 64 ports from the UDP Base Port

number you set are assigned to the
Virtual FP number. If no data is set,
the UDP port number is assigned to
No. 50000-51984.
NOTE 4: One port from the UDP Base Port
number you set is assigned to the
Virtual FP number automatically,
when the second data of CM05 Y=6
is set to 1 (Remote Site).
NOTE 5: One UDP port is required to a
DtermIP. Assign the necessary number of UDP port to the Virtual FP
number suitable for the number of
DtermIPs.
B
165
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
DESCRIPTION
DATA
CM0B
Assign the port number of the PROTIMS port

(which is NEC original UDP port) to each Virtual FP number.
INITIAL
NOTE 2: 64 ports from the UDP Base Port
number you set are assigned to the
Virtual FP number. If no data is set,
the UDP port number is assigned to
No. 50000-56336.
Y=11
(2) 01024-65534: UDP Base Port No.
NONE
: See below.
Virtual FP No.
00
01
02
03
:
:
99
UDP Base Port No.

50000
50064
50128
50192
:
:
56336
NOTE 3: One port from the UDP Base Port

number you set is assigned to the
Virtual FP number automatically,
when the second data of CM05 Y=6
is set to 1 (Remote Site).
NOTE 4: One UDP port is required to a
DtermIP. Assign the necessary number of UDP port to the Virtual FP
number suitable for the number of
DtermIPs.
Assign the port number of the Registration Admission Status (RAS) port which is NEC original UDP port for System-based DRS.
INITIAL
NOTE:
Follow the initial data setting usually.
Y=10
(1) 60
(2) 01024-65534: UDP Port No. 102465534
00000-01023: UDP Port No. 3456
NONE
: UDP Port No. 3456
END
166
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
DtermIP Login/Logout Data Assignment

(1)
For DtermIP Login (Automatic Login Mode)

To register the DtermIP ID for Automatic Login mode, do the following programming.
NOTE:
DtermSP20 is registered in Automatic Login mode only.

DESCRIPTION
START
DATA
CM08
Specify the way of ID registration.
(1) 513
(2) 1 : As per CM15 Y=480
CM12
Assign Service Restriction Class C to the required stations.
Y=07
(2) 00-15 : Service Restriction Class C
CM15
Assign the way of ID registration to Service

Restriction Class C assigned by CM12Y=07.
Y=480
(1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class C assigned
by CM12 Y=07
(2) 7 : Automatic Login Mode
(Authentication by MAC Address)
NOTE:
This data is effective only when

CM08>513 is set to 1.
CM2B
Assign the Password for initial setup which is

used for the automatic login mode, if required.
Y=10
(1) 00
(2) Z-ZZZZZZZZ: Password for initial setup
Z: 0-9, A (*), B (#)
CM08
Specify if the system encodes the station number when the DtermIPs log into the network.
(1) 514
(2) 0 : To encode by NEC original method
1 : Not encoded
Specify if the system encodes the password

when the DtermIPs log into the network.
(1) 515
(2) 0 : Not encoded
1 : As per CM08>517
Specify the encoding method of the password.

(1) 517
(2) 0 : MD5
1 : NEC original method
NOTE:
Do not set the 2nd data 0, when the

destination IP terminal does not
support the MD5 encoding.
END
167
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
When replacing the DtermIP which has been set to Automatic Login mode with new one individually,
do the following programming before registering the ID of new DtermIP.
DESCRIPTION
START
CM12
DATA
Clear the authentication by MAC Address of

the DtermIP.
Y=90
(2) CCC
NOTE 1: Execute the system data backup by CMEC Y=6>0: 0 after this data setting.
NOTE 2: You can also clear the authentication by MAC Address of the DtermIP by executing the logout operation. For logout operation, see DtermIP Logout.
Page 187
END
When replacing all DtermIPs which have been set to Automatic Login mode with new ones, do the
following programming.
DESCRIPTION
START
CMEC
DATA

all DtermIPs.
OFF LINE
NOTE:
Y=7
(1) 00
(2) CCC
Execute the system data backup by CMEC Y=6>0:0 after this data setting.
END
168
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
When changing the way of ID registration of a DtermIP from Automatic Login mode to Protected Login mode during the system operation, do the following programming.
START
DESCRIPTION
DATA
CM15

Restriction Class C assigned by CM12 Y=07.
Y=480
by CM12 Y=07
(2) 0: Protected Login Mode
NOTE:
CM12


the DtermIP.
Y=90
(2) CCC
NOTE 1: Execute the system data backup by CMEC Y=6>0: 0 after this data setting.
NOTE 2: You can also clear the authentication by MAC Address of the DtermIP by executing the
Page 187
logout operation, For logout operation, see DtermIP Logout.
END
169
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
JULY/01/2006
(2)
For DtermIP Login (Protected Login Mode)

To register the DtermIP ID for Protected Login mode, do the following programming.
NOTE 1: Register the IDs with Protected Login mode to the DtermIPs that provide User Mobility feature.
NOTE 2: We recommend the Protected Login mode for the login method of the DtermSP30.
START
DESCRIPTION
DATA
CM08
Specify whether the way of ID registration for

all DtermIPs in the system is set to protected login mode or determined by CM15 Y=480.
(1) 513
(2) 0 : Protected Login Mode for All DtermIPs
1 : As per CM15 Y=480
CM12
Y=07
CM15

Y=480
by CM12 Y=07
(2) 0: Protected Login Mode
NOTE:

Allow the login to the visitor site in Service

Y=196
by CM12 Y=07
(2) 0 : Allow
1 : Restricted
CM42
Specify the number of digits for Password.
(1) 73
(2) 01-08 : 1 digit-8 digits
NONE : 4 digits
CM2B
Assign the Password of the DtermIP to the system.
Y=00
(2) Z-ZZZZZZZZ: Password
Z: 0-9, A (*), B (#)
CM08
(1) 514
1 : Not encoded
170
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
DESCRIPTION
A
CM08
DATA

when DtermIPs log into the network.
(1) 515
(2) 0 : Not encoded
1 : As per CM08>517
Specify if the system overrides the DtermIPs

which have the same ID (station number) when
the DtermIPs log into the network.
(1) 516
(2) 0 : To override
1 : Not overridden
NOTE:
Set the second data to 0, when a

DtermIP user moves to visitor site
without the logout operation in User
Mobility feature.

NOTE:
CM20
(1) 517
(2) 0 : MD5

Assign the access code for Password Change.

(2) A231: Password Change
END
171
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
(3)
For DtermIP Login (Fixed Connection Mode)

To register the DtermIP ID for Fixed Connection mode, do the following programming.
DESCRIPTION
START
DATA
CM08
Specify the way of ID registration.
(1) 513
(2) 1 : As per CM15 Y=480
CM12
Y=07
CM15

Y=480
by CM12 Y=07
(2) 1: Fixed Connection Mode
CM42
Specify the number of digits for Password.
(1) 73
(2) 01-08 : 1 digit-8 digits
NONE : 4 digits
CM2B
Assign the Password of the DtermIP to the system.
Y=00
(2) Z-ZZZZZZZZ: Password
Z: 0-9, A (*), B (#)
CM08
(1) 514
1 : Not encoded

when DtermIPs log into the network.
(1) 515
(2) 0 : Not encoded
1 : As per CM08>517
Specify if the system overrides the DtermIPs

which have the same ID (station number) when
the DtermIPs log into the network.
(1) 516
(2) 0 : To override
1 : Not overridden
NOTE:
Set the second data to 0, when a

DtermIP user moves to visitor site
without the logout operation in User
Mobility feature.
172
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
DESCRIPTION
CM08

NOTE:
CM20
DATA

Assign the access code for Password Change.
(1) 517
(2) 0 : MD5

(2) A231: Password Change
END
To register the MAC Address for Fixed Connection Mode automatically, do the following programming after logging in from the terminal.
If this programming is performed after logging in from the terminal, the MAC address of the terminal
is registered to the programming data memory of CM12 Y=92 automatically.
START
DESCRIPTION
DATA
CM12
Assign the MAC Address automatic registration in Fixed Connection Mode.
Y=90
(2) 0
: MAC Address automatic registration in Fixed Connection
Mode
CCC
: Clear
NONE : No data
NOTE 1: MAC Address automatic registration in Fixed Connection Mode should be executed during
the terminal logging in.
NOTE 2: Maximum 256 MAC Addresses can be registered in Fixed Connection Mode.
NOTE 3: This command has to be registered after assigning CM15 Y=480 2nd data 1 and CM2B
Y=00 in Fixed Connection Mode. If you do not that, DATA ERROR is displayed.
NOTE 4: Execute the system data backup by CMEC Y=6>0:0 after this command registered.
When changing this data of terminals accommodated in a remote site, execute the office
data copy by CMEC Y=8 to the remote site.
NOTE 5: Confirm the registered MAC Addresses by CM12 Y=92.
END
173
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
JULY/01/2006
To register the MAC Address for Fixed Connection Mode manually, do the following programming.
START
DESCRIPTION
DATA
CM12
Assign the MAC Address in Fixed Connection

Mode.
Y=92
(2) XXXXXXXXXXXX: MAC Address
(12 digits)
CCC
: Clear
NONE : No data
NOTE 1: Maximum 256 MAC Addresses can be registered in Fixed Connection Mode.
NOTE 2: This command has to be registered after assigning CM15 Y=480 2nd data 1 and CM2B
Y=00 in Fixed Connection Mode. If you do not that, DATA ERROR is displayed.
NOTE 3: When a MAC Address is entered during the terminal logging in wrongly, DATA ERROR
is displayed.
When a MAC Address of the other terminals which is logging in is entered, WAIT, BUSY
NOW is displayed.
NOTE 4: Execute the system data backup by CMEC Y=6>0:0 after this command registered.
When changing this data of terminals accommodated in a remote site, execute the office
data copy by CMEC Y=8 to the remote site.
END
174
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
JULY/01/2006
(4)
Confirmation of DtermIP status and terminal station number

DESCRIPTION
START
CMFA
DATA
Read the DtermIP status.
NOTE:
Y=02
(2) XX...X Z
XX...X: IP Address of DtermIP
Z
: DtermIP status (A/N)
A: Busy
N: Idle
FF
: The terminal is not DtermIP
NONE : DtermIP is logout status/DtermIP
has never been busy
This command is available for all login methods: Automatic Login Mode (Authentication
by MAC Address), Protected Login Mode, and Fixed Connection Mode.
Read the DtermIP Station number registered in

Fixed Connection Mode.
Y=30
(1) 000-255: Block No.
CCC
: Clear
NONE : No data
NOTE 1: This command can read the DtermIP status and terminal station number assigned by CM12
Y=92.
NOTE 2: The MAC Address of the relevant terminal set in CM12 Y=92 is cleared by the 2nd data
CCC.
END
175
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
JULY/01/2006
(5)
For DtermIP Logout (Automatic Login Mode, Protected Login Mode, Fixed Connection Mode)
For the DtermIP users Logout operation, do the following programming.
START
DESCRIPTION
DATA
CM12
Assign Service Restriction Class A to the required DtermIP station.
Y=02
(2) XXZZ
XX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A
CM15
Allow Logout operation in Service Restriction

Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.
Y=143
(1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class A
assigned by CM12 Y=02
(2) 0 : To allow
1 : Not allowed
CM20
Assign the Logout access code.

(2) A239: DtermIP Logout
CM90
Assign the Logout key on the DtermIP if required.
Y=00
(2) F0B39: DtermIP Logout
176
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
JULY/01/2006
DESCRIPTION
CM12
Specify that the Soft Key feature is available to

each DtermIP.
Y=22
(2) 0 : Available
Assign Soft Key Pattern number to each

DtermIP.
Y=23
(2) 0 : Pattern No. 0
1 : Pattern No. 1
2 : Pattern No. 2
3 : Pattern No. 3
Assign the Logout function to the Soft Key of

the DtermIP.
Y=00-03 Soft Key Pattern No. 0-3 assigned

by CM12 Y=23
(1) 01 bb
01: During dialing (Holding no call)
bb: 00-15: Soft Key No.
00-03: Indicated on 1st display
04-07: Indicated on 2nd display
08-11: Indicated on 3rd display
12-15: Indicated on 4th display
(2) F0B39: DtermIP Logout
Assign the characters indicated on the DtermIP,

corresponding to the Soft Key function assigned by CM9A Y=00-03.
Y=10-13 Soft Key Pattern No. 0-3 assigned

by CM12 Y=23
(1) Same as CM9A Y=00-03
(2) Soft Key name indicated on LCD
(Maximum 12 characters)
4C6F676F7574: Logout
CM9A
DATA
END
177
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm

DtermIP SETUP
DtermIP SETUP
Data setting on the DtermIP is required in addition to the system data programming when you start-up a
DtermIP first. Do the following setup after accommodation of DtermIP to the LAN and the system data programming.
When the data server (such as System-based DRS, Network-based DRS on the LAN, DHCP Server, FTP/
TFTP Server, etc.) is used, the DtermIP must be connected to the LAN that accommodates the servers before you follow the procedure below.
WARNING
Do not allow regular (non-NEC trained/authorized) users to set User Menu items and
Administrator Menu items.
DtermIP may not work if information on these menus has been changed without network/
administrator knowledge.
NOTE 1: When using HotDialPAD, do the following setup after invalidating the HotDialPAD function
once or pulling out the LAN cable from the DtermIP.
NOTE 2: When you change only the setting on User Menu items after the DtermIP setup has been completed, do the following STEP 2 through STEP 7, then press Save key (soft key).
When you change only the setting on Administrator Menu items after the DtermIP setup has
been completed, do the following STEP 2, STEP 8 through STEP 11.
STEP1: Connect the AC adapter or inline power patch panel to the DtermIP.
You must wait until either Parameter Missing or DRS Connect Time Out is indicated on
the LCD.
STEP2: Press Hold, Transfer, , # keys in that order.
The User Menu appears on the LCD.
At this time, you can use Up and Down soft keys to scroll the menu indication.
STEP3: Press Hold, #, 0 keys in that order.
The Administrator Menu appears on the LCD.
STEP4: Press 7 key.
The message of Factory Value Set? appears on the LCD.
STEP5: Press OK key (soft key).
178
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm

DtermIP SETUP
STEP6: Press Exit key (soft key).

STEP7: Select the setting item by pressing digit keys, and set the required data. Then press Set key (soft
key). When you press the Set key, the LCD returns to the Menu indication. Repeat settings for
the required items. The following table shows the setting items on the User Menu.
User Menu Items

MENU
No.
INDICATION
SETTING DATA
DESCRIPTION
DHCP Mode
1: DHCP Disable
2: DHCP Enable
Set when the DHCP is not used.

Set when the DHCP is used.
Default: 1 (DHCP Disable)
DRS Address
Primary
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
Enter the IP Address of System-based DRS.

NOTE 1
DRS Address
Secondary
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
Enter the IP Address of System-based DRS. When

no secondary DRS is provided, this setting is not
required.
IP Address
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
Enter the IP Address of the DtermIP.

When DHCP server is provided for the DtermIP, this
setting is not required.
Default Gateway
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
Enter the Default Gateway Address.

When the DHCP server gives the address, or when
no Gateway (no router) is provided, this setting is
not required.
Subnet Mask
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
Enter the Subnet Mask.

When the DHCP server gives the Subnet Mask, or
when no Subnet Mask is required, this setting is not
required.
DNS
1. DNS
Address
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
Enter the IP Address of DNS server when the DNS

server is used.
NOTE 2
2. DNS
Domain
Name
DNS Domain Name
Enter the Domain Name of the DNS server when the

DNS server is used.
3. DRS Name
DRS Name
Enter the Domain Name of the System-based DRS.

179
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm

DtermIP SETUP
User Menu Items

MENU
No.
8
INDICATION
VLAN 1. VLAN
Mode
SETTING DATA
1: Disable
2: Enable
2. VLAN ID
ID 2-4094
3. VLAN
Priority
Priority 0-7
System Information
DESCRIPTION
Set when the VLAN is not used.
Set when the VLAN is used.
NOTE 4
NOTE 3
Enter the VLAN ID.

Default: 7
Enter the Priority of the VLAN.
When the HUB has no function to give the priority
to the packet, no setting is required.
Default: 5
Select when displaying the list of current settings.
NOTE 1: In the Remote PIM over IP system, when a DtermIP is accommodated to a remote site, input the
IP address of the remote site.
NOTE 2: For the IP Address of the DNS server, ask the network administrator.
NOTE 3: Only Tag VLAN is available.
NOTE 4: Do not set the VLAN ID 0 and 1.
STEP8: After you finish setting User Menu items, you can start setting Administrator Menu items.
To display Administrator Menu, stay in the User Menu and press Hold, #, 0 keys in that
order.
At this time, you can use Up and Down soft keys to scroll the menu indication.
STEP9: Select the setting item by pressing digit keys, and set the required data. Then press Set key.
When you press the Set key, the LCD returns to the Menu indication. Repeat settings for the
required items. The following table shows the setting items on the Administrator Menu.
180
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm

DtermIP SETUP
Administrator Menu Items

MENU
No.
1
INDICATION
DtermIP Mode
SETTING DATA
DESCRIPTION
Set when the DtermIP is connected to the HUB/
Router on the LAN.
Set when the DtermIP is connected to the HUB/
Router via Internet/Intranet.
Default: 1 (Normal)
1: Normal
2: Remote
Download Address
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
Enter the TFTP/FTP Server Address when the server

is provided on the LAN.
Area ID
0 : Automatic
1 : Japan
2 : America
3 : Australia
4 : Others
5 : Hong Kong
6 : Malaysia
7 : Singapore
8 : England
9 : Mexico
10: Taiwan
11: New Zealand
12: Korea
13: Brazil
14: China
15: Thailand
16: Thailand (EGAT)
17: Srilanka
Enter your country/area ID.

Default: 0 (Automatic)
Port
1. DRS Mate
Port
1-65535
Enter the DRS Mate port number for System-based

DRS.
Default: 3456
NOTE 1, NOTE 5
2. DRS Self
Port
1024-65535
Enter the DRS Self port number.

Default: 3455
NOTE 1, NOTE 3
3. PROTIMS
Self Port
1024-65534
Enter the PROTIMS Self port number.

Default: 3458
NOTE 1, NOTE 3
4. RTP Self
Port
1024-65472
Enter the RTP (Real-time Transfer Protocol) Self

port number.
Default: 3462
NOTE 1, NOTE 2, NOTE 3
5. Voice Ctrl
Self Port
1024-65535
Enter the Voice Control Self port number.

Default: 4000
NOTE 1, NOTE 3
6. H.245 Self
Port
0, 1024-65504
Enter the H.245 Self port number.

Default: 0
NOTE 1, NOTE 4
181
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm

DtermIP SETUP
Administrator Menu Items

MENU
No.
5
INDICATION
Down
load
SETTING DATA
DESCRIPTION
1. Program
File: ramhPtoP. hex

(Fixed)
Select TFTP or FTP by soft key, for downloading the

DtermIP program.
2. Config
File: config. ini (Fixed)
Select TFTP or FTP by soft key, for downloading the

DtermIP Configuration file.
3. Input File
Name
File: XXXXXXXX
Enter the file name of TFTP/FTP for downloading,

and press its soft key.
Soft Reset
Select for resetting the DtermIP software.
Factory Value
No setting is required.
Type of Service
No setting is required.
Language
NOTE 6 0. English/Japanese
1. Portuguese
2. Spanish
3. French
4. German
5. Italian
6. Dutch
7. Norwegian
8. Danish
9. Swedish
Set the language of the screen.

Default: (Automatic)
NOTE 1: Well-Known port (0-1023) cannot be assigned except for the DRS Mate Port.
NOTE 2: Odd port number cannot be assigned for the RTP Self Port.
NOTE 3: Do not assign the same port number for the DRS Self Port, PROTIMS Self Port, RTP Self Port
and the Voice Ctrl Port. Also DtermIP uses 64 ports from the port that is assigned for the RTP
Self Port. For example, when the port number 3462 was assigned for the RTP Self Port, 64 ports
(3462-3525) will be used. Do not assign the ports between 3462-3525 for DRS Self Port, PROTIMS Self Port and the Voice Ctrl Port. If you assign the wrong port number, the error message
Port Number Duplicate will be displayed after the configuration.
NOTE 4: DtermIP uses 32 ports from the port that is assigned for the H.245 Self Port.
NOTE 5: The DRS Mate port number for System-based DRS is set by CM0B Y=10>60.
Page 166
term75 (Series E) provides the language of 0-3 when used as the IP terminal.
NOTE 6: D
Dterm85 (Series i) provides the language of 0-9 when used as the IP terminal.
182
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm

DtermIP SETUP
STEP10: After setting on the Administrator Menu, with displaying that menu, press Exit key (soft key).
STEP11: Press Save key (soft key).
The data is saved and DtermIP is reset.
The LCD returns to normal condition.
End of setup
183
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm

DtermIP LOGIN/LOGOUT OPERATION

To connect the DtermIP to the network, registration of the ID for each DtermIP is required.
To provide security, passwords for DtermIP can be registered to the system that administers and identifies
the password.
Follow the registration procedure as shown below.
DtermIP Login
NOTE:
(1)
The way of ID registration is determined by CM08>513 and CM15 Y=480.

Before registering the ID, program the system data. See DtermIP Login/Logout Data
Assignment.
Page 167
Automatic Login Mode (Authentication by MAC Address)
NOTE 1: Do the following procedure under On-Line mode of the MP card.

NOTE 2: To save the data registered by the following operation to your PC, select Other from the pulldown menu of the area name and input 80 in Area number on the Save/Load/Verify dialog of
the MATWorX program.
The data cannot be saved by the basic area name All office data for MP (Basic + Option) on
the Save/Load/Verify dialog.
NOTE 3: To load the registered data from your PC, reset the MP card after loading operation of the
MATWorX.
It takes 5 minutes to start up the DtermIP after MP card is reset.
When you start up the DtermIP, the following appears on the LCD.
DtermIP Display (ID Registration without Password)

L o g
P a
w d
C a
n c
:
:
B K
S e
O K
STEP1: Enter the station number of the DtermIP to the first row behind Login :.
STEP2: Press Set key (soft key).
184
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm

STEP3: Enter the password for initial setup to the second row behind Passwd :. NOTE 4
NOTE 4: If no password is set by CM2B Y=10, skip this step.
Time and date appears on the LCD.
STEP5: Repeat the above steps on all DtermIPs of Automatic Login Mode.
STEP6: Execute the system data backup by CMEC Y=6>0: 0.
After the first registration, Login operation is not required.
NOTE 5: If you enter a wrong station number, log out the DtermIP using the DtermIP Logout key assigned
by CM90. After the Login display appears on the LCD, enter the correct station number.
185
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm

(2)
Protected Login Mode/Fixed Connection Mode

When you start up the DtermIP, the following appears on the LCD.
DtermIP Display (ID Registration with Password)

L O G I
P a
w d
C a
n c
:
:
B K
S e
O K
STEP1: Enter the station number of the DtermIP to the first row behind Login :.
STEP2: Press Set key (soft key).
STEP3: Enter the password set by CM2B Y=00 for each DtermIP to the second row behind Passwd :.
Time and date appears on the LCD.
186
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
JULY/01/2006

DtermIP Logout
STEP1: Go off-hook or press Speaker key.
STEP2: Operate either of the following for logout.
Enter the access code assigned by CM20
Press the logout key assigned by CM90
Press the soft key assigned by CM9A
NOTE:
Do not execute the logout operation from the DtermIP in Automatic Login mode for normal operation, except when replacing the DtermIP or changing the way of ID registration of the
DtermIP.
187
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
JULY/01/2006

IP-PAD DATA ASSIGNMENT

In addition to the system constitution data for IP-PAD, do the following programming.
The IP-PAD is required for the following connections.
DtermIP-to-Legacy terminal connection
DtermIP-to-Public Network/Tie Line Network connection
External hold tone connection
Conference Trunk (CFT) connection
Digital Announcement Trunk (DAT) connection
START
DESCRIPTION
DATA
CM0A
Define the LAN Interface of the IP-PAD card.

IP-PAD INITIAL
Y=00
NOTE 1, NOTE 2
(2) XXZ
XX: FP No. 00-59 which accommodates
the IP-PAD
Z : IP-PAD No. 0-3 NOTE 3
NONE : No data
NOTE 1: Maximum 8 LAN Interface number

can be assigned for IP-PAD cards.
Use the LAN Interface number 0015.
NOTE 2: In the Remote PIM over IP system,
maximum 32 LAN Interface number
can be assigned for IP-PAD cards.
LAN Interface number 00-31 can be
used.
NOTE 3: Set the IP-PAD serial number according to the accommodated PIM and slot as follows.
[For PN-32IPLA/PN-32IPLA-A]
When accommodated in odd numbered PIM (PIM1/3/5/7)
PFT
IPPAD
No. 2
LT11
LT10
LT09
LT08
LT07
LT06
LT05
LT04
LT03
LT02
LT01
LT00
VM
PIM
1/3/5/7
IPPAD
No. 3
When accommodated in even numbered PIM (PIM0/2/4/6)
IPPAD
No. 0
IPPAD
No. 1
PFT
MP12/FP12
LT11
LT10
LT09
LT08
LT07
LT06
LT05
LT04
LT03
LT02
LT01
LT00
VM
PIM
0/2/4/6
188
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm

DESCRIPTION
A
CM0A
DATA
[For PN-8IPLA]
When accommodated in odd numbered PIM (PIM1/3/5/7)
PFT
LT11
LT10
LT09
LT08
LT07
LT06
LT05
LT04
LT03
LT02
LT01
LT00
VM
IP-PAD No.3
IP-PAD No.2
PIM
1/3/5/7
When accommodated in even numbered PIM (PIM0/2/4/6)
IP-PAD No.1
IP-PAD No.0
PFT
MP12/FP12
LT11
LT10
LT09
LT08
LT07
LT06
LT05
LT04
LT03
LT02
LT01
LT00
VM
PIM
0/2/4/6
Assign the IP address for the LAN Interface of

the IP-PAD card.
IP-PAD INITIAL
Y=01
(2) 000000000000-255255255255:
IP Address
NONE : No data
Assign the Subnet Mask for the LAN Interface

of the IP-PAD card.
IP-PAD INITIAL
Y=02
(2) 000000000000-255255255255:
Subnet Mask
NONE : No data

IP-PAD INITIAL
Y=03
(2) 000000000000-255255255255:
Default Gateway Address
NONE : No data
Assign the TCP/UDP/RTP port number for the

IP-PAD INITIAL
(1)
(2)

NOTE 2: Set this data when the router or firewall provides the restriction by TCP
port.
Y=10-17 LAN Interface No. 00-07

90: UDP Port for Voice control
01024-65534: UDP Port No.
NONE
: 50000 [50000 (1port is
used)]
NOTE 1, NOTE 2
189
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm

DESCRIPTION
DATA
CM0A
NOTE 3: 1025 ports from the Base port are

used for H.245 control. All ports are
not used simultaneously. Ports
which are not used in the system, are
periodically used in the following
cases per calls (establish of TCP
groups).
Starting Peer-to-Peer connection
DTMF signals
(1) 92: TCP Base Port for H.245 control

(2) 01024-65534: TCP Base Port No.
NONE
: 6000 [6000-7024 (1025
ports are used)]
NOTE 4: The port number to be used for

transmitting/receiving the RTP
packets is used at 10-port intervals
from the Base port set by this command for each channel. Transmitting/receiving the RTP packet uses
the port number adding 1 to the
RTP port number.
For the default settings, port number will be used as shown by the following table.
(1) 93: RTP Base Port for Voice Packet transmitting/receiving

(2) 01024-65534: RTP Base Port No.
NONE
: 10000 [9998-10317 (320
ports are used)]
NOTE 5: Be sure that the port number does

not overlap when assigning the
TCP/UDP/RTP port number for the
CHANNEL No.
PORT No.
00
01
TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING
RTP PACKET No.
10000
10010
RECEIVING RTCP PACKET No.
10001
10011
...
31
10310
...
10311
190
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

DESCRIPTION
DATA
CM10
Assign the IP-PAD data to the required LEN.
[For Series 3200 R6.1 software or before]

(1) 000-763: LEN
(2) DD XZZ
X : 0-7: Card No. of IP-PAD
ZZ: 00-31: Channel No. of IP-PAD
NOTE:
We recommend the setting of IPPAD data by CM14, when using Series 3200 R6.2 software or later.
[For Series 3200 R6.2 software or later]

(1) 000-763: LEN
(2) DD000-DD255: IP-PAD Channel No.
CM14
Assign the IP-PAD channel number to the required LEN.

(1) XX ZZZ: LEN

XX : 00-59: FP No.
ZZZ: 000-127: Port No.
(2) DD000-DD255: IP-PAD Channel No.
NONE
: No data
CME5
Specify the number of IP-PAD channel to be

make busy state to each IP-PAD card.
Y=5
(1) XX ZZ
XX: 00-31: LAN Interface No.
ZZ : 00-31: Number of IP-PAD Channel to
be make busy
(2) 0 : To be make busy
1 : Not to be make busy
CM0A
Assign the card number of IP-PAD for the

IP-PAD INITIAL
Y=50
(2) 0-7: Card No. of IP-PAD assigned by
CM10
NOTE:
Set this data only when the card

number of IP-PAD is set by CM10.
When using Series 3200 R6.2 software or later, this data setting is not
required
191
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

DESCRIPTION
DATA
CM0A
Assign whether the Echo Canceller control is

provided for the LAN Interface of the IP-PAD
card.
IP-PAD INITIAL
Y=21
(2) 0 : Not provided
1 : To provide
NOTE 1: This command is available when

PN-32IPLA/PN-32IPLA-A is used.
For this feature, Series 3200 R6.2
software or before is required.
NOTE 2: Assign the Echo Canceller control
by CM67 Y=03 in the conditions as
follows.
Series 3200 R6.2 software or
later is used.
PN-8IPLA is used.
Assign whether the Non Linear Processor
Control is provided for the LAN interface.
IP-PAD INITIAL
Y=22
(2) 0 : To provide
1 : Not provided
NOTE 1: This command is available when

PN-32IPLA/PN-32IPLA-A is used.
For this feature, Series 3200 R6.2
software or before is required. When
Series 3200 R6.2 or later is used, the
Non Linear Processor Control is always provided.
NOTE 2: Set the second data to 0 usually.
E
192
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

DESCRIPTION
DATA
CM0A
Assign the sending (Origination) side PAD

level for the LAN Interface of the IP-PAD
card.
IP-PAD INITIAL
Y=23
(2) 00-16 : 0 to 16 dB (16 dB Loss)
NONE : 0 dB
NOTE 1: We recommend the setting of PAD

level by CM67 Y=02, when using
NOTE 2: Set the second data in the range of
0 to 14 dB (14 dB Loss), when using
the PN-8IPLA (IP-PAD) card.
Assign the receiving (Destination) side PAD
level for the LAN Interface of the IP-PAD
card.
IP-PAD INITIAL
Y=24
(2) 00-16 : 0 to 16 dB (16 dB Loss)
NONE : 0 dB
NOTE 1: We recommend the setting of PAD

level by CM67 Y=02, when using
NOTE 2: Set the second data in the range of
0 to 14 dB (14 dB Loss), when using
the PN-8IPLA (IP-PAD) card.
F
193
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

DESCRIPTION
DATA
CM0A
Specify the Type of Service (TOS) field precedence for IP-PAD voice and control packets.
IP-PAD INITIAL
Y=29
(2) XZ
X: 0-7 : PRECEDENCE 0-7 for voice
packet
Z: 0-7 : PRECEDENCE 0-7 for control
packet
NONE : 56
NOTE 1: Set the TOS field precedence by

CM67 Y=01, when using Series
3200 R6.2 software or later.
NOTE 2: The priority of PRECEDENCE 0-7 is as follows.

PRECEDENCE 0: Lowest priority
PRECEDENCE 7: Highest priority

NOTE 4: By this data setting, the router recognizes the precedence of control packets and voice
packets and controls Weighted Fair Queuing (WFQ).
Assign the IP-PAD group number to the LAN
Interface number and VCT number. NOTE 1
IP-PAD INITIAL
Y=70
(1) XX Z:
Z : 0-1: VCT No.
(2) 00-31 : IP-PAD Group No.
NONE : IP-PAD Group No. 00
When no 16VCT card is mounted, assign the

way of connection to the PN-32IPLA/PN32IPLA-A (IP-PAD) LAN Interface number.
IP-PAD INITIAL
Y=71
(2) 0 : Restrict the connection of IP-PAD
without 16VCT
1 : Connect with G.711 fixed
NOTE 1: When using the IP-PAD card or IP-PAD channel with CODEC/IP-PAD channel without
CODEC properly to each terminal, set the IP-PAD group number combining with location
number.
NOTE 2: When using the PN-8IPLA (IP-PAD) card, do not set this data.
G
194
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm

DESCRIPTION
DATA
CM0A
Assign the characteristic level to each IP-PAD

channel.
IP-PAD INITIAL
Y=72
(1) XX ZZ:
ZZ : 00-31: IP-PAD Channel No.
(2) 00-07, 10-17: Characteristic level No. 0-7,
10-17 (See the table below)
NONE : No data
Level
Destination Terminal/Trunk (via TDSW)
COT/LDT/DIT/ODT
Single line telephone (including LLC connection)
PRT/BRT
DTI
PS
Dterm/AD-8/Paging equipment/ATTCON (SN708/709/712/741) /SN716

DESKCON
External BGM source/CFT/DAT
IPT
10-17
Fixed allocation to specific Trunk Route/Service Restriction Class
CM35
Assign the trunk route data for the characteristic level No. 10-17
Y=193
(2) 10-17 : Characteristic level No. 10-17
NONE : No data
CM12
When you assign the characteristic level to

each station, assign the Service Restriction
Class C to the required stations.
Y=07
CM15
Assign the characteristic level No. 10-17 to the

Service Restriction Class C assigned by CM12
Y=07.
Y=483
(1) 00-15:Service Restriction Class C assigned
by CM12 Y=07
(2) 10-17 : Characteristic level No. 10-17
NONE : No data
195
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm

DESCRIPTION
DATA
CM0A
Assign the number of channels used in the IPPAD card.

IP-PAD INITIAL
Y=73
(2) 00 : 8-Channel used (8 ports are occupied)
01 : 16-Channel used (16 ports are occupied)
02 : 24-Channel used (24 ports are occupied)
07 : When accommodating only
PN-8IPLA: 8-Channel used (8 ports
are occupied)
When accommodating PN-8IPLA +
PZ-24IPLA: 32-Channel used
(32 ports are occupied)
When accommodating PN-32IPLA/
PN-32IPLA-A: 32-Channel used
(32 ports are occupied)
NOTE:
For the PN-8IPLA card, when setting all channels to be make busy by
this data, the card cannot start up.
196
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm

DESCRIPTION
DATA
CM0A
Specify the threshold of Smooth PAD (limit

function of voice level) to each destination
trunk/terminal via TDSW (characteristic level).
IP-PAD INITIAL
Y=74
(1) XX ZZ
99: All of the LAN Interface No.
ZZ : 00-07, 10-17:Characteristic level No.
0-7, 10-17 (See the table
below)
(2) 00 : Smooth PAD OFF
01 : -8 dBm
02 : -5 dBm
03 : -2 dBm
NONE : See the initial data in the table
below.
Initial Data
Level
PN-8IPLA
COT/LDT/DIT/ODT
-5 dBm
-2 dBm
PRT/BRT
DTI
PS
Dterm/AD-8/Paging equipment/ATTCON (SN708/

709/712/741) /SN716 DESKCON
IPT
10-17
NOTE:
PN-32IPLA/
PN-32IPLA-A
Not available

Follow the initial data settings usually.
197
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm

DESCRIPTION
DATA
CM0A
Specify the DTMF inband mode for the IPPAD (PN-8IPLA).

Y=75
(2) 0 : Inband mode (Voice pass through)
1 : Outband mode (with H.245 UII)
CM67
Assign the IP-PAD group number to the location number assigned by CM12 Y=39, 50/
CM8A Y=5000-5255: 173.
Y=18
(2) 00-31 : IP-PAD Group No. assigned by
CM0A Y=70
NONE : IP-PAD Group No. 00
NOTE 1: This data is available only for the

IP-PAD (PN-32IPLA/PN-32IPLAA).
Specify the priority of the IP-PAD channel to
the location number assigned by CM12 Y=39,
50/CM8A Y=5000-5255: 173.
NOTE 2, NOTE 3
NOTE 1: When no16VCT card is mounted, set
the 2nd data to 00 or 02.
Y=19
(2) 00
: Give priority to IP-PAD channel
without 16VCT
01
: Give priority to IP-PAD channel
with 16VCT
02
: Use only IP-PAD channel without 16VCT
NONE : Use only IP-PAD channel with
16VCT
NOTE 2: When using only PN-8IPLA (IP-PAD) card in the system, follow the initial data setting.
When using PN-8IPLA (IP-PAD) card and PN-32IPLA/PN-32IPLA-A (IP-PAD) card in
the system, you must not set the second data to 02 (use only IP-PAD channel without
16VCT). PN-8IPLA card is equal to the IP-PAD channel with 16 VCT.
K
198
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
OCTOBER/14/2005

K
CM67
DESCRIPTION
DATA
NOTE 3: When using the IP-PAD (PN-32IPLA/PN-32IPLA-A) with CODEC/IP-PAD (PN-32IPLA/

PN-32IPLA-A) without CODEC for the location number of DtermIP or virtual IPT, specify
the IP-PAD group number by CM67 Y=18 and specify the priority of the IP-PAD channel
by CM67 Y=19.
1. Assign the IP-PAD group number for each location number for DtermIP (assigned by
CM12 Y=39) and virtual IPT (assigned by CM8A Y=5XXX>173) by CM67 Y=18.
2. Confirm whether there is an IP-PAD channel that uses 16VCT in the IP-PAD group assigned by CM67 Y=18. Assign the priority of the IP-PAD channel by CM67 Y=19 to
specify the IP-PAD channel automatically.
Give priority to IP-PAD
channel without 16VCT
(CM67 Y=19>00-63:00)
Give priority to IP-PAD

channel with 16VCT
(CM67 Y=19>00-63:01)
Is there
any IP-PAD
channel with
16VCT
in the IPPAD group?
Is there
any IP-PAD
channel without
16VCT
in the IP-PAD
group?
No
Yes
Not use IP-PAD

channel
Is there
any IP-PAD
channel without
16VCT
in the IP-PAD
group?
No
Yes
Use only IP-PAD

channel with 16VCT
(CM67 Y=19>00-63:
NONE)
Is there
any IP-PAD
channel with
16VCT
in the IPPAD group?
No
Yes
Is there
any IP-PAD
channel without
16VCT
in the IPPAD group?
Is there
any IP-PAD
channel with
16VCT
in the IP-PAD
group?
No
No
Yes
Use only IP-PAD

channel without 16VCT
(CM67 Y=19>00-63:02)
Yes
Yes
Use IP-PAD
channel with
16VCT
No
Use IP-PAD
channel without
16VCT
Not use IP-PAD

channel
Use IP-PAD
channel without
16VCT
Use IP-PAD
channel with
16VCT
When all IP-PAD channel are used, the system restricts the connection.
IP-PAD channel will be periodically used from younger number.
L
199
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
OCTOBER/14/2005

DESCRIPTION
DATA
CM41
Assign the DTMF signal width on system basis

for PN-8IPLA.
Y=0
(1) 106
(2) 04-15: 64-240 ms.
(16 ms. increments)
NONE : No data
Assign the DTMF Inter-digit Pause on system

basis for PN-8IPLA.
Y=0
(1) 107
(2) 01: 64 ms.
02: 80 ms.
03: 96 ms.
04: 128 ms.
05: 160 ms.
06: 192 ms.
07: 240 ms.
NONE : No data
Specify the time until IP network between

main site and remote site is reconnected.
Y=0
(1) 108
(2) 00-99: 0-99 seconds
(1 second increment)
NONE : No data
END
Assign the required data to accommodate Legacy Line/Trunk by CM07, CM10, CM14, etc.
NOTE:
When using the 2-line analog trunk (2COT/2LDT/2ODT) to connect to the DtermIP, the PAD
data for 2-line analog trunk must be set as follows.
If the following data is not set, the DtermIP will receive a big echo during the communication.
CM35 Y=19 (1) 00-63 (Trunk Route No.)
(2) 6 (3 dB [Transmit/Receive])
200
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm

CCIS VIRTUAL IPT DATA ASSIGNMENT

Programming Procedure for CCIS Virtual IPT
Programming Procedure for CCIS Virtual IPT

START
Virtual IPT Data Assignment
CCIS Feature Programming
Page 202
NOTE
END
NOTE:
Refer to the CCIS System Manual.
201
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm

Virtual IPT Data Assignment

In addition to the system constitution data for Virtual IPT, do the following programming.
START
DESCRIPTION
DATA
CM14
Assign the trunk number for voice channel and

control channel of Virtual IPT accommodated
to the Virtual PIM.
(1) XX ZZZ
XX : 04-15, 20-59: Virtual AP No.
(2) D000-D254: Trunk No. of Virtual IPT
NOTE 2
NOTE 1: To assign the allocation data for the Virtual PIM by CM14, CM05 Y=4/8 must have been
already assigned. If CM14 is assigned, you cannot clear the setting of CM05 Y=4/8.
NOTE 2: Set the trunk number for control channel of Virtual IPT to one of the trunk number of Virtual IPT (D000-D254) which Circuit Identification Code (CIC) is not set by CM30 Y=35.
A
202
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm

DESCRIPTION
DATA
CM06
Assign an IPT number to the AP number of

Virtual IPT.
INITIAL
Y=07
(1) 0-7: IPT No.
(2) 04-15, 20-31: Virtual AP No. which is set to
the Virtual PIM No. 12 by
CM05 Y=4/8
NOTE:
CM08
CMAA
This data setting is required only for

the Virtual AP number which is set
to the Virtual PIM number 12 by
CM05 Y=4/8.
Allow C.O. to C.O. transfer by station or attendant.
(1) 028
(2) 0: To allow
Specify that Ring Transfer for Call TransferAll Calls to a Virtual IPT is available when a
station holds another station.
(1) 253
(2) 0: Available
Send information about Call Forwarding station through IP network.
(1) 373
(2) 0: To send
Specify the maximum number of dialed digits

sent to IP network.
(1) 379
(2) 0 : 24 digits
1 : 15 digits
Specify whether the AP number is provided

with the control channel.
INITIAL
Y=14
(1) 04-15, 20-31: Virtual AP No.
(2) 0 : Without Control Channel
1 : With Control Channel
NOTE:
This data setting depends on the second data of CM05 Y=4/8.

Set the data as the following combination:
CM05 Y=4/8
2nd data
CMAA Y=14
2nd data
12
13
203
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm

DESCRIPTION
B
CM30
DATA
Assign a trunk route number to each trunk

number for voice channel of Virtual IPT.
NOTE:
Trunk number for control channel of Virtual IPT assigned by CM14 is not required to set
the trunk route number.
Assign a tenant number to each trunk number.
NOTE:
CM35
Y=00
(1) 000-254: Trunk No. assigned by CM14
Y=01
(2) 00, 01 -63: Tenant No.
When the opposite PBX is the 2400 IPX, assign 01 or more for tenant number.
Assign the trunk route data for Virtual IPT

route.
Y=00
(2) 04: Tie Line
Y=04
(2) 2: Answer signal arrives
Y=05
(2) 1 : Release signal arrives
Specify the incoming connection signal as

Wink Start/CCIS.
Y=09
(2) 03: Wink Start/CCIS
Specify the outgoing start condition as Wink

Start/CCIS.
Y=20
(2) 00: Wink Start/CCIS
Provide the Virtual IPT route with No. 7 CCIS

facilities.
Y=90
(2) 0: No. 7 CCIS
Assign the IPT number to each Virtual IPT

route.
Y=91
(2) 0-7: IPT No.
204
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm

DESCRIPTION
CM30
Assign a Circuit Identification Code (CIC) to

each trunk number for voice channel of Virtual
IPT route.
INITIAL
NOTE:
DATA
Y=35
(2) 001-127: CIC
The Circuit Identification Code (CIC) represents a circuit number to designate a trunk (of
each trunk route) used as a voice channel in the No. 7 CCIS network.
Assign this data after setting CM35 Y=90, 91.
CM35
Specify the trunk seizure sequence for Virtual

IPT route.
Y=83
(2) 0 : As per CM08>078
1 : By allotter
CM08
Specify the trunk seizure sequence when

CM35 Y=83 2nd data is set to 0.
(1) 078
(2) 0 : Highest available trunk
1 : Lowest available trunk
CM36
Allow Trunk-to-Trunk Connection with Virtual IPT route.
Y=0
(1) XX ZZ
XX: 00-63: Incoming trunk route
ZZ : 00-63: Outgoing trunk route
(2) 0: Allow
205
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
JUNE/01/2007

DESCRIPTION
DATA
CMA7
Assign a trunk number of Virtual IPT used as

control channel to the IPT number assigned by
CM06 Y=07.
Y=00
(1) 0-7: IPT No.
(2) 000-254: Trunk No. for control channel of
Virtual IPT assigned by CM14
Assign an Original Point Code (OPC) to IPT

number.
INITIAL
Y=01
(1) 0-7: IPT No.
(2) 00001-16367: Original Point Code
NOTE 1: The Originating Point Code is used to designate an originating office in the No. 7 CCIS
network. A single OPC should be assigned to IPT No. 0 and all other Virtual IPTs provided
in the same office.
NOTE 2: Do not change this data while the system is operating. If you do that, the operation of
DtermIPs will be unstable.
NOTE 3: If the own 2000 IPS connects the opposite 2400 IPX Virtual IPT via CCIS when the own
2000 IPS is Remote PIM over IP system, assign the Point Code of the own 2000 IPS larger
than the point code of the opposite 2400 IPX. This restriction is not performed when the
system is not in Remote PIM over IP or the network is configured by only 2000 IPSs.
Example of Point Code assignment
NETWORK CONFIGURATION
POINT CODE
REMARKS
Office A (2000 IPS)
00100
Remote PIM over IP
Office B (2000 IPS)
00110
Remote PIM over IP
Office C (2000 IPS)
00120
Remote PIM over IP
Office D (2400 IPX)
00010
Virtual IPT connection via

CCIS
Office E (2400 IPX)
00020
Virtual IPT connection via

CCIS
206
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
JUNE/01/2007

DESCRIPTION
E
CMA7
DATA
Assign an originating office number to each

IPT number.
NOTE:
Y=06
(1) 0-7: IPT No.
(2) 0-9999: Originating Office No.
This data must be assigned only

when open numbering plan is adopted.
Specify the Type of Service (TOS) field precedence for opposite Virtual IPT control packets.
Y=44
(1) 0-7: IPT No.
(2) 0-7 : PRECEDENCE 0-7
15 : PRECEDENCE 0


PRECEDENCE 6 is recommended.
NOTE 2: By this data setting, the router recognizes the precedence of control packets and controls
Weighted Fair Queuing (WFQ).
NOTE 3: When the router provides DiffServ QoS for the control packet, assign CMA7 Y=50.
Page 208
F
207
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
JUNE/01/2007

DESCRIPTION
DATA
CMA8
Assign the IPT number to the Destination Point

Code (DPC).
(1) 00001-16367: Destination Point Code

(2) 0-7: IPT No.
NOTE 1: The Destination Point Code is used

to designate a terminating office in
the No. 7 CCIS network.
NOTE 2: Assign the DPC by CM8A Y=50005255>168.
Page 210
CMA7
Specify the connection type for Virtual IPTs in

Point-to-Multipoint connection.
Y=46
(1) 0-7: IPT No.
(2) 0: Point-to-Multipoint
Specify the release timer for Virtual IPT in

Point-to-Multipoint connection.
Y=45
(1) 0-7: IPT No.
(2) 000
: 30 seconds
001-127 : 1-127 minutes
(1 minute increment)
NONE : Not released
When the router provides DiffServ QoS, specify the DS code point (DiffServ code point) for
control packet.
Y=50
(1) 0-7: IPT No.
(2) 00-3F: DS code point
NOTE:
When this data is set, the TOS field precedence set by CMA7 Y=44 is ineffective.
If you want to validate the precedence set by CMA7 Y=44, set CCC (data clear) for
CMA7 Y=50.
CM20
Assign the first digit of remote office station

number to LCR Group 3.

(1) X: 1st digit of remote office station No.
(2) A129: LCR Group 3
CM8A
Assign an Area Code Development Pattern

number to LCR Group 3.
Y=A000
(1) 3: LCR Group 3
(2) 4000-4007: Area Code Development Pattern No. 0-7
Assign a Route Pattern number to the first digit

of remote office station number for the Area
Code Development Pattern number assigned
by CM8A Y=A000.
Y=4000-4007 Area Code Development

Pattern No. 0-7
(2) 0000-0255: Route Pattern No. 000-255
208
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
JUNE/01/2007

DESCRIPTION
G
CM8A
DATA
Assign the next Route Pattern number to the

Route Pattern number assigned by CM8A
Y=4000-4007.
NOTE:
This data is required to expand the

order of LCR selection that is assigned by CM8A Y=0000-0255.
The order of LCR selection can be
expand to the maximum seventh.
Specify the order of LCR selection for the

Y=4000-4007.
NOTE:
Y=0000-0255 Route Pattern No. 000-255

(1) 0: Designation of next table
(2) 0000-0255: Next Route Pattern No.000255

(1) 1-4: Order of LCR selection
1: 1st
2: 2nd
3: 3rd
4: 4th
(2) XXX ZZ
XXX: 000-255: LCR Pattern No. 000-255
ZZ : 00-63: Trunk Route No. assigned by
CM30 Y=00.
You cannot assign CM8A Y=0000-0255 1st data 0 (Destination of next table) and 1st data
4 (4th LCR selection) simultaneously. The latest data assignment including system data
memory clear is effective. The other assigned data is set as NONE.
Example:
Y
0000
0001
1ST DATA
0
1
2
3
4
0
1
2
3
4
Destination of next table

1st LCR selection
2nd LCR selection
3rd LCR selection
4th LCR selection
1st LCR selection
2nd LCR selection
3rd LCR selection
4th LCR selection
2ND DATA
0001
00000
00101
00202
NONE (Unavailable)
NONE
00303
00404
00505
00606
ORDER OF LCR
SELECTION
1st LCR selection
2nd LCR selection
3rd LCR selection
4th LCR selection

5th LCR selection
6th LCR selection
7th LCR selection
209
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
JUNE/01/2007

DESCRIPTION
H
CM8A
DATA
Assign the Destination IP Address Pattern

number to the LCR Pattern number.
Y=5000-5255 LCR Pattern No. 000-255

(1) 167: Destination IP Address Pattern
(2) 000-255: IP Address Pattern No.
Assign the Destination Point Code (DPC) for

Virtual IPT.
Y=5000-5255 LCR Pattern No. 000-255

(1) 168: Destination Point Code for Virtual IPT
NOTE:
Do not assign the same DPC to the

plural LCR pattern numbers. If the
same DPC is assigned to the plural
LCR pattern numbers, the CCIS feature such as Outgoing Trunk Queuing-CCIS cannot be used.
Specify the release timer for each opposite office respectively.
NOTE:
Y=5000-5255 LCR Pattern No. 000-255

(1) 171: Release Timer for Virtual IPT
(2) 000
: 30 seconds
001-127 : 1-127 minutes
999
: Not released
NONE : As per CMA7 Y=45
When setting the release timer to each trunk route, set the second data to NONE.
210
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
JUNE/01/2007

DESCRIPTION
I
CM5B
DATA
Assign the Destination IP Address.

NOTE 1: IP address number (00-07) is the
number for specifying the IP address of opposite office which has
plural IP addresses, when the offices are connected with Point-to-Multipoint. If the opposite office has
plural IP addresses, set plural IP
address numbers. If the opposite office has only one IP address such as
2000 IPS, set one IP address number.
Y=01 Destination IP Address for Virtual

IPT
(1) XXX ZZ
XXX: 000-255: IP Address Pattern No.
assigned by CM8A
Y=5000-5255
ZZ : 00-07: IP Address No. 0-7 NOTE 1
(2) 000000000000-255255255255:
Destination IP Address of opposite Virtual
IPT
NOTE 2
Example:When the opposite office is 2400 IPX which has two IP addresses, set the data as shown
below.
1ST DATA
MEANING
00000
IP Address Pattern No.

assigned by CM8A +
IP Address No. 00
IP Address Pattern No.
assigned by CM8A +
IP Address No. 01
CM5B Y=01
00001
2ND DATA
MEANING
10010015150 IP Address of opposite

2400 IPX
10010015151 IP Address of opposite
2400 IPX
NOTE 2: Destination IP Address of opposite

Virtual IPT is the IP Address of opposite 2000 IPS assigned by CM0B
Y=00/02 or the IP Address of opposite 2400 IPX.
NOTE 3: This command should be assigned
from the leading number of 1st data
(IP Address Pattern No. + IP Address No.).
NOTE 4: When providing Alternate Routing
for a fault occurrence for the virtual
IPT, the next IP address number of
the last IP address number that
failed in the connecting has the first
priority to the next call.
J
211
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
JUNE/01/2007

DESCRIPTION
CM85
Specify the maximum number of digits dialed

by the calling party.
The maximum number of digits (including the
area codes) should be assigned to each area
code.
Y=0-7 Area Code Development Pattern

No. 0-7 assigned by CM8A
Y=A000
(2) 01-24 : 1-24 digits
25-79 : 25-79 digits
CM0B
Assign the port number of the TCP server to

the system.
INITIAL
Y=20
(1) 00
(2) 01024-65534: TCP Server Port
No. 1024-65534
00000-01023: 57000
NONE
: 57000
CCC
: Clear
Assign the TCP Client base port number to the

system.
INITIAL
Y=20
(1) 01
(2) 01024-64512: Base Port No. of TCP Client
Port 1024-64512
00000-01023: Controlled with 58000
64513-65534: Controlled with 58000
NONE
: 58000-59023
CCC
: Clear
NOTE:
DATA
1024 ports from the base port number you set are assigned as TCP Client port number.
END
212
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
JUNE/01/2007

To provide the Alternative Routing (another trunk route) for the Virtual IPT when an outgoing call
via the Virtual IPT is not available due to the LAN cable of IP-PAD card is pulled out or a fault occurrence, in addition to Virtual IPT Data Assignment do the following programming.
START
DESCRIPTION
DATA
CM08
Provide the system with the check of the LAN

cable of IP-PAD card is pulled out.
(1) 723
(2) 0 : To provide
1 : Not provided
CM35
Provide the voice channel route of Virtual IPT

with Alternative Routing for a fault
occurrence.
Y=186
(2) 0 : To provide
1 : Not provided
When the outgoing trunk of the tandem office

is Virtual IPT, provide the incoming trunk
route with Alternative Routing for a tandem
call.
Y=192
(2) 0 : To provide
1 : Not provided
CM08
Provide the system with Alternative Routing

of CCIS outgoing call when all outgoing
trunks of tandem office are busy.
(1) 372
(2) 0 : To provide
1 : Not provided
CM41
Set the ORT timer when established tandem

connection to CCIS.
Y=0
(1) 104
(2) 03-99: 03-99 seconds
If no data is set, the default setting is 7 seconds.
CM29
Assign a Numbering Plan Group to each tenant.
(1) 00-63: Tenant No.

(2) 710-713: Numbering Plan Group 0-3
CM20
Assign the access code for LCR Group 0-3.

(2) A126: LCR Group 0
A127: LCR Group 1
A128: LCR Group 2
A129: LCR Group 3
213
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
OCTOBER/14/2005

DESCRIPTION
DATA
CM90
Assign a service feature access key for LCR

Group 0-2 to Dterm, if required.
Y=00
(2) F0A26-F0A28: LCR Group 0-2
CM35
Assign the Area Code Development Pattern

number for maximum digit analysis to each
trunk route.
Y=76
(2) 05-07: Area Code Development Pattern
No. 5-7
CM8A
Assign an Area Code Development Pattern

number to each LCR Group.
Y=A000
(1) 0-3: LCR Group 0-3
(2) 4005-4007: Area Code Development Pattern No. 5-7
Assign a Route Pattern number to each area

code for the Area Code Development Pattern
number assigned by CM8A Y=A000.

Pattern No. 5-7
(1) X...X: Area Code, Maximum 8 digits
(2) 0000-0255: Route Pattern No. 000-255
Assign a LCR Pattern number to each area

code for the Area Code Development Pattern
number assigned by CM8A Y=A000.

Pattern No. 5-7
(1) X...X: Area Code, Maximum 8 digits
(2) 0000-0255: LCR Pattern No. 000-255
For area code deletion, designate the digits to

be not deleted.
Y=5000-5255 LCR Pattern No. 000-255

(1) 152: Deletion of all digits of the area code
assigned by CM8A Y=4005-4007
(2) 1 : Not deleted
Assign the next Route Pattern number to the

Y=4005-4007.

(1) 0: Designation of next table
(2) 0000-0255: Next Route Pattern No. 000255
NOTE:
This data is required to expand the

order of LCR selection that is assigned by CM8A Y=0000-0255.
The order of LCR selection can be
expand to the maximum seventh.
214
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
OCTOBER/14/2005

DESCRIPTION
B
CM8A
DATA
Specify the order of LCR selection for the

Y=4005-4007.
NOTE:

(1) 1-4: Order of LCR Selection
1: 1st
2: 2nd
3: 3rd
4: 4th
(2) XXX ZZ
XXX: 000-255: LCR Pattern No.
ZZ : 00-63: Trunk Route No.
You cannot assign CM8A Y=0000-0255 1st data 0 (Destination of next table) and 1st data
4 (4th LCR selection) simultaneously. The latest data assignment including system data
memory clear is effective. The other assigned data is set as NONE.
Example:
Y
0000
0001
1ST DATA
0
1
2
3
4
0
1
2
3
4
2ND DATA

1st LCR selection
2nd LCR selection
3rd LCR selection
4th LCR selection
1st LCR selection
2nd LCR selection
3rd LCR selection
4th LCR selection
0001
00000
00101
00202
NONE (Unavailable)
NONE
00303
00404
00505
00606
ORDER OF LCR
SELECTION
1st LCR selection
2nd LCR selection
3rd LCR selection
4th LCR selection

5th LCR selection
6th LCR selection
7th LCR selection
CM85
Specify the maximum number of digits to be

dialed by calling party.
The maximum number of digits including the
area codes should be assigned to each area
code.
Y=5-7 Area Code Development Pattern

No. 5-7 assigned by CM8A
Y=A000
(1) X-X...X: Area code dialed, Maximum 8
digits
(2) 01-24 : 1 digit-24 digits
25-79 : 25 digits-79 digits
CMA7
Assign an ACM signal waiting timer after

sending IAI signal in the outgoing calls via
CCIS to IPT number.
Y=10
(1) 0-7: IPT No.
(2) 00-14: 0-28 seconds (2 second increments)
15 : 6 seconds
END
215
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
OCTOBER/14/2005

When the offices connected with the CCIS via the Virtual IPT and if all outgoing trunks of the incoming office are busy, or the MB switch of IP-PAD card is ON/LAN cable of IP-PAD card is pulled
out/all outgoing trunks are make busy condition in the incoming office, or the no answer timer of
outgoing call (T1 timer) time-out occurs, the incoming office can send the busy/fault occurrence
message to the outgoing office. The outgoing office that the message is received can detour the call
via an another trunk route such as CCIS (DTI/CCT) /ISDN.
Outgoing
Office
Busy/Fault
Occurrence/Make Busy
2000 IPS
2000 IPS
Virtual
IPT
TRK
IP Network
PSTN
Incoming
Office
Virtual
IPT
TRK
To provide this detouring feature for the systems, do the following programming to the incoming office.
In outgoing office, program the data for providing the Alternative Routing in advance.
START
CM08
DESCRIPTION
DATA
Provide the system with the check of LAN

cable of IP-PAD card is pulled out.
(1) 723
(2) 0 : To provide
1 : Not provided
216
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
OCTOBER/14/2005

DESCRIPTION
CM08
Provide the system with the alternative routing

when the MB switch of IP-PAD card is ON/
LAN cable of IP-PAD card is pulled out in
incoming office or when all outgoing trunks of
incoming office are make busy condition.
NOTE:
DATA
(1) 624
(2) 0 : To provide (CGC sending)
1 : Not provided (CFL sending)
The make busy condition means

when the MB switch of cards is ON
and CME5 Y=1/Y=5 is set to 0.
Provide the system with the alternative routing

when the no answer timer of outgoing call (T1
timer) time-out occurs.
(1) 666
(2) 0 : To provide (CGC sending)
1 : Not provided (CFL sending)
END
217
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
OCTOBER/14/2005

Sample Programming of Alternate Routing [Series 3200 R6.2 software required]

In the following network configuration, sample programming of each office A, B, and C to office E is
shown below.
In the following network, the terminated call via the private line between office A and office B cannot
make a detour through the private line.
RT=10
PSTN/
GSTN
Office A
PC=1
(2)
Private Line
RT=20
RT=20
(1)
RT=20
(2)
Office B
PC=2
RT=00
(2)
RT=00
1xx
PSTN/
GSTN
RT=10
(1)
2xx
IP Network
(1)
Office C
PC=3
Office D
PC=4
3xx
Office E
PC=5
4xx
Office F
PC=6
5xx
6xx
Sample Programming of Office C

Data
Meaning
CM20 Y=0>5: A129
Access code for LCR Group (3)
CM8A Y=A000>3: 4000
Area Code Development Pattern No. (0)
CM8A Y=4000>5: 0005
Route Pattern No. (005) for the Area Code Development Pattern No.
CM8A Y=0005>1: 00520
Order of LCR selection (1: 1st) for the Route Pattern No.
CM8A Y=0005>2: 00120
Order of LCR selection (2: 2nd) for the Route Pattern No.
CM8A Y=5001>167: 001
Destination IP Address Pattern No. (001) for the LCR Pattern No.
CM8A Y=5001>168: 00001
DPC of Office A (00001)
CM8A Y=5005>167: 005
CM8A Y=5005>168: 00005
DPC of Office E (00005)
CM5B Y=01>00100:
aaabbbcccddd
IP Address of Office A
CM5B Y=01> 00500:

aaabbbcccddd
IP Address of Office E
CM35 Y=186>20: 0
Providing Alternate Routing for the Trunk Route of Virtual IPT (20)
CM35 Y=192>20:0
Providing Alternate Routing for the Trunk Route of IN-side trunk (20)
218
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm

Sample Programming of Office A

Data
Meaning
CM20 Y=0>5: A129
CM8A Y=A000>3: 4000
CM8A Y=4000>5: 0005
CM8A Y=0005>1: 00520
CM8A Y=0005>2: 00010
CM8A Y=5005>167: 005
CM8A Y=5005>168: 00005
CM5B Y=01>00500:
aaabbbcccddd
CM35 Y=186>00: 1
Not providing Alternate Routing for the Trunk Route of Virtual IPT (00)
CM35 Y=186>10: 1
CM35 Y=186>20: 0
CM35 Y=192>00:0
CM35 Y=192>10:1
Not providing Alternate Routing for the Trunk Route of IN-side trunk (10)
CM35 Y=192>20:0
Sample Programming of Office B

Data
Meaning
CM20 Y=0>5: A129
CM8A Y=A000>3: 4000
CM8A Y=4000>5: 0005
CM8A Y=0005>1: 00520
CM8A Y=0005>2: 00010
CM8A Y=5005>167: 005
CM8A Y=5005>168: 00005
CM5B Y=01>00500:
aaabbbcccddd
CM35 Y=186>00: 1
CM35 Y=186>10: 1
CM35 Y=186>20: 0
CM35 Y=192>00:0
CM35 Y=192>10:1
Not providing Alternate Routing for the Trunk Route of IN-side trunk (10)
CM35 Y=192>20:0
219
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm

When the offices connected by CCIS via Virtual IPT are disconnected due to a fault occurrence, the
link down can be notified to the Dterms/DtermIPs that are connected to the offices.
To provide the link down notice with the Dterms/DtermIPs, assign the following data.
START
DESCRIPTION
CM90
Assign the Event Occurrence Notice button to

the Dterm/DtermIP.
NOTE:
CM9B
DATA
Assign this data only to the station

number of Dterm/DtermIP that the
link down is notified.
Assign the link down notice for CCIS to the

Event Occurrence Notice button.
Y=00
(2) F1364-F1399: Event Occurrence Notice
button No. 01-36
NONE
: No data
Y=0
(1) XX ZZ
XX: 01-36: Event Occurrence Notice button No.
ZZ: 00: Link Down Notice for CCIS
(2) 0 : To notify
1 : Not notified
END
220
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm

LOCATION DATA ASSIGNMENT

Location number is the data for administration of the group. Location number can differ from the Tenant
number, Service class or Trunk route.
For example, setting of the following network condition is possible with the combination of location numbers.
The communication speed of the groups connected with station-to-station (group A and group B shown
in the figure below) is 64 Kbps and the other groups connected via IP network (group B and group C shown
in the figure below) is 8 Kbps.
The figure below shows the sample location data for each group (location).
221
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm

Sample Locations
2000 IPS
2000 IPS/
2400 IPX
INTERNET/
INTRANET
(CCIS via IP)
ROUTER
ROUTER
Group A
Location No.: 00
ROUTER
Group B
Location No.: 01
Conditions
Group A and Group B is connected by peer to peer in
the system.
Location number 00/01 has been set to each station in
Group A and Group B by CM12 Y=39/50.
Sample Data
.
.
COMMAND
FIRST
DATA
SECOND
DATA
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
00
00
01
01
02
02
03
03
14
14
0001
0100
0001
0100
0001
0100
0001
0100
00
01
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
0000
0000
01
01
5
5
Group C
Location No.: 02
Conditions
Group B and Group C is connected by CCIS via IP.
Location number 01 has been set to each station in
Group B by CM12 Y=39/50.
Location number 02 has been set to each LCR pattern
by CM8A Y=5000-5255.
Location number 01/02 for the LAN Interface of the IPPAD card has been set to each system by CM0A Y=09.
Sample Data
.
.
.
.
COMMAND
FIRST
DATA
SECOND
DATA
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
00
00
01
01
02
02
03
03
14
0102
0201
0102
0201
0102
0201
0102
0201
01
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
0103
0103
01
01
5
222
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm

NOTE:
Assign the unique location number to each remote site, when system provides the Remote PIM
over IP feature.
START
DESCRIPTION
CM12
Assign the location number for local connection where the DtermIP belongs, to the station
number.
Y=39
(2) 00-63 : Location No. 00-63 for Local
Connection
Assign the location number for remote connection where the DtermIP belongs, to the station
number.
Y=50
(2) 00-63 : Location No. 00-63 for Remote
Connection
NOTE:
CM8A
DtermSP20 does not support the remote connection.
Assign the location number of the group to

each LCR pattern number for the Virtual IPT.
Y=5000-5255 LCR Pattern No. 000-255

(1) 173
(2) 00-63 : Location No. 00-63
Provide the link reconnecting feature between

PC and the system for each LCR Pattern number for the Virtual IPT.
Y=5000-5255 LCR Pattern No. 000-255

(1) 174
(2) 0 : Not provided
3 : To provide
NOTE:
CM0A
DATA
Assign the location number for the LAN Interface of the IP-PAD card.
IP-PAD INITIAL
Y=09
(2) 00-63 : Location No. 00-63
223
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm

DESCRIPTION
A
CM0B
DATA
Assign the location number for all terminals

accommodated in the main site.
NOTE:
The location number set by this data

is effective when the location number has not been set by CM12 Y=39,
50/CM0A Y=09.
Assign the location number for all terminals

accommodated in each remote site.
NOTE:
Y=00
(1) 40
(2) 00-63 : Location No. 00-63

(1) 40
(2) 00-63 : Location No. 00-63
The location number set by this data

is effective when the location number has not been set by CM12 Y=39,
50/CM0A Y=09.
224
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm

DESCRIPTION
DATA
CM67
Specify the CODEC list which is used to negotiate the CODEC type and payload size between location groups to each location number
assigned by CM12 Y=39, 50/CM8A Y=50005255: 173/CM0A Y=09.
Y=00
(1) XXZZ
XX: 00-63: Location No. of group
ZZ : 00-63: Location No. of group
(2) 0-3
: CODEC List 0-3
(As per CM42)
NONE : See below.
CODEC type
Payload size
Priority 1 G.711*
40 ms.
Priority 2 G.729a
40 ms.
Priority 3 G.723.1 (6.3k) 30 ms.
Priority 4 G.723.1 (5.3k) 30 ms.
*A-law/-law depends on the SW2-1 on
PN-CP24-A/PN-CP24-B/PN-CP24-C/
PN-CP24-D/PN-CP27-A/PN-CP27-B or
PROG-A1) on PN-CP31-A/PN-CP31-B/
PN-CP31-C/PN-CP31-D
NOTE 1: This data setting is valid for the

voice packets that are sent to the
group that is set to ZZ in the first
data from the group that is set to
XX in the first data.
NOTE 2: Specify the CODEC type and the
payload size for the location number
of group which DtermSP20/
DtermSP30 belongs. Set the CODEC
list that the CODEC type and the
payload size are set as shown in the
table below (DtermSP20/DtermSP30
does not support the CODEC type
G.723.1).
Do not set the different CODEC list
to the location groups that the voice
packet is sent/received.
*For EU:
A-law/-law depends on CM04 Y=10/1140 and the SW2-1 on PN-CP24-A/PNCP24-B/PN-CP24-C/PN-CP24-D/PNCP27-A/PN-CP27-B or the Key ROM
(SP-3722 IPS KYUS PROG-A1) on PNCP31-A/PN-CP31-B/PN-CP31-C/PNCP31-D
Terminal
CODEC TYPE
PAYLOAD SIZE
(MILLISECONDS)
DtermSP20
G.711
40
G.729a
40
G.711
20/30/40
G.729a
20/30/40
DtermSP30
REMARKS
Fixed to 40 ms.
10 ms. is not available
NOTE 3: The setting of small payload size is effective for the voice quality measures in general, but
the used bandwidth become bigger. Set the payload size considering the available bandwidth in the network.
C
225
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

DESCRIPTION
DATA
CM67
Specify the Type of Service (TOS) field precedence of the control packet and voice packet
for the DtermIP/Virtual IPT/IP-PAD to the location number assigned by CM12 Y=39, 50/
CM8A Y=5000-5255: 173/CM0A Y=09.
Y=01
(1) XX ZZ
(2) X Z
X: 0-7 : PRECEDENCE 0-7 for control
packet NOTE 3
Z: 0-7 : PRECEDENCE 0-7 for voice
packet NOTE 3
NONE : 65
NOTE 1: This data setting is valid to the packets that are sent to the group which
is set to ZZ in the first data from
the group which is set to XX in the
first data.
NOTE 2: The TOS between DtermIPs or
DtermIP and IP-PAD is determined
by this data setting.
NOTE 3: The priority of PRECEDENCE 0-7
is as follows.

NOTE 5: By this data setting, the router recognizes the precedence of control
packet and voice packet and controls Weighted Fair Queuing
(WFQ).
D
226
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
OCTOBER/14/2005

DESCRIPTION
DATA
CM67
Specify the PAD data between location groups

to each location number assigned by CM12
Y=39, 50/CM8A Y=5000-5255: 173/CM0A
Y=09.
Y=02
(1) XXZZ
(2) TTRR
TT (Transmit): 00 -08, 81-88
RR (Receive) : 00 -08, 81-88
NOTE 1: See below.
2nd Data
PAD Data [dB]
00
0 dB
01/81
+2 dB/2 dB
02/82
+4 dB/4 dB
03/83
+6 dB/6 dB
04/84
+8 dB/8 dB
05/85
+10 dB/10 dB
06/86
+12 dB/12 dB
07/87
+14 dB/14 dB
08/88
+16 dB/16 dB
+: Gain
: Loss
NOTE 1: When setting the PAD data for gaining to high value, the echo and
howling may occur.
NOTE 2: This data setting is valid to the
group that is set to XX in the first
data.
NOTE 3: When this data is set to the location number assigned by CM0A Y=09, there are conditions
as follows.
When using the PN-16VCTA-A card, the PAD data setting both of Transmit and Receive is valid, but when using PN-16VCTA card, only the PAD data setting of Receive is valid.
When using no 16VCT card, the PAD data for Transmit and Receive cannot be set
to the gain direction.
The data setting of CM0A Y=23, 24 (PAD level of IP-PAD) is overwritten by this data.
When using the PN-8IPLA (IP-PAD) card, set the second data in the range of 00-07 (0
dB to + 14 dB)/81-87 (-2 dB to -14 dB).
E
227
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
OCTOBER/14/2005

DESCRIPTION
DATA
CM67
Provide the Echo Canceller between location

groups with each location number assigned by
CM12 Y=39, 50/CM8A Y=5000-5255: 173/
CM0A Y=09, if required.
Y=03
(1) XXZZ
(2) 00
: Echo Canceller OFF
01
: Echo Canceller ON
NONE : Echo Canceller ON
NOTE 1: This data setting is valid to the group that is set to XX in the first data.
NOTE 2: When Echo Canceller control for IP-PAD is operated in the system Series 3200 R6.2 or
later is used, this command must be used. The data setting of CM0A Y=21 (Echo Canceller
control for IP-PAD) is invalid.
NOTE 3: When Series 3200 R6.2 or later is used, the Non Linear Processor Control is always provided. The data setting of CM0A Y=22 (NLP control for IP-PAD) is invalid.
Specify the minimum value of jitter buffer between location groups to each location number
NOTE 1: Assign the value which does not exceed the maximum value of jitter
buffer set by CM67 Y=05.
Y=04
(1) XX ZZ
(2) 01-30 : 10 ms.-300 ms.
(10 ms. increments)
NONE : 10 ms.

data.
F
228
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
JULY/01/2006

DESCRIPTION
DATA
CM67
Specify the maximum value of jitter buffer between location groups to each location number
NOTE 1: Assign the value which exceeds the
minimum value of jitter buffer set by
CM67 Y=04.
Y=05
(1) XX ZZ
(2) 01-30 : 10 ms.-300 ms.
(10 ms. increments)
NONE : 300 ms.

data.
NOTE 3: Assign the value which is multiple of
the payload size assigned by CM67
Y=00 to the location number that is
set to the PN-8IPLA (IP-PAD) card.
If the setting value of the second
data is not multiple of the payload
size, the value remaining is omitted
and assigned to the location number
automatically.
Specify the DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) of
control packet and voice packet to each location number assigned by CM12 Y=39, 50/
CM8A Y=5000-5255: 173/CM0A Y=09.
Y=06
(1) XXZZ
(2) XXZZ
XX
: 00-FF: DSCP of control packet
ZZ
: 00-FF: DSCP of voice packet
NONE : C0A0
NOTE 1: This data is required when the system is connected to the router that provides the DiffServ
type QoS function.
NOTE 2: This data setting is valid to the packets that are sent to the group which is set to ZZ in
the first data from the group which is set to XX in the first data.
NOTE 3: The TOS field precedence that is set by CM67 Y=01 is invalid when this data is set.
To be valid the TOS field precedence, set CM67 Y=01 again after this data setting.
G
229
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
JULY/01/2006

DESCRIPTION
G
CM67
DATA
To set the type of tone for each area/country

where the location is set.
NOTE:
Second data 16 to 26 are

available only for EU for Series
3200 R6.2 or later software.
Y=13
(1) 00-63: Location No. assigned by CM12
Y=39, 50
(2) 01: Japan
02: North America
03: Australia
04: A-law countries
05: Hong Kong
06: Malaysia
07: Singapore
08: UK
09: Mexico
10: Taiwan
11: New Zealand
13: China
14: Thailand
15: Brazil
16: Netherlands
17: Germany
18: Italy
19: Austria
20: Belgium
21: Spain
22: Sweden
23: UK
24: Denmark
25: Greece
26: Switzerland
27: South Africa
NONE : Depends on Nation Code
(CM31 Y=0>0)
230
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

DESCRIPTION
DATA
CM67
Specify the Type of Service (TOS) field precedence of the control packet for the DtermIP-tosystem to each location number assigned by
CM12 Y=39, 50.
Y=14
(1) 00-63: Location No. of group
(2) 0-7
: PRECEDENCE 0-7 for control
packet
NONE : 6
NOTE:
The TOS between the DtermIP and

the system is determined by this data
setting.
Specify the DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) of the

control packet for DtermIPs to each location
number assigned by CM12 Y=39, 50.
NOTE:
Y=15
(2) 00-FF : DSCP of control packet for
DtermIP
NONE : C0
The TOS field precedence that is set

by CM67 Y=14 is invalid when this
data is set.
Specify the minimum value of jitter buffer to

each location number assigned by CM12
Y=39/CM8A Y=5000-5255: 173/CM0A
Y=09.
Y=16
(2) 01-30 : 10 ms.-300 ms.
(10 ms. increments)
NONE : 10 ms.
NOTE 1: Assign the value which does not exceed the maximum value of jitter buffer set by CM67
Y=17.
NOTE 2: When using Series 3200 R6.2 software or later, set the minimum value of jitter buffer by
CM67 Y=04.
Specify the maximum value of jitter buffer to
each location number assigned by CM12
Y=39/CM8A Y=5000-5255: 173/CM0A
Y=09.
Y=17
(2) 01-30 : 10 ms.-300 ms.
(10 ms. increments)
NONE : 300 ms.
NOTE 1: Assign the value which exceeds the minimum value of jitter buffer set by CM67 Y=16.
NOTE 2: When using Series 3200 R6.2 software or later, set the maximum value of jitter buffer by
CM67 Y=05.
I
231
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
OCTOBER/14/2005

DESCRIPTION
DATA
CM42
Specify the original CODEC list to the system,

if required.
To provide the original CODEC list, assign the
CODEC type and payload size to CODEC list
0-3.
(1) 100-103: Priority 1-4 in CODEC list 0

120-123: Priority 1-4 in CODEC list 1
(2) 01: G.711 -law 64k
02: G.711 A-law 64k
03: G.723.1 (5.3/6.3k)
04: G.729a
NONE : No data
(1) 110-113: Priority 1-4 in CODEC list 0
(2) 01-04: 10 ms.-40 ms. NOTE 1
NONE : Depends on CODEC type
(40 ms. [G.711]/
30 ms. [G.723.1]/
10 ms. [G.729a])
NOTE 1: The following payload size can be assigned for each CODEC type.
G.711 : 10 ms./20 ms./30 ms./40 ms. (Initial: 40 ms.)
G.723.1 : 30 ms. fixed (Initial: 30 ms.)
G.729a : 10 ms./20 ms./30 ms./40 ms. (Initial: 10 ms.)
NOTE 2: When no 16VCT card is mounted, the CODEC type is fixed to G.711 and the payload size
is fixed to 40 ms.
J
232
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
JULY/01/2006

DESCRIPTION
J
CM42
DATA
NOTE 3: Set the CODEC list (combination of CODEC type and payload size) as shown below to the
location group which DtermSP20/DtermSP30 belongs (DtermSP20/DtermSP30 does not support the CODEC type G.723.1).
Terminal
CODEC TYPE
PAYLOAD SIZE
(MILLISECONDS)
DtermSP20
G.711
40
G.729a
40
G.711
20/30/40
G.729a
20/30/40
DtermSP30
REMARKS
Fixed to 40 ms.
10 ms. is not available
NOTE 4: The maximum number of voice channels per IP-PAD is based on the payload size as shown
below.
For PN-32IPLA/PN-32IPLA-A+PN-16VCTA/PN-16VCTA-A
PAYLOAD
SIZE
MAXIMUM NUMBER OF VOICE

CHANNELS PER IP-PAD
G.729a
G.711
G.723.1
10 ms.
12
12
20 ms.
20
20
30 ms.
30
30
24
40 ms.
32
32
When no 16 VCT card is mounted, the CODEC type is fixed to G.711 and the payload size
is fixed to 40 ms.
K
233
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
OCTOBER/14/2005

K
CM42
DESCRIPTION
DATA
For PN-8IPLA+PZ-24IPLA
PAYLOAD
SIZE
MAXIMUM NUMBER OF VOICE

CHANNELS PER IP-PAD
G.729a
G.711
G.723.1
10 ms.
20
20
20 ms.
32
32
30 ms.
32
32
24
40 ms.
32
32
When only PN-8IPLA card is mounted, the maximum number of voice channels per IPPAD is fixed to 8-channel.
NOTE 5: When the payload size setting differs from that for the opposite IP-PAD, the shorter size is
adopted.
END
234
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3001.fm
OCTOBER/14/2005

IP FEATURE PROGRAMMING
Automatic Program Download for IP Enabled Dterm/DtermIP

Bandwidth Control
Page 245
Page 250
FAX over IP
Page 259
Modem over IP
Page 270
SNMP
Page 277
Terminal Login via NAT
Page 292
235
Page 236
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm
JANUARY/20/2006

Automatic Program Download for IP Enabled Dterm/DtermIP

General Description
This feature provides the method to download the latest firmware program of IP Enabled Dterm/DtermIP
from the FTP/TFTP server automatically by system programming. The following three patterns of program download are available.
Program Download at Appointed Time
At the appointed time set by CM43 Y=6>00, the system reads the firmware version of IP Enabled
Dterm/DtermIP automatically and downloads the firmware program to the required IP Enabled Dterm/
DtermIP.
Program Download at Login Time
When the IP Enabled Dterms/DtermIPs log in to the system, the system reads the firmware version of
them automatically and downloads the firmware program to the required IP Enabled Dterm/DtermIP.
Program Download for Designated Terminal
The system reads the firmware version of the designated IP Enabled Dterms/DtermIPs automatically
and downloads the firmware program to them if required.
Station Application
Dterm75 (Series E)/Dterm85 (Series i) Terminals with LCD equipped for IP Adapter units (Peer-to-Peer version), DtermIP, DtermIP INASET, DtermSP20/DtermSP30.
Service Conditions
1. For program download, the FTP or TFTP server is required.
2. This service is available for the IP Enabled Dterm/DtermIP with Peer-to-Peer connections. Terminals
with IPELC connections are not supported.
3. Maximum of four terminals can be downloaded at the same time regardless of the type of download.
4. Firmware version filed in FTP/TFTP server is assigned by the system data (CM0C Y=00-07>02).
When the latest firmware version is filed in the server, be sure to update the system data.
5. When the FTP/TFTP server is used for program download, login from the IP Enabled Dterm/DtermIP
with a login name "anonymous" and password "2000 IPS" (authentication by FTP server is
required).
6. Conditions on Program Download at Appointed Time
a. Program Download at Appointed Time service is available by the system data assignment (CM15
Y=482) on a station class of service basis.
b. By the same command mentioned above, program download can be retried just one time. When
the download results in failure two times in succession, the IP Enabled Dterm/DtermIP operates with
previous firmware.
236
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm

7.
8.
c. When this service is executed, neither Program Download at Login Time nor Program Download
for Designated Terminal can be executed.
d. PBX system checks the firmware version of each terminal starting from the terminal with the
smallest LEN, and execute this service if required.
e. This service is executed only for the idle terminals. This service is not executed for the terminals
in Logout or busy status.
f. The actual starting time of the Program Download at Appointed Time may be varied with a range
of +/-1 minute. When 448 of IP Enabled Dterm/DtermIP have to be upgraded, for example, it takes
about 225 minutes to be completed, without retry.
g. CMFA Y=50>01/02 counts the number of terminals that are successfully downloaded and the
number of terminals that result in download failure only when the PBX sends the latest program
download message to the terminals. During executing the download, Downloading... is
displayed on the LCD of a terminal.
After the download is finished (it takes three minutes to download the firmware per terminal), the
LCD of a terminal returns to the time display automatically.
h. Program Download at Appointed Time can be suspended by CMFA Y=50>00:CCC (clear) during
executing the download. However, you cannot suspend the download of the terminal with
"Downloading..." displayed.
Conditions on Program Download at Login Time
a. Program Download at Login Time service can be assigned on a system basis by CM0C Y=90>02.
b. When this service is assigned, retry in download failure status is not available.
c. During executing the download, Downloading... is displayed on the LCD of a terminal.
Conditions on Program Download for Designated Terminals
a. Program Download for Designated Terminals is assigned and executed on the Primary station
number basis.
b. This service is executed only for idle terminals. This service is not executed for the terminals in
Logout status.
c. When this service is assigned, retry in download failure status is not available.
d. During executing the download, Downloading... is displayed on the LCD of a terminal.
237
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm

Programming
(1) FTP/TFTP Server information setting
START
DESCRIPTION
DATA
CM0C
Specify the firmware in the FTP/TFTP server

to update the DtermIPs firmware.
Y=00-07 Update Information Profile No.

00-07
(1) 00: Type of Firmware for Update
(2) 00: DtermIP (IP Adapter Type) Firmware/
Dterm75 (Series E) with IP adapter
Firmware
03: Dterm85 (Series i) with IP adapter Firmware
05: DtermIP (IP Bundled Type) Firmware
NONE : No data
Specify the file version of the firmware in the

FTP/TFTP server.

00-07
(1) 02: Firmware File version for Update
(2) XX ZZ
XX: 00-99: Integral No. of file version
ZZ : 00-99: Two decimals No. of file version
NONE : No data
NOTE:
If no data is set, the system does not

update the firmware of DtermIPs.
Assign the IP Address for the FTP/TFTP server.

00-07
(1) 04: IP Address for Server
(2) 000000000000-255255255255:
IP Address for the FTP/TFTP server
NONE : No data
238
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm

DESCRIPTION
A
CM0C
DATA
Specify the protocol of the server.
NOTE:

00-07
(1) 05: Protocol of Server
(2) 0 : FTP
1 : TFTP
When using the TFTP/FTP server, allow the PBX to access the server with anonymity, and
set the following information to the TFTP/FTP server if required.
Login Name/Password
Login Name
TFTP Server
FTP Server
anonymous
anonymous
Password
2000IPS
And the default directory/default file name for each DtermIP is as shown below.
Leave the default directory/default file name as it is.
TFTP Server
(Default File Name)
Type of DtermIP
DtermIP (IP Adapter Type)/
Dterm75 (Series E) with IP
adapter
ramhptop.hex
/IPW2U/ramhptop.hex
Dterm85 (Series i) with IP

adapter
ramhp2pr.hex
/IPR/ramhp2pr.hex
DtermIP (IP Bundled Type)
ramhp2pw.out
/IPRU/ramhp2pw.out
Specify the firmware condition to update

DtermIPs.
NOTE:
FTP Server
(Default Directory +
Default File Name)
Y=90
(1) 01: Firmware Condition for Update
(2) 0 : To update when the file version of the
DtermIPs firmware is not same as the
file version of the firmware in the
server
1 : To update when the file version of the
DtermIPs firmware is older than the
file version of the firmware in the
server
END
239
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm

(2)
Setting for automatic update

(a) To update the firmware of DtermIPs automatically at the predetermined time:
START
DESCRIPTION
DATA
CM43
Specify the start time for automatic update.
Y=6
(1) 00: Start time for automatic update
(2) YYYY MM DD HH mm
YYYY: 2000-2099 (Year)
MM : 01-12 (Month)
DD : 01-31 (Date)
HH : 00-23 (Hour)
mm : 00-59 (Minutes)
NONE : Not to update the firmware of
DtermIPs automatically at the
predetermined time
CM12
Y=07
CM15
Allow the automatic updating at the predetermined time in Service Restriction Class C assigned by CM12 Y=07, and specify if the
system executes the updating again when the
system fails to update at the predetermined
time.
Y=482
(1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class C
(2) 0 : Allow and to update again
1 : Allow and to update only once
2 : Restrict
END
240
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm

To read the status of the automatic update at the predetermined time:

START
DESCRIPTION
DATA
CMFA
Read the status of the automatic update at the

predetermined time.
Y=50
(1) 00
(2) 00 : Not started
01 : Now updating
10 : Completed
CCC: Interrupt updating/Reset count data
NOTE:
If you type the second data CCC, the count data which can be read by CMFA Y=50>01/
02 is cleared.
Read the number of terminal that succeeded in

updating.
Y=50
(1) 01
(2) XXX: Number of terminal that succeeded
in updating
Read the number of terminal that failed in updating.
Y=50
(1) 02
(2) XXX: Number of terminal that failed in updating
END
241
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm

(b) To update the firmware of DtermIPs automatically when DtermIPs log in the system:
DESCRIPTION
START
CM0C
DATA
Provide the automatic update when DtermIPs

log in the system for the system.
NOTE:
Set the second data to 1, after the

DtermIPs firmware is updated.
Y=90
(1) 02
(2) 0 : To provide
1 : Not provided
END
242
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm

(c) To update the firmware of the DtermIP which you specified:

DESCRIPTION
START
CM0C
DATA
Specify the DtermIP to be updated, then execute the firmware updating.
Y=50
(2) 0: Start updating
After setting the first data and second data, MAT/CAT displays the status of the DtermIP. The table
below shows the contents of the display and its meaning.
FIRST
DATA
DtermIP STATUS
DISPLAY
XX ZZ
MEANING
Current firmware version of the DtermIP
SECOND
DATA
0: Start updating
XX: 00-09: Integral

No.
ZZ : 00-09: Two decimals No.
XXXXXXXXX:
DtermIP Station
No.
DATA
ERROR
The DtermIP is logout

status/The terminal is
not IP terminal
WAIT,
BUSY
NOW
The DtermIP is updated

now/The DtermIP is
busy
DtermIP STATUS
DISPLAY
MEANING
OK
Start updating
DATA
NOT
FOUND
You cannot update the

DtermIPs firmware
because the FTP/TFTP
server information data
has not been assigned
NOTE 1
WAIT,
BUSY
NOW
You cannot update the

DtermIPs firmware
because other four
DtermIPs in the system
are updated now
NOTE 2
You cannot update the DtermIPs firmware
NOTE 1: Set this data after setting CM0C Y=00-07>00-05.

NOTE 2: Maximum four DtermIPs can be updated at the same time in a system. Set this data after
other four DtermIPs are updated.
END
243
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm

(3)
To read the DtermIP information:
START
CMFA
DESCRIPTION
DATA
Read the firmware information such as SP

number and firmware version of the DtermIP.
Y=00
(2) XXXX YY ZZ
XXXX: SP No.
YY : Integral No. of firmware version
ZZ
: Two decimals No. of firmware
version
Read the type of the DtermIP.
Y=01
(2) 00 : DtermIP (IP Adapter Type)/
Dterm75 (Series E) with IP adapter
03 : Dterm85 (Series i) with IP adapter
05 : DtermIP (IP Bundled Type)
FF: The terminal is not IP terminal
NONE : DtermIP is logout status
END
Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
244
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm

Bandwidth Control
General Description
This feature allows to assign an available bandwidth threshold for VoIP traffic within a Location and between Locations, and to restrict outgoing/incoming calls when the VoIP traffic exceeds the threshold.
The Location is a group of VoIP devices (IP Enabled Dterm, IP-PAD, or Peer-to-Peer IP trunks [built-in IP
trunks]), which the same VoIP communications parameters such as codec selection list and ToS field value
are assigned.
When the VoIP traffic over CCIS exceeds the threshold, the call can be routed to legacy trunks (TDM network).
When exceeding the threshold, the system can store fault information and provide external alarm indication.
Station Application
Not applicable
Service Conditions
1. Two kinds of threshold can be assigned on a Location-to-Location basis by system programming.
Limit Threshold : Maximum bandwidth available for VoIP traffic.
When the traffic exceeds this threshold, the later calls are restricted within
that Location or between those Locations.
In case of CCIS calls over IP network, the calls can be routed to the legacy
trunks (TDM network).
Warning Threshold: This threshold should be assigned lower than the Limit Threshold, and can be
used for providing alarm information before reaching the Limit Threshold.
2. Each threshold can be assigned on a Location-to-Location basis.
3. Maximum 65534 Kbps can be assigned for each threshold on a 1 Kbps increment. If no data is assigned, 100 Mbps is assigned (default data).
4. The following parameters can be recorded as peg count on a Location-to-Location basis.
a. The number exceeding the Limit Threshold
b. The number exceeding the Warning Threshold
c. Maximum bandwidth actually used
d. The bandwidth currently used
5. The bandwidth managed by this feature is that of voice packets for Peer-to-Peer connections only.
The data packets for control signals of IP Enabled Dterm, CCIS and MAT are not supported by this
feature. The bandwidth of the voice packets for each call is defined by the combination of voice encoding type and payload size as follows.
245
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm

Bandwidth of voice packets for each call (Both way)
Type of Voice Encoding
Payload Size (ms.)

10
20
30
40
G.711 (64 Kbps)
192 Kbps
160 Kbps
147.4 Kbps
144 Kbps
G.729a (8 Kbps)
80 Kbps
48 Kbps
37.4 Kbps
32 Kbps
34.2 Kbps
G.723.1 (6.3/5.3 Kbps)

NOTE:
The bandwidth for G.723.1 is defined by which the voice encoding uses 6.3 Kbps.
The system counts the bandwidth for each call based on the above table whenever the call is established, and the system deletes the bandwidth when the call is released.
6. When an outgoing/incoming call is attempted, and the voice encoding type and payload size between
the Locations is not determined yet, the bandwidth for the call is temporarily determined based on the
primary value in the CODEC list in the system. The system counts that temporary bandwidth.
7. When the call is established and the voice encoding type and payload size actually used are informed
from the corresponding terminal, the system deletes the temporary bandwidth determined by #6
above and counts the bandwidth based on the voice encoding type and payload size actually used.
In case of CCIS calls over IP network with Peer-to-Peer connections, the system maintains the bandwidth determined based on the primary value of the CODEC list in the system, as mentioned #6
above.
8. There are following conditions when the Limit Threshold is exceeded.
a. When an outgoing call is attempted and an answering party can be specified, the call is restricted
when calling.
b. When an outgoing call is attempted but an answering party cannot be specified, the call is restricted after answered.
c. The bandwidth for a call on hold is not maintained.
d. When a held call is restricted from a different party from the party initiating hold and the Limit
Threshold is exceeded, the retrieving the call is restricted and the both parties will receive reorder
tone.
e. When a call is terminated to a Multiline group, the system will check the bandwidth for My Line
only. Therefore, when the call is answered by Sub line and the Limit Threshold is exceeded, the
call is restricted and the calling and called party will receive reorder tone.
9. When the occupied bandwidth exceeds the Limit Threshold or Warning Threshold, fault information
can be recorded and/or an external alarm indication can be provided by system data assignment.
10. The default alarm type when exceeding each threshold is as follows.
Limit Threshold is exceeded : MJ alarm
Warning Threshold is exceeded : MN alarm
246
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm

11. Once the fault information is recorded, the fault information is not recorded until the fault restoration
information is recorded by #10, even if the occupied bandwidth exceeds each threshold again. However, the number exceeding each threshold is recorded as peg count whenever each threshold is exceeded.
12. When the occupied bandwidth decreases till 0 % after exceeding each threshold, fault restoration information is recorded.
13. Fault information can be recorded or not on a system basis, not on a Location-to-Location basis. The
fault information provides the calling and called Location numbers which exceeds each threshold.
14. Whether the call is restricted or not, when the Limit Threshold is exceeded, is assigned on a Locationto-Location basis by system programming.
15. When a call is restricted at originating the call, the calling party will hear reorder tone.
16. When a call is restricted at answering the call, both calling and called party will hear reorder tone.
17 When a call is restricted by this feature, no LCD indiction is provided such as RST.
18. When an incoming CCIS call over IP network is restricted, the calling party will receive reorder tone.
19. When a CCIS call over IP network is restricted, the call can be routed to a legacy trunk route (TDM
network).
Programming
START
DESCRIPTION
DATA
CM67
Specify the limit bandwidth for the traffic between location groups to each location number
Y=90
(1) XX ZZ
(2) 00000-65534: 0 Kbps-65534 Kbps
NOTE 1
NONE
: 100000 Kbps (100 Mbps)
NOTE 1: Set the bandwidth for voice packets. The available bandwidth minus the bandwidth for
control packets (40 Kbps) is the bandwidth for voice packets.
If the reflection speed of terminals such as button reflection becomes slower by setting the
value above-mentioned, set the bandwidth for voice packets to the value with the bandwidth for control packets supposed as more than 40 Kbps.
NOTE 2: Assign the value that exceeds the warning bandwidth set by CM67 Y=92.
A
247
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm
OCTOBER/14/2005

DESCRIPTION
DATA
CM67
Specify the action when the traffic between location groups exceeds the limit bandwidth assigned by CM67 Y=90.
Y=91
(1) XX ZZ
(2) 0 : Restrict the connection between location groups
3 : Keep the connection between location
groups
Specify the warning bandwidth for the traffic

between location groups to each location number assigned by CM12 Y=39, 50/CM8A
Y=5000-5255: 173/CM0A Y=09.
Y=92
(1) XX ZZ
ZZ: 00-63: Location No. of group
(2) 00000-65534: 0 Kbps-65534 Kbps
NONE
: 100000 Kbps (100 Mbps)
NOTE:
CMEA
Assign the value which does not exceed the limit bandwidth set by CM67 Y=90.
Specify if the fault information is stored into

the memory, and the external alarm kind.
Y=2
(1) 40: Traffic of IP network exceeded limit
bandwidth (Standard data: MJ)
41: Traffic of IP network exceeded warning
bandwidth (Standard data: MN)
50: Traffic of IP network returned to normal condition from limit bandwidth excess (Standard data: --)
51: Traffic of IP network retuned to normal
condition from warning bandwidth excess (Standard data: --)
: Fault memory store/No output of
(2) 0
external alarm
1
: Fault memory store/External
alarm is MN alarm
2
alarm is MJ alarm
3
alarm kind is determined by
standard data
NONE : No fault memory store/No external alarm output
END
248
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm
OCTOBER/14/2005

To read/clear the PEG count, do the following programming.

When reading/clearing the PEG count between location groups that exceeded the limit bandwidth
ST + B400 + DE + 00-63 (location number of sending side) +
00-63 (location number of receiving side) + DE + CCC + EXE
When clearing the PEG counts of all location groups that exceeded the limit bandwidth
ST + B400 + DE + 9999 + DE + CCC + EXE
When reading/clearing the PEG count between location groups that exceeded the warning bandwidth
When clearing the PEG counts of all location groups that exceeded the warning bandwidth
ST + B401 + DE + 9999 + DE + CCC + EXE
NOTE:
The PEG count of 0-49999 can be stored to the system. If the PEG count exceeds 49999, the
system counts it from 0.
To read/clear the bandwidth, do the following programming.

When reading/clearing the maximum bandwidth between location groups
When clearing the maximum bandwidth of all location groups in the system
ST + B402 + DE + 9999 + DE + CCC + EXE
When reading/clearing the bandwidth that are used now
When clearing all bandwidth that are used now
ST + B403 + DE + 9999 + DE + CCC + EXE
NOTE:
The bandwidth of 0-1677721 Kbps can be displayed on MAT/CAT. Even if the bandwidth exceeds 1677721 Kbps, MAT/CAT displays the bandwidth 1677721 Kbps.
Operating Procedure
249
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm


General Description
This feature allows a call terminated to a DtermIP in logout status to be forwarded to a predesignated station, outside number, Attendant Console or Digital Announcement Trunk (DAT). This feature is also applicable to the DtermIPs that the LAN cable is pulled out or the power is off.
Station Application
Dterm75 (Series E)/Dterm85 (Series i) Terminals with LCD equipped for IP Adapter units (Peer-to-Peer version), DtermIP, DtermIP INASET, DtermSP20/DtermSP30.
Service Conditions
1. This feature is effective when a DtermIP is in the following logout conditions.
When the DtermIP is logged out by Logout Feature Access Code.
When Login Dialog is displayed on the DtermIP.
When Connecting..... is displayed on a DtermIP.
When the DtermIP is in the Configuration mode (When the DtermIP is in the Configuration mode
for more than two minutes, the DtermIP is to be Logout status).
When the DtermIP is reset by pulling out the LAN cable (When the LAN cable is pulled out for
more than two minutes, the DtermIP is automatically reset).
When the power of the DtermIP is OFF.
When the PBX system is reset by power failure or other reasons.
2. When a DtermIP is in a Logout status, calls cannot be terminated to the sublines on that DtermIP.
3. When a DtermIP in a Logout status is in a multiline group, a call to that DtermIP cannot ring other stations in that multiline group.
4. A call forwarding destination can be a station, a Voice Mail System, an outside number, an Attendant
Console, and a Digital Announcement Trunk (DAT).
5. When the call forwarding destination is a station, an outside number or an Attendant Console, this
feature can be set by dialing Call Forwarding-Logout Feature Access/Cancellation Code or data assignment from a MAT/CAT. Setting by Feature Access Key is not supported.
6. When the call forwarding destination is an outside number, there are following conditions.
a. When a DtermIP in a Logout status receives an incoming trunk call and call forwarding destination
is an outside number (tandem connection), the call is forwarded or not in accordance with the restriction data for tandem connections (CM36). When the tandem connection between the incoming
trunk route and outgoing trunk route is allowed by system programming, the call is forwarded to
the outside number. When it is restricted, the caller will hear ROT.
b. Maximum 250 outside numbers can be assigned as call forwarding destinations (There is no limitation when a station is designated as a call forwarding destination).
250
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm

7.
8.
9.
c. Whether a DtermIP is busy or not, the MAT/CAT can set/change the Call Forwarding-Logout destination.
d. When a toll call number is assigned as the call forwarding destination, a calling station that is restricted to make a toll call can be forwarded to that toll call number.
When the call forwarding destination is a DAT, this feature can be assigned on a tenant basis by system programming. However, the call forwarding destination assigned by Feature Access Code or
MAT/CAT (station, outside number, Attendant Console) has priority over that assigned by the system
data (DAT).
Up to 8 multi-connections are available per DAT. When the connection exceeds 8, the excess connections are restricted and the caller will hear ROT. Secondary callers cannot be connected to the beginning of the message. A message duration for the announcement is assigned by CM41 Y=0>102.
When the message duration exceeds the time assigned by the system programming, the caller will
hear ROT.
When the call forwarding destination is not assigned, a caller will hear ROT or RBT.
If the called DtermIP sets Call Forwarding-All Calls, the caller will be forwarded to the destination of
Call Forwarding-All Calls. Even if the called DtermIP sets any of Call Forwarding-Busy Line, Call
Forwarding-No Answer, Dont Disturb and Station Hunting, such service will be ignored and the caller will hear ROT or RBT. ROT or RBT can be selected in station class of Service assignment.
Figure below shows a service priority applied to a DtermIP that sets more than one call forwarding or
hunting features at the same time are set. Call Forwarding-Logout, Call Forwarding-All Calls, Dont
Disturb, Uniform Call Distribution (UCD), Station Hunting, Call Forwarding-Busy Line, Call Forwarding-No Answer are listed in the order of priority. Note that when the DtermIP in the logout status
does not set both Call Forwarding-Logout and Call Forwarding-All Calls, the caller will not be forwarded by Do Not Disturb, UCD, Station Hunting, Call Forwarding-Busy Line, or Call ForwardingNo Answer and will hear ROT or RBT.
Service Priority in Logout Status

High
Call Forwarding-Logout
P
r
i
o
r
i
t
y
Call Forwarding-All Calls

Do not Disturb
UCD
Station Hunting
*When neither Call Forwarding-Logout nor

Call Forwarding-All Calls is set, the caller
will hear ROT/RBT.
Call Forwarding-Busy Line

Low
Call Forwarding-No Answer
251
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm

10. Call Forwarding-Logout service can be allowed or denied in Class of Service assignment. Also, ROT/
RBT, which calling party hears when call forwarding destination is not assigned, can be selected in
Class of Service assignment.
11. Multiple Call Forwarding-Logout is available. Multiple Call Forwarding-Logout can be assigned by
CM42 Y=14.
Multiple Call Forwarding-Logout can forward a maximum of five times when the called station sets
Call Forwarding-Logout to a station that has set Call Forwarding-Logout, Call Forwarding-All Calls,
or Call Forwarding-Busy Line. When Call Forwarding-Logout is repeated more than five times including Call Forwarding-All Calls and Call Forwarding-Busy Line, a calling party hears RBT ever
after.
When the call is forwarded, on the way of Multiple Call Forwarding-Logout feature, to a station that
has set Call Forwarding-No Answer, the number of Call Forwardings so far is reset (=0) and Call Forwarding-Logout is carried out from the beginning.
12. LCD displays of both calling party and call forwarding destination in Call Forwarding-Logout feature
are illustrated below.
<Example> When Sta. 200 calls to Sta. 300 in Logout status that sets Call Forwarding-Logout to Sta.
400:
a. LCD display of calling party (Sta. 200)
(Called party: Sta. 300, Call forwarding destination: Sta. 400)
CFA
400
b. LCD Display of call forwarding destination (Sta. 400)

(Calling party: Sta. 200, Called party: Sta. 300)
CFA
300 200
252
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm

Programming
To set a station, Voice Mail System, attendant console or outside party as the Call Forwarding-Logout destination:
NOTE:
START
To set a Voice Mail System as the Call Forwarding-Logout destination, in addition to the following programming, do the programming of VOICE MAIL INTEGRATION.
For the programming of VOICE MAIL INTEGRAION, refer to the Feature Programming Manual.
DESCRIPTION
DATA
CM12
Y=07
CM15
Allow Call Forwarding-Logout in Service Restriction Class C assigned by CM12 Y=07, and
specify the sending tone when Call Forwarding-Logout destination is not set.
Y=481
by CM12 Y=07
(2) 02 : Allow and send ROT
03 : Allow and send RBT
CM29
Assign a Numbering Plan Group number to

each tenant.
(1) 00-63: Tenant No.

CM20
Assign the access code for Call ForwardingLogout, Set and Cancel, respectively.

(2) A241: Call Forwarding-Logout Set
A242: Call Forwarding-Logout Cancel
253
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm

DESCRIPTION
DATA
CM42
Specify the number of times of Call Forwarding for a call.
(1) 14
(2) 01-05: 1 time-5 times
NONE : 5 times
CME6
When setting the destination of Call Forwarding-Logout from MAT/CAT, assign the destination to the required stations.
Y=06
(2) Destination No.;
X-XXXXXXXX: DtermIP Station No./
E000
: Attendant Console/
YY...Y
: Outgoing Trunk Access
Code (1-4 digits) + , +
Called No. (Maximum
26 digits)
CM35
To apply this feature to incoming calls, set the

trunk route combination for Tandem connection.
Y=05
CM36
Y=0
(1) Incoming Trunk Route No. + Outgoing
Trunk Route No. assigned by CM35 Y=05
(2) 0: Allow
END
254
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm

To set the Digital Announcement Trunk (DAT) as the Call Forwarding-Logout destination:
START
DESCRIPTION
DATA
CM10
Assign the Digital Announcement Trunk card

number to the required LEN.
NOTE 1: We recommend the setting of Digital
Announcement Trunk Card number
by CM14, when using Series 3200
R6.2 software or later.
NOTE 2: The Digital Announcement Trunk
card number must be assigned to the
first LEN (Level 0), the third LEN
(Level 2), the fifth LEN (Level 4) and
the seventh LEN (Level 6) of each
LT slot.
CM14
Assign the Digital Announcement Trunk card

number to the required LEN.
NOTE:
The Digital Announcement Trunk

card number must be assigned to the
first LEN (Level 0), the third LEN
(Level 2), the fifth LEN (Level 4) and
the seventh LEN (Level 6) of each
LT slot.
(1) 000-763: LEN

(2) EB002-EB127: Digital Announcement
Trunk Card No.
For PIM0/1 : EB002-EB031
NOTE:
EB000 and EB001 are dedicated

to built-in Digital Announcement
Trunk of the MP card.
(1) XX ZZZ: LEN

XX: 00-59: FP No.
(2) EB002-EB127: Digital Announcement
Trunk Card No.
For FP No. 00 : EB002-EB031
NONE :No data
NOTE:
EB000 and EB001 are dedicated

to built-in Digital Announcement
Trunk of the MP card.
255
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm

DESCRIPTION
CM49
For the MP built-in Digital Announcement

Trunk in Remote Sites, assign the FP number
and the line number of MP built-in DAT to the
Digital Announcement Trunk card number.
NOTE:
DATA
The Digital Announcement Trunk

card number assigned by CM10/
CM14 to the LEN cannot be set to
the first data in this command and
the Digital Announcement Trunk
card number set in this command
cannot be assigned to the LEN by
CM10/14.
Y=20
(1) 002-127: Digital Announcement Trunk
Card No.
(2) XX Z
XX: 00-59: FP No.
Z : 0/1: Line No. of MP built-in DAT
NONE : No data
CM12
Y=07
CM15
Allow Call Forwarding-Logout in Service Restriction Class C assigned by CM12 Y=07, and
specify the sending tone as ROT when Call
Forwarding-Logout destination is not set.
Y=481
by CM12 Y=07
(2) 02 : Allow and send ROT
CM29
Assign a Numbering Plan Group number to

each tenant.
(1) 00-63: Tenant No.

CM20
Assign the access code for Call ForwardingLogout, Set and Cancel, respectively.

(2) A241: Call Forwarding-Logout Set
A242: Call Forwarding-Logout Cancel
CM42
Specify the number of times of Call Forwarding for a call.
(1) 14
(2) 01-05: 1 time-5 times
NONE : 5 times
256
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm

DESCRIPTION
CM41
Specify the timing which an announcement for

Call Forwarding-Logout is sent.
Y=0
(1) 102
(2) 01-99: 4-396 seconds
seconds.
CM49
Assign the announcement for Call Forwarding-Logout to each Digital Announcement

Trunk accommodated into the system.
Y=00
(1) 000-001: Built-in DAT on MP card
002-127: Digital Announcement Trunk
Card No. (EB002-EB127) assigned by CM10/CM14
(2) 21XX: Call Forwarding-Logout
XX: Message Group No. (00-63)
Assign the message group number to the tenant

number.
Y=14
(1) 00-63: Tenant No.
(2) 00-63: Message Group No.
Assign the Digital Announcement Trunk as the

destination of Call Fowarding-Logout to each
tenant.
Y=32
(1) 00-63: Tenant No.
(2) EB000-001 : Built-in DAT on MP card
EB002-EB127: Digital Announcement
Trunk Card No.
CM51
DATA
END
Operating Procedure
Call Forwarding to a station
To set Call Forwarding-Logout
1. Press Speaker Key and receive dial tone.
2. Dial Call Forwarding-Logout Feature Access Code and receive special dial tone.
3. Dial a desired station number.
4. Set OK is displayed and receive service set tone.
5. Press Speaker Key.
To cancel Call Forwarding-Logout
2. Dial Call Forwarding-Logout Feature Cancellation Code and receive special dial tone.
3. Call forwarding destination is displayed.
4. Press .
5. Reset OK is displayed and receive service set tone.
257
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm

Call Forwarding to an outside number

3. Dial trunk access code and desired outside number.
3. Call forwarding destination is displayed.
4. Press .
Call Forwarding to Attendant Console
3. Dial Access Code for Attendant Console.
3. Attendant Console for Call forwarding destination is displayed.
4. Press .
258
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm

FAX over IP
General Description
This feature allows the system to transmit facsimile communications over IP network, via Local Area Networks (LAN) and corporate Wide Area Network (WAN).
Since PBX regards facsimile equipment as one of ordinary telephones, IP Packet Assembler/Disassembler
(IP-PAD) and Voice Compression Trunk (VCT) are required for facsimile uses over IP network same as
legacy stations. The facsimile transmission procedure (T.30 or G.711/G.726 pass-through) is supported
with IP-PAD/VCT.
The following figure shows a typical configuration of facsimile use on Peer-to-Peer CCIS network.
Example of FAX Use on IP Network (via Peer-to-Peer CCIS)

2000 IPS
FAX
IP-PAD
IP-PAD
WAN/LAN
FAX
IPSDM
DtermIP
D
term
IP
term
IP
Station Application
G3 facsimile stations
259
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm

Service Conditions
1. IP-PAD and 16VCT are required for facsimile use on Peer-to-Peer CCIS network or Remote PIM
over IP function.
2. PN-32IPLA (IP-PAD) card and PN-16VCTA (16VCT) card do not support FAX over IP.
3. IP-PAD card and 16VCT card support FAX over IP with the following FAX protocol.
FAX Protocol
Cards
G.711
Pass-through
G.726
Pass-through
SPN-8IPLA IP PAD-B
[Series 3300
software or later]
[Series 3300
software or later]
SPN-8IPLA IP PAD-A
[Series 3300
software or later]
SPN-32IPLA IP PAD-E
[Series 3400
software or later]
SPN-32IPLA IP PAD-E +
SPN-16VCTAA IP PAD-B
[Series 3300
software or later]
[Series 3400
software or later]
[Series 3200 R6.2

software or later]
SPN-32IPLA IP PAD-E +
SPN-16VCTAA IP PAD-A
[Series 3200 R6.2

software or later]
SPN-32IPLA IP PAD-C +
SPN-16VCTAA IP PAD-A
[Series 3200 R6.2

software or later]
260
T.30
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

4.
The FAX communications for each IP-PAD connection pattern is as follows.

N/A: Not Available
Opposite Office (2000 IPS)

32IPLA-A 32IPLA-A 32IPLA-A Opposite
Office
8IPLA 8IPLA 32IPLA-A
+
+
+
(2400/MC)
[A]
[B]
[C]
16VCTA-A 16VCTA-A 16VCTA-A
[D]
[E]
[F]
8IPLA
G.711
[A] G.726
G.711
G.711
G.711
G.726
N/A
N/A
G.711
G.726
8IPLA
G.711
G.711
G.711
G.711
N/A
N/A
G.711
G.711
G.711
G.711
G.711
N/A
N/A
G.711
32IPLA-A+ G.711
16VCTA-A G.726
[D]
G.711
G.711
G.711
G.726
T.30
T.30
T.30
G.711
G.726
T.30
Own Office (2000 IPS)
[B]
32IPLA-A
[C]
32IPLA-A+
16VCTA-A
[E]
N/A
N/A
N/A
T.30
T.30
T.30
T.30
32IPLA-A+
16VCTA-A
[F]
N/A
N/A
N/A
T.30
T.30
T.30
T.30
[A]: SPN-8IPLA IP PAD-B

[B]: SPN-8IPLA IP PAD-A
[C]: SPN-32IPLA IP PAD-E
[D]: SPN-32IPLA IP PAD-E + SPN-16VCTAA IP PAD-B
[E] : SPN-32IPLA IP PAD-E + SPN-16VCTAA IP PAD-A
[F] : SPN-32IPLA IP PAD-C + SPN-16VCTAA IP PAD-A
5.
6.
7.
8.
The analog Media Converter used by 2400 IPX cannot be accommodated in 2000 IPS. It is possible
to connect facsimiles between 2400 IPX and 2000 IPS.
A problem may occur such as expected transmission speed is not obtained or not connectable,
depending on a facsimile model even if it supports T.30.
If a Super G3 facsimile is used, the transmission speed will be equivalent to G3.
When using the Error Correction Mode (ECM) function, be sure to provide the ECM function for the
PN-32IPLA-A (IP-PAD) card by CM0A Y=82.
261
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm

9.
When the answering using facsimile is required, provide the FAX stations with reverse signal sending
by CM13 Y=18. In this case, restrict the Call Waiting Answer of called side by CM15 Y=44 because
the system does not provide the FAX station with the call waiting feature.
10. Connectable combinations between facsimile stations are shown below.
Connectable Combinations
Source
Via
Destination
2000 IPS FAX station
Local
Peer-to-Peer CCIS
Peer-to-Peer Local/
Peer-to-Peer CCIS
IPSDMR/IPSDM FAX
station
Peer-to-Peer CCIS
2400 IPX FAX station
Peer-to-Peer CCIS
2400 IPX MC FAX

station
Remarks
Station-to-Station connection
Peer-to-Peer Local for
Station-to-Station connection (Remote PIM
over IP)
Peer-to-Peer CCIS for
stand alone system
11. Required bandwidth for FAX connection (default setting) are shown below.
PN-32IPLA-A
Connection Conditions
Required Bandwidth (One-way)
T.30, G711, Payload=40 ms.

T.30, G729a, Payload=40 ms., Communication
speed=14.4 Kbps
(No IP Header compression in Router)
23.6 Kbps (FAX Payload=78 byte)
T.30, G729a, Payload=40 ms., Communication

speed=14.4 Kbps
(with IP Header compression in Router)
16.6 Kbps (FAX Payload=78 byte)
* This data does not include MAC Header.
262
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm

PN-8IPLA
G.711 pass-through, Payload=40 ms.

72 Kbps (FAX Payload=320 byte)




12. FAX communication mode of 32IPLA is T.30 in default. To set the voice pass-through mode, FAX
related data setting is required in system data programming.
13. To use 8IPLA, new 32IPLA and old 32IPLA in the same network, the location data setting is required
in system data programming. In addition, FAX communication mode should be set to same as the opposite IP-PAD/facsimile.
Example of Network Configuration

Location No.=02
Communication with
Voice pass-through mode
8IPLA
IPSDM
FAX
Location No.=01
IPS
Dterm
32IPLA (new)
FAX
WAN/LAN
FAX
32IPLA
(old)
IPSDM
Dterm
FAX
Communication
with T.30 mode
Location No.=03
DtermIP
32IPLA (new) : PN-32IPLA-A (SPN-32IPLA IP PAD-E)

32IPLA (old) : PN-32IPLA-A (SPN-32IPLA IP PAD-C)
263
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm

Programming
(1) FAX station setting
DESCRIPTION
START
CM10
DATA
Assign the station number for the FAX communication to the required LEN.
NOTE:
(1) 000-763: LEN

NONE : No data
We recommend the setting of station

number by CM14, when using Series
3200 R6.2 software or later.
CM14
Assign the station number for FAX communication to the required LEN.
(1) XX ZZZ: LEN

XX : 00-59: FP No.
NONE : No data
CM13
Define the station number assigned by CM14

as the FAX station number.
Y=7
(2) 0 : FAX Station
1 : Ordinary Station
CM12
To provide the FAX station with the answering

feature, assign Service Restriction Class A to
the required FAX station number.
Y=02
(2) 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A
CM15
Restrict the Call Waiting Answer-Called side

in Service Restriction Class A assigned by
CM12 Y=02.
Y=44
(1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02
(2) 0 : Restricted
1 : Allow
CM13
To provide the FAX station with the answering

feature, set the Reverse signal sending to be effective.
Y=18
(2) 0 :Effective
1 : Ineffective
NOTE:
When providing the FAX station

with answering feature, set the second data of CM13 Y=18 to 0 and
use PN-8LC card (LC with reverse
function is required).
END
264
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm

(2)
FAX data setting for IP-PAD

To provide the IP-PAD card with FAX over IP feature, in addition to the IP-PAD DATA
ASSIGNMENT, do the following programming.
START
DESCRIPTION
CM0A
When no 16VCT card is mounted, assign the

way of connection to the IP-PAD card number.
IP-PAD INITIAL
NOTE:
DATA
When using the PN-8IPLA (IP-PAD)

card, do not set this data.
Provide the FAX communication feature for

the LAN Interface of the IP-PAD card.
IP-PAD INITIAL
NOTE:
Y=71
(2) 0 : Restrict the connection of IP-PAD
without 16VCT
1 : Connect with G.711 fixed
(1) Y=80
0 : To provide
1 : Not provided
To avoid the misdetection, set the

second data to 1 when the IP-PAD
card does not provide the FAX communication feature.
Assign the FAX mode detection timer to the

IP-PAD INITIAL
NOTE 2: If the FAX mode timer is set to longer, a mis-detection may occur.
NOTE 3: When using the PN-8IPLA (IP-PAD)
card, this data setting is not required.
Y=81
(2) 1: Always detect FAX mode
2: Voice mode fixed
3: 1 minute after starting communication
4: 2 minutes after starting communication
NONE : 1 minute after starting communication
265
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm

DESCRIPTION
CM0A
Provide the Error Correction Mode (ECM)

function for the LAN Interface of the IP-PAD
card.
IP-PAD INITIAL
NOTE:
DATA
Y=82
(2) 0 : To provide
1 : Not provided
This data setting is available only when providing the FAX communication (T.30) with the
PN-32IPLA-A (IP-PAD) card.
Assign the baud of FAX communication to the

IP-PAD INITIAL
card, this data setting is not required.
NOTE 2: When providing the FAX communication (pass-through) with the PN32IPLA-A (IP-PAD) card, this data
setting is not required.
Y=85
(2) 0: 2400 bps
1: 4800 bps
2: 7200 bps
3: 9600 bps
4: 12000 bps
5: 14400 bps
NONE : 14400 bps
END
266
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm

(3)
FAX Protocol, FAX Payload size, Jitter Buffer settings for location group
To provide each location group with the FAX over IP feature, in addition to the LOCATION DATA
ASSIGNMENT, do the following programming.
START
CM67
DESCRIPTION
DATA
Y=20
(1) XXZZ
ZZ: 00-63: Location No. of group
(2) 0: Fixed list 0 (See the table below)
1: Fixed list 1 (See the table below)
2: Fixed list 2 (See the table below)
3: Not used
4-7: Programmable list 4-7 (depends on the
setting of CM67 Y=21-24)
NONE : When using PN-32IPLA-A card:
Fixed list 0 (See the table below)/
When using PN-8IPLA card:
Fixed list 1 (See the table below)
Assign the FAX control information list to

each location group number assigned by
CM8A Y=5000-5255: 173/CM0A Y=09.
NOTE 2: When using the PN-8IPLA (IPPAD) card, do not set the second
data to 0 (Fixed list 0).
NOTE 3: When providing the FAX communication (G.711 pass-through) with
the PN-32IPLA-A card, set the second data to 1 (Fixed list 1), or set the
second data to 4-7 (Programmable
list 4-7) and then set CM67 Y=2124.
NOTE 4: When providing the FAX communication (G.711 pass-through) with
the PN-32IPLA-A card in the system
using the Series 3200 R6.2 software
or before, set the second data to 4-7
(Programmable list 4-7) and then
set CM67 Y=21-24.
Fixed list 0
Fixed list 1
Fixed list 2
T.30
G.711
G.726
40 ms.
40 ms.
Minimum Jitter Buffer
0 ms.
120 ms.
120 ms.
Maximum Jitter Buffer
0 ms.
120 ms.
120 ms.
FAX Protocol
FAX Payload Size
267
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm
OCTOBER/14/2005

DESCRIPTION
DATA
CM67
Assign the FAX protocol for the programmable list 4-7.
Y=21/22/23/24
(1) 00: FAX Protocol Pattern No.
(2) 00: Not detect the FAX protocol NOTE 2
01: G.711 -law
(Only for PN-8IPLA)
02: G.711 A-law
(Only for PN-8IPLA)
03: G.726
04: T.30
(Only for PN-32IPLA-A)
NONE : No data

NOTE 2: To avoid the misdetection, set the
second data to 00 when the location
groups (between location groups)
does not provide FAX over IP feature.

PN-CP31-C/PN-CP31-D
*For EU
A-law/-law depends on CM04 Y=10/1140 and the SW2-1 on PN-CP24-A/
PN-CP24-B/PN-CP24-C/PN-CP24-D/
PN-CP27-A/PN-CP27-B or the Key
ROM (SP-3722 IPS KYUS PROG-A1) on
PN-CP31-D
Assign the FAX payload size for the programmable list 4-7.
NOTE:
Y=21/22/23/24
(1) 01: FAX Payload Size Pattern No.
(2) 01-04: 10 ms.-40 ms. (10 ms. increments)
NONE : No data
268
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

DESCRIPTION
DATA
CM67
Specify the minimum value of jitter buffer for

the programmable list 4-7.
Y=21/22/23/24
(1) 08
NONE : No data

buffer set by CM67 Y=21/22/23/
24>09.
Specify the maximum value of jitter buffer for
Y=21/22/23/24
(1) 09
NONE : No data

CM67 Y=21/22/23/24>08.
card, assign the value which is multiple of the payload size set by CM67
Y=21/22/23/24>01.
automatically.
END
Operating Procedure
269
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm
JULY/01/2006

Modem over IP
This feature allows the system to transmit modem communications over IP network, via Local Area Networks (LAN) and corporate Wide Area Network (WAN).
The following figure shows a typical configuration of modem use on Peer-to-Peer CCIS network.
Example of the PC built-in modem Use on IP Network (via Peer-to-Peer CCIS)

IPS
PC built-in
Modem
LC
PC built-in
Modem
IP-PAD
IP-PAD
LC
WAN/LAN
DtermIP
IPSDM
DtermIP
DtermIP
Station Application
Analog stations (modem)
Service Conditions
1. PN-8IPLA (IP-PAD) card is required for MODEM over IP use on Peer-to-Peer network or Remote
PIM over IP function.
2. PN-32IPLA/PN-32IPLA-A (IP-PAD) card does not support MODEM over IP.
3. Connectable combinations between modem stations are shown below.
Connectable Combinations
Source
Via
Destination
2000 IPS MODEM

station
Peer-to-Peer CCIS
2000 IPS MODEM

station
2000 IPS MODEM

station
Peer-to-Peer CCIS
Local/Peer-to-Peer
CCIS
IPSDMR/IPSDM
MODEM station
270
Remarks
Peer-to-Peer CCIS
Local (Remote PIM
over IP)
Peer-to-Peer CCIS for
stand alone system
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm

4.
The target value of the connection speed of modem communications over IP in 2000 IPS is shown in
the table below.
NOTE:
The 2000 IPS does not guarantee the connection speed in the table that is a reference value.
The actual speed varies depending on the connection configuration between modem, the conditions of network such as the number of hybrid circuits in the connection route, the quality of
lines, or the type of modems. An evaluation test for the connectivity and the effective speed
should be performed before actual operation.
Connection Speed
Modem Protocol
5.
Connection Speed
G.711 pass-through
14.4-24 Kbps
G.726 pass-through
9.6-14.4 Kbps
PN-8IPLA (IP-PAD) card supports MODEM over IP with the following modem protocol.
Modem Protocol
Cards
G.711
Pass-through
G.726
Pass-through
SPN-8IPLA IP PAD-B
SPN-8IPLA IP PAD-A
271
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm

6.
The MODEM communications for each IP-PAD connection pattern is as follows.

N/A: Not available
Own Office (2000 IPS)
Opposite Office (2000 IPS)
7.
Opposite Office
(2400/MC)
SPN-8IPLA
IP PAD-B
SPN-8IPLA
IP PAD-A
SPN-8IPLA
IP PAD-B
G.711
G.726
G.711
SPN-8IPLA
IP PAD-A
G.711
G.711
Required bandwidth for modem connection (default setting) are shown below.

72 Kbps (MODEM Payload=320 byte)



272
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm

Programming
(1) MODEM station setting
DESCRIPTION
START
CM10
Assign the station number for the MODEM

communication to the required LEN.
NOTE:
CM14
DATA
(1) 000-763: LEN
NONE : No data
We recommend the setting of station

number by CM14.
Assign the station number for the MODEM

communication to the required LEN.
(1) XX ZZZ: LEN

XX : 00-59: FP No.
NONE : No data
END
273
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm

(2)
MODEM Protocol, MODEM Payload size, Jitter Buffer settings for location group
To provide each location group with the MODEM over IP feature, in addition to the LOCATION
DATA ASSIGNMENT, do the following programming.
START
DESCRIPTION
DATA
CM67
Assign the MODEM control information list to

each location group number assigned by
CM8A Y=5000-5255: 173/CM0A Y=09.
Y=20
(1) XXZZ
(2) 1 : Fixed list 1 (See the table below)
2 : Fixed list 2 (See the table below)
3 : Not used
4-7: Programmable list 4-7 (depends on the
setting of CM67 Y=21-24)
NONE : Fixed list 1 (See the table below)
NOTE:
Fixed list 1
Fixed list 2
MODEM Protocol
G.711
G.726
MODEM Payload Size
40 ms.
40 ms.
Minimum Jitter Buffer
120 ms.
120 ms.
Maximum Jitter Buffer
120 ms.
120 ms.
274
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm
OCTOBER/14/2005

DESCRIPTION
DATA
CM67
Assign the MODEM protocol for the programmable list 4-7.

NOTE 2: To avoid the misdetection, set the
second data 00 when the location
groups (between location groups)
do not provide Modem over IP feature.
Y=21/22/23/24
(1) 00: MODEM Protocol Pattern No.
(2) 00: Not detect the MODEM protocol
NOTE 2
01: G.711 -law
02: G.711 A-law
03: G.726
NONE : No data
PN-CP31-C/PN-CP31-D
*For EU
A-law/-law depends on CM04 Y=10/1140 and the SW2-1 on PN-CP24-A/
PN-CP24-B/PN-CP24-C/PN-CP24-D/
PN-CP27-A/PN-CP27-B or the Key
ROM (SP-3722 IPS KYUS PROG-A1) on
PN-CP31-D
Assign the MODEM payload size for the programmable list 4-7.
NOTE:
Y=21/22/23/24
(1) 01: MODEM Payload Size Pattern No.
NONE : No data
275
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

DESCRIPTION
DATA
CM67

Y=21/22/23/24
(1) 08
NONE : No data

buffer set by CM67 Y=21/22/23/
24>09.
Y=21/22/23/24
(1) 09
NONE : No data

CM67 Y=21/22/23/24>08.
NOTE 3: Assign the value which is multiple of
the payload size set by CM67 Y=21/
22/23/24>01.
automatically.
END
Operating Procedure
276
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm
JULY/01/2006

SNMP
General Description
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is a standard protocol for TCP/IP network management,
which enables a network management application software to query a management agent (network device
such as router, PC host, and hub) using a supported MIB (Management Information Base). The MIB is a
database of network performance information that is stored on the network devices. The 2000 IPS can support the SNMP standard MIB (MIB-II, defined in IETF RFC 1213), private MIB, and TRAP.
The 2000 IPS is also possible to correspond to the SNMP via the NAT.
SNMP System Configuration

2000 IPS
Private MIB
Management Console
(PBX Fault Information)

(MJ/MN)
Network Management System
Manager
Agent
MIB
UDP Port 161
SNMP
SNMP
UDP Port 162
UDP
UDP
IP
IP
NIC
NIC
TRAP
(Management
Information
Base)
Object
LAN
GET, GETNEXT, SET Request, GET Response
Station Application
Not Applicable
277
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm

Service Conditions
1. The 2000 IPS supports SNMP V1 and SNMP V2C.
2. The 2000 IPS supports the following standard MIB (standard MIB-II defined in IETF RFC 1213).
System Group
Interfaces Group
IP Group
ICMP Group
TCP Group
UDP Group
SNMP Group
3. There are following conditions to access the standard MIB information from the SNMP manager.
a) When public is assigned as a community name, the SNMP manager can always access all MIB
information as read-only.
b) When admin is assigned as the community name, the SNMP manager can access the MIB information only when the PBX system data is assigned to allow using admin. In this case, the SNMP
manager can read all MIB information, and write the following MIB information.
sysContact, sysName, sysLocation
c) When the community name uses a string with any character, the SNMP manager can read all MIB
information.
4. Private MIB Extensions and Trap command are supported. The 2000 IPS provides alarm (MJ/MN)
and fault information of the system as the MIB information and automatically sends the fault information to the SNMP manager by Trap command.
5. Management via Network Address Translation (NAT) is available when the IP address of Trap source
is set in system data programming.
6. Maximum four IP addresses of SNMP managers can be set in system data programming, to restrict
access from any other addresses. The number of accessible SNMP managers can be expanded in system data programming. By masking one IP address with Subnet Mask, access to the system is allowed
to all managers in the same network.
7. The 2000 IPS can provide the MIB information on a LAN port in the MP. The information on the
ports of IP-PAD and external IP trunk is not provided.
278
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm

8. This service can be operated on UDP/IP.

9. The UDP port number of the 2000 IPS for SNMP is 161 (fixed/standard).
10. The following MIB objects in the System group are assigned as follows:
MIB object
Description
Value
sysDescr
System Information
Default IPS (change from MAT is

available)
sysObjectID
System object ID
Fixed as 1.3.6.1.4.1.119.1.76.3
sysContact
Contact person for the System with

information on how to contact this
person
Assigned by ASCII characters (0-255

characters) from MAT/SNMP manager.
sysName
System name Administrativelyassigned name for the system

sysLocation
Physical location of the system

NOTE 1: Maximum of 64 characters can be assigned for each of MIB object sysContact, sysName,
sysLocation from the MAT. The MIB objects can be overwritten from the SNMP manager
with maximum of 255 characters after they are set by MAT.
Be sure to execute the system data backup after the MIB objects are changed.
NOTE 2: To register the MIB objects to the 2000 IPS from the SNMP manager, be sure to set the community name admin (CM0B Y=03>01) or optional community name (CM0B Y=03>10-11)
beforehand.
NOTE 3: The above MIB objects are stored in the MP as system data. Therefore, when the SNMP manager changes the MIB information after saving the system data by MAT, verify error will occur
between the saved system data and the system data in the MP.
There is no problem for the 2000 IPS even if the verify error occurs.
279
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm
JULY/01/2006

11. The following PBX information can be read from the MIB information.
(1) The total number of packets through MP LAN port .... enable to know the status of LAN segment.
(2) The number of error message packets per each protocol. NOTE
(3) The number of packets per each protocol. NOTE
(4) The number of packets disposed by PBX inside reason per each protocol. NOTE
NOTE:
The relationship between each protocol and PBX functions are as follows:
SNMP (SNMP communication)............................................................ Application Layer
TCP (MAT, OAI, IPT-IPT communication).......................................... Transport Layer
UDP (for control and authentication of DtermIP, IPT-IP-PAD communication)
............................................................................................................... Transport Layer
ICMP (for internet control, not related to PBX functions) .................. Network Layer
IP (above SNMP, TCP, UDP, ICMP communication).......................... Network Layer
280
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm

12. The following private MIB objects are provided: [Series 3200 R6.2 software required]
SNMP
Command
Name
GET/SET
GET
GET
TRAP
NOTE:
MIB Object/ID
Notified Information
IpsLampStatusClear/
PBX Lamp status
1.3.6.1.4.1.119.2.3.76.3.1.1 1: MJ/MN Lamp Off
2: Either MJ or MN Lamp On
IpsMajorLampStatus/
PBX MJ Lamp status
1.3.6.1.4.1.119.2.3.76.3.1.2 1: MJ Lamp Off
2: MJ Lamp On
IpsMinorLampStatus/
PBX MN Lamp status
1.3.6.1.4.1.119.2.3.76.3.1.3 1: MN Lamp Off
2: MN Lamp On
IpsSystemMessageData/
Contents of fault message (Trap)
1.3.6.1.4.1.119.2.3.76.3.2.1 Fault message notification
(Trap)
Stored up to 255 bytes of
alphanumeric characters (ASCII
code) (See condition 13.)
- FK: Fault Kind Code
(2 characters)
- External Alarm Kind:
0/1/2=[--]/[MN]/[MJ]
- Fault Description
(Max.197characters)
- Processor Information
(5 characters)
00-03H: @FP00-@FP03
04H-0FH: @AP04-@AP15
10H-13H: @FP16-@FP19
14H-1FH: @AP20-@AP31
80H: @MP_
- Detail Data (43 characters)
IpsSystemMessage/
1.3.6.1.4.1.119.2.3.76.3.2.2
Access to Object
Read/Write NOTE
Read only
Read only
Not accessible
Not accessible
When Set-Request is operated for this MIB object, all lamps on PBX are cleared.
281
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm
JUNE/01/2007

13. SNMP-Trap Message Format [Series 3200 R6.2 software required]

Fault message format of SNMP-Trap is as follows.
08 [MN] FP/AP Card down @ AP04 (03 01 31 20 41 FF. . .)
Detail Data (YY [Year] MM [Month] DD [Day] HH [Hour] mm [Minute])
Processor Information
Separator
Fault Description
External Alarm Kind
FK: Fault Kind Code
The table below shows the list of Fault Kind Code and Fault Description.
Fault Kind Code
Fault Description
01
System Initialization
02
B level endless loop occurrence
03
The number of hopper entry was more than the caution level
04
MP-FP/MP-AP communication failure
05
Trunk lock-up occurred and released by PATROL
06
DTI Called Party unresponse
07
DTI Restore undetection
08
FP/AP Card down
09
Power failure
0A
Line/Trunk card was removed from a slot
10
Trouble warning of a Digital Line Circuit
11
The multiple detour notice (INS BACKUP)
12
CS/ZT fault occurred
16
A periodic maintenance alarm
17
The result of authentication
18
FP/AP Card returned to normal condition
19
Power failure returned to normal condition
1A
Line/Trunk card was inserted to a slot
20
DTI Line failure
21
DCH/BRT/PRT D-channel link connection failure
22
CCH link connection failure

CCH/IPT link connection failure [Series 3300 software required]
23
Trunk failure
282
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm
JUNE/01/2007

Fault Kind Code
Fault Description
24
The number of faulty trunks was more than the predetermined number
25
The number of lock-out station was more than the predetermined number
26
DLC Card down
28
SMDS output buffer memory overflow
2A
Recording-unit fault occurrence
2B
CS/ZT fault occurred
30
DTI line returned to normal condition
31
DCH/BRT/PRT D-channel link connection returned to normal condition
32
CCH link connection returned to normal condition

CCH/IPT link connection returned to normal condition
33
Faulty trunk returned to normal condition
34
The number of faulty trunks was less than the predetermined number
35
The number of lockout station restored to less than the predetermined number
36
DLC Card returned to normal condition
38
SMDS output buffer memory returned to normal condition
3A
Recording -unit fault occurrence returned to normal condition
3B
CS/ZT returned to normal condition
40
Traffic of IP network exceeded limit bandwidth
41
Traffic of IP network exceeded warning bandwidth
42
Communication error occurrence between Main Site and Remote Site
4A
Long call duration-1

4B
Long call duration-2

50
Traffic of IP network returned to normal condition from limit bandwidth excess
51
Traffic of IP network returned to normal condition from warning bandwidth excess
52
Communication error restoration between Main Site and Remote Site
283
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm
JUNE/01/2007

14. In following conditions, fault messages output by Trap might disappear. This is because SNMP is operated on UDP and communication is made without establishing the connection. Besides, since UDP
does not resend messages, abandoned data cannot be retrieved again.
SNMP manager is not started
Network traffic is congested
Fault occurs on the line between PBX and SNMP manager
Programming
START
DESCRIPTION
CM0B
To register the MIB system information from

SNMP manager to the system, open the SNMP
port of the system.
INITIAL
NOTE:
DATA
To avoid the unauthorized access to the network, keep the 2nd data to 1 except when registering the MIB system information.
Allow the use of community name admin.

INITIAL
NOTE:
Y=03
(1) 00
(2) 0 : Open SNMP port
1 : Not open SNMP port
Restrict the use of community name

admin (set the community name
to public) except the system construction.
Y=03
(1) 01
(2) 0 : Allow (admin)
1 : Restrict (public)
284
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm
JUNE/01/2007

DESCRIPTION
DATA
CM0B
Set the community name with 1-25 characters

(ASCII code).
INITIAL
Y=03
(1) 10: 1-16 characters
(2) XXX...X: Character Code (Maximum 32
digits: 16 characters)
See Character Code Table.
Page 319
NONE : No data
Page 319
NONE : No data
Assign the required IP Address for the SNMP

manager (first place to fourth place).
INITIAL
NOTE:
Y=03
(1) 80: First place
81: Second place
82: Third place
83: Fourth place
(2) 000000000000-255255255255:
IP Address for the SNMP manager
NONE : No data NOTE
The system allows the access only from the IP address that is set by this command. But if
no IP address for the SNMP manager (first place to fourth place) are set, the access to the
system is allowed to all SNMP managers.
To avoid the unauthorized access to the system, this data setting is required.
To check the IP address of SNMP manager

from the network address, define the IP address of SNMP manager (fourth place) as the
Subnet mask of the IP address for the SNMP
manager (first place).
[Series 3300 R8 software required]
Y=03
(1) 03
(2) 0 : Subnet Mask of the IP address for the
SNMP manager (first place)
1 : IP address for the SNMP manager
(fourth place)
285
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm
JULY/01/2006

DESCRIPTION
DATA
CM0B
Set the system information (sysDescr) with 1128 characters (ASCII code).
INITIAL
Y=03
21: 17-32 characters
Page 319
NONE : IPS
Set the system contact (sysContact) with 1-64

characters (ASCII code).
INITIAL
Y=03
Page 319
NONE : No data
Set the system name (sysName) with 1-64

characters (ASCII code).
INITIAL
Y=03
Page 319
NONE : No data
Set the location of system (sysLocation) with

1-64 characters (ASCII code).
INITIAL
Y=03
Page 319
NONE : No data
286
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm
JULY/01/2006

DESCRIPTION
DATA
CM0B
Specify whether the trap is sent to the SNMP

manager.
INITIAL
Y=03
(1) 02
(2) 0 : To send
1 : Not sent
Specify whether the specific, object ID in the

trap message is changed, or not.
Y=03
(1) 04
(2) 0 :Changed by Alarm kind
1 : Fixed
Assign the required IP Address for the destination of trap (first place to fourth place).
INITIAL
Y=03
(1) 60: First place
61: Second place
62: Third place
63: Fourth place
(2) 000000000000-255255255255:
IP Address for the destination of trap
NONE : No data
Assign the community name for the destination of trap (first place) with 1-25 characters
(ASCII code).
INITIAL
Y=03
Page 319
NONE : No data
Page 319
NONE : No data
287
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm
JULY/01/2006

DESCRIPTION
DATA
CM0B
Assign the community name for the destination of trap (second place) with 1-25 characters
(ASCII code).
INITIAL
Y=03
Page 319
NONE : No data
Page 319
NONE : No data
Assign the community name for the destination of trap (third place) with 1-25 characters
(ASCII code).
INITIAL
Y=03
Page 319
NONE : No data
Page 319
NONE : No data
Assign the community name for the destination of trap (fourth place) with 1-25 characters
(ASCII code).
INITIAL
Y=03
Page 319
NONE : No data
Page 319
NONE : No data
288
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm
JULY/01/2006

DESCRIPTION
CM0B
When using the NAT, assign the IP Address for

the trap source.
INITIAL
NOTE:
DATA
Y=03
(1) 90
(2) 000000000000-255255255255:
IP Address for the trap source
NONE : No data
The IP address assigned by this data is set to the Agent address in SNMP TRAP PDU,
and the system sends the IP address to the IP network.
Wherever the system is located on the LAN, system administrator can manage it easily by
setting of the convenient IP address.
END
289
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm
JULY/01/2006

Operating Procedure
To make available the SNMP for 2000 IPS, register the following SNMP data to the 2000 IPS using the
MAT or SNMP manager.
Once SNMP data is registered, the operation of 2000 IPS is not required.
Also, a part of MIB system information can be changed from the SNMP manager.
(1)
MAT Operation
STEP1: Open the SNMP port of the system by CM0B Y=03>00.

After setting of the data, execute the system data backup and press the SW1 of MP card of Main
Site.
STEP2: Set the community name (for system password) by CM0B Y=03>10-11.
There are three community names as follows.
public: SNMP manager can read All MIB information
admin: SNMP manager can read All MIB information, and can write a part of MIB information.
Optional community name: SNMP manager can read/write the MIB information such as a
general SNMP
Usually, set the Optional community name by CM0B Y=03>10-11.
Community name public is always available.
To avoid the unauthorized access to the network, use the community name admin only for the
system construction (CM0B Y=03>01).
STEP3: Set the IP address for SNMP manager by CM0B Y=03>80-83.
STEP4: Set the system information (sysDescr) by CM0B Y=03>20-27.
STEP5: Set the system contact (sysContact) by CM0B Y=03>30-33.
STEP6: Set the system name (sysName) by CM0B Y=03>40-43.
STEP7: Set the system location (sysLocation) by CM0B Y=03>50-53.
STEP8: Specify whether the trap is sent or not by CM0B Y=03>02.
STEP9: Set the IP address for the destination of trap by CM0B Y=03>60-63.
STEP10: Set the community name for the destination of trap by CM0B Y=03>70-77.
STEP11: When using the NAT, set the IP address for the trap source by CM0B Y=03>90.
STEP12: Execute the system data backup by CMEC Y=6>0:0.
STEP13: Press the SW1 of MP card.
290
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm
JULY/01/2006

(2)
SNMP Manager Operation

The following MIB system information can be changed from the SNMP manager.
When the following information is set from the MAT, SNMP manager can overwrite them.
System Contact (sysContact)
System Name (sysName)
System Location (sysLocation)
NOTE:
When the above information is overwritten by the SNMP manager, be sure to execute the system
data backup from the MAT.
291
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm

Terminal Login via NAT

This feature allows the system to transmit Network Address Translation (NAT) over IP network, via Local
Area Networks (LAN) and corporate Wide Area Network (WAN).
The following figure shows a typical configuration of NAT use on IP network.
Example of NAT Use on IP Network

IPS
Global IP Address
Router
DtermIP
DtermIP
WAN/LAN
DtermIP
Private IP Address
NAT
DtermIP
DtermIP
Station Application
Not Applicable
292
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm
JANUARY/20/2006

Service Conditions
Conditions on Overall System
1. As an address translation method, Basic NAT is used. NAPT (IP masquerade) is not supported.
2. Global IP address is assigned to a DtermIP/IP-PAD placed in stand-alone system or main site for
Remote PIM over IP when NAT is performed. Only single Private IP address can be translated to
single Global IP address. Private IP address can be assigned to DtermIPs under the NAT only.
3. Global IP address that is assigned to DtermIP does not change when the terminal has logged in.
4. Equipments that support NAT are as follows. (All the equipments that are related to communications
and supporting NAT are required. If there is equipment that does not support NAT, one-way speech
or no tone might occur.)
Available
:
Not available: -
EQUIPMENT
Terminals
Cards
Dterm85 (Series i) (IP Adapter Type)
Dterm85 (Series i) (IP Bundled Type)
DtermIP INASET (ITR-240G-1)
DtermSP30
IP-CS
Dterm75 (Series E) (IP Adapter Type)
DtermIP INASET (ITR-LC-1)
DtermSP20
PN-8IPLA (IP-PAD)
PN-32IPLA/PN-32IPLA-A (IP-PAD)
PN-IPTB (IPT)
293
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm
JANUARY/20/2006

Conditions on DtermIP
1. DtermIP can be installed at remote location from IPS via NAT.
DtermIP can communicate each other under the same NAT.
DtermIP can communicate each other under different NATs.
DtermIP cannot be connected via multiple NATs.
LAN-A
2000 IPS
DtermIP
10.1.1.1
10.1.1.100
Router
OK
OK
IP Network
10.1.1.xxx
to
192.1.1.xxx
10.1.1.xxx
to
168.1.1.xxx
NAT
NAT
OK
DtermIP
192.1.1.100
DtermIP
192.1.1.200
OK
LAN-B
2.
3.
OK
OK
DtermIP
168.1.1.200
DtermIP
168.1.1.100
LAN-C
DtermIPs used between networks via NAT can be set different location numbers since it is necessary
to specify the connection status of NAT between locations in system data programming (CM67
Y=08).
Be sure to set NAT, as the assigned IP address at login of DtermIP is not changed before logout.
294
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm
JANUARY/20/2006

Conditions on CCIS Connection (Peer to Peer Connection)

1. Communication in CCIS connection via NAT is not available.
DtermIPs accommodated in the same office can communicate each other.
DtermIPs accommodated in the different offices via NAT cannot communicate each other.
LAN-A
LAN-B
2000 IPS
2000 IPS
Router
NAT
CCIS over IP
10.1.1.xxx
to
192.1.1.xxx
10.1.1.1
192.1.1.1
DtermIP
10.1.1.100
NG
295
DtermIP
192.1.1.100
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm
JANUARY/20/2006

Conditions on Remote PIM over IP

1. Remote Site can operate in normal remote mode, which is subordinate operation to the Main Site,
when NAT is used between the Main Site and Remote Site.
DtermIPs accommodated in the same site can communicate each other. This condition is applied to
normal remote operation and survival operation.
DtermIPs accommodated in the different sites via NAT cannot communicate each other.
Main Site
LAN-A
2000 IPS
DtermIP
10.1.1.1
10.1.1.100
Router
Main-Remote
Link OK
NG
IP Network
10.1.1.xxx
to
192.1.1.xxx
10.1.1.xxx
to
192.2.1.xxx
NAT
NAT
IPSDM
192.1.1.1
IPSDM
192.2.1.1
NG
OK
DtermIP
192.1.1.100
OK
DtermIP
192.2.1.200
DtermIP
192.1.1.200
LAN-C
LAN-B
Remote Site
2.
DtermIP
192.2.1.100
Remote Site
Be sure to set NAT, as the assigned IP address for the site that is not changed during normal operation
mode.
296
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm
JANUARY/20/2006

Conditions on IP-PAD
1. When the IP-PAD is connected via NAT, a Global IP address is assigned to the IP-PAD of Remote
Site for Remote PIM over IP by system data (CM0A Y=65). Therefore, in NAT setting, the IP address
of IP-PAD should be assigned statically.
Programming
START
DESCRIPTION
DATA
CM67
Specify whether the DtermIP at remote site

location from IPS via NAT can communicate
each other under the same NAT or not.
Y=07
(1) XX ZZ
(2) 0 : Under the same NAT
1 : Under the different NAT or Not used
NAT
NOTE:
The same location number must not

be assigned to DtermIP that is not
accommodated under the same NAT.
However, multiple location numbers
can be assigned to DtermIP that is
accommodated under the same NAT.
Specify whether the connection between

locations is restricted or not.
NOTE:
CM0A
Restrict the following connection by

this command when NAT is used.
- Connection via CCIS (Peer to
Peer connection)
- Connection between Main Site
and Remote Sites
- Connection between locations
that is restricted the communications
Assign the Global IP address for IP-PAD of

Remote Site of Remote PIM over IP when IPPAD is controlled by NAT.
Y=08
(1) XX ZZ
(2) 0 : To restrict
1 : Not restricted
Y=65
(2) 000000000000-255255255255:
Global IP Address for IP-PAD
NONE : No data
END
297
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006

Example of Programming for Terminal Login via NAT

The following shows example of data programming for Terminal Login via NAT.
Network configuration
Network Configuration
Location No.=00
Location No.=01
2000 IPS
DRS: 10.1.1.1
Global
IP Address
10.1.2.250
Global
IP Address
10.1.1.250
Router
Station No. 200
(10.1.1.100)
Router
Station No. 210
(10.1.0.100)
Station No. 201

(10.1.1.101)
IP Network
Remote Site
Location No.=02
Location No.=03
NAT-a
NAT-b
IPSDM
Station No. 220

(192.1.1.100)
Station No. 221

(192.1.1.101)
DRS: 168.1.1.1
Global IP Address : 10.1.4.250

Private IP Address : 168.1.1.250
Station No. 300
(168.1.1.100)
Station No. 301

(168.1.1.101)
Global IP Address : 10.1.3.250

Private IP Address : 192.1.1.250
298
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm
JANUARY/20/2006

Programming of Terminal Login via NAT
Programming of Terminal Login via NAT

COMMAND
FIRST DATA
SECOND DATA
67
07
0202
67
07
0303
67
08
0003
67
08
0300
67
08
0103
67
08
0301
67
08
0203
67
08
0302
Programming of DtermIP
Programming of DtermIP
STATION NUMBER
IP ADDRESS
DRS
GATEWAY ADDRESS
200
10.1.1.100
(Global IP Address)
10.1.1.1
10.1.1.250
(Global IP Address)
201
10.1.1.101
(Global IP Address)
10.1.1.1
10.1.1.250
(Global IP Address)
210
10.1.2.100
(Global IP Address)
10.1.1.1
10.1.2.250
(Global IP Address)
220
192.1.1.100
(Private IP Address)
10.1.1.1
192.1.1.250
221
192.1.1.101
10.1.1.1
192.1.1.250
300
168.1.1.100
168.1.1.1
192.1.1.250
301
168.1.1.101
168.1.1.1
192.1.1.250
299
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm
JANUARY/20/2006

Setting of Router (NAT-a [Cisco router])

> ip nat pool POOL1 10.1.3.1 10.1.3.15 netmask 255.255.255.240
[Register the range of Global IP address 10.1.3.1-10.1.3.15 for NAT as POOL1.]
* Set the number of Global IP address to exceed the number of DtermIP.
> access-list 1 permit any
[Register all packets of private network as list 1.]
> ip nat inside source list 1 pool POOL1
[Find the matched packets to list 1 in private network and translate within range of POOL1.]
> interface Ethernet0
[Port of LAN side]
>> ip nat inside
[Designate private network of NAT]
> interface Ethernet1
[Port of WAN side]
>> ip nat outside
[Designate global network of NAT]
Communication Availability
STATION NUMBER
Available
:
Not available: -
200-201
200-210
200-220
200-300
210-220
220-221
220-300
300-301
300
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm
JANUARY/20/2006

H.323 IP TRUNK DATA ASSIGNMENT

Programming Procedure for H.323 IP Trunk
Programming Procedure for H.323 IP Trunk

START
H.323 IPT Data Assignment
Page 302
END
301
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm

H.323 IPT Data Assignment

START
DESCRIPTION
CM05
Assign an AP number to the H.323 IPT card.

The AP number must match the SENSE switch
setting on the H.323 IPT card.
INITIAL
Y=0
(1) 04-15, 20-31: AP No.
(2) 39: H.323 IPT card
CM06
Assign an IPT number to the AP number of

each H.323 IPT card.
INITIAL
Y=07
(1) 0-7: IPT No.
(2) 04-15, 20-31: AP No. of H.323 IPT card
Assign a VIPT (Voice channel for H.323 IPT)

number to the AP number of each H.323 IPT
card.
INITIAL
Y=17
(1) 00-07: VIPT No.
(2) 04-15, 20-31: AP No. of H.323 IPT card
Allow C.O. to C.O. transfer by station or attendant.
(1) 028
(2) 0: To allow
Specify that Ring Transfer for Call TransferAll Calls to an IP trunk is available when a station holds another station.
(1) 253
(2) 0: Available
Send information about Call Forwarding station through IP network.
(1) 373
(2) 0: To send
Specify the maximum number of dialed digits

sent to IP network.
(1) 379
(2) 0 : 24 digits
1 : 15 digits
CM08
DATA
302
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm

DESCRIPTION
A
CM0A
Define the LAN Interface on the H.323 IPT

card.
IPT INITIAL
NOTE:
CM10
DATA
Maximum 8 LAN Interface number

can be assigned for IPT cards.
Y=00
(1) 00-31: LAN Interface No. NOTE
(2) XX0
XX: AP No. 04-15, 20-31 of H.323 IPT
card assigned by CM05 Y=0
Assign the IP address for own H.323 IP trunk.

IPT INITIAL
Y=01
(2) 000000000000-255255255255:
IP Address for own IP trunk
Assign the Subnet Mask for own IP subnet.

IPT INITIAL
Y=02
(2) 000000000000-255255255255:
Subnet Mask for own IP subnet
Assign the Default Gateway Address for own

IP subnet.
IPT INITIAL
Y=03
(2) 000000000000-255255255255:
Default Gateway Address for own IP subnet
Assign a trunk number for voice channels of

4VCT card to the required LEN.
(1) 000-763: LEN

(2) D000-D254: Trunk No.
Do not assign Trunk No. D255 for IP.
NOTE 1: We recommend the setting of VCT

trunk number by CM14, when using
NOTE 2: The VCT trunk number must be assigned from the first LEN (Level 0)
to fourth LEN (Level 3) of each LT
slot.
CM14
Assign a trunk number for voice channels of

4VCT card to the required LEN.
NOTE:
The VCT trunk number must be assigned from the first LEN (Level 0)
to fourth LEN (Level 3) of each LT
slot.
(1) XX ZZZ: LEN

XX : 00-59: FP No.
ZZZ : 000-127: Port No.
(2) D000-D254: Trunk No.
NONE : No data
NOTE:
Do not assign Trunk No. D255

for IP.
303
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm

DESCRIPTION
DATA
CM30
Assign a trunk route number to each VCT

channel.
Y=00
(1) 000-254: Trunk No. assigned by CM10/
CM14
CM35
Assign the trunk route data for voice channel

route.
Y=00
(2) 04: Tie Line
Y=04
(2) 2: Answer signal arrives
Y=05
Specify the incoming connection signal as

Wink Start/CCIS/H.323.
Y=09
(2) 03: Wink Start/CCIS/H.323
Specify the outgoing start condition as Wink

Start/CCIS/H.323.
Y=20
(2) 00: Wink Start/CCIS/H.323
304
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm

DESCRIPTION
C
CM35
Specify the PAD patterns to voice channel

route.
Y=19
(2) 0-3 : Programmable PAD (See CM42.)
4-7 : Fixed PAD (See tables below.)
[Australia/New Zealand]
[North America/-law countries/A-law

countries]
CONNECTION
PATTERNS (A-B)
CM42
DATA
PAD DATA OF B TRUNK [dB]
CONNECTION
PATTERNS (A-B)
DATA DATA DATA DATA

=4 (T/R) =5 (T/R) =6 (T/R) =7 (T/R)
PAD DATA OF B TRUNK [dB]

DATA DATA DATA DATA
=4 (T/R) =5 (T/R) =6 (T/R) =7 (T/R)
Station-IPT
0/0
0/0
0/0
0/0
Station-IPT
0/8
0/4
0/4
0/8
Tone-IPT
0/0
0/0
0/0
0/0
Tone-IPT
0/0
0/0
0/0
0/0
COT/DID/LDT/IPTIPT
0/0
0/0
0/0
0/0
COT/DID/LDT/ODT
(2W E&M)/IPT-IPT
0/0
0/0
0/0
0/0
ODT-IPT
0/0
0/0
0/0
0/0
ODT (4W E&M)-IPT
0/0
0/0
0/0
0/0
DTI/BRT/PRT/CCT/
Virtual IPT-IPT
0/0
0/0
0/0
0/0
DTI/BRT/PRT/CCT/
Virtual IPT-IPT
0/12
0/0
0/12
0/0
T/R: Transmit/Receive
: Loss
When CM35 Y=19 2nd data is set to 0-3, specify the PAD value for programmable PAD pattern.
(1) 50-65: See table below.

(2) 00-07: See tables on next page.
PATTERNS
PAD DATA PATTERNS

CM35 Y=19
2ND
DATA=1
CM35 Y=19
2ND
DATA=2
CM35 Y=19
2ND
DATA=3
50
50
54
58
62
STA/TONE-IPT
CONNECTING
PATTERNS (A-B)
CM35 Y=19
2ND
DATA=0
51
55
59
63
COT/DID/LDT/IPT-IPT
52
56
60
64
ODT (4W E&M)-IPT
1ST DATA
65
DTI/BRT/PRT/CCT/
Virtual IPT-IPT
D
305
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm

DESCRIPTION
D
CM42
DATA
[Australia/New Zealand/Europe/A-law countries]

PATTERNS
2ND DATA
PAD DATA OF
IPT (T/R) [dB]
00
00
01
0/2
02
0/4
03
0/12
04
0/8
15
05
06
07
0/0
08
Not Used
15
: Loss
[North America/-law countries]
PATTERNS
2ND DATA
PAD DATA OF
IPT (T/R) [dB]
00
00
01
0/16
02
0/4
03
0/12
04
0/8
15
05
06
07
0/0
08
Not Used
15
: Loss
E
306
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm

E
CM35
CM30
DESCRIPTION
DATA
Provide the voice channel route with No. 7

CCIS facilities.
Y=90
(2) 0: No. 7 CCIS
Assign the IPT number to each voice channel

route.
Y=91
(2) 0-7: IPT No.
Assign the VIPT number to each voice channel

route.
Y=165
(2) 00-07: VIPT No.
Assign a Circuit Identification Code (CIC) to

each trunk number for voice channel route.
INITIAL
Y=35
(1) 000-254: Trunk No.
(2) 001-127: CIC
NOTE 1: The Circuit Identification Code (CIC) represents a circuit number to designate a trunk (of
each trunk route) used as a voice channel in the network.
Assign this data after setting CM35 Y=90, 91, 165.
NOTE 2: For the first number of CIC, assign the same CIC set by CMBB Y=02.
Then assign the other CIC one after another.
NOTE 3: Assign a CIC for each IP trunk according to the following example.
EXAMPLE: First CIC is 100.
LEVEL No. FOR 4VCT CARD
2ND DATA
VCT 0
VCT 1
VCT 2
100
104
108
101
105
109
102
106
110
103
107
111
307
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm

DESCRIPTION
DATA
CM35
Specify the Type of Service (TOS) field precedence for IP trunk voice packet.
Y=134
(2) 00-07: PRECEDENCE 0-7
15 : PRECEDENCE 0


NOTE 2: By this data setting, the router recognizes the precedence of voice packets and controls
When the router provides DiffServ QoS, specify the DS code point for IP trunk voice packet.
NOTE:
Y=161
When this data is set, the TOS field precedence set by CM35 Y=134 is ineffective. If you
want to validate the precedence set by CM35 Y=134, set CCC (data clear) for CM35
Y=161.
Set the echo canceller for IP trunk to each

trunk route.
Y=163
(2) 0 : Echo canceller OFF
1 : Echo canceller ON
Specify whether RBT for H.323 connection is

sent.
Y=166
(2) 0 : Send
1 : Send RBT according to the Progress
Indicator within Alert
3 : Not sent
When an alternative route is assigned by

CM8A LCR setting, provide the condition
check of IPT Ethernet cable. If a cable is disconnected, the alternative route is selected for
originating a call.
Y=167
(2) 0 : To provide
1 : Not provided
308
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm

DESCRIPTION
CMA7
Assign an Originating Point Code (OPC) to

each IPT number.
INITIAL
NOTE:
DATA
Y=01
(1) 0-7: IPT No.
(2) 00001-16367: Originating Point Code
The Originating Point Code is used to designate an originating office in the network. A
single OPC should be assigned to all IPTs provided in the same office.
Assign the Gatekeeper point code as the Destination Point Code (DPC) to each IPT number.
Y=02
(1) 0-7: IPT No.
Specify the connection type for IP trunks in

Point-to-Point connection.
IPT INITIAL
Y=46
(1) 0-7: IPT No.
(2) 1 : Point-to-Point
Assign the H.323 LAN Interface number for

control packet to each IPT number.
Y=70
(1) 0-7: IPT No.
Assign the H.323 Profile number for control

packet to each IPT number.
Y=71
(1) 0-7: IPT No.
(2) 00-15: Profile No. for control packet
CMA8
Assign the IPT number to the Destination

Point Code (DPC) assigned by CMA7 Y=02.
(1) 00001-16367: Destination Point Code assigned by CMA7 Y=02

(2) 0-7: IPT No.
CMBB
Assign the H.323 LAN Interface number for

voice packet to each VIPT number.
Y=00
(1) 00-07: VIPT No.
Assign the IPT control channel number for

H.323 to each VIPT number.
Y=01
(1) 00-07: VIPT No.
(2) 0-7: IPT No.
309
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm

DESCRIPTION
H
CMBB
Assign the first number of Circuit Identification Code for H.323 to each VIPT number.
NOTE:
CMBA
DATA
Y=02
(1) 00-07: VIPT No.
(2) 001-127: First number of CIC
For the first number of CIC, assign

the same CIC set by CM30 Y=35.
Assign the H.323 Profile number for voice

packet to each VIPT number.
Y=03
(1) 00-07: VIPT No.
(2) 00-31: Profile No. for voice packet
Specify the Type of Service (TOS) field precedence for H.323 IP trunk control packet.
IPT INITIAL
Y=04
(1) 00-31: Profile No. assigned by CMA7
Y=71
(2) 00-07: PRECEDENCE 0-7
15 : PRECEDENCE 0


NOTE 2: By this data setting, the router recognizes the precedence of control packets and controls
When the route provides DiffServ QoS, specify the DS code point for H.323 IP trunk control
packet.
IPT INITIAL
NOTE:
Y=10
Y=71
When this data is set, the TOS field precedence set by CMBA Y=04 is ineffective. If you
want to validate the precedence set by CMBA Y=04, set CCC (data clear) for CMBA
Y=10.
310
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm

DESCRIPTION
I
CMBA
DATA
Specify the voice encoding selection precedence for H.323 IP trunk.

IPT INITIAL
DATA
Y=21
(1) 00-31: Profile No. assigned by CMBB
Y=03
(2) 1-7 : See table below.
HIGHSELECTION PRECEDENCE LOW
MODE
Standard Mode 1
G.729a
G.723.1
G.711
Standard Mode 2
G.729a
G.711
G.723.1
Tone Quality Mode 2
G.711
G.723.1
G.729a
Band Mode 2
G.723.1
G.711
G.729a
Tone Quality Mode 1
G.711
G.729a
G.723.1
Band Mode 1
G.723.1
G.729a
G.711
Standard Mode 1
G.729a
G.723.1
G.711
NOTE:
When the voice encoding selection setting differs from that for the opposite IP trunk, the
setting on the IP trunk which first makes the request of TCP connection takes priority over
the other IP trunk. So, the voice encoding selection precedence may be different from the
setting on the own IP trunk according to the circumstances when the TCP connection is
made.
311
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm

J
CMBA
DESCRIPTION
DATA
Specify the payload size for H.323 IP trunk.

IPT INITIAL
Y=22
Y=03
(2) 1 : 20 ms.
2 : 30 ms.
3 : 40 ms.
NOTE 1: Set the payload size according to the maximum voice channels per IPT card as follows.
MAXIMUM VOICE CHANNELS PER IPT
PAYLOAD
SIZE
G.729a
G.711
G.723.1
20 ms.
30 ms.
40 ms.
12
10
NOTE 2: When G.723.1 is applied for voice encoding, 30 ms. is set regardless of this data setting.
NOTE 3: When the payload size setting differs from that for the opposite IP trunk, the shorter size
is adopted.
K
312
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm

DESCRIPTION
DATA
CMBA
Assign the H.323 Profile data to Profile number.

IPT INITIAL
Y=30 Gatekeeper IP Address

Y=71
(2) aaa bbb ccc ddd: Gatekeeper IP Address
aaa : 000-255
bbb: 000-255
ccc : 000-255
ddd: 000-255
Y=31 Gatekeeper Port No.
Y=71
(2) 00000-65534: Gatekeeper Port No.
NOTE:
CMBA Y=32 must be set when the

Gatekeeper requires E.164 Address
as the ID Address of the Gateway.
Y=32 E.164 Address

Y=71
(2) X-XX...XX: E.164 Address
(Maximum 24 digits)
X: 0-9, *, #
NONE
: No data
313
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm

DESCRIPTION
L
CMBA
NOTE:
DATA
4 ports from the Base port per Circuit Identification Code (CIC) (assigned by CM30 Y=35) are used for
RTP. Only first port (transmitting
the RTP packet) and third port (receiving the RTP packet) are used actually. Second port (transmitting the
RTCP packet) and fourth port (receiving the RTCP packet) are not
used.
Y=34 RTP Base Port No.

Y=71
00-31: Profile No. assigned by CMBB
Y=03
(2) 20000-65000: RTP Base Port No.
NONE
: 56000
Example: When the first number of Circuit Identification Code (CIC) for H.323 (assigned by CMBB
Y=02) is 100, 100-115 of CIC are used. For the default settings, port number will be used
as shown below per CIC.
PORT No.
CHANNEL No.
00 (100)
01 (101)
02 (102)
1 (TRANSMITTING
RTP PACKET)
56000
56004
2 (TRANSMITTING
RTCP PACKET)
56001
3 (RECEIVING RTP
PACKET)
4 (RECEIVING RTCP
PACKET)
...
10 (110)
11 (111)
56008
56040
56044
56005
56009
56041
56045
56002
56006
56010
56042
56046
56003
56007
56011
56043
56047
...
( )=CIC assigned by CM30 Y=35

Base Port No.=56000 + Channel No. 4
Y=36 H.323 call control procedure
Y=71
(2) 0 : Fast Connect
1 : Normal Connect
M
314
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm

DESCRIPTION
DATA
CMBA
Specify the timing to send voice packet when

H.323 call control procedure is Fast Connect.
IPT INITIAL
Y=37
Y=71
(2) 0 : When the destination answers
1 : When the destination is ringing
Specify the timing to provide H.245 link.

IPT INITIAL
Y=38
Y=71
(2) 0 : When the destination answers
1 : When the destination is ringing
Specify the call release when the voice channel

open is failed.
IPT INITIAL
Y=39
Y=71
(2) 0 : Keep the call
1 : Release the call
Specify the method of Q931 Signaling bearer

information sending.
IPT INITIAL
Y=41
Y=71
(2) 0 : SpeechUnrestricted digital information
3.1kHz audioUnrestricted digital
information
1 : SpeechUnrestricted digital information
2 : 3.1kHz audioUnrestricted digital information
3 : Own office setting transparent
(Standard setting)
315
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm

DESCRIPTION
DATA
CMBA
Specify the method of Q931 Signaling bearer

information receiving.
IPT INITIAL
Y=42
Y=71
(2) 1 : Unrestricted digital
information3.1kHz audio
2 : Unrestricted digital
informationSpeech
3 : Opposite office setting transparent
(Standard setting)
Specify whether E.164 Address (changing the

calling number to E.164 Address) is provided.
Y=44
Y=71
(2) 00 : Provide E.164 Address
01 : Provide E.164 Address when the calling number is not sent/Not provide
E.164 Address when the calling number is sent
15 : E.164 Address is not provided
NOTE 1: CMBA Y=44 must be set when the

Gatekeeper requires E.164 Address
as the ID Address of the Gateway. If
not, set this data to 15.
NOTE 2: E.164 Address is assigned by CMBA
Y=32.
O
316
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm

DESCRIPTION
CMBA
Assign the H.323 ID to Profile number with

character or character code.
When you assign the data with character code,
use CMBA Y=46 for upper 12 characters and
CMBA Y=47 for lower 12 characters.
IPT INITIAL
NOTE:
DATA
CMBA Y=45 or Y=46, 47 must be

set when the Gatekeeper requires
H.323 ID as the ID Address of the
Gateway.
Y=45
Y=71
(2) A-Z, 0-9: Character
Y=46
Y=71
(2) XXX...X: Character Code (24 digits, 12
characters fixed)
Page 319
NONE : No data
Y=47
Y=71
characters fixed)
Page 319
NONE : No data
317
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm
JULY/01/2006

DESCRIPTION
CMBA
Assign the Gateway Prefix to Profile number

with character or character code.
When you assign the data with character code,
use CMBA Y=49 for upper 12 characters and
CMBA Y=50 for lower 12 characters.
IPT INITIAL
NOTE:
DATA
CMBA Y=48 or Y=49, 50 must be

set when the Gatekeeper requires
Supported Prefix (GW Prefix).
Depending on the setting on the
Gatekeeper, Zone Prefix (Area
Code) or Technology Prefix (Gateway Type, Class) can be assigned.
Specify the H.245 message transmission method.

IPT INITIAL
Y=48
Y=71
(2) A-Z, 0-9: Character
Y=49
Y=71
characters fixed)
Page 319
NONE : No data
Y=50
Y=71
characters fixed)
Page 319
NONE : No data
Y=51
Y=71
(2) 00
: Tunneling (Coding to Q.931 Facility message)
NONE : TCP connection for H.245
END
318
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm
JULY/01/2006

Character Code Table

X: Upper digit Y: Lower digit
X
&
<
>
319
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm

To correct jitter for H.323 IP trunk, assign the following data.

START
DESCRIPTION
CMBA
Specify the maximum threshold of packet discard probability for H.323 IP trunk.
IPT INITIAL
Y=12
Y=03
(2) 001-100 : 1 %-100 %
(1 % increment)
NONE : 10 %

H.323 IP trunk.
IPT INITIAL
Y=13
Y=03
(2) 001-060 : 10 ms.-600 ms.
(10 ms. increments)
NONE : 300 ms.
NOTE:
DATA
Assign the value which exceeds the minimum value for jitter buffer set by CMBA Y=14.

H.323 IP trunk.
IPT INITIAL
Y=14
Y=03
(2) 001-060 : 10 ms.-600 ms.
(10 ms. increments)
NONE : 40 ms.
NOTE 1: This data is used for the default delay for voice packet.
NOTE 2: Assign the value which does not exceed the maximum value for jitter buffer set by CMBA
Y=13.
A
320
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm

DESCRIPTION
CMBA
Specify the jitter adjustment interval for H.323

IP trunk (statistics count for jitter buffer).
IPT INITIAL
NOTE:
DATA
Jitter buffer is decreased by the interval of [jitter statistics interval (second) jitter adjustment interval (time)].
Specify the jitter statistics interval for H.323 IP

trunk.
IPT INITIAL
NOTE:
Y=15
Y=03
(2) 001-255 : 1 time-255 times
(1 time increment)
NONE : 5 times
Y=16
Y=03
(2) 001-255 : 1-255 seconds
NONE : 1 second
Jitter buffer is increased by the interval set by this data.
Specify the time adjustment interval for H.323

IP trunk.
IPT INITIAL
Y=17
Y=03
(2) 001-255 : 1-255 seconds
NONE : 10 seconds
321
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm

DESCRIPTION
CMBA
Specify the maximum threshold value of early

arrival packet used for jitter buffer adjustment
for H.323 IP trunk.
IPT INITIAL
NOTE:
DATA
Jitter buffer is decreased only when the jitter buffer has not been increased and the IP
trunk receives the number of packets which exceeds the value set by CMBA Y=18.
Specify the maximum threshold value of early

arrival packet used for meantime adjustment
for H.323 IP trunk.
IPT INITIAL
NOTE:
Y=18
Y=03
(2) 001-100 : 1 %-100 %
(1 % increment)
NONE : 8 %
Y=19
Y=03
(2) 001-100 : 1 %-100 %
(1 % increment)
NONE : 80 %
The meantime is decreased only when the number of early arrival packets exceeds the value set by CMBA Y=19 during the interval set by CMBA Y=17.
END
322
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm

SYSTEM DATA BACKUP
SYSTEM DATA BACKUP

CAUTION
If you operate as follows without system data backup after system data setting or service
memory setting (registration of the features such as Call Forwarding and Speed Calling
[Speed Dialing] from a station), the data that has been set is invalid.
You must execute the system data backup before the following operations.
-Turning Off the system
-System Initialization (reset of MP card)
-Changing the MP card to Off-Line Mode
-Changing the MP card to On-Line Mode after system data setting under Off-Line Mode
You can execute the system data backup by the following two ways.
-Executing the system data backup once a day at the time set by CM43 Y=5>00
(If no data is set, the default setting is 3:00 a.m.)
-Executing the system data backup from MAT/CAT by CMEC Y=6>0:0
Do not reset the MP card while SYSD lamp on the MP card is flashing.
323
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm
OCTOBER/14/2005

SYSTEM DATA BACKUP
(1)
Regular system data backup
START
CM43
DESCRIPTION
DATA
Assign the time for saving the system data

once a day.
Y=5
(1) 00: Regular Backup Time
(2) HH MM
HH
: 00-23 (Hour)
MM
: 00-59 (Minute)
NONE : 0300 (3:00 a.m.)
END
(2)
Manual system data backup
START
DESCRIPTION
DATA
CMEC
Save the system data for backup to flash memory on the MP card.
Backup takes about 90 seconds on On-line
mode, or about 1 minute on Off-line mode.
While saving the system data to flash memory,
SYSD lamp on the MP card flashes.
Y=6
(1) 0: System Data Backup
(2) 0: Start save
1: Now saving
3: Stand by
NOTE:
1 is displayed while the system

data is being saved.
END
324
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm

SYSTEM RESET
SYSTEM RESET
When you set the system data under Off-Line mode, system reset is required after data setting.
(1)
Set the SW3 to 0 (On Line) position and press the SW1 on the MP card.
(2)
The lamps light in the following order.

RUN lamp lights momentarily.
L0 lamp flashes while copying the MP program from the Flash Memory to the SDRAM.
L0 lamp goes off.
SYSD lamp lights while copying the system data from the Flash Memory to the SDRAM.
SYSD lamp goes off.
RUN lamp flashes.
(3)
The operating mode has been changed to On-Line mode.

The backup data has been restored to the system.
325
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm
326
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch3002.fm
JUNE/01/2007
CHAPTER 4 CIRCUIT CARD INFORMATION
CHAPTER 4
CIRCUIT CARD
INFORMATION
This chapter explains the mounting location, the meaning of lamp indications
and the method of switch settings of each circuit card for the system.
HOW TO READ THIS CHAPTER .............................................. 328

MOUNTING LOCATION OF CIRCUIT CARDS ......................... 329
LIST OF REQUIRED CIRCUIT CARDS .................................... 335
PN-CP24-A/PN-CP24-B/PN-CP24-C/PN-CP24-D (MP) .................
PN-CP27-A/PN-CP27-B (MP) .........................................................
PZ-M606-A (ETHER) ......................................................................
PN-32IPLA (IP-PAD) ......................................................................
PN-32IPLA-A (IP-PAD) ...................................................................
PN-16VCTA/PN-16VCTA-A (16VCT) .............................................
PN-8IPLA (IP-PAD) ........................................................................
PN-IPTB (IPT) .................................................................................
PN-4VCTI (4VCT) ...........................................................................
327
336
342
347
349
353
357
359
362
366
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch4001.fm
JULY/01/2006


This chapter explains the following items about each circuit card used in this system. Explanations are given in alphabetical order of the circuit card names within each circuit card category (Control, Application
Processor, and Line/Trunk).
(1)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The locations of lamps, switches, and connectors of each circuit card are shown by a face layout.
(2)
Lamp Indications
The name, color, and functions of each indicator lamp equipped on each circuit card are described in
a table.
(3)
Switch Settings
The name, settings, and functions of each switch equipped on each circuit card are described in a
table.
Each switch setting table has a CHECK column. Make necessary entries in the CHECK column during
and/or after the system installation and maintenance, and use each table as a reference for subsequent system maintenance and operations.
328
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch4001.fm

MOUNTING LOCATION OF CIRCUIT CARDS

This section explains the conditions for mounting circuit cards used in the system.
Regular PIM
The figure below shows circuit card mounting slots allocated in the regular PIM.
Circuit Card Mounting Slots (Regular PIM)
PFT
MP12/FP12
LT11/AP11
LT10/AP10
LT09/AP09
LT08/AP08
LTC1
LT07/AP07
DC/DC
PWR
*3
*2
LT06/AP06
LTC0
*5
LT05/AP05
*4
LT04/AP04
LT03/AP03
*3
LT02/AP02
*5
PIM
0-7
LT01/AP01
LT00/AP00
VM
AC/DC
PWR
*1
*4
LTC2
LTC3
BWB
FRONT
LT00-LT11 : Line/Trunk card mounting slots

AP00-AP11: Application Processor card mounting slots
MP12
: PN-CP24-A/PN-CP24-B/PN-CP24-C/
PN-CP24-D mounting slot
FP12
: PN-CP15 mounting slot
VM
: PZ-VM00/VM00-M/VM10-M/VM03-M
mounting slot
PFT
: PZ-8PFTB mounting slot
AC/DC PWR: PZ-PW121/PW126 mounting slot
DC/DC PWR: PZ-PW122 mounting slot
*1 PN-CP24-A/PN-CP24-B/PN-CP24-C/PN-CP24-D (MP) card is mounted in the MP12 slot of

PIM0.
PZ-M606-A (ETHER) card is mounted on the PN-CP24-A/PN-CP24-B/PN-CP24-C/PN-CP24-D
(MP) card.
PN-CP15 (FP) card is mounted in the FP12 slot of PIM2, 4, 6 according to the system configuration.
329
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch4001.fm
JULY/01/2006

*2 PN-IPTB (IPT) card is mounted in the AP00-AP11 slots of PIM0-7. NOTE 1, NOTE 2
PN-4VCTI (4VCT) card is mounted in the LT00-LT11 slots of PIM0-7. NOTE 1, NOTE 2
Either line/trunk cards or application processor cards can be mounted in the LT00/AP00-LT11/
AP11 slots of PIM0-7.
*3 PN-32IPLA/PN-32IPLA-A (IP-PAD) card is mounted in the LT01 and/or LT05 slots of PIM0-7.
NOTE 3, NOTE 4
*4 PN-16VCTA/PN-16VCTA-A (16VCT) card is mounted in the LT02, LT03 and/or LT06, LT07
slots of PIM0-7, next to the PN-32IPLA/PN-32IPLA-A (IP-PAD) card.
NOTE 3, NOTE 4
*5 PN-8IPLA (IP-PAD) card is mounted in the LT00 and/or LT04 slots of PIM0-7.
PZ-24IPLA (24DPS) card is mounted on the PN-8IPLA (IP-PAD) card. NOTE 5, NOTE 6
NOTE 1: When one IPT and one 4VCT reside in PIM 0, two additional LT slots must be left vacant.
When one IPT and two 4VCT reside in PIM 0, three additional LT slots must be left vacant.
When one IPT and three 4VCT reside in PIM 0, four additional LT slots must be left vacant.
When one IPT and four 4VCT reside in PIM 0, five additional LT slots must be left vacant.
NOTE 2: When one IPT and one 4VCT reside in PIM 1-7, no additional LT slots must be left vacant.
When one IPT and two 4VCT reside in PIM 1-7, one additional LT slot must be left vacant.
When one IPT and three 4VCT reside in PIM 1-7, two additional LT slots must be left vacant.
When one IPT and four 4VCT reside in PIM 1-7, three additional LT slots must be left vacant.
NOTE 3: One PN-32IPLA/PN-32IPLA-A (IP-PAD) card requires two physical slots and two vacant slots.
When the IP-PAD card is mounted in the LT01 slot, the LT00 physical slot is required.
The LT02 and LT03 slots must be vacant except the 16VCT card.
When mounting the 16VCT card, use the vacant slot for the IP-PAD card.
When the IP-PAD card is mounted in the LT01 slot, the first 16VCT (VCT0) card is mounted
in the LT02 and the second 16VCT (VCT1) card is mounted in the LT03.
NOTE 4: Do not mount any other L/T cards in the LT08-LT11 slots when you mount the IP-PAD and
16VCT cards in the LT05-LT07 slots (AP cards are mountable in AP08-AP11 slots).
330
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch4001.fm
JULY/01/2006

NOTE 5: When using Series 3300 R8 software or later in the system, mount the IP-PAD (PN-8IPLA) card
as shown below.
the IP-PAD card.
slots).
331
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch4001.fm
JULY/01/2006

PIM for Backup CPU System

The figure below shows circuit card mounting slots allocated in the PIM0 for the Backup CPU system.
Circuit Card Mounting Slots (Backup CPU)
*6
LTC2
*3
PFT
*2
MP00
MP01
LT10/AP10
LT09/AP09
LT08/AP08
LTC1
LTC0
LT07/AP07
*5
*4
LT06/AP06
*7
LT05/AP05
*6
LT04/AP04
*5
LT03/AP03
*7
LT02/AP02
PIM0
(For
Backup
CPU)
LT01/AP01
LT00/AP00
VM
AC/DC
PWR
*1
LTC3
BWB
DC/DC
PWR
FRONT
LT00-LT10 : Line/Trunk card mounting slots
AP00-AP10 : Application Processor card mounting slots
MP00/MP01: PN-CP27-A/PN-CP27-B mounting slot
VM
: PZ-VM00/VM00-M/VM10-M/VM03-M
mounting slot
PFT
: PZ-8PFTB mounting slot
AC/DC PWR: PZ-PW121/PW126 mounting slot
DC/DC PWR: PZ-PW122 mounting slot
*1
*2
*3
*4
PN-CP27-A/PN-CP27-B (MP0) card is mounted in the MP00 slot of PIM0.

PN-CP27-A/PN-CP27-B (MP1) card is mounted in the MP01 slot of PIM0.
PZ-M606-A (ETHER) cards are mounted on the PN-CP27-A/PN-CP27-B (MP) cards.
PN-IPTB (IPT) card is mounted in the AP00-AP10 slots of PIM0. NOTE 1, NOTE 2
PN-4VCTI (4VCT) card is mounted in the LT00-LT10 slots of PIM0. NOTE 1, NOTE 2
Either line/trunk cards or application processor cards can be mounted in the LT00/AP00-LT10/
AP10 slots of PIM0.
*5 PN-32IPLA/PN-32IPLA-A (IP-PAD) card is mounted in the LT01 and/or LT05 slots of PIM0.
NOTE 3, NOTE 4
*6 PN-16VCTA/PN-16VCTA-A (16VCT) card is mounted in the LT02, LT03 and/or LT06, LT07
slots of PIM0, next to the PN-32IPLA/PN-32IPLA-A (IP-PAD) card.
NOTE 3, NOTE 4
332
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch4001.fm
JULY/01/2006

*7 PN-8IPLA (IP-PAD) card is mounted in the LT00 and/or LT04 slots of PIM0.
PZ-24IPLA (24DSP) card is mounted on the PN-8IPLA (IP-PAD) card. NOTE 5, NOTE 6
NOTE 1: When one IPT and one 4VCT reside in PIM 0, two additional LT slots must be left vacant.
When one IPT and two 4VCT reside in PIM 0, three additional LT slots must be left vacant.
When one IPT and three 4VCT reside in PIM 0, four additional LT slots must be left vacant.
When one IPT and four 4VCT reside in PIM 0, five additional LT slots must be left vacant.
NOTE 2: When one IPT and one 4VCT reside in PIM 1-7, no additional LT slots must be left vacant.
When one IPT and two 4VCT reside in PIM 1-7, one additional LT slot must be left vacant.
When one IPT and three 4VCT reside in PIM 1-7, two additional LT slots must be left vacant.
When one IPT and four 4VCT reside in PIM 1-7, three additional LT slots must be left vacant.
NOTE 3: One PN-32IPLA/PN-32IPLA-A (IP-PAD) card requires two physical slots and two vacant slots.
When mounting the 16VCT card, use the vacant slot for the IP-PAD card.
NOTE 4: Do not mount any other L/T cards in the LT08-LT10 slots when you mount the IP-PAD and
16VCT cards in the LT05-LT07 slots (AP cards are mountable in AP08-AP10 slots).
333
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch4001.fm
JULY/01/2006

NOTE 5: When using Series 3300 R8 software or later in the system, mount the IP-PAD (PN-8IPLA) card
as shown below.
the IP-PAD card.
slots).
334
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch4001.fm
JULY/01/2006

LIST OF REQUIRED CIRCUIT CARDS
LIST OF REQUIRED CIRCUIT CARDS

The table below shows the required circuit cards to be explained in this section.
List of Required Circuit Cards

EXTRACTION/
INSERTION WITH
POWER ON
SWITCH
: ALLOWED
REFERENCE
: PROVIDED
: ALLOWED
PAGE
: NOT
AFTER MB*
PROVIDED
: NOT
ALLOWED
NAME
(FUNCTIONAL
NAME)
LAMP
: PROVIDED
: NOT
PROVIDED
PN-CP24-A/
PN-CP24-B/
PN-CP24-C/
PN-CP24-D (MP)
Page 336
PN-CP27-A/
PN-CP27-B (MP)
Page 342
PZ-M606-A
(ETHER)
Page 347
PN-32IPLA
(IP-PAD)
Page 349
PN-32IPLA-A
(IP-PAD)
Page 353
PN-16VCTA/
PN-16VCTA-A
(16VCT)
Page 357
PN-8IPLA
(IP-PAD)
Page 359
PN-IPTB
(IPT)
Page 362
PN-4VCTI
(4VCT)
Page 366
*MB=Make Busy
335
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch4001.fm
JULY/01/2006
PN-CP24-A/PN-CP24-B/PN-CP24-C/PN-CP24-D (MP)
JP1
SW3
RUN
SW1
SW2
VR
JACK
SYSD
L0
CLK IN
JP0
SW4
RS1
RS0
CONN
DK
CONN: To CONN connector on PZ-M606-A (ETHER)
336
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch4001.fm
JULY/01/2006
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
RUN
Green
Flash (120 IPM) : On Line

Flash (slowly) : Off Line
OFF or ON
: This card is not operating.
Lights momentarily when initializing this card.
SYSD
Red
Flashes while writing the system data for backup to the Flash Memory.
Lights while copying the system data from the Flash Memory to the
SDRAM.
L0
Green
Flashes at 240 IPM while copying the MP program from the Flash
Memory to the SDRAM.
When executing the MP program remote download to the PN-CP24-C/
PN-CP24-D card, flashes at 240 IPM while downloading the MP program to the Flash Memory (outdated side).
PN-CP24-D card, remains lit when the MP program downloaded to the
Flash Memory (outdated side) is completed.
PN-CP24-D card, disappears when the program change of the Flash
Memory (outdated side) and the Flash Memory (upgraded side) is completed.
PN-CP24-D card, flashes at 120 IPM when the MP program download
to the Flash Memory (outdated side) is interrupted/fails.
PN-CP24-D card, flashes at 60 IPM while copying the program of
Flash Memory (upgraded side) to the Flash Memory (outdated side).
PN-CP24-D card, flashes specially (ON : OFF=7 : 3) when the program copy from the Flash Memory (upgraded side) to the Flash Memory (outdated side) is completed.
CLK IN
Green
Remains lit while receiving clock signals to the PLO.
337
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch4001.fm
JULY/01/2006
Switch Settings
CAUTION
When the operating power is being supplied to this circuit card, do not plug/unplug this circuit
card into/from its mounting slot.
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW3 (Rotary SW)
CHECK
On Line
(Call processing is in progress)
Off Line (Call processing is stopped)

I/O port: As per CM40 Y=08

I/O port: 9600 bps (Fixed)
Debug Mode
(For collecting control signals between
MP and SIP cards)
NOTE 1
0-F
FUNCTION
5
NOTE 2

I/O port: 9600 bps
6
NOTE 2

I/O port: 19200 bps
7
NOTE 2

I/O port: 38400 bps
8
NOTE 2

I/O port: 57600 bps
For clearing the office data
For setting the resident system program
1, 9
A, D-F
Not used
NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.

NOTE 2: Only when executing MP Program Download (Local download) using MATWorX, set the
SW3 to 5-8.
338
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch4001.fm
JULY/01/2006
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW1 (Push SW)
SW2
(Piano SW)
FUNCTION
CHECK
For initializing CPU
OFF
ON
A-law (Australia)
OFF
-law (North America)
Selection of PLO0 input

(Phase Locked Oscillator)
For clock receiver office:
4
3
2
1
SW2-2 SW2-3
ON
2, 3
FUNCTION
OFF
OFF
1.5 MHz clock

[For PN-24DTA/PN-24CCT/
PN-24PRT/PN-DTA/PN-DTB/
PZ-M649]
ON
OFF
192 kHz clock

[For PN-BRTA]
OFF
ON
2 MHz clock
[For PN-30DTC/PN-2BRT/
PN-4BRT/PN-30CCT/PN-30PRT/
PN-DTA/PN-DTB/PZ-M650]
ON
ON
Not used
For clock source office:

SW2-3
SW2-2
OFF
OFF
4
ON
When using RS1 port for built-in

MODEM
OFF
When using RS1 port for RS-232C

339
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch4001.fm
JUNE/01/2007
SWITCH NAME
SW4 (Dip SW)
ON
1 2 3 4
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
FUNCTION
OFF
Not used
OFF
Not used
CHECK

3, 4
SW4-3
SW4-4
FUNCTION
OFF
OFF
1.5 MHz clock

PZ-M649]
ON
OFF
192 kHz clock

[For PN-BRTA]
OFF
ON
2 MHz clock
ON
ON
Not used

SW4-3
SW4-4
OFF
OFF
VR (Rotary SW)
DK (Connector)
Variable Resistor for External Hold

Tone Source
(Volume [low to high] Clockwise)
02
Ground detection
01
Ground sending
02
01
340
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch4001.fm
JUNE/01/2007
SWITCH NAME
JP0 (Jumper pin)
Front
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
FUNCTION
CHECK
UP
For normal operation

(Battery backup ON)
DOWN
Not used
(Battery backup OFF)
RIGHT
For using external hold tone source

(When Pin Jack on the MP card is in
use)
LEFT
For using internal hold tone source

(When Melody IC on the MP card is in
use)
JP1 (Jumper pin)
Front
The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of

in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
341
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch4001.fm
JUNE/01/2007
PN-CP27-A/PN-CP27-B (MP)
JP1
SW3
RUN
SW1
SW2
JACK
VR
JP0
SYSD
L0
CLK IN
STBY
MB
SW4
CONN
RS1
RS0
DK
CONN: To CONN connector on PZ-M606-A (ETHER)
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
RUN
Green
Flash (120 IPM) : On Line

Flash (slowly) : Off Line
OFF or ON
Lights momentarily when initializing this card.
SYSD
Red
Flashes while writing the system data for backup to the Flash Memory.
Lights while copying the system data from the Flash Memory to the
SDRAM.
L0
Green
Flashes at 240 IPM while copying the MP program from the Flash
Memory to the SDRAM.
CLK IN
Green
Remains lit while receiving clock signals to the PLO.
STBY
Red
Remains lit while this card is a stand by mode.
342
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch4001.fm
JULY/01/2006
Switch Settings
CAUTION
When the operating power is being supplied to this circuit card, do not plug/unplug this circuit
card into/from its mounting slot.
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW3 (Rotary SW)
CHECK
On Line
(Call processing is in progress)

I/O port: As per CM40 Y=08

I/O port: 9600 bps (Fixed)
Debug Mode
(For collecting control signals between
MP and SIP cards)
NOTE 1
0-F
FUNCTION
5
NOTE 2

I/O port: 9600 bps
6
NOTE 2

I/O port: 19200 bps
7
NOTE 2

I/O port: 38400 bps
8
NOTE 2

I/O port: 57600 bps
For clearing the office data
For setting the resident system program
1, 9
A, D-F
Not used

NOTE 2: Only when executing MP Program Download (Local download) using MATWorX, set the
SW3 to 5-8.
343
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch4001.fm
JULY/01/2006
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW1 (Push SW)
SW2
(Piano SW)
FUNCTION
CHECK
For initializing CPU
ON
A-law (Australia)
OFF
-law (North America)

OFF
4
3
2
1
SW2-2 SW2-3
ON
2, 3
FUNCTION
OFF
OFF
1.5 MHz clock

PZ-M649]
ON
OFF
192 kHz clock

[For PN-BRTA]
OFF
ON
2 MHz clock
ON
ON
Not used

SW2-3
SW2-2
OFF
OFF
4
ON
When using RS1 port for built-in

MODEM
OFF
When using RS1 port for RS-232C

344
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch4001.fm
JUNE/01/2007
SWITCH NAME
SW4 (Dip SW)
ON
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
FUNCTION
OFF
Not used
OFF
Not used
1 2 3 4
CHECK

3, 4
SW4-3
SW4-4
FUNCTION
OFF
OFF
1.5 MHz clock

PZ-M649]
ON
OFF
192 kHz clock

[For PN-BRTA]
OFF
ON
2 MHz clock
ON
ON
Not used

SW4-3
SW4-4
OFF
OFF
MB (Toggle SW)
NOTE3
VR (Rotary SW)
UP
DOWN
For make-busy
Variable Resistor for External Hold
Tone Source
(Volume [low to high] Clockwise)
NOTE 3: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.
345
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch4001.fm
JUNE/01/2007
SWITCH NAME
DK (Connector)
02
01
JP0 (Jumper pin)
Front
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
FUNCTION
02
Ground detection
01
Ground sending
CHECK
UP

(Battery backup ON)
DOWN
Not used
(Battery backup OFF)
RIGHT
For using external hold tone source

(When Pin Jack on the MP card is in
use)
LEFT
For using internal hold tone source

(When Melody IC on the MP card is in
use)
JP1 (Jumper pin)
Front

346
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch4001.fm
JUNE/01/2007
PZ-M606-A (ETHER)
PZ-M606-A (ETHER)
Locations of Lamps, Switches and Connectors
FACE
REAR
LAN
CONN:
To CONN Connector
on PN-CP24-A/
PN-CP24-B/
PN-CP24-C/
PN-CP24-D/
PN-CP27-A/
PN-CP27-B (MP)
CONN
LINK
100M
TX
RX
COL
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
LINK
Green
Remains lit when link is established.
100M
Green
ON : Ethernet is operating at 100 Mbps.

OFF : Ethernet is operating at 10 Mbps.
TX
Green
Remains lit when transmitting the data.
RX
Green
Remains lit when receiving the data.
COL
Yellow
Remains lit when detecting IP data collision.
347
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch4001.fm
JULY/01/2006
PZ-M606-A (ETHER)
Switch Settings
This card has no switches.
Mounting PZ-M606-A Card
When mounting the ETHER card on the MP card, do the following procedure.
STEP1: Take off four screws from the rear side of ETHER support.
NOTE:
Supports and screws are attached to the ETHER card.
STEP2: Connect the CONN connector on the ETHER card and the CONN connector on the MP card.
STEP3: Secure the ETHER card to the MP card with four screws which have been taken off by STEP1.
Mounting ETHER Card on MP card
Support
CONN Connector of ETHER Card
ETHER Card
ETHER Card
MP Card
CONN Connector on MP Card
348
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch4001.fm
OCTOBER/14/2005
PN-32IPLA (IP-PAD)
PN-32IPLA (IP-PAD)
PN-32IPLA
PZ-M571
SUBA
PZ-M572 PN-32IPLA
RUN
VC3
VC2
VC1
VC0
SUBB
MB
RUN
MB
SW0
SW0
BL
LOAD
PCON
AUX
VCTB
VCTB
VCTA
VCTA
VCTB/VCTA:
To 16VCT Card VCT1A/
VCT0A Connector
LAN:
To LAN
LAN
MODE
PZ-M571
NALM
LINK
IPDL
100M
TX
RX
COL
LAN
MODE
349
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch4001.fm
PN-32IPLA (IP-PAD)
Lamp Indications
PN-32IPLA
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
RUN
Green
Flash (120 IPM) : This card is operating normally.

OFF
BL
Red
ON : At least one line is busy.

OFF : All lines are idle.
LOAD
Not used
PCON
Not used
AUX
Not used
VC3
Green
Remains lit when the last 16-channel of IP-PAD is available without

Card No. 1 of 16VCT.
VC2
Green
Remains lit when Card No. 1 of 16VCT is operating.
VC1
Green
Remains lit when the first 16-channel of IP-PAD is available without

VC0
Green
PZ-M571
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
NALM
Not used
LINK
Green
ON : Connected to the IP network.

OFF : Not connected to the IP network.
IPDL
Not used
100M
Green

TX
Green
ON : Sending IP data
OFF : Not sending IP data
RX
Green
ON : Receiving IP data
OFF : Not receiving IP data
COL
Yellow
ON : Detecting IP data collision
350
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch4001.fm
PN-32IPLA (IP-PAD)
Switch Settings
PN-32IPLA
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
MB (Toggle SW)
UP
DOWN
NOTE
SW0
(Piano Key SW)
OFF
4
3
2
1
ON
NOTE:
FUNCTION
CHECK
For make-busy
OFF
Not used
OFF
Not used
OFF
Not used
OFF
Not used
When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.
351
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch4001.fm
PN-32IPLA (IP-PAD)
PZ-M571
SWITCH NAME
MODE
(Rotary SW)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
0-F
FUNCTION
CHECK
Auto Negotiation ON
(Ethernet 10 Mbps/100 Mbps automatic
change) NOTE
Auto Negotiation OFF

(10 Mbps [Half-Duplex] fixed)

1, 2, 5-F
Not used

NOTE:
As for the conditions of Full-Duplex or Half-Duplex operation, refer to FULL-DUPLEX/

HALF-DUPLEX CONDITIONS OF LAN INTERFACE.
Page F2
352
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch4001.fm
JULY/01/2006
PN-32IPLA-A (IP-PAD)
PN-32IPLA-A
PZ-M632
PZ-M633 PN-32IPLA-A
SUBA
RUN
MB
RUN
MB
SW0
SW0
VC3
VC2
VC1
VC0
BL
LOAD
PCON
AUX
VCTB
VCTA
SUBB
VCTB/VCTA:
To 16VCT Card VCT1A/
VCT0A Connector
VCTB
MODE
VCTA
LAN
LAN:
To LAN
PZ-M632
NALM
LINK
IPDL
100M
TX
RX
COL
MODE
LAN
353
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch4001.fm
Lamp Indications
PN-32IPLA-A
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
RUN
Green
Flash (120 IPM) : This card is operating normally.

OFF
BL
Red

LOAD
Not used
PCON
Not used
AUX
Not used
VC3
Green
Remains lit when the last 16-channel of IP-PAD is available without

VC2
Green
VC1
Green
Remains lit when the first 16-channel of IP-PAD is available without

VC0
Green
PZ-M632
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
NALM
Not used
LINK
Green

IPDL
Not used
100M
Green

TX
Green
ON : Sending IP data
OFF : Not sending IP data
RX
Green
ON : Receiving IP data
OFF : Not receiving IP data
COL
Yellow
ON : Detecting IP data collision
354
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch4001.fm
Switch Settings
PN-32IPLA-A
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
MB (Toggle SW)
UP
DOWN
NOTE
SW0
(Piano Key SW)
OFF
4
3
2
1
ON
NOTE:
FUNCTION
CHECK
For make-busy
OFF
Not used
OFF
Not used
OFF
Not used
OFF
Not used
When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.
355
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch4001.fm
PZ-M632
SWITCH NAME
MODE
(Rotary SW)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
0-F
FUNCTION
CHECK
Auto Negotiation ON
(Ethernet 10 Mbps/100 Mbps automatic
change) NOTE 1

(100 Mbps [Full-Duplex] fixed)
NOTE 2


1, 2, 5-F
Not used

NOTE 1: As for the conditions of Full-Duplex or Half-Duplex operation, refer to FULL-DUPLEX/
Page F2
NOTE 2: When using the firmware program of SC-3150 IPS IPAD PROG-C1 or later for the PN32IPLA-A card, you may set the MODE switch to 1 (Auto Negotiation OFF [100 Mbps <FullDuplex> fixed]). When using the firmware program of SC-3090 IPS IPAD PROG-B1 for the
PN-32IPLA-A card, you may not set the MODE switch to 1.
356
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch4001.fm
JULY/01/2006
PN-16VCTA/PN-16VCTA-A (16VCT)
BL0
SW1
VCT1B
VCT0B
VCT1A
VCT0A
VCT1B/VCT0B:
To VCT1A/VCT0A Connector on
Another 16VCT Card
VCT1A/VCT0A:
To IP-PAD Card VCTB/VCTA Connector
or
To VCT1B/VCT0B Connector on
Another 16VCT Card
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
Remains lit when 0-15 channels are available.
357
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch4001.fm
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW1
(Piano Key SW)
FUNCTION
Set the number per 16VCT card if two 16VCT cards

are used. (Maximum two 16VCT cards)
OFF
SW No.
4
3
2
1
CHECK
1, 2
ON
3
4
Card No.
1-1
1-2
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Not used
Not used

358
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch4001.fm
PN-8IPLA (IP-PAD)
PN-8IPLA (IP-PAD)
DC_CONN
PZ-24IPLA
NOTE
RUN
MB
SW0
BUSY
DC
L1
L0
LINK
100M
ACT
LAN
RS
NOTE:
Order the PZ-24IPLA card separately.
359
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch4001.fm
PN-8IPLA (IP-PAD)
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
RUN
Green
Flash (240 IPM): Initializing this card.

Flash (120 IPM): Normal operation.
OFF:
Idle/Make Busy.
BUSY
Red
ON:
All channels are busy.
Flash (120 IPM): One or more channels are busy (except for a case
where all channels are busy).
OFF:
All channels are idle.
DC
Green
ON:
OFF:
PZ-24IPLA card already mounted is operating.

PZ-24IPLA card is not mounted.
L0
Red
ON:
Disconnection of a link with the IP network has been

detected.
L1
Green
ON:
OFF:
G723.1 is enabled.
G723.1 is disabled.
LINK
Green
ON:
OFF:
Connected to the IP network.

Not connected to the IP network.
100M
Green
ON:
OFF:
Ethernet is operating at 100 Mbps.

Ethernet is operating at 10 Mbps.
ACT
Green
ON:
OFF:
Data is sending/receiving to the IP network.

Data is not sending/receiving to the IP network.
360
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch4001.fm
PN-8IPLA (IP-PAD)
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
MB (Toggle SW)
UP
FUNCTION
CHECK
For make-busy
ON
DOWN
NOTE 1
SW0
(Piano Key SW)
OFF
4
3
2
1
ON
OFF
Not used
OFF
Not used
ON

(100 Mbps [Full-Duplex] fixed)
OFF
Auto Negotiation ON
(Ethernet 10 Mpbs/100 Mbps automatic
change) NOTE 2
OFF
Not used
3
NOTE 3

circuit card.
Page F2
NOTE 3: When using the firmware program of SC-3330 IPS IPADT PROG-B1 or later for the PN-8IPLA
card, you may set the Auto Negotiation ON/OFF settings by the SW0-3. When using the
firmware program of SC-3213 IPS IPADT PROG-A1 for the PN-8IPLA card, Auto Negotiation
function is always set to ON.
361
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch4001.fm
JULY/01/2006
PN-IPTB (IPT)
PN-IPTB (IPT)
PZ-M567
PN-IPTB
SENSE
RUN
MB
SW1
LINK
TXRX
COL
100M
VCTA
BUSY
SUBOPE3
SUBOPE2
SUBOPE1
SUBOPE0
L3
L2
L1
LYR
VCTA
To 4VCT Card
VCT
VCT
SW2
IP
CONN
IP CONN : To External
LAN Interface
MODE
362
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch4001.fm
PN-IPTB (IPT)
Lamp Indications
PN-IPTB
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
RUN
Green
Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.
BUSY
Red

SUBOPE3
Green
SUBOPE2
Green
SUBOPE1
Green
SUBOPE0
Green
L3
Not used
L2
Green
Remains lit when this card successfully is registered at the H.323 gatekeeper. Before the L2 lights, the LED flashes.
L1
Green
Remains lit while the line can be used.
LYR
Green
Remains lit when IP network is ready to use.
PZ-M567
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
LINK
Green

TXRX
Green
Remains lit when sending or receiving IP data.
COL
Green
Remains lit when detecting IP data collision.
100M
Green

363
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch4001.fm
PN-IPTB (IPT)
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SENSE
(Rotary SW)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
FUNCTION
CHECK
0-3
Not used
4-F
Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be

set by CM05.
F
4
AP No.
NOTE 1
SW1-4: ON
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
SW1-4: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
SW No.
MB (Toggle SW)
04
UP
For make-busy
ON
DOWN
NOTE 2
MODE
(Rotary SW)
Auto Negotiation ON NOTE 3

(10 Mbps/100 Mbps [Half-Duplex]
fixed) NOTE 4
0, 1
2-F
Not used

circuit card.
Page F2
NOTE 4: When you set the MODE switch to 1 (Auto Negotiation OFF), the communication mode of the
Ethernet will be fixed to Half-Duplex. And the communication speed will be set by SW2-1.
364
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch4001.fm
JULY/01/2006
PN-IPTB (IPT)
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW1 (Dip SW)

1
ON
1 2 3 4
FUNCTION
CHECK
ON
OFF
Not used
ON
OFF
Not used
ON
OFF
Not used
ON
AP No. 04-15
OFF
AP No. 20-31
ON
Ethernet 100 Mbps NOTE 5
OFF
Ethernet 10 Mbps NOTE 5
OFF
Not used
ON
Dynamic Jitter Buffer
OFF
Static Jitter Buffer
ON
Nonlinear processor for echo canceller

is not used.
OFF
Nonlinear processor for echo canceller

is used.
4
SW2 (Dip SW)
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2-5, 7

NOTE 5: These switch settings are valid only when MODE switch (Rotary SW) is set to 1 (Auto Negotiation OFF).
365
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch4001.fm
JULY/01/2006
PN-4VCTI (4VCT)
PN-4VCTI (4VCT)
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
SW1
IPTA
IPT
IPTA/IPT:
To IPT Card VCTA/VCT Connector
or
To Other 4VCT Card EXPA/EXP
Connector
EXPA
EXP
EXPA/EXP:
To IPTA/IPT Connector or
Other 4VCT Card
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0-3
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.
366
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch4001.fm
PN-4VCTI (4VCT)
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW1
(Piano Key SW)
FUNCTION
Set the number per 4VCT card if two or more 4VCT

cards are used. (Maximum four 4VCT cards)
OFF
SW No.
4
3
2
1
CHECK
1, 2
ON
3
4
Card No.
1-1
1-2
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Not used
Not used

367
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch4001.fm
368
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pch4001.fm
APPENDIX A SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
This appendix explains the specifications of the system.
SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS .....................................................

IP SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................
A1
A2
A4
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9papa001.fm
System Specifications
ITEM
SPECIFICATIONS
REMARKS
Available
Terminals
DtermIP
DtermIP INASET
DtermSP20/DtermSP30
All Legacy Terminals
Dterm60/65 (Electra/Series III)
Dterm70/75 (Elite/Series E)
Dterm85 (Series i)
Single line telephone
DSS/BLF Console
SN7xx ATTCON/DESKCON
Number of
Terminals
Maximum 1020 total

DtermIP
: 956
Legacy terminal: 980 NOTE
DtermIP + Legacy terminal

< 1020
Available
Line/Trunk Card
All LT cards used in NEAX 2000 IVS2/

NEAX 7400 ICS M100MX/NEAX 2000
INTEGRATED VOICE SERVER
128 ports per FP

Available Application Processor Card
All AP cards used in NEAX 2000 IVS2/

NEAX 7400 ICS M100MX/NEAX 2000
INTEGRATED VOICE SERVER except
AP01 and CC01 cards
OAI
Built-in OAI of MP card (LAN connection)
AP01/CC01 cards are not

available.
RS-232C connection is not
available for OAI terminal.
SMDR
MP built-in SMDR on RS-232C

MP built-in SMDR on IP
SMDR with AP00
A2
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9papa001.fm
System Specifications
ITEM
SPECIFICATIONS
MAT
Direct Connection (RS-232C)

Modem Connection
LAN Connection
PIM
SN1617 PIMMD/SN1663 PIMMG is used.

SN1658 PIMMF/SN1664 PIMMH is used for
backup CPU system.
SN1174 PIMA-A is not available as 2000 IPS
PIM.
SN1480 PIMAF is available as 2000 IPS PIM
by replacing Front Cover.
NOTE:
REMARKS
Direct connection and LAN
connection are available for
MP program download. Only
direct connection is available
for AP program download.
Legacy terminal can be added by mounting the FP card in the system.

When you add the legacy terminal, set the total number of DtermIPs and legacy terminals to less
than 1020.
A3
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9papa001.fm
IP SPECIFICATIONS
IP SPECIFICATIONS
IP Specifications
ITEM
SPECIFICATIONS
REMARKS
Voice Encoding
G.729a
G.723.1 (5.3 k/6.3 k)
G.711
IP-PAD
8/32 channels per card

Automatically seized per call
FAX Communication
Feature
T.30 fax relay
G3 FAX (up to 14.4 Kbps)

Super G3 Reciprocal: Not allowed
FAX communication with H.323:
Not available
PN-32IPLA-A (IP-PAD) card
(PN-8IPLA (IP-PAD) card is not
available.)
G.711 pass-through
G.726 pass-through
PN-8IPLA (IP-PAD) card

PN-32IPLA-A (IP-PAD) card
MODEM Communication Feature
G.711 pass-through
G.726 pass-through
PN-8IPLA (IP-PAD) card
DTMF Signal
H.245
H.323 IPT/IP-PAD/DtermIP
Inter-office/Intra-office
Signaling
H.245
DtermIP-to-DtermIP connection
DtermIP-to-IP-PAD connection
PROTIMS over IP
DtermIP-to-2000 IPS connection
CCIS over IP
Point-to-Multipoint connection
H.323
H.323 IPT/4VCT card and IPPAD card are required
Jitter Control
8 Kbps CS-ACELP
MP-MLQ/ACELP
64 Kbps PCM
Dynamic Jitter Buffer

A4
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9papa001.fm
IP SPECIFICATIONS
IP Specifications
ITEM
SPECIFICATIONS
Quality of Service
(QoS)
TOS, IP Precedence
DiffServ
LAN Interface
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
Echo Canceller
(IP-PAD)
G.168 (64 ms.)
REMARKS
Auto Negotiation is available.

100BASE-TX is recommended.
Payload Size CCIS

10 ms.-40 ms.
Virtual
(G.723.1: 30 ms. fixed) NOTE 1
IPT
(32IPLA
+ 16VCT)
Maximum voice channels per card

G.729a G.711 G.723.1
10 ms.: 12ch
12ch
20 ms.: 20ch
20ch
30 ms.: 30ch
30ch
24ch
40 ms.: 32ch
32ch
-
CCIS
10 ms.-40 ms.
Virtual
(G.723.1: 30 ms. fixed) NOTE 2
IPT
(8IPLA +
24IPLA)

G.729a G.711 G.723.1
10 ms.: 20ch
20ch
20 ms.: 32ch
32ch
30 ms.: 32ch
32ch
24ch
40 ms.: 32ch
32ch
-
CCIS IPT 10 ms.-40 ms.

(G.723.1: 30 ms. fixed)

G.729a G.711 G.723.1
10 ms.: 4ch
4ch
20 ms.: 8ch
8ch
30 ms.: 16ch
16ch
16ch
40 ms.: 16ch
16ch
-
H.323
IPT

G.729a G.711 G.723.1
20 ms.: 6ch
5ch
30 ms.: 8ch
7ch
8ch
40 ms.: 12ch
10ch
-
20 ms.-40 ms. (10 ms. increments)

(G.723.1: 30 ms. fixed)
NOTE 1: When no 16VCT card is mounted, the CODEC type is fixed to G.711 and the payload size is
fixed to 40 ms.
NOTE 2: When only PN-8IPLA card is mounted, the maximum voice channels per IP-PAD is fixed to 8channel.
A5
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9papa001.fm
IP SPECIFICATIONS
IP Specifications
ITEM
PAD Control
SPECIFICATIONS
REMARKS
0 dB to +16 dB (+2 dB increments)

0 dB to 16 dB (2 dB increments)
When using PN-8IPLA (IP-PAD):
0 dB to +14 dB (+2 dB increments)
0 dB to 14 dB (2 dB increments)
Setting is available per Location

No.
For connection between DtermIPs
0 dB to 16 dB (For North America)

0 dB to 12 dB (For other than North
America)
For connection via the IPT card
A6
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9papa001.fm
APPENDIX B LEN ASSIGNMENT
APPENDIX B
LEN ASSIGNMENT
This appendix contains the location of Line Equipment Number (LEN) for
each system configuration and the data assignment.
LOCATION OF EACH LEN .......................................................
B1
B2
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9papb001.fm
LOCATION OF EACH LEN

LEN is a combination number of PIM number/FP number and Port number.
The LEN assignment for each type of PIM is as follows.
The LEN assignment in Physical PIM/Virtual PIM by CM14 is as follows.
Physical PIM/Virtual PIM
XXZZZ
XXZZZ
XXZZZ
XXZZZ
XXZZZ
XXZZZ
XXZZZ
XXZZZ
(LTXX)
Use CM14 for LEN assignment.

Level 7
XX : FP Number (00-31) [For Series 3200 R6.2 software or before]
Level 6
Level 5
FP Number (00-59) [For Series 3300 software or later]
Level 4
ZZZ: Port Number of Physical PIM/Virtual PIM (000-127)
Level 3
Level 2
Level 1
Level 0
LT card accommodation position
number in Physical PIM/
Virtual station of DtermIP
accommodation position in Virtual
PIM
The LEN of Physical PIM can also be assigned by CM10.

The LEN assignment by CM10 is as follows.
Physical PIM
XZZ
XZZ
XZZ
XZZ
XZZ
XZZ
XZZ
XZZ
(LTXX)
Use CM10 for LEN assignment.

Level 7
Level 6
X : PIM Number (0-7)
Level 5
ZZ: Port Number (00-63)
Level 4
Level 3
Level 2
Level 1
Level 0
LT card accommodation position
number in Physical PIM
B2
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9papb001.fm
The figures below show the location of LEN for each system configuration and the initial data of CM05
Y=0/4/6/8 that is set by CM00>1/11/12/13/14: CCC.
LEN of CM14
(1) 8 PIMs (CM00>1: CCC)
Page B4
(2) 1 PIM + 7 Virtual PIMs (CM00>11: CCC)
(3) 2 PIMs + 6 Virtual PIMs (CM00>12: CCC)
Page B6
Page B8
Page B10
Page B12
LEN of CM10
(1) 8 PIMs (CM00>1: CCC)
Page B14
(2) 1 PIM + 7 Virtual PIMs (CM00>11: CCC)
Page B16
Page B18
Page B20
Page B22
(1)
(2)
(3)
PIM3
PIM7
PIM3
PIM7
PIM3
PIM7
PIM2
PIM6
PIM2
PIM6
PIM2
PIM6
PIM1
PIM5
PIM1
PIM5
PIM1
PIM5
PIM0
PIM4
PIM0
PIM4
PIM0
PIM4
512 LT ports +
0 IP
64 LT ports +
448 IP
(4)
(5)
PIM3
PIM7
PIM3
PIM7
PIM2
PIM6
PIM2
PIM6
PIM1
PIM5
PIM1
PIM5
PIM0
PIM4
PIM0
PIM4
192 LT ports +
320 IP
256 LT ports +
256 IP
B3
128 LT ports +
384 IP
PIM0
PIM1
Physical PIM
Virtual PIM
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9papb001.fm

LEN of CM14
LEN of CM14
8PIMs
8 PIMs (CM00>1: CCC)

PIM3
CM05 Y=0
(1) 01
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 01
(2) NONE
CM05 Y=6
(1) 01
(2) NONE
CM05 Y=8
(1) 01
(2) NONE
01071
01070
01069
01068
01067
01066
01065
01064
(LT00)
PIM2
CM05 Y=0
(1) 01
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 01
(2) NONE
CM05 Y=6
(1) 01
(2) NONE
CM05 Y=8
(1) 01
(2) NONE
01007
01006
01005
01004
01003
01002
01001
01000
(LT00)
PIM1
CM05 Y=0
(1) 00
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 00
(2) NONE
CM05 Y=6
(1) 00
(2) 2
CM05 Y=8
(1) 00
(2) NONE
00071
00070
00069
00068
00067
00066
00065
00064
(LT00)
PIM0
CM05 Y=0
(1) 00
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 00
(2) NONE
CM05 Y=6
(1) 00
(2) 2
CM05 Y=8
(1) 00
(2) NONE
00007
00006
00005
00004
00003
00002
00001
00000
(LT00)
.
.
.
01079
01078
01077
01076
01075
01074
01073
01072
(LT01)
01087
01086
01085
01084
01083
01082
01081
01080
(LT02)
01095
01094
01093
01092
01091
01090
01089
01088
(LT03)
01103
01102
01101
01100
01099
01098
01097
01096
(LT04)
01111
01110
01109
01108
01107
01106
01105
01104
(LT05)
01119
01118
01117
01116
01115
01114
01113
01112
(LT06)
01127
01126
01125
01124
01123
01122
01121
01120
(LT07)
01103
01102
01101
01100
(LT08)
.
.
.
.
.
.
01015
01014
01013
01012
01011
01010
01009
01008
(LT01)
01023
01022
01021
01020
01019
01018
01017
01016
(LT02)
01031
01030
01029
01028
01027
01026
01025
01024
(LT03)
01039
01038
01037
01036
01035
01034
01033
01032
(LT04)
01047
01046
01045
01044
01043
01042
01041
01040
(LT05)
01055
01054
01053
01052
01051
01050
01049
01048
(LT06)
01063
01062
01061
01060
01059
01058
01057
01056
(LT07)
01039
01038
01037
01036
(LT08)
.
.
01127
01126
01125
01124
(LT11)
01047
01046
01045
01044
(LT09)
01055
01054
01053
01052
(LT10)
01063
01062
01061
01060
(LT11)
NOTE
00079
00078
00077
00076
00075
00074
00073
00072
(LT01)
00087
00086
00085
00084
00083
00082
00081
00080
(LT02)
00095
00094
00093
00092
00091
00090
00089
00088
(LT03)
00103
00102
00101
00100
00099
00098
00097
00096
(LT04)
00111
00110
00109
00108
00107
00106
00105
00104
(LT05)
00119
00118
00117
00116
00115
00114
00113
00112
(LT06)
00127
00126
00125
00124
00123
00122
00121
00120
(LT07)
00103
00102
00101
00100
(LT08)
.
.
01119
01118
01117
01116
(LT10)
NOTE
.
.
01111
01110
01109
01108
(LT09)
00111
00110
00109
00108
(LT09)
00119
00118
00117
00116
(LT10)
00127
00126
00125
00124
(LT11)
NOTE
00015
00014
00013
00012
00011
00010
00009
00008
(LT01)
00023
00022
00021
00020
00019
00018
00017
00016
(LT02)
00031
00030
00029
00028
00027
00026
00025
00024
(LT03)
00039
00038
00037
00036
00035
00034
00033
00032
(LT04)
00047
00046
00045
00044
00043
00042
00041
00040
(LT05)
00055
00054
00053
00052
00051
00050
00049
00048
(LT06)
00063
00062
00061
00060
00059
00058
00057
00056
(LT07)
00039
00038
00037
00036
(LT08)
00047
00046
00045
00044
(LT09)
00055
00054
00053
00052
(LT10)
00063
00062
00061
00060
(LT11)
NOTE
B4
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9papb001.fm

LEN of CM14

PIM7
CM05 Y=0
(1) 03
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 03
(2) NONE
CM05 Y=6
(1) 03
(2) NONE
CM05 Y=8
(1) 03
(2) NONE
03071
03070
03069
03068
03067
03066
03065
03064
(LT00)
PIM6
CM05 Y=0
(1) 03
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 03
(2) NONE
CM05 Y=6
(1) 03
(2) NONE
CM05 Y=8
(1) 03
(2) NONE
03007
03006
03005
03004
03003
03002
03001
03000
(LT00)
PIM5
CM05 Y=0
(1) 02
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 02
(2) NONE
CM05 Y=6
(1) 02
(2) NONE
CM05 Y=8
(1) 02
(2) NONE
02071
02070
02069
02068
02067
02066
02065
02064
(LT00)
PIM4
CM05 Y=0
(1) 02
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 02
(2) NONE
CM05 Y=6
(1) 02
(2) NONE
CM05 Y=8
(1) 02
(2) NONE
02007
02006
02005
02004
02003
02002
02001
02000
(LT00)
.
.
.
03079
03078
03077
03076
03075
03074
03073
03072
(LT01)
03087
03086
03085
03084
03083
03082
03081
03080
(LT02)
03095
03094
03093
03092
03091
03090
03089
03088
(LT03)
03103
03102
03101
03100
03099
03098
03097
03096
(LT04)
03111
03110
03109
03108
03107
03106
03105
03104
(LT05)
03119
03118
03117
03116
03115
03114
03113
03112
(LT06)
03127
03126
03125
03124
03123
03122
03121
03120
(LT07)
03103
03102
03101
03100
(LT08)
.
.
.
.
.
03015
03014
03013
03012
03011
03010
03009
03008
(LT01)
03023
03022
03021
03020
03019
03018
03017
03016
(LT02)
03031
03030
03029
03028
03027
03026
03025
03024
(LT03)
03039
03038
03037
03036
03035
03034
03033
03032
(LT04)
03047
03046
03045
03044
03043
03042
03041
03040
(LT05)
03055
03054
03053
03052
03051
03050
03049
03048
(LT06)
03063
03062
03061
03060
03059
03058
03057
03056
(LT07)
03039
03038
03037
03036
(LT08)
.
.
02079
02078
02077
02076
02075
02074
02073
02072
(LT01)
02087
02086
02085
02084
02083
02082
02081
02080
(LT02)
02095
02094
02093
02092
02091
02090
02089
02088
(LT03)
02103
02102
02101
02100
02099
02098
02097
02096
(LT04)
02111
02110
02109
02108
02107
02106
02105
02104
(LT05)
03047
03046
03045
03044
(LT09)
03055
03054
03053
03052
(LT10)
03063
03062
03061
03060
(LT11)
02119
02118
02117
02116
02115
02114
02113
02112
(LT06)
02127
02126
02125
02124
02123
02122
02121
02120
(LT07)
02103
02102
02101
02100
(LT08)
02111
02110
02109
02108
(LT09)
02119
02118
02117
02116
(LT10)
02127
02126
02125
02124
(LT11)
NOTE
02015
02014
02013
02012
02011
02010
02009
02008
(LT01)
02023
02022
02021
02020
02019
02018
02017
02016
(LT02)
02031
02030
02029
02028
02027
02026
02025
02024
(LT03)
02039
02038
02037
02036
02035
02034
02033
02032
(LT04)
02047
02046
02045
02044
02043
02042
02041
02040
(LT05)
NOTE:
03127
03126
03125
03124
(LT11)
NOTE
03119
03118
03117
03116
(LT10)
NOTE
.
.
03111
03110
03109
03108
(LT09)
02055
02054
02053
02052
02051
02050
02049
02048
(LT06)
02063
02062
02061
02060
02059
02058
02057
02056
(LT07)
02039
02038
02037
02036
(LT08)
02047
02046
02045
02044
(LT09)
02055
02054
02053
02052
(LT10)
02063
02062
02061
02060
(LT11)
NOTE
In Slot 08-11, the following 8-port or 16-port line/trunk circuit cards are not mountable.
PN-8COT, PN-8DLC, PN-8LC, PN-4DAT, PN-CFTB, PN-2CSI, PN-4CSI
When the above line/trunk cards are mounted in Slot 04-07, only application processor cards
are mountable in Slot 08-11.
B5
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9papb001.fm

LEN of CM14
1 PIM + 7 Virtual PIMs
1 PIM + 7 Virtual PIMs (CM00>11: CCC)

PIM3
CM05 Y=0
(1) 17
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 17
(2) 03
CM05 Y=6
(1) 17
(2) 0
CM05 Y=8
(1) 17
(2) 0003
17007
17006
17005
17004
17003
17002
17001
17000
(LT00)
17015
17014
17013
17012
17011
17010
17009
17008
(LT01)
17023
17022
17021
17020
17019
17018
17017
17016
(LT02)
17031
17030
17029
17028
17027
17026
17025
17024
(LT03)
17039
17038
17037
17036
17035
17034
17033
17032
(LT04)
17047
17046
17045
17044
17043
17042
17041
17040
(LT05)
17055
17054
17053
17052
17051
17050
17049
17048
(LT06)
17063
17062
17061
17060
17059
17058
17057
17056
(LT07)
(LT08)
(LT09)
(LT10)
(LT11)
PIM2
CM05 Y=0
(1) 01
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 01
(2) 02
CM05 Y=6
(1) 01
(2) 0
CM05 Y=8
(1) 01
(2) 0002
01007
01006
01005
01004
01003
01002
01001
01000
(LT00)
01015
01014
01013
01012
01011
01010
01009
01008
(LT01)
01023
01022
01021
01020
01019
01018
01017
01016
(LT02)
01031
01030
01029
01028
01027
01026
01025
01024
(LT03)
01039
01038
01037
01036
01035
01034
01033
01032
(LT04)
01047
01046
01045
01044
01043
01042
01041
01040
(LT05)
01055
01054
01053
01052
01051
01050
01049
01048
(LT06)
01063
01062
01061
01060
01059
01058
01057
01056
(LT07)
(LT08)
(LT09)
(LT10)
(LT11)
PIM1
CM05 Y=0
(1) 16
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 16
(2) 01
CM05 Y=6
(1) 16
(2) 0
CM05 Y=8
(1) 16
(2) 0001
16007
16006
16005
16004
16003
16002
16001
16000
(LT00)
16015
16014
16013
16012
16011
16010
16009
16008
(LT01)
16023
16022
16021
16020
16019
16018
16017
16016
(LT02)
16031
16030
16029
16028
16027
16026
16025
16024
(LT03)
16039
16038
16037
16036
16035
16034
16033
16032
(LT04)
16047
16046
16045
16044
16043
16042
16041
16040
(LT05)
16055
16054
16053
16052
16051
16050
16049
16048
(LT06)
16063
16062
16061
16060
16059
16058
16057
16056
(LT07)
(LT08)
(LT09)
(LT10)
(LT11)
PIM0
CM05 Y=0
(1) 00
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 00
(2) 00
CM05 Y=6
(1) 00
(2) 2
CM05 Y=8
(1) 00
(2) 0000
00007
00006
00005
00004
00003
00002
00001
00000
(LT00)
00015
00014
00013
00012
00011
00010
00009
00008
(LT01)
00023
00022
00021
00020
00019
00018
00017
00016
(LT02)
00031
00030
00029
00028
00027
00026
00025
00024
(LT03)
00039
00038
00037
00036
00035
00034
00033
00032
(LT04)
00047
00046
00045
00044
00043
00042
00041
00040
(LT05)
00055
00054
00053
00052
00051
00050
00049
00048
(LT06)
00063
00062
00061
00060
00059
00058
00057
00056
(LT07)
00039
00038
00037
00036
(LT08)
00047
00046
00045
00044
(LT09)
00055
00054
00053
00052
(LT10)
00063
00062
00061
00060
(LT11)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
NOTE
B6
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9papb001.fm

LEN of CM14

PIM7
CM05 Y=0
(1) 19
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 19
(2) 07
CM05 Y=6
(1) 19
(2) 0
CM05 Y=8
(1) 19
(2) 0007
19007
19006
19005
19004
19003
19002
19001
19000
(LT00)
19015
19014
19013
19012
19011
19010
19009
19008
(LT01)
19023
19022
19021
19020
19019
19018
19017
19016
(LT02)
19031
19030
19029
19028
19027
19026
19025
19024
(LT03)
19039
19038
19037
19036
19035
19034
19033
19032
(LT04)
19047
19046
19045
19044
19043
19042
19041
19040
(LT05)
19055
19054
19053
19052
19051
19050
19049
19048
(LT06)
19063
19062
19061
19060
19059
19058
19057
19056
(LT07)
(LT08)
(LT09)
(LT10)
(LT11)
PIM6
CM05 Y=0
(1) 03
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 03
(2) 06
CM05 Y=6
(1) 03
(2) 0
CM05 Y=8
(1) 03
(2) 0006
03007
03006
03005
03004
03003
03002
03001
03000
(LT00)
03015
03014
03013
03012
03011
03010
03009
03008
(LT01)
03023
03022
03021
03020
03019
03018
03017
03016
(LT02)
03031
03030
03029
03028
03027
03026
03025
03024
(LT03)
03039
03038
03037
03036
03035
03034
03033
03032
(LT04)
03047
03046
03045
03044
03043
03042
03041
03040
(LT05)
03055
03054
03053
03052
03051
03050
03049
03048
(LT06)
03063
03062
03061
03060
03059
03058
03057
03056
(LT07)
(LT08)
(LT09)
(LT10)
(LT11)
PIM5
CM05 Y=0
(1) 18
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 18
(2) 05
CM05 Y=6
(1) 18
(2) 0
CM05 Y=8
(1) 18
(2) 0005
18007
18006
18005
18004
18003
18002
18001
18000
(LT00)
18015
18014
18013
18012
18011
18010
18009
18008
(LT01)
18023
18022
18021
18020
18019
18018
18017
18016
(LT02)
18031
18030
18029
18028
18027
18026
18025
18024
(LT03)
18039
18038
18037
18036
18035
18034
18033
18032
(LT04)
18047
18046
18045
18044
18043
18042
18041
18040
(LT05)
18055
18054
18053
18052
18051
18050
18049
18048
(LT06)
18063
18062
18061
18060
18059
18058
18057
18056
(LT07)
(LT08)
(LT09)
(LT10)
(LT11)
PIM4
CM05 Y=0
(1) 02
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 02
(2) 04
CM05 Y=6
(1) 02
(2) 0
CM05 Y=8
(1) 02
(2) 0004
02007
02006
02005
02004
02003
02002
02001
02000
(LT00)
02015
02014
02013
02012
02011
02010
02009
02008
(LT01)
02023
02022
02021
02020
02019
02018
02017
02016
(LT02)
02031
02030
02029
02028
02027
02026
02025
02024
(LT03)
02039
02038
02037
02036
02035
02034
02033
02032
(LT04)
02047
02046
02045
02044
02043
02042
02041
02040
(LT05)
02055
02054
02053
02052
02051
02050
02049
02048
(LT06)
02063
02062
02061
02060
02059
02058
02057
02056
(LT07)
(LT08)
(LT09)
(LT10)
(LT11)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
NOTE:
B7
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9papb001.fm

LEN of CM14
2 PIMs + 6 Virtual PIMs
2 PIMs + 6 Virtual PIMs (CM00>12: CCC)

PIM3
CM05 Y=0
(1) 17
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 17
(2) 03
CM05 Y=6
(1) 17
(2) 0
CM05 Y=8
(1) 17
(2) 0003
17007
17006
17005
17004
17003
17002
17001
17000
(LT00)
17015
17014
17013
17012
17011
17010
17009
17008
(LT01)
17023
17022
17021
17020
17019
17018
17017
17016
(LT02)
17031
17030
17029
17028
17027
17026
17025
17024
(LT03)
17039
17038
17037
17036
17035
17034
17033
17032
(LT04)
17047
17046
17045
17044
17043
17042
17041
17040
(LT05)
17055
17054
17053
17052
17051
17050
17049
17048
(LT06)
17063
17062
17061
17060
17059
17058
17057
17056
(LT07)
(LT08)
(LT09)
(LT10)
(LT11)
PIM2
CM05 Y=0
(1) 01
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 01
(2) 02
CM05 Y=6
(1) 01
(2) 0
CM05 Y=8
(1) 01
(2) 0002
01007
01006
01005
01004
01003
01002
01001
01000
(LT00)
01015
01014
01013
01012
01011
01010
01009
01008
(LT01)
01023
01022
01021
01020
01019
01018
01017
01016
(LT02)
01031
01030
01029
01028
01027
01026
01025
01024
(LT03)
01039
01038
01037
01036
01035
01034
01033
01032
(LT04)
01047
01046
01045
01044
01043
01042
01041
01040
(LT05)
01055
01054
01053
01052
01051
01050
01049
01048
(LT06)
01063
01062
01061
01060
01059
01058
01057
01056
(LT07)
(LT08)
(LT09)
(LT10)
(LT11)
.PIM1
CM05 Y=0
00071
00070
00069
00068
00067
00066
00065
00064
(LT00)
00079
00078
00077
00076
00075
00074
00073
00072
(LT01)
00087
00086
00085
00084
00083
00082
00081
00080
(LT02)
00095
00094
00093
00092
00091
00090
00089
00088
(LT03)
00103
00102
00101
00100
00099
00098
00097
00096
(LT04)
00111
00110
00109
00108
00107
00106
00105
00104
(LT05)
00119
00118
00117
00116
00115
00114
00113
00112
(LT06)
00127
00126
00125
00124
00123
00122
00121
00120
(LT07)
00103
00102
00101
00100
(LT08)
00111
00110
00109
00108
(LT09)
00119
00118
00117
00116
(LT10)
00127
00126
00125
00124
(LT11)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
(1) 00
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 00
(2) NONE
CM05 Y=6
(1) 00
(2) 2
CM05 Y=8
(1) 00
(2) NONE
PIM0
CM05 Y=0
(1) 00
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 00
(2) NONE
CM05 Y=6
(1) 00
(2) 2
CM05 Y=8
(1) 00
(2) NONE
.
.
.
NOTE
00007
00006
00005
00004
00003
00002
00001
00000
(LT00)
00015
00014
00013
00012
00011
00010
00009
00008
(LT01)
00023
00022
00021
00020
00019
00018
00017
00016
(LT02)
00031
00030
00029
00028
00027
00026
00025
00024
(LT03)
00039
00038
00037
00036
00035
00034
00033
00032
(LT04)
00047
00046
00045
00044
00043
00042
00041
00040
(LT05)
00055
00054
00053
00052
00051
00050
00049
00048
(LT06)
00063
00062
00061
00060
00059
00058
00057
00056
(LT07)
00039
00038
00037
00036
(LT08)
00047
00046
00045
00044
(LT09)
00055
00054
00053
00052
(LT10)
00063
00062
00061
00060
(LT11)
NOTE
B8
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9papb001.fm

LEN of CM14

PIM7
CM05 Y=0
(1) 19
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 19
(2) 07
CM05 Y=6
(1) 19
(2) 0
CM05 Y=8
(1) 19
(2) 0007
19007
19006
19005
19004
19003
19002
19001
19000
(LT00)
19015
19014
19013
19012
19011
19010
19009
19008
(LT01)
19023
19022
19021
19020
19019
19018
19017
19016
(LT02)
19031
19030
19029
19028
19027
19026
19025
19024
(LT03)
19039
19038
19037
19036
19035
19034
19033
19032
(LT04)
19047
19046
19045
19044
19043
19042
19041
19040
(LT05)
19055
19054
19053
19052
19051
19050
19049
19048
(LT06)
19063
19062
19061
19060
19059
19058
19057
19056
(LT07)
(LT08)
(LT09)
(LT10)
(LT11)
PIM6
CM05 Y=0
(1) 03
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 03
(2) 06
CM05 Y=6
(1) 03
(2) 0
CM05 Y=8
(1) 03
(2) 0006
03007
03006
03005
03004
03003
03002
03001
03000
(LT00)
03015
03014
03013
03012
03011
03010
03009
03008
(LT01)
03023
03022
03021
03020
03019
03018
03017
03016
(LT02)
03031
03030
03029
03028
03027
03026
03025
03024
(LT03)
03039
03038
03037
03036
03035
03034
03033
03032
(LT04)
03047
03046
03045
03044
03043
03042
03041
03040
(LT05)
03055
03054
03053
03052
03051
03050
03049
03048
(LT06)
03063
03062
03061
03060
03059
03058
03057
03056
(LT07)
(LT08)
(LT09)
(LT10)
(LT11)
PIM5
CM05 Y=0
(1) 18
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 18
(2) 05
CM05 Y=6
(1) 18
(2) 0
CM05 Y=8
(1) 18
(2) 0005
18007
18006
18005
18004
18003
18002
18001
18000
(LT00)
18015
18014
18013
18012
18011
18010
18009
18008
(LT01)
18023
18022
18021
18020
18019
18018
18017
18016
(LT02)
18031
18030
18029
18028
18027
18026
18025
18024
(LT03)
18039
18038
18037
18036
18035
18034
18033
18032
(LT04)
18047
18046
18045
18044
18043
18042
18041
18040
(LT05)
18055
18054
18053
18052
18051
18050
18049
18048
(LT06)
18063
18062
18061
18060
18059
18058
18057
18056
(LT07)
(LT08)
(LT09)
(LT10)
(LT11)
PIM4
CM05 Y=0
(1) 02
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 02
(2) 04
CM05 Y=6
(1) 02
(2) 0
CM05 Y=8
(1) 02
(2) 0004
02007
02006
02005
02004
02003
02002
02001
02000
(LT00)
02015
02014
02013
02012
02011
02010
02009
02008
(LT01)
02023
02022
02021
02020
02019
02018
02017
02016
(LT02)
02031
02030
02029
02028
02027
02026
02025
02024
(LT03)
02039
02038
02037
02036
02035
02034
02033
02032
(LT04)
02047
02046
02045
02044
02043
02042
02041
02040
(LT05)
02055
02054
02053
02052
02051
02050
02049
02048
(LT06)
02063
02062
02061
02060
02059
02058
02057
02056
(LT07)
(LT08)
(LT09)
(LT10)
(LT11)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
NOTE:
B9
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9papb001.fm

LEN of CM14

PIM3
CM05 Y=0
(1) 17
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 17
(2) 03
CM05 Y=6
(1) 17
(2) 0
CM05 Y=8
(1) 17
(2) 0003
17007
17006
17005
17004
17003
17002
17001
17000
(LT00)
17015
17014
17013
17012
17011
17010
17009
17008
(LT01)
17023
17022
17021
17020
17019
17018
17017
17016
(LT02)
17031
17030
17029
17028
17027
17026
17025
17024
(LT03)
17039
17038
17037
17036
17035
17034
17033
17032
(LT04)
17047
17046
17045
17044
17043
17042
17041
17040
(LT05)
17055
17054
17053
17052
17051
17050
17049
17048
(LT06)
17063
17062
17061
17060
17059
17058
17057
17056
(LT07)
(LT08)
(LT09)
(LT10)
(LT11)
PIM2
CM05 Y=0
(1) 01
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 01
(2) 02
CM05 Y=6
(1) 01
(2) 3
CM05 Y=8
(1) 01
(2) 0002
01007
01006
01005
01004
01003
01002
01001
01000
(LT00)
01015
01014
01013
01012
01011
01010
01009
01008
(LT01)
01023
01022
01021
01020
01019
01018
01017
01016
(LT02)
01031
01030
01029
01028
01027
01026
01025
01024
(LT03)
01039
01038
01037
01036
01035
01034
01033
01032
(LT04)
01047
01046
01045
01044
01043
01042
01041
01040
(LT05)
01055
01054
01053
01052
01051
01050
01049
01048
(LT06)
01063
01062
01061
01060
01059
01058
01057
01056
(LT07)
01039
01038
01037
01036
(LT08)
01047
01046
01045
01044
(LT09)
01055
01054
01053
01052
(LT10)
01063
01062
01061
01060
(LT11)
.PIM1
CM05 Y=0
00071
00070
00069
00068
00067
00066
00065
00064
(LT00)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
(1) 00
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 00
(2) NONE
CM05 Y=6
(1) 00
(2) 2
CM05 Y=8
(1) 00
(2) NONE
PIM0
CM05 Y=0
(1) 00
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 00
(2) NONE
CM05 Y=6
(1) 00
(2) 2
CM05 Y=8
(1) 00
(2) NONE
.
.
.
NOTE
00079
00078
00077
00076
00075
00074
00073
00072
(LT01)
00087
00086
00085
00084
00083
00082
00081
00080
(LT02)
00095
00094
00093
00092
00091
00090
00089
00088
(LT03)
00103
00102
00101
00100
00099
00098
00097
00096
(LT04)
00111
00110
00109
00108
00107
00106
00105
00104
(LT05)
00119
00118
00117
00116
00115
00114
00113
00112
(LT06)
00127
00126
00125
00124
00123
00122
00121
00120
(LT07)
00103
00102
00101
00100
(LT08)
00111
00110
00109
00108
(LT09)
00119
00118
00117
00116
(LT10)
00127
00126
00125
00124
(LT11)
NOTE
00007
00006
00005
00004
00003
00002
00001
00000
(LT00)
00015
00014
00013
00012
00011
00010
00009
00008
(LT01)
00023
00022
00021
00020
00019
00018
00017
00016
(LT02)
00031
00030
00029
00028
00027
00026
00025
00024
(LT03)
00039
00038
00037
00036
00035
00034
00033
00032
(LT04)
00047
00046
00045
00044
00043
00042
00041
00040
(LT05)
00055
00054
00053
00052
00051
00050
00049
00048
(LT06)
00063
00062
00061
00060
00059
00058
00057
00056
(LT07)
00039
00038
00037
00036
(LT08)
00047
00046
00045
00044
(LT09)
00055
00054
00053
00052
(LT10)
00063
00062
00061
00060
(LT11)
NOTE
B10
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9papb001.fm

LEN of CM14

PIM7
CM05 Y=0
(1) 19
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 19
(2) 07
CM05 Y=6
(1) 19
(2) 0
CM05 Y=8
(1) 19
(2) 0007
19007
19006
19005
19004
19003
19002
19001
19000
(LT00)
19015
19014
19013
19012
19011
19010
19009
19008
(LT01)
19023
19022
19021
19020
19019
19018
19017
19016
(LT02)
19031
19030
19029
19028
19027
19026
19025
19024
(LT03)
19039
19038
19037
19036
19035
19034
19033
19032
(LT04)
19047
19046
19045
19044
19043
19042
19041
19040
(LT05)
19055
19054
19053
19052
19051
19050
19049
19048
(LT06)
19063
19062
19061
19060
19059
19058
19057
19056
(LT07)
(LT08)
(LT09)
(LT10)
(LT11)
PIM6
CM05 Y=0
(1) 03
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 03
(2) 06
CM05 Y=6
(1) 03
(2) 0
CM05 Y=8
(1) 03
(2) 0006
03007
03006
03005
03004
03003
03002
03001
03000
(LT00)
03015
03014
03013
03012
03011
03010
03009
03008
(LT01)
03023
03022
03021
03020
03019
03018
03017
03016
(LT02)
03031
03030
03029
03028
03027
03026
03025
03024
(LT03)
03039
03038
03037
03036
03035
03034
03033
03032
(LT04)
03047
03046
03045
03044
03043
03042
03041
03040
(LT05)
03055
03054
03053
03052
03051
03050
03049
03048
(LT06)
03063
03062
03061
03060
03059
03058
03057
03056
(LT07)
(LT08)
(LT09)
(LT10)
(LT11)
PIM5
CM05 Y=0
(1) 18
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 18
(2) 05
CM05 Y=6
(1) 18
(2) 0
CM05 Y=8
(1) 18
(2) 0005
18007
18006
18005
18004
18003
18002
18001
18000
(LT00)
18015
18014
18013
18012
18011
18010
18009
18008
(LT01)
18023
18022
18021
18020
18019
18018
18017
18016
(LT02)
18031
18030
18029
18028
18027
18026
18025
18024
(LT03)
18039
18038
18037
18036
18035
18034
18033
18032
(LT04)
18047
18046
18045
18044
18043
18042
18041
18040
(LT05)
18055
18054
18053
18052
18051
18050
18049
18048
(LT06)
18063
18062
18061
18060
18059
18058
18057
18056
(LT07)
(LT08)
(LT09)
(LT10)
(LT11)
PIM4
CM05 Y=0
(1) 02
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 02
(2) 04
CM05 Y=6
(1) 02
(2) 0
CM05 Y=8
(1) 02
(2) 0004
02007
02006
02005
02004
02003
02002
02001
02000
(LT00)
02015
02014
02013
02012
02011
02010
02009
02008
(LT01)
02023
02022
02021
02020
02019
02018
02017
02016
(LT02)
02031
02030
02029
02028
02027
02026
02025
02024
(LT03)
02039
02038
02037
02036
02035
02034
02033
02032
(LT04)
02047
02046
02045
02044
02043
02042
02041
02040
(LT05)
02055
02054
02053
02052
02051
02050
02049
02048
(LT06)
02063
02062
02061
02060
02059
02058
02057
02056
(LT07)
(LT08)
(LT09)
(LT10)
(LT11)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
NOTE:
B11
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9papb001.fm

LEN of CM14

PIM3
CM05 Y=0
(1) 01
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 01
(2) NONE
CM05 Y=6
(1) 01
(2) NONE
CM05 Y=8
(1) 01
(2) NONE
01071
01070
01069
01068
01067
01066
01065
01064
(LT00)
PIM2
CM05 Y=0
(1) 01
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 01
(2) NONE
CM05 Y=6
(1) 01
(2) 3
CM05 Y=8
(1) 01
(2) NONE
01007
01006
01005
01004
01003
01002
01001
01000
(LT00)
.PIM1
CM05 Y=0
00071
00070
00069
00068
00067
00066
00065
00064
(LT00)
.
.
.
01079
01078
01077
01076
01075
01074
01073
01072
(LT01)
01087
01086
01085
01084
01083
01082
01081
01080
(LT02)
01095
01094
01093
01092
01091
01090
01089
01088
(LT03)
01103
01102
01101
01100
01099
01098
01097
01096
(LT04)
01111
01110
01109
01108
01107
01106
01105
01104
(LT05)
01119
01118
01117
01116
01115
01114
01113
01112
(LT06)
01127
01126
01125
01124
01123
01122
01121
01120
(LT07)
01103
01102
01101
01100
(LT08)
.
.
.
.
.
.
PIM0
CM05 Y=0
(1) 00
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 00
(2) NONE
CM05 Y=6
(1) 00
(2) 2
CM05 Y=8
(1) 00
(2) NONE
.
.
.
01119
01118
01117
01116
(LT10)
01127
01126
01125
01124
(LT11)
NOTE
01015
01014
01013
01012
01011
01010
01009
01008
(LT01)
01023
01022
01021
01020
01019
01018
01017
01016
(LT02)
01031
01030
01029
01028
01027
01026
01025
01024
(LT03)
01039
01038
01037
01036
01035
01034
01033
01032
(LT04)
01047
01046
01045
01044
01043
01042
01041
01040
(LT05)
01055
01054
01053
01052
01051
01050
01049
01048
(LT06)
01063
01062
01061
01060
01059
01058
01057
01056
(LT07)
01039
01038
01037
01036
(LT08)
(1) 00
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 00
(2) NONE
CM05 Y=6
(1) 00
(2) 2
CM05 Y=8
(1) 00
(2) NONE
01111
01110
01109
01108
(LT09)
01047
01046
01045
01044
(LT09)
01055
01054
01053
01052
(LT10)
01063
01062
01061
01060
(LT11)
NOTE
00079
00078
00077
00076
00075
00074
00073
00072
(LT01)
00087
00086
00085
00084
00083
00082
00081
00080
(LT02)
00095
00094
00093
00092
00091
00090
00089
00088
(LT03)
00103
00102
00101
00100
00099
00098
00097
00096
(LT04)
00111
00110
00109
00108
00107
00106
00105
00104
(LT05)
00119
00118
00117
00116
00115
00114
00113
00112
(LT06)
00127
00126
00125
00124
00123
00122
00121
00120
(LT07)
00103
00102
00101
00100
(LT08)
00111
00110
00109
00108
(LT09)
00119
00118
00117
00116
(LT10)
00127
00126
00125
00124
(LT11)
NOTE
00007
00006
00005
00004
00003
00002
00001
00000
(LT00)
00015
00014
00013
00012
00011
00010
00009
00008
(LT01)
00023
00022
00021
00020
00019
00018
00017
00016
(LT02)
00031
00030
00029
00028
00027
00026
00025
00024
(LT03)
00039
00038
00037
00036
00035
00034
00033
00032
(LT04)
00047
00046
00045
00044
00043
00042
00041
00040
(LT05)
00055
00054
00053
00052
00051
00050
00049
00048
(LT06)
00063
00062
00061
00060
00059
00058
00057
00056
(LT07)
00039
00038
00037
00036
(LT08)
00047
00046
00045
00044
(LT09)
00055
00054
00053
00052
(LT10)
00063
00062
00061
00060
(LT11)
NOTE
B12
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9papb001.fm

LEN of CM14

PIM7
CM05 Y=0
(1) 19
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 19
(2) 07
CM05 Y=6
(1) 19
(2) 0
CM05 Y=8
(1) 19
(2) 0007
19007
19006
19005
19004
19003
19002
19001
19000
(LT00)
19015
19014
19013
19012
19011
19010
19009
19008
(LT01)
19023
19022
19021
19020
19019
19018
19017
19016
(LT02)
19031
19030
19029
19028
19027
19026
19025
19024
(LT03)
19039
19038
19037
19036
19035
19034
19033
19032
(LT04)
19047
19046
19045
19044
19043
19042
19041
19040
(LT05)
19055
19054
19053
19052
19051
19050
19049
19048
(LT06)
19063
19062
19061
19060
19059
19058
19057
19056
(LT07)
(LT08)
(LT09)
(LT10)
(LT11)
PIM6
CM05 Y=0
(1) 03
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 03
(2) 06
CM05 Y=6
(1) 03
(2) 0
CM05 Y=8
(1) 03
(2) 0006
03007
03006
03005
03004
03003
03002
03001
03000
(LT00)
03015
03014
03013
03012
03011
03010
03009
03008
(LT01)
03023
03022
03021
03020
03019
03018
03017
03016
(LT02)
03031
03030
03029
03028
03027
03026
03025
03024
(LT03)
03039
03038
03037
03036
03035
03034
03033
03032
(LT04)
03047
03046
03045
03044
03043
03042
03041
03040
(LT05)
03055
03054
03053
03052
03051
03050
03049
03048
(LT06)
03063
03062
03061
03060
03059
03058
03057
03056
(LT07)
(LT08)
(LT09)
(LT10)
(LT11)
PIM5
CM05 Y=0
(1) 18
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 18
(2) 05
CM05 Y=6
(1) 18
(2) 0
CM05 Y=8
(1) 18
(2) 0005
18007
18006
18005
18004
18003
18002
18001
18000
(LT00)
18015
18014
18013
18012
18011
18010
18009
18008
(LT01)
18023
18022
18021
18020
18019
18018
18017
18016
(LT02)
18031
18030
18029
18028
18027
18026
18025
18024
(LT03)
18039
18038
18037
18036
18035
18034
18033
18032
(LT04)
18047
18046
18045
18044
18043
18042
18041
18040
(LT05)
18055
18054
18053
18052
18051
18050
18049
18048
(LT06)
18063
18062
18061
18060
18059
18058
18057
18056
(LT07)
(LT08)
(LT09)
(LT10)
(LT11)
PIM4
CM05 Y=0
(1) 02
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 02
(2) 04
CM05 Y=6
(1) 02
(2) 0
CM05 Y=8
(1) 02
(2) 0004
02007
02006
02005
02004
02003
02002
02001
02000
(LT00)
02015
02014
02013
02012
02011
02010
02009
02008
(LT01)
02023
02022
02021
02020
02019
02018
02017
02016
(LT02)
02031
02030
02029
02028
02027
02026
02025
02024
(LT03)
02039
02038
02037
02036
02035
02034
02033
02032
(LT04)
02047
02046
02045
02044
02043
02042
02041
02040
(LT05)
02055
02054
02053
02052
02051
02050
02049
02048
(LT06)
02063
02062
02061
02060
02059
02058
02057
02056
(LT07)
(LT08)
(LT09)
(LT10)
(LT11)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
NOTE:
B13
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9papb001.fm

LEN of CM10
LEN of CM10
8 PIMs
.PIM3
CM05 Y=0
(1) 01
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 01
(2) NONE
CM05 Y=6
(1) 01
(2) NONE
NOTE 1
.
.
.PIM2
CM05 Y=0
(1) 01
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 01
(2) NONE
CM05 Y=6
(1) 01
(2) NONE
NOTE 1
.
.
.PIM1
CM05 Y=0
(1) 00
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 00
(2) NONE
CM05 Y=6
(1) 00
(2) 2
NOTE 1
.
.
.PIM0
CM05 Y=0
(1) 00
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 00
(2) NONE
CM05 Y=6
(1) 00
(2) 2
NOTE 1
.
.
307
306
305
304
303
302
301
300
(LT00)
315
314
313
312
311
310
309
308
(LT01)
323
322
321
320
319
318
317
316
(LT02)
331
330
329
328
327
326
325
324
(LT03)
339
338
337
336
335
334
333
332
(LT04)
347
346
345
344
343
342
341
340
(LT05)
355
354
353
352
351
350
349
348
(LT06)
363
362
361
360
359
358
357
356
(LT07)
339
338
337
336
(LT08)
347
346
345
344
(LT09)
355
354
353
352
(LT10)
363
362
361
360
(LT11)
NOTE 2
207
206
205
204
203
202
201
200
(LT00)
215
214
213
212
211
210
209
208
(LT01)
223
222
221
220
219
218
217
216
(LT02)
231
230
229
228
227
226
225
224
(LT03)
239
238
237
236
235
234
233
232
(LT04)
247
246
245
244
243
242
241
240
(LT05)
255
254
253
252
251
250
249
248
(LT06)
263
262
261
260
259
258
257
256
(LT07)
239
238
237
236
(LT08)
247
246
245
244
(LT09)
255
254
253
252
(LT10)
263
262
261
260
(LT11)
NOTE 2
107
106
105
104
103
102
101
100
(LT00)
115
114
113
112
111
110
109
108
(LT01)
123
122
121
120
119
118
117
116
(LT02)
131
130
129
128
127
126
125
124
(LT03)
139
138
137
136
135
134
133
132
(LT04)
147
146
145
144
143
142
141
140
(LT05)
155
154
153
152
151
150
149
148
(LT06)
163
162
161
160
159
158
157
156
(LT07)
139
138
137
136
(LT08)
147
146
145
144
(LT09)
155
154
153
152
(LT10)
163
162
161
160
(LT11)
NOTE 2
007
006
005
004
003
002
001
000
(LT00)
015
014
013
012
011
010
009
008
(LT01)
023
022
021
020
019
018
017
016
(LT02)
031
030
029
028
027
026
025
024
(LT03)
039
038
037
036
035
034
033
032
(LT04)
047
046
045
044
043
042
041
040
(LT05)
055
054
053
052
051
050
049
048
(LT06)
063
062
061
060
059
058
057
056
(LT07)
039
038
037
036
(LT08)
047
046
045
044
(LT09)
055
054
053
052
(LT10)
063
062
061
060
(LT11)
NOTE 2
B14
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9papb001.fm

LEN of CM10
.PIM7
CM05 Y=0
(1) 03
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 03
(2) NONE
CM05 Y=6
(1) 03
(2) NONE
NOTE 1
.
.
.PIM6
CM05 Y=0
(1) 03
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 03
(2) NONE
CM05 Y=6
(1) 03
(2) NONE
NOTE 1
.
.
.PIM5
CM05 Y=0
(1) 02
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 02
(2) NONE
CM05 Y=6
(1) 02
(2) NONE
NOTE 1
.
.
.PIM4
CM05 Y=0
(1) 02
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 02
(2) NONE
CM05 Y=6
(1) 02
(2) NONE
NOTE 1
.
.
707
706
705
704
703
702
701
700
(LT00)
715
714
713
712
711
710
709
708
(LT01)
723
722
721
720
719
718
717
716
(LT02)
731
730
729
728
727
726
725
724
(LT03)
739
738
737
736
735
734
733
732
(LT04)
747
746
745
744
743
742
741
740
(LT05)
755
754
753
752
751
750
749
748
(LT06)
763
762
761
760
759
758
757
756
(LT07)
739
738
737
736
(LT08)
747
746
745
744
(LT09)
755
754
753
752
(LT10)
763
762
761
760
(LT11)
NOTE 2
607
606
605
604
603
602
601
600
(LT00)
615
614
613
612
611
610
609
608
(LT01)
623
622
621
620
619
618
617
616
(LT02)
631
630
629
628
627
626
625
624
(LT03)
639
638
637
636
635
634
633
632
(LT04)
647
646
645
644
643
642
641
640
(LT05)
655
654
653
652
651
650
649
648
(LT06)
663
662
661
660
659
658
657
656
(LT07)
639
638
637
636
(LT08)
647
646
645
644
(LT09)
655
654
653
652
(LT10)
663
662
661
660
(LT11)
NOTE 2
507
506
505
504
503
502
501
500
(LT00)
515
514
513
512
511
510
509
508
(LT01)
523
522
521
520
519
518
517
516
(LT02)
531
530
529
528
527
526
525
524
(LT03)
539
538
537
536
535
534
533
532
(LT04)
547
546
545
544
543
542
541
540
(LT05)
555
554
553
552
551
550
549
548
(LT06)
563
562
561
560
559
558
557
556
(LT07)
539
538
537
536
(LT08)
547
546
545
544
(LT09)
555
554
553
552
(LT10)
563
562
561
560
(LT11)
NOTE 2
407
406
405
404
403
402
401
400
(LT00)
415
414
413
412
411
410
409
408
(LT01)
423
422
421
420
419
418
417
416
(LT02)
431
430
429
428
427
426
425
424
(LT03)
439
438
437
436
435
434
433
432
(LT04)
447
446
445
444
443
442
441
440
(LT05)
455
454
453
452
451
450
449
448
(LT06)
463
462
461
460
459
458
457
456
(LT07)
439
438
437
436
(LT08)
447
446
445
444
(LT09)
455
454
453
452
(LT10)
463
462
461
460
(LT11)
NOTE 2
NOTE 1: Use CM10>XZZ: X (PIM: 0-7) + ZZ (Port: 00-63).

Do not use CM14 in this configuration.
NOTE 2: In Slot 08-11, the following 8-port or 16-port line/trunk circuit cards are not mountable.
B15
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9papb001.fm

LEN of CM10
1 PIM + 7 Virtual PIMs
.PIM3
CM05 Y=0
17007
17006
17005
17004
17003
17002
17001
17000
(LT00)
17015
17014
17013
17012
17011
17010
17009
17008
(LT01)
17023
17022
17021
17020
17019
17018
17017
17016
(LT02)
17031
17030
17029
17028
17027
17026
17025
17024
(LT03)
17039
17038
17037
17036
17035
17034
17033
17032
(LT04)
17047
17046
17045
17044
17043
17042
17041
17040
(LT05)
17055
17054
17053
17052
17051
17050
17049
17048
(LT06)
17063
17062
17061
17060
17059
17058
17057
17056
(LT07)
(LT08)
(LT09)
(LT10)
(LT11)
PIM2
CM05 Y=0
(1) 01
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 01
(2) 02
CM05 Y=6
(1) 01
(2) 0
NOTE 2
01007
01006
01005
01004
01003
01002
01001
01000
(LT00)
01015
01014
01013
01012
01011
01010
01009
01008
(LT01)
01023
01022
01021
01020
01019
01018
01017
01016
(LT02)
01031
01030
01029
01028
01027
01026
01025
01024
(LT03)
01039
01038
01037
01036
01035
01034
01033
01032
(LT04)
01047
01046
01045
01044
01043
01042
01041
01040
(LT05)
01055
01054
01053
01052
01051
01050
01049
01048
(LT06)
01063
01062
01061
01060
01059
01058
01057
01056
(LT07)
(LT08)
(LT09)
(LT10)
(LT11)
PIM1
CM05 Y=0
(1) 16
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 16
(2) 01
CM05 Y=6
(1) 16
(2) 0
NOTE 2
16007
16006
16005
16004
16003
16002
16001
16000
(LT00)
16015
16014
16013
16012
16011
16010
16009
16008
(LT01)
16023
16022
16021
16020
16019
16018
16017
16016
(LT02)
16031
16030
16029
16028
16027
16026
16025
16024
(LT03)
16039
16038
16037
16036
16035
16034
16033
16032
(LT04)
16047
16046
16045
16044
16043
16042
16041
16040
(LT05)
16055
16054
16053
16052
16051
16050
16049
16048
(LT06)
16063
16062
16061
16060
16059
16058
16057
16056
(LT07)
(LT08)
(LT09)
(LT10)
(LT11)
.PIM0
CM05 Y=0
007
006
005
004
003
002
001
000
(LT00)
015
014
013
012
011
010
009
008
(LT01)
023
022
021
020
019
018
017
016
(LT02)
031
030
029
028
027
026
025
024
(LT03)
039
038
037
036
035
034
033
032
(LT04)
047
046
045
044
043
042
041
040
(LT05)
055
054
053
052
051
050
049
048
(LT06)
063
062
061
060
059
058
057
056
(LT07)
039
038
037
036
(LT08)
047
046
045
044
(LT09)
055
054
053
052
(LT10)
063
062
061
060
(LT11)
(1) 17
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 17
(2) 03
CM05 Y=6
(1) 17
(2) 0
NOTE 2
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
(1) 00
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 00
(2) 00
CM05 Y=6
(1) 00
(2) 2
NOTE 1
.
.
NOTE 3
B16
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9papb001.fm

LEN of CM10
.PIM7
CM05 Y=0
19007
19006
19005
19004
19003
19002
19001
19000
(LT00)
19015
19014
19013
19012
19011
19010
19009
19008
(LT01)
19023
19022
19021
19020
19019
19018
19017
19016
(LT02)
19031
19030
19029
19028
19027
19026
19025
19024
(LT03)
19039
19038
19037
19036
19035
19034
19033
19032
(LT04)
19047
19046
19045
19044
19043
19042
19041
19040
(LT05)
19055
19054
19053
19052
19051
19050
19049
19048
(LT06)
19063
19062
19061
19060
19059
19058
19057
19056
(LT07)
(LT08)
(LT09)
(LT10)
(LT11)
PIM6
CM05 Y=0
(1) 03
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 03
(2) 06
CM05 Y=6
(1) 03
(2) 0
NOTE 2
03007
03006
03005
03004
03003
03002
03001
03000
(LT00)
03015
03014
03013
03012
03011
03010
03009
03008
(LT01)
03023
03022
03021
03020
03019
03018
03017
03016
(LT02)
03031
03030
03029
03028
03027
03026
03025
03024
(LT03)
03039
03038
03037
03036
03035
03034
03033
03032
(LT04)
03047
03046
03045
03044
03043
03042
03041
03040
(LT05)
03055
03054
03053
03052
03051
03050
03049
03048
(LT06)
03063
03062
03061
03060
03059
03058
03057
03056
(LT07)
(LT08)
(LT09)
(LT10)
(LT11)
PIM5
CM05 Y=0
(1) 18
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 18
(2) 05
CM05 Y=6
(1) 18
(2) 0
NOTE 2
18007
18006
18005
18004
18003
18002
18001
18000
(LT00)
18015
18014
18013
18012
18011
18010
18009
18008
(LT01)
18023
18022
18021
18020
18019
18018
18017
18016
(LT02)
18031
18030
18029
18028
18027
18026
18025
18024
(LT03)
18039
18038
18037
18036
18035
18034
18033
18032
(LT04)
18047
18046
18045
18044
18043
18042
18041
18040
(LT05)
18055
18054
18053
18052
18051
18050
18049
18048
(LT06)
18063
18062
18061
18060
18059
18058
18057
18056
(LT07)
(LT08)
(LT09)
(LT10)
(LT11)
PIM4
CM05 Y=0
(1) 02
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 02
(2) 04
CM05 Y=6
(1) 02
(2) 0
NOTE 2
02007
02006
02005
02004
02003
02002
02001
02000
(LT00)
02015
02014
02013
02012
02011
02010
02009
02008
(LT01)
02023
02022
02021
02020
02019
02018
02017
02016
(LT02)
02031
02030
02029
02028
02027
02026
02025
02024
(LT03)
02039
02038
02037
02036
02035
02034
02033
02032
(LT04)
02047
02046
02045
02044
02043
03042
03041
02040
(LT05)
02055
02054
02053
02052
02051
02050
02049
02048
(LT06)
02063
02062
02061
02060
02059
02058
02057
02056
(LT07)
(LT08)
(LT09)
(LT10)
(LT11)
(1) 19
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 19
(2) 07
CM05 Y=6
(1) 19
(2) 0
NOTE 2
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
NOTE 1: Use CM10>XZZ: X (PIM: 0) + ZZ (Port: 00-63) only.

NOTE 2: Use CM14>XXZZZ: XX (FP No. 01-03, 16-19) + ZZZ (Port No. of Virtual PIM: 000-063).
B17
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9papb001.fm

LEN of CM10
.PIM3
CM05 Y=0
17007
17006
17005
17004
17003
17002
17001
17000
(LT00)
17015
17014
17013
17012
17011
17010
17009
17008
(LT01)
17023
17022
17021
17020
17019
17018
17017
17016
(LT02)
17031
17030
17029
17028
17027
17026
17025
17024
(LT03)
17039
17038
17037
17036
17035
17034
17033
17032
(LT04)
17047
17046
17045
17044
17043
17042
17041
17040
(LT05)
17055
17054
17053
17052
17051
17050
17049
17048
(LT06)
17063
17062
17061
17060
17059
17058
17057
17056
(LT07)
(LT08)
(LT09)
(LT10)
(LT11)
PIM2
CM05 Y=0
(1) 01
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 01
(2) 02
CM05 Y=6
(1) 01
(2) 0
NOTE 2
01007
01006
01005
01004
01003
01002
01001
01000
(LT00)
01015
01014
01013
01012
01011
01010
01009
01008
(LT01)
01023
01022
01021
01020
01019
01018
01017
01016
(LT02)
01031
01030
01029
01028
01027
01026
01025
01024
(LT03)
01039
01038
01037
01036
01035
01034
01033
01032
(LT04)
01047
01046
01045
01044
01043
01042
01041
01040
(LT05)
01055
01054
01053
01052
01051
01050
01049
01048
(LT06)
01063
01062
01061
01060
01059
01058
01057
01056
(LT07)
(LT08)
(LT09)
(LT10)
(LT11)
.PIM1
CM05 Y=0
107
106
105
104
103
102
101
100
(LT00)
115
114
113
112
111
110
109
108
(LT01)
123
122
121
120
119
118
117
116
(LT02)
131
130
129
128
127
126
125
124
(LT03)
139
138
137
136
135
134
133
132
(LT04)
147
146
145
144
143
142
141
140
(LT05)
155
154
153
152
151
150
149
148
(LT06)
163
162
161
160
159
158
157
156
(LT07)
139
138
137
136
(LT08)
147
146
145
144
(LT09)
155
154
153
152
(LT10)
163
162
161
160
(LT11)
(1) 17
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 17
(2) 03
CM05 Y=6
(1) 17
(2) 0
NOTE 2
.
.
.
.
.
(1) 00
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 00
(2) NONE
CM05 Y=6
(1) 00
(2) 2
NOTE 1
.
.
.PIM0
CM05 Y=0
(1) 00
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 00
(2) NONE
CM05 Y=6
(1) 00
(2) 2
NOTE 1
.
.
NOTE 3
007
006
005
004
003
002
001
000
(LT00)
015
014
013
012
011
010
009
008
(LT01)
023
022
021
020
019
018
017
016
(LT02)
031
030
029
028
027
026
025
024
(LT03)
039
038
037
036
035
034
033
032
(LT04)
047
046
045
044
043
042
041
040
(LT05)
055
054
053
052
051
050
049
048
(LT06)
063
062
061
060
059
058
057
056
(LT07)
039
038
037
036
(LT08)
047
046
045
044
(LT09)
055
054
053
052
(LT10)
063
062
061
060
(LT11)
NOTE 3
B18
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9papb001.fm

LEN of CM10
.PIM7
CM05 Y=0
19007
19006
19005
19004
19003
19002
19001
19000
(LT00)
19015
19014
19013
19012
19011
19010
19009
19008
(LT01)
19023
19022
19021
19020
19019
19018
19017
19016
(LT02)
19031
19030
19029
19028
19027
19026
19025
19024
(LT03)
19039
19038
19037
19036
19035
19034
19033
19032
(LT04)
19047
19046
19045
19044
19043
19042
19041
19040
(LT05)
19055
19054
19053
19052
19051
19050
19049
19048
(LT06)
19063
19062
19061
19060
19059
19058
19057
19056
(LT07)
(LT08)
(LT09)
(LT10)
(LT11)
PIM6
CM05 Y=0
(1) 03
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 03
(2) 06
CM05 Y=6
(1) 03
(2) 0
NOTE 2
03007
03006
03005
03004
03003
03002
03001
03000
(LT00)
03015
03014
03013
03012
03011
03010
03009
03008
(LT01)
03023
03022
03021
03020
03019
03018
03017
03016
(LT02)
03031
03030
03029
03028
03027
03026
03025
03024
(LT03)
03039
03038
03037
03036
03035
03034
03033
03032
(LT04)
03047
03046
03045
03044
03043
03042
03041
03040
(LT05)
03055
03054
03053
03052
03051
03050
03049
03048
(LT06)
03063
03062
03061
03060
03059
03058
03057
03056
(LT07)
(LT08)
(LT09)
(LT10)
(LT11)
PIM5
CM05 Y=0
(1) 18
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 18
(2) 05
CM05 Y=6
(1) 18
(2) 0
NOTE 2
18007
18006
18005
18004
18003
18002
18001
18000
(LT00)
18015
18014
18013
18012
18011
18010
18009
18008
(LT01)
18023
18022
18021
18020
18019
18018
18017
18016
(LT02)
18031
18030
18029
18028
18027
18026
18025
18024
(LT03)
18039
18038
18037
18036
18035
18034
18033
18032
(LT04)
18047
18046
18045
18044
18043
18042
18041
18040
(LT05)
18055
18054
18053
18052
18051
18050
18049
18048
(LT06)
18063
18062
18061
18060
18059
18058
18057
18056
(LT07)
(LT08)
(LT09)
(LT10)
(LT11)
PIM4
CM05 Y=0
(1) 02
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 02
(2) 04
CM05 Y=6
(1) 02
(2) 0
NOTE 2
02007
02006
02005
02004
02003
02002
02001
02000
(LT00)
02015
02014
02013
02012
02011
02010
02009
02008
(LT01)
02023
02022
02021
02020
02019
02018
02017
02016
(LT02)
02031
02030
02029
02028
02027
02026
02025
02024
(LT03)
02039
02038
02037
02036
02035
02034
02033
02032
(LT04)
02047
02046
02045
02044
02043
03042
03041
02040
(LT05)
02055
02054
02053
02052
02051
02050
02049
02048
(LT06)
02063
02062
02061
02060
02059
02058
02057
02056
(LT07)
(LT08)
(LT09)
(LT10)
(LT11)
(1) 19
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 19
(2) 07
CM05 Y=6
(1) 19
(2) 0
NOTE 2
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
NOTE 1: Use CM10>XZZ: X (PIM: 0-1) + ZZ (Port: 00-63) only.

NOTE 2: Use CM14>XXZZZ: XX (FP No. 01-03, 17-19) + ZZZ (Port No. of Virtual PIM: 000-063).
B19
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9papb001.fm

LEN of CM10
.PIM3
CM05 Y=0
(1) 17
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 17
(2) 03
CM05 Y=6
(1) 17
(2) 0
NOTE 2
.
.
.PIM2
CM05 Y=0
(1) 01
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 01
(2) 02
CM05 Y=6
(1) 01
(2) 3
NOTE 1
.
.
.PIM1
CM05 Y=0
(1) 00
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 00
(2) NONE
CM05 Y=6
(1) 00
(2) 2
NOTE 1
.
.
.PIM0
CM05 Y=0
(1) 00
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 00
(2) NONE
CM05 Y=6
(1) 00
(2) 2
NOTE 1
.
.
17007
17006
17005
17004
17003
17002
17001
17000
(LT00)
17015
17014
17013
17012
17011
17010
17009
17008
(LT01)
17023
17022
17021
17020
17019
17018
17017
17016
(LT02)
17031
17030
17029
17028
17027
17026
17025
17024
(LT03)
17039
17038
17037
17036
17035
17034
17033
17032
(LT04)
17047
17046
17045
17044
17043
17042
17041
17040
(LT05)
17055
17054
17053
17052
17051
17050
17049
17048
(LT06)
17063
17062
17061
17060
17059
17058
17057
17056
(LT07)
(LT08)
(LT09)
(LT10)
(LT11)
207
206
205
204
203
202
201
200
(LT00)
215
214
213
212
211
210
209
208
(LT01)
223
222
221
220
219
218
217
216
(LT02)
231
230
229
228
227
226
225
224
(LT03)
239
238
237
236
235
234
233
232
(LT04)
247
246
245
244
243
242
241
240
(LT05)
255
254
253
252
251
250
249
248
(LT06)
263
262
261
260
259
258
257
256
(LT07)
239
238
237
236
(LT08)
247
246
245
244
(LT09)
255
254
253
252
(LT10)
263
262
261
260
(LT11)
NOTE 3
107
106
105
104
103
102
101
100
(LT00)
115
114
113
112
111
110
109
108
(LT01)
123
122
121
120
119
118
117
116
(LT02)
131
130
129
128
127
126
125
124
(LT03)
139
138
137
136
135
134
133
132
(LT04)
147
146
145
144
143
142
141
140
(LT05)
155
154
153
152
151
150
149
148
(LT06)
163
162
161
160
159
158
157
156
(LT07)
139
138
137
136
(LT08)
147
146
145
144
(LT09)
155
154
153
152
(LT10)
163
162
161
160
(LT11)
NOTE 3
007
006
005
004
003
002
001
000
(LT00)
015
014
013
012
011
010
009
008
(LT01)
023
022
021
020
019
018
017
016
(LT02)
031
030
029
028
027
026
025
024
(LT03)
039
038
037
036
035
034
033
032
(LT04)
047
046
045
044
043
042
041
040
(LT05)
055
054
053
052
051
050
049
048
(LT06)
063
062
061
060
059
058
057
056
(LT07)
039
038
037
036
(LT08)
047
046
045
044
(LT09)
055
054
053
052
(LT10)
063
062
061
060
(LT11)
NOTE 3
B20
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9papb001.fm

LEN of CM10
.PIM7
CM05 Y=0
19007
19006
19005
19004
19003
19002
19001
19000
(LT00)
19015
19014
19013
19012
19011
19010
19009
19008
(LT01)
19023
19022
19021
19020
19019
19018
19017
19016
(LT02)
19031
19030
19029
19028
19027
19026
19025
19024
(LT03)
19039
19038
19037
19036
19035
19034
19033
19032
(LT04)
19047
19046
19045
19044
19043
19042
19041
19040
(LT05)
19055
19054
19053
19052
19051
19050
19049
19048
(LT06)
19063
19062
19061
19060
19059
19058
19057
19056
(LT07)
(LT08)
(LT09)
(LT10)
(LT11)
PIM6
CM05 Y=0
(1) 03
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 03
(2) 06
CM05 Y=6
(1) 03
(2) 0
NOTE 2
03007
03006
03005
03004
03003
03002
03001
03000
(LT00)
03015
03014
03013
03012
03011
03010
03009
03008
(LT01)
03023
03022
03021
03020
03019
03018
03017
03016
(LT02)
03031
03030
03029
03028
03027
03026
03025
03024
(LT03)
03039
03038
03037
03036
03035
03034
03033
03032
(LT04)
03047
03046
03045
03044
03043
03042
03041
03040
(LT05)
03055
03054
03053
03052
03051
03050
03049
03048
(LT06)
03063
03062
03061
03060
03059
03058
03057
03056
(LT07)
(LT08)
(LT09)
(LT10)
(LT11)
PIM5
CM05 Y=0
(1) 18
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 18
(2) 05
CM05 Y=6
(1) 18
(2) 0
NOTE 2
18007
18006
18005
18004
18003
18002
18001
18000
(LT00)
18015
18014
18013
18012
18011
18010
18009
18008
(LT01)
18023
18022
18021
18020
18019
18018
18017
18016
(LT02)
18031
18030
18029
18028
18027
18026
18025
18024
(LT03)
18039
18038
18037
18036
18035
18034
18033
18032
(LT04)
18047
18046
18045
18044
18043
18042
18041
18040
(LT05)
18055
18054
18053
18052
18051
18050
18049
18048
(LT06)
18063
18062
18061
18060
18059
18058
18057
18056
(LT07)
(LT08)
(LT09)
(LT10)
(LT11)
PIM4
CM05 Y=0
(1) 02
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 02
(2) 04
CM05 Y=6
(1) 02
(2) 0
NOTE 2
02007
02006
02005
02004
02003
02002
02001
02000
(LT00)
02015
02014
02013
02012
02011
02010
02009
02008
(LT01)
02023
02022
02021
02020
02019
02018
02017
02016
(LT02)
02031
02030
02029
02028
02027
02026
02025
02024
(LT03)
02039
02038
02037
02036
02035
02034
02033
02032
(LT04)
02047
02046
02045
02044
02043
03042
03041
02040
(LT05)
02055
02054
02053
02052
02051
02050
02049
02048
(LT06)
02063
02062
02061
02060
02059
02058
02057
02056
(LT07)
(LT08)
(LT09)
(LT10)
(LT11)
(1) 19
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 19
(2) 07
CM05 Y=6
(1) 19
(2) 0
NOTE 2
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

NOTE 2: Use CM14>XXZZZ: XX (FP No. 02, 03, 17-19) + ZZZ (Port No. of Virtual PIM: 000-063).
B21
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9papb001.fm

LEN of CM10
.PIM3
CM05 Y=0
(1) 01
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 01
(2) NONE
CM05 Y=6
(1) 01
(2) 3
NOTE 1
.
.
.PIM2
CM05 Y=0
(1) 01
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 01
(2) NONE
CM05 Y=6
(1) 01
(2) 3
NOTE 1
.
.
.PIM1
CM05 Y=0
(1) 00
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 00
(2) NONE
CM05 Y=6
(1) 00
(2) 2
NOTE 1
.
.
.PIM0
CM05 Y=0
(1) 00
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 00
(2) NONE
CM05 Y=6
(1) 00
(2) 2
NOTE 1
.
.
307
306
305
304
303
302
301
300
(LT00)
315
314
313
312
311
310
309
308
(LT01)
323
322
321
320
319
318
317
316
(LT02)
331
330
329
328
327
326
325
324
(LT03)
339
338
337
336
335
334
333
332
(LT04)
347
346
345
344
343
342
341
340
(LT05)
355
354
353
352
351
350
349
348
(LT06)
363
362
361
360
359
358
357
356
(LT07)
339
338
337
336
(LT08)
347
346
345
344
(LT09)
355
354
353
352
(LT10)
363
362
361
360
(LT11)
NOTE 3
207
206
205
204
203
202
201
200
(LT00)
215
214
213
212
211
210
209
208
(LT01)
223
222
221
220
219
218
217
216
(LT02)
231
230
229
228
227
226
225
224
(LT03)
239
238
237
236
235
234
233
232
(LT04)
247
246
245
244
243
242
241
240
(LT05)
255
254
253
252
251
250
249
248
(LT06)
263
262
261
260
259
258
257
256
(LT07)
239
238
237
236
(LT08)
247
246
245
244
(LT09)
255
254
253
252
(LT10)
263
262
261
260
(LT11)
NOTE 3
107
106
105
104
103
102
101
100
(LT00)
115
114
113
112
111
110
109
108
(LT01)
123
122
121
120
119
118
117
116
(LT02)
131
130
129
128
127
126
125
124
(LT03)
139
138
137
136
135
134
133
132
(LT04)
147
146
145
144
143
142
141
140
(LT05)
155
154
153
152
151
150
149
148
(LT06)
163
162
161
160
159
158
157
156
(LT07)
139
138
137
136
(LT08)
147
146
145
144
(LT09)
155
154
153
152
(LT10)
163
162
161
160
(LT11)
NOTE 3
007
006
005
004
003
002
001
000
(LT00)
015
014
013
012
011
010
009
008
(LT01)
023
022
021
020
019
018
017
016
(LT02)
031
030
029
028
027
026
025
024
(LT03)
039
038
037
036
035
034
033
032
(LT04)
047
046
045
044
043
042
041
040
(LT05)
055
054
053
052
051
050
049
048
(LT06)
063
062
061
060
059
058
057
056
(LT07)
039
038
037
036
(LT08)
047
046
045
044
(LT09)
055
054
053
052
(LT10)
063
062
061
060
(LT11)
NOTE 3
B22
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9papb001.fm

LEN of CM10
.PIM7
CM05 Y=0
19007
19006
19005
19004
19003
19002
19001
19000
(LT00)
19015
19014
19013
19012
19011
19010
19009
19008
(LT01)
19023
19022
19021
19020
19019
19018
19017
19016
(LT02)
19031
19030
19029
19028
19027
19026
19025
19024
(LT03)
19039
19038
19037
19036
19035
19034
19033
19032
(LT04)
19047
19046
19045
19044
19043
19042
19041
19040
(LT05)
19055
19054
19053
19052
19051
19050
19049
19048
(LT06)
19063
19062
19061
19060
19059
19058
19057
19056
(LT07)
(LT08)
(LT09)
(LT10)
(LT11)
PIM6
CM05 Y=0
(1) 03
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 03
(2) 06
CM05 Y=6
(1) 03
(2) 0
NOTE 2
03007
03006
03005
03004
03003
03002
03001
03000
(LT00)
03015
03014
03013
03012
03011
03010
03009
03008
(LT01)
03023
03022
03021
03020
03019
03018
03017
03016
(LT02)
03031
03030
03029
03028
03027
03026
03025
03024
(LT03)
03039
03038
03037
03036
03035
03034
03033
03032
(LT04)
03047
03046
03045
03044
03043
03042
03041
03040
(LT05)
03055
03054
03053
03052
03051
03050
03049
03048
(LT06)
03063
03062
03061
03060
03059
03058
03057
03056
(LT07)
(LT08)
(LT09)
(LT10)
(LT11)
PIM5
CM05 Y=0
(1) 18
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 18
(2) 05
CM05 Y=6
(1) 18
(2) 0
NOTE 2
18007
18006
18005
18004
18003
18002
18001
18000
(LT00)
18015
18014
18013
18012
18011
18010
18009
18008
(LT01)
18023
18022
18021
18020
18019
18018
18017
18016
(LT02)
18031
18030
18029
18028
18027
18026
18025
18024
(LT03)
18039
18038
18037
18036
18035
18034
18033
18032
(LT04)
18047
18046
18045
18044
18043
18042
18041
18040
(LT05)
18055
18054
18053
18052
18051
18050
18049
18048
(LT06)
18063
18062
18061
18060
18059
18058
18057
18056
(LT07)
(LT08)
(LT09)
(LT10)
(LT11)
PIM4
CM05 Y=0
(1) 02
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 02
(2) 04
CM05 Y=6
(1) 02
(2) 0
NOTE 2
02007
02006
02005
02004
02003
02002
02001
02000
(LT00)
02015
02014
02013
02012
02011
02010
02009
02008
(LT01)
02023
02022
02021
02020
02019
02018
02017
02016
(LT02)
02031
02030
02029
02028
02027
02026
02025
02024
(LT03)
02039
02038
02037
02036
02035
02034
02033
02032
(LT04)
02047
02046
02045
02044
02043
03042
03041
02040
(LT05)
02055
02054
02053
02052
02051
02050
02049
02048
(LT06)
02063
02062
02061
02060
02059
02058
02057
02056
(LT07)
(LT08)
(LT09)
(LT10)
(LT11)
(1) 19
(2) 00
CM05 Y=4
(1) 19
(2) 07
CM05 Y=6
(1) 19
(2) 0
NOTE 2
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

NOTE 2: Use CM14>XXZZZ: XX (FP No. 02, 03, 18, 19) + ZZZ (Port No. of Virtual PIM: 000-063).
B23
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9papb001.fm
B24
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9papb001.fm
APPENDIX C REMOTE PIM OVER IP SAMPLE SETUP
APPENDIX C
REMOTE PIM OVER IP
SAMPLE SETUP
This appendix explains the required data and the procedure of the data setting
for Remote PIM over IP system, using a sample system configuration.
SAMPLE SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ..................................... C2

CONDITIONS FOR SAMPLE SYSTEM .................................... C4
LIST OF COMMANDS ............................................................... C5
SETUP THE SYSTEM ............................................................... C11
C1
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9papc001.fm
SAMPLE SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

The figure below shows the sample system configuration and the accommodated hardware in the Main
Site and Remote Site of the sample system.
Sample System Configuration

GSTN
Main Site
Dterm
Remote Site
2000 IPS
Router
Router
IPSDMR
Dterm
SLT
DtermIP
DtermIP
DtermIP
C2
DtermIP
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9papc001.fm
Accommodated Hardware in Main Site

PIM0 (Physical PIM)
PN-8DLC
PN-8LC
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
PN-16VCTA-A (16VCT)
PN-CP24-B (MP)
Accommodated Hardware in Remote Site
LT01
PN-8COT
LT04
LT00
PN-8DLC
LT03
PN-16VCTA-A (16VCT)
PN-CP31-A (MP)
LT02
MP
C3
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9papc001.fm
CONDITIONS FOR SAMPLE SYSTEM
CONDITIONS FOR SAMPLE SYSTEM

The following shows the conditions of sample system that are required to the system data setting.
Sample System Conditions

MP=192.168.1.1
IP-PAD=192.168.1.5
IP-PAD=192.168.2.5
MP=192.168.2.1
GSTN
Main Site
Station No. 250
Remote Site
2000 IPS
MP built-in FP=
FP00
Virtual FP=FP01
Router
IPSDMR
Router
Station No. 350
Station No. 260

192.168.2.254
192.168.1.254
Location=00
Station No. 200
Station No. 201
MP built-in FP=
FP32
Location=01
Station No. 300
Station No. 301
Virtual FP=FP33
192.168.1.100
(1)
(2)
(3)
192.168.1.101
192.168.2.100
192.168.2.101
A Remote Site number of the Remote Site in this system is 01.

Prepare the required Key FDs in advance. In this sample system, 128 port Key FD 1, 16-IP license
Key FD 1, Remote PIM over IP license (one license per Remote Site) 1 are required to setup the
system.
A CODEC within the site is G.711 (64 Kbps), and a CODEC between sites is G.729 (8 Kbps).
C4
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9papc001.fm
JULY/01/2006
LIST OF COMMANDS
LIST OF COMMANDS
The table below shows the required command list and the data setting procedure that are set to the MP card
of Main Site in the sample system.
NOTE:
Some cells are colored in order to see the table easily.
Command List Set to Main Site

Setting Procedure
No.
Contents of Setting
CM
System data memory all clear
00
IP address for Main Site
0B
Subnet Mask for Main Site
1st
Data
2nd Data
CCC
00
00
192168001001
0B
00
01
255255255000
Default Gateway address for

Main Site
0B
00
02
192168001254
IP address for Remote Site
0B
31
00
192168002001
Subnet Mask for Remote Site
0B
31
01
255255255000

Remote Site
0B
31
02
192168002254
FP No. 00 assignment to MP
built-in FP in Main Site
05
00
00
Reference
Page
Remarks
Page 109
OFF LINE
Page 119
Remote Site No.=01

Page 129
FP No. 00 assignment
to MP built-in FP of
Main Site
Page 138
05
00
0000
FP No. 00 controls
PIM0
10
05
00
Accommodation type
of FP No. 00
Page 139
11
05
00
064
Number of port controlled by FP No. 00
Page 140
05
01
00
to Virtual FP of Main
Site
12
FP No. 01 assignment to Virtual

FP in Main Site
13
05
01
0002
FP No. 01 controls Virtual PIM2 of Main Site
14
05
01
Accommodation type
of FP No. 01
Page 138
Page 139
C5
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9papc001.fm
JULY/01/2006
LIST OF COMMANDS

Setting Procedure
No.
15
Contents of Setting
FP No. 32 assignment to MP
built-in FP in Remote Site No.
01
CM
05
Y
0
1st
Data
32
2nd Data
00
Reference
Page
Remarks
to MP built-in FP of
Remote Site
Page 141
Page 142
16
05
32
0100
FP No. 32 controls
PIM0 of Remote Site
17
05
32
Accommodation type
of FP No. 32
Page 143
18
05
32
Type of FP No. 32
19
05
32
064
Number of port controlled by FP No. 32
Page 144
05
33
00
to Virtual FP of
Remote Site
Page 141
FP No. 33 controls Virtual PIM2 of Remote

Site
Page 142
20
FP No. 33 assignment to Virtual

FP in Remote Site No. 01
21
05
22
05
23
24
Numbering Plan
25
26
Dterm
33
33
0102
Accommodation type
of FP No. 33
05
33
Type of FP No. 33
20
100
For COT in Remote

Site connection
20
803
3 digits station
20
803
00000
F250
Station No. 250
14
12
24
250
Kind of Dterm
29
20
803
3 digits station
30
90
00
250, 01
250
My line setting
31
93
250
250
Prime line setting
27
28
Registration of
Site
in Main
Page 143
Refer to
Command
Manual
Refer to
Command
Manual
C6
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9papc001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
LIST OF COMMANDS

Setting Procedure
CM
1st
Data
14
01000
F200
Station No. 200
12
24
200
Kind of DtermIP
34
20
803
3 digits station
35
90
00
200, 01
200
My line setting
36
93
200
200
Prime line setting
No.
Contents of Setting
32
Registration of DtermIP in Main

Site
33
37
12
39
14
12
40
2nd Data
Reference
Page
Remarks
Page 164
Page 165
term
200
00
Registration of D IP
to Location No. 00
01001
F201
Station No. 201
24
201
Kind of DtermIP
20
803
3 digits station
41
90
00
201, 01
201
My line setting
42
93
201
201
Prime line setting
Page 165
43
12
39
201
00
Registration of DtermIP
to Location No. 00
Page 223
38
39
Registration of DtermIP in Main

Site
Page 223
Page 164
44
Registration of Single line telephone in Main Site
14
00008
260
Station No. 260

(DTMF)
Refer to
Command
Manual
45
Registration of Dterm in Remote

Site
14
32000
F350
Station No. 350
Refer to
Command
Manual
46
term
12
24
350
Kind of D
47
20
803
3 digits station
48
90
00
350, 01
350
My line setting
93
350
350
Prime line setting
14
33000
F300
Station No. 300
12
24
300
Kind of DtermIP
52
20
803
3 digits station
53
90
00
300, 01
300
My line setting
54
93
300
300
Prime line setting
Page 165
55
12
39
300
01
Registration of DtermIP
to Location No. 01
Page 223
49
50
51
Registration of
Remote Site
DtermIP
in
Page 164
C7
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9papc001.fm
JULY/01/2006
LIST OF COMMANDS

Setting Procedure
CM
1st
Data
14
33001
F301
Station No. 301
12
24
301
Kind of DtermIP
58
20
803
3 digits station
59
90
00
301, 01
301
My line setting
60
93
301
301
Prime line setting
No.
56
57
Contents of Setting
Registration of DtermIP in
Remote Site
61
12
39
14
30
64
2nd Data
Reference
Page
Remarks
Page 164
Page 165
term
301
01
Registration of D IP
to Location No. 01
32008
D000
Trunk No. 000
00
000
00
Trunk Route No. 00
30
02
000
04
Direct-in Termination
for incoming C.O call
65
30
04
000
300
Direct-in Termination
setting to Station No.
300
66
35
00
00
00
C.O trunk
67
35
01
00
DTMF
68
35
05
00
0/1
Release signal does nor

arrive/Release signal
arrives
0A
00
00
001
FP No. 00 + IP-PAD
No. 1
70
0A
01
00
192168001005
IP Address of IP-PAD
71
0A
02
00
255255255000
Subnet Mask of IPPAD
62
63
69
Registration of COT in Remote

Site
Registration of IP-PAD in Main

Site
72
0A
03
00
192168001254
Default Gateway
Address of IP-PAD
73
0A
09
00
00
Registration of IP-PAD
to Location No. 00
74
14
00000
DD000
75
..
.
..
.
..
.
..
.
76
14
00063
DD031
IP-PAD Channel No.

(000-031) assignment
Page 223
Refer to
Command
Manual
Page 188
Page 189
Page 223
Page 191
C8
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9papc001.fm
JULY/01/2006
LIST OF COMMANDS

Setting Procedure
No.
77
Contents of Setting
Registration of IP-PAD in
Remote Site
CM
1st
Data
2nd Data
Reference
Page
Remarks
0A
00
01
321
FP No. 32 + IP-PAD
No. 1
78
0A
01
01
192168002005
IP Address of IP-PAD
79
0A
02
01
255255255000
Subnet Mask of IPPAD
80
0A
03
01
192168002254
Default Gateway
Address of IP-PAD
81
0A
09
01
01
Registration of IP-PAD
to Location No. 01
82
14
32032
DD032
83
..
.
..
.
..
.
..
.
IP-PAD Channel No.

(032-063) assignment
84
14
32063
DD063
67
00
0001
CODEC List 0
86
67
00
0100
CODEC List 0
87
42
100
04
CODEC type=G.729a
88
42
110
04
Payload Size=40 ms.
85
Location Data Assignment
89
Key FD Data Download
90
System Data Backup
EC
C9
Page 188
Page 189
Page 223
Page 191
Page 225
Page 232
Data Backup to Flash

Rom of MP card
Page 324
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9papc001.fm
JULY/01/2006
LIST OF COMMANDS
The table below shows the required command list and the data setting procedure that are set to the MP card
of Remote Site in the sample system.
NOTE:
Some cells are colored in order to see the table easily.
Command List Set to Remote Site

Setting Procedure
No.
Contents of Setting
CM
System data memory all clear
00
Remote Site Number
0B
IP address for Main Site
1st
Data
2nd Data
Reference
Page
Remarks
CCC
OFF LINE
Page 109
00
90
01
OFF LINE
Page 156
0B
00
00
192168001001
Subnet Mask for Main Site
0B
00
01
255255255000

Main Site
0B
00
02
192168001254
IP address for Remote Site
0B
31
00
192168002001
Subnet Mask for Remote Site
0B
31
01
255255255000

Remote Site
0B
31
02
192168002254
System Data Backup
EC
C10
Page 119
Remote Site No.=01

Page 129
Data Backup to Flash

Rom of MP card
Page 324
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9papc001.fm
SETUP THE SYSTEM
SETUP THE SYSTEM

After the office data programming in LIST OF COMMANDS
low. (The two routers should already be working correctly.)
Page C5, follow the procedure be-
STEP1: Turn power switch of the Main Site on.

STEP2: Confirm that the MP in Main Site is working, and turn power switch of the Remote Site on.
The communication between Main Site and Remote Site starts. (The RX/TX lamp on PZM606-A card lights on.)
STEP3: Confirm that the office data has been copying from Main Site to Remote Site.
After 30 seconds, the RUN lamp on MP card at Remote Site flashes at 30 IPM.
STEP4: Confirm that the office data is backed up in Flash ROM of MP card at Remote Site.
SYSD lamp on the MP card turns on, and the data back up starts. (It takes two minutes to back
up the office data.)
STEP5: Confirm that Normal Mode operation starts.
The MP card in the Remote Site resets itself automatically, and starts Normal Mode operation.
C11
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9papc001.fm
JANUARY/20/2006
C12
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9papc001.fm
APPENDIX D VOICE QUALITY MEASURES IN IP-PAD
APPENDIX D
VOICE QUALITY
MEASURES IN IP-PAD
This appendix describes how to reduce echoes in 2000 IPS and the setup
method.
COUNTERMEASURES FOR ECHO .........................................

COUNTERMEASURES FOR OTHERS .....................................
D1
D2
D8
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9papd001.fm
COUNTERMEASURES FOR ECHO
In 2000 IPS, the IP-PAD is used to relay the voice data on the IP network (on the IP packet) to the signals
(PCM data) on TDM. The IP-PAD is equipped with an echo canceller circuit to suppress the echoes that
influence calls. However, the echo canceller by itself cannot diminish echoes completely in some hardware
configuration that contains lines on the TDM side.
This appendix describes how to reduce echoes in 2000 IPS and the setup method.

IP-PAD Channel Automatic Selection Procedure
(1)
About IP-PAD Channel Automatic Selection

The echo canceller installed in the IP-PAD card has a function that automatically learns (trains) the
characteristics of echoes that were generated, corrects the echoes, and stores the information.
However, one to two seconds are required for training and when the actual call status and the echo
characteristics that were stored do not match, echoes may occur for one to two seconds from the
start of a call. 2000 IPS reduces echoes by storing the status of the echo characteristics and using
the result as the key for selecting the next channel for each IP-PAD channel, using the echo canceller
circuit function.
In practice, the system classifies echo canceller training results into the models (levels) as indicated
STEP2 of (2) Setting Up Procedure for IP-PAD Channel Automatic Selection according to the
connection destination on the TDM side and stores the information for each IP-PAD channel.
These levels are organized in the sequence starting from the level with the characteristics closest to
those of the channel.
The level of each IP-PAD channel that has been stored is maintained unless the system or the IP-PAD
card is reset (When using Series 3100 software or later, the level of each IP-PAD channel that has
been stored is maintained even if the system or the IP-PAD card is reset).
After the levels of all the IP-PAD channels are set, the IP-PAD channel storing the level matching
with that of the connection destination is used in subsequent connection processing. If there is an IPPAD channel whose level has not been set, the channel is captured first and trained.
(2)
Setting Up Procedure for IP-PAD Channel Automatic Selection

[Cautions and Reference Information]
When the setup described in this section is not carried out or the channel setting distribution ratio
is incorrectly set, customers may experience echoes for 1 to 2 seconds until all the IP-PAD
channels are used. However, by continuing the operation, the value is set to the optimum value
automatically under the customer's use environment (Actually, if the number of IP-PAD channels
is greater, the level matching probability increases so that the number of channels also influences
the echo occurrence frequency).
D2
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9papd001.fm
Once training is performed, the echo control information is stored unless the IP-PAD is reset
(When using Series 3100 software or later, the level of each IP-PAD channel that has been stored
is maintained even if the system or the IP-PAD card is reset).
The training does not become valid unless the caller carries out a conversation.
If a digital trunk such as ISDN is used for the main trunk line, the influence of the echo is less than
that of the analog trunk.
NOTE:
The setting up procedure is varied by the software version you use (Series 3100 software or before/Series 3200 R6.1 software or later).
[For Series 3100 software or before]

Carry out training together with the IP-PAD canalization test at the final stage of construction.
STEP1: Determine the total number of IP-PAD channel.
STEP2: Assume the connection ratio (number of channels allocated) of IP telephones and Virtual
IP trunk to terminals that communicate via TDSW (Dterm, single line telephones, ATTCON, COT, ODT/LDT/DID/ODT etc.). Match this total value and the total value that
was determined in STEP1.
Level
Connection
Ratio
Number of
IP-PAD Channel
COT/LDT/DIT/ODT
PRT/BRT
DTI
PS
Dterm/AD-8/Paging equipment/ATTCON (SN708/709/712/741) /

SN716 DESKCON
IPT
Total
(total number of IP-PAD channel determined by STEP1)
D3
100%
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9papd001.fm
STEP3: To set the number of IP-PAD channels divided by STEP2, start up the IP-PAD by MB
switch of the card to ON then to OFF. Consequently, the characteristic levels that have
been stored are reset (erased).
STEP4: Carry out calls with the call destination of each level as many times as the number of
channels that were allocated.
NOTE:
Connection with a line that sends a voice announcement, music, or tones continuously from the
call destination such as time information and weather information from a main trunk line is ineffective. The call destination could be silent. A call of several seconds is sufficient.
D4
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9papd001.fm
[For Series 3200 R6.1 software or later]

Carry out training together with the IP-PAD canalization test at the final stage of construction.
STEP1: Determine the total number of IP-PAD channel.
STEP2: Assume the connection ratio (number of channels allocated) of IP telephones and Virtual
IP trunk to terminals that communicate via TDSW (Dterm, single line telephones,
ATTCON, COT, ODT/LDT/DID/ODT etc.). Match this total value and the total value that
was determined in STEP1.
Level
Connection
Ratio
COT/LDT/DIT/ODT
PRT/BRT
DTI
PS
Dterm/AD-8/Paging equipment/ATTCON (SN708/709/712/741) /SN716

DESKCON
IPT
17
NOTE
16
NOTE
15
NOTE
14
NOTE
13
NOTE
12
NOTE
11
NOTE
10
NOTE
Total (total number of IP-PAD channel determined by STEP1)
NOTE:
Number of
IP-PAD
Channel
100%
For characteristic levels 10 to 17, since channels with other levels that are set are not captured
even if channels become inadequate, assign the necessary number of channels when there is an
adequate number of channels.
D5
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9papd001.fm
STEP3: Set the characteristic level to each IP-PAD channel. When IP-PAD is started, the characteristic levels that were set here are assigned automatically (This is not for training the
echo canceller).
CM0A Y=72
1st Data: XX ZZ
ZZ: 00-31: IP-PAD Channel No.
2nd Data: 00-07, 10-17: Characteristic level No. 0-7, 10-17
CM35 Y=193
1st Data: 00-63: Trunk Route No.
2nd Data: 10-17: Characteristic level No. 10-17 to be fixed allocated to specific Trunk
Route
CM15 Y=483
1st Data: 00-15: Service Restriction Class C assigned by CM12 Y=07
2nd Data: 10-17: Characteristic level No. 10-17 to be fixed allocated to specific Service
Restriction Class
NOTE 1: When this data is not set, levels are set automatically in the conventional way.
NOTE 2: When the number of channels with characteristic levels is less than the number of channels set
in the exchange data, use the channels with a different level (for characteristic levels 00-07).
STEP4: Set the MB switch of IP-PAD to ON then to OFF.
STEP5: Carry out calls with the call destination of each level as many times as the number of
channels that were allocated.
NOTE:
Connection with a line that sends a voice announcement, music, or tones continuously from the
call destination such as time information and weather information from a main trunk line is ineffective. The call destination could be silent. A call of several seconds is sufficient.
D6
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9papd001.fm
Echo Canceller function (NLP) Setting

The IP-PAD echo canceller circuit is equipped with a function called Non Linear Processor (NLP) and echoes can be reduced by changing the setting.
[Data setting]
Set the following data to each IP-PAD.
CM0A Y=22
1st Data: 00-31: LAN Interface No.
2nd Data: 0: NLP ON
NOTE:
This function erases small sound at a level less than a certain level. Since this function erases
the background noise on the other party, some customers may feel this is strange. (At the point,
a better result can be achieved by setting NLP ON.)
PAD Adjustment
To achieve good echo erase characteristics, it is necessary to prevent the voice level in the trunk from exceeding the saturation point, even if the originator and the incoming call responder talked simultaneously.
To achieve this, enter PAD of 3dB for both transmission and reception of the 2W analog trunk line such as
COT, ODT and LDT. By this setting, the call levels of both transmission and reception drop by 3dB, however, this hardly influences the call.
[Data setting]
Set the following data to the trunk route of an analog trunk line.
CM35 Y=19
1st Data: 00-63: Trunk Route No.
2nd Data: 6: 3dB (Transit/Receive)
NOTE:
Since level dial setting becomes extremely important in digital trunks also such as ISDN trunk
and DTI trunk, make sure that the value is set to the standard value described in the manual or
adjust the value to the optimum value.
D7
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9papd001.fm
COUNTERMEASURES FOR OTHERS
COUNTERMEASURES FOR OTHERS

Mixed Use of Voice and Data
When voice and data exist in the same LAN in mixed mode, the transmission priority order of the voice
packet must be increased on the LAN to transmit a voice packet such as QoS setting and fragment certainly. See the related manual and router instruction manual for the setting method. Otherwise, voice may be
interrupted or the voice quality deteriorates.
Connection with Hubs

Since the category 5 cable that is used for LAN is heavy and the cable sags if it simply inserted in a modular
jack under its own weight, a load is applied to the modular jack, causing a contact fault. Fix the cable to
prevent the weight from being applied to the modular jack directly.
Fix the cable to not weight
D8
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9papd001.fm
APPENDIX E TCP/UDP/RTP PORT NUMBER CONDITIONS
APPENDIX E
TCP/UDP/RTP PORT
NUMBER CONDITIONS
This appendix explains the default TCP/UDP/RTP port number and range of
the available TCP/UDP/RTP port numbers used in 2000 IPS.
TCP/UDP/RTP PORT NUMBER CONDITIONS ........................
E1
E2
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pape001.fm
TCP/UDP/RTP PORT NUMBRE CONDITIONS
TCP/UDP/RTP PORT NUMBER CONDITIONS

Tables below show the default TCP/UDP/RTP port number and range of the available TCP/UDP/RTP port
numbers used in 2000 IPS.
For DtermIP
PORT
TYPE
Port for
Login to
DRS
(UDP)
DESTINATION
DEFAULT
PORT No.
NUMBER OF REFERENCE
PORT USED
PAGE
2000 IPS
(MP Built-in DRS
of Main Site)
3456
1024-65534
Assign by CM0B
Y=10>60
Page 166
2000 IPS
(MP Built-in DRS
of Remote Site)
3456
Fixed
DtermIP
3455
1024-65535
Assign by DtermIP
set up (Administrator Menu)
Page 181
Not available
(IP-PAD cannot
use DRS)
IP-PAD
Port for
PROTIMS
(UDP)
REMARKS
2000 IPS
DtermIP
IP-PAD
50000 +
64 Virtual
FP No. +
Port No. of
Virtual PIM
Base Port: 102465534

Assign by CM0B
Y=10>00-59
(Virtual FP No.)
(Default: 50000 +
64 Virtual FP
No.)
1/terminal
Page 165
3458
1024-65534
Assign by DtermIP
set up (Administrator Menu)
Page 181
Not available
E2
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pape001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
For CCIS Virtual IPT

PORT
TYPE
DESTINATION
DEFAULT
PORT No.
TCP
Server
Port
CCIS Virtual IPT
57000
1024-65534
Assign by CM0B
Y=20>00
Page 212
TCP
Client
Port
(TCP)
CCIS Virtual IPT
5800059023
Base Port: 102465534

Assign by CM0B
Y=20>01 Select
by Round Robin
method
(Use from the
lowest in blank
port)
1024
Page 212
REMARKS
NUMBER OF REFERENCE
PORT USED
PAGE
For Voice Control/Voice Packet

PORT
TYPE
Port for
Voice
Control
(UDP)
DESTINATION
DEFAULT
PORT No.
REMARKS
NUMBER OF REFERENCE
PORT USED
PAGE
DtermIP
4000
1024-65535
Assign by DtermIP
set up
(Administrator
Menu)
Page 181
IP-PAD
50000
1024-65534
Assign by CM0A
Y=10-17/30-37/
100-115>90
Page 189
E3
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pape001.fm
JULY/01/2006
For Voice Control/Voice Packet

PORT
TYPE
Port for
H.245
Voice
Control
(TCP)
Port for
Voice
Packet
(RTP)
DESTINATION
DEFAULT
PORT No.
REMARKS
DtermIP
1024-65535 1024-65535
Assign by Round
Robin method
(Use from the
lowest in blank
port)
Change by configuration
IP-PAD
6001-7024
DtermIP
3462-3525
IP-PAD
9998-10317 Base Port:102465213

Assign by CM0A
Y=10-17/30-37/
100-115>93
NUMBER OF REFERENCE
PORT USED
PAGE
1
Page 181
1024-65534
Use 1024 ports in
Round Robin
method assigned
by CM0A Y=1017/30-37/100115>92
1024
Page 190
1024-65535
Assign by Round
Robin method
(Use from the
lowest in blank
port)
64
Page 181
320
(10/channel)
Page 190
IPT (CCIS)
5600056062
Base Port: Fixed

to 56000
4/channel
IPT (H.323)
5600056047
Base Port: 2000065000

Assign by CMBA
Y=34 (Default:
56000)
4/channel
Page 314
E4
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pape001.fm
JULY/01/2006
For Remote PIM over IP

PORT
TYPE
Port for
Remote
PIM
Control
(UDP)
DESTINATION
2000 IPS
(Main Site)
DEFAULT
PORT No.
3300
REMARKS
1024-65534
Assign by CM0B
Y=10>70
DHM Self Port
(Communication
port between the
Main Site and
Remote Site),
Common Port
2000 IPS
(Main Site)
3300 +
Port per Remote
Remote Site Site
No.
(MP-MP)
Port per Remote
Site:
Setting data of
CM0B Y=10>70
+ Site No.
2000 IPS
(Main Site)
50000 +
FP/AP No.
of Remote
Site 64
1024-65534
Assign by CM0B
Y=10>00-31,
CM0B
Y=11>00-99
(Virtual FP No. of
Remote Site)
Port per Remote
Site
(MP-FP)
NUMBER OF REFERENCE
PORT USED
PAGE
1
Page 128
1/site
Page 128
1/FP-AP
Page 165
E5
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pape001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
For Remote PIM over IP

PORT
TYPE
Port for
Remote
PIM
Control
(UDP)
DESTINATION
2000 IPS
(Remote Site)
2000 IPS
(Remote Site)
DEFAULT
PORT No.
3300
REMARKS
DHM Self Port
(Communication
port between the
Main Site and
Remote Site),
Common Port
= Port per Remote
Site
(MP-MP)
(3300 fixed)
3300 +
Port per Remote
Remote Site Site
No. + 1
(MP-MP)
NUMBER OF REFERENCE
PORT USED
PAGE
1
1/FP-AP
For H.323 IP Trunk

PORT
TYPE
DESTINATION
DEFAULT
PORT No.
REMARKS
NUMBER OF REFERENCE
PORT USED
PAGE
H.255.0
RAS
Port
(UDP)
IPT
1719
Fixed to 1719
H.255.0
Control
Port
(UDP)
IPT
1720
Fixed to 1720
E6
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9pape001.fm
JULY/01/2006
APPENDIX F FULL-DUPLEX/HALF-DUPLEX CONDITIONS OF LAN INTERFACE
APPENDIX F
FULL-DUPLEX/HALFDUPLEX CONDITIONS OF
LAN INTERFACE
This appendix explains the Full-Duplex/Half-Duplex conditions of the LAN

Interface cards.
FULL-DUPLEX/HALF-DUPLEX CONDITIONS OF LAN

INTERFACE ...............................................................................
F1
F2
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9papf001.fm
FULL-DUPLEX/HALF-DUPLEX CONDITIONS OF LAN

INTERFACE
Tables below show the Full-Duplex/Half-Duplex conditions of the LAN Interface cards.
Full-Duplex/Half-Duplex Operation
100 Mbps
CARD
PZ-M606-A
PN-8IPLA
PN-32IPLA
PN-32IPLA-A
PN-IPTB
10 Mbps
FULLDUPLEX
HALFDUPLEX
FULLDUPLEX
HALFDUPLEX
NOTE 1
NOTE 1
NOTE 1
NOTE 2
NOTE 3
NOTE 3
NOTE 3
NOTE 3
NOTE 3
NOTE 1: When Auto Negotiation function is provided for both the own office LAN Interface and the opposite office LAN Interface, the own office LAN Interface is available to be set as Full-Duplex
at 100 Mbps.
In the case of that the opposite office LAN Interface is fixed as Full-Duplex at 100 Mbps, when
using the cards as shown in the Full-Duplex/Half-Duplex Settings on
Page F3, the
own office LAN Interface is available to be set as Full-Duplex at 100 Mbps.
NOTE 2: When Auto Negotiation function is provided for both the own office LAN Interface and the opposite office LAN Interface, the own office LAN Interface is available to be set as Full-Duplex
at 100 Mbps.
When the opposite office LAN Interface is fixed as Full-Duplex at 100 Mbps, the own office LAN
Interface will be set as Half-Duplex at 100 Mbps instead of Full-Duplex at 100 Mbps.
NOTE 3: When Auto Negotiation function is provided for the opposite office LAN Interface, the own
office LAN Interface will be set as Full-Duplex at 100 Mbps. When the opposite office LAN
Interface is fixed at 10 Mbps, the own office LAN Interface will be set as Half-Duplex at 10
Mbps instead of Full-Duplex at 10 Mbps.
F2
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9papf001.fm
JULY/01/2006
Full-Duplex/Half-Duplex Settings
100 Mbps
10 Mbps
AUTO
NEGOTIATION
FULLDUPLEX
HALFDUPLEX
FULLDUPLEX
HALFDUPLEX
PZ-M606-A
NOTE 1
NOTE 1
PN-8IPLA
NOTE 2
NOTE 2
PN-32IPLA
PN-32IPLA-A
NOTE 3
PN-IPTB (IPT)
CARD
REMARKS
Set by MODE
switch and
SW2-1
NOTE 1: When using Series 3400 software or later, LAN Interface is available to be set by CM0B
Y=00>05/CM0B Y=31-60>05. When using Series 3300 software or before, LAN Interface is
not available to be set manually (Auto Negotiation function is available to be provided).
NOTE 2: When using SPN-8IPLA IP PAD-B or later, LAN Interface is available to be set by the SW0 on
the PN-8IPLA card. When using SPN-8IPLA IP PAD-A, LAN Interface is not available to be
set manually.
NOTE 3: When using SPN-32IPLA IP PAD-C or later, LAN Interface is available to be set as FullDuplex at 100 Mbps by the MODE switch on the PZ-M632 card (When using SPN-32IPLA IP
PAD-B, LAN Interface is not available to be set as Full-Duplex at 100 Mbps).
F3
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9papf001.fm
F4
NWA-008840-001 Rev.5.0
9papf001.fm

009 11279 R14.0 - IPS System Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

009 11279 R14.0 - IPS System Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

A Publication of

NEC PHILIPS Unified Solutions Nederland B.V.

3522 009 11279

Great care has been taken to ensure that the information

NEC PHILIPS Unified Solutions Nederland B.V. 2007.

Abbr. PBC Description / Remarks

One touch key

Abbr. NEC Description

Abbr. PBC Description / Remarks

Announcement without 3rd party hearing it.

A standard related to 911 service

See Commands Manual

ISDN calling party number

Digital Announcement Trunk

Abbr. NEC Description

Abbr. PBC Description / Remarks

Direct Inward System Access

Digital Line Circuit

(Rotary) Dial Pulse

Differential Services (DiffServ)

Commands Manual - AP00 card

T1/E1 interface to public network

SuperVisor / Operator Console

Direct Dialing Out : setting up external calls

For Dterm assistant software

Desktop Telephone (analog or digital)

American regulation office

Signalling format for ANI.

Abbr. NEC Description

Abbr. PBC Description / Remarks

Key Feauture (registration)

Key Transfer Facility

Listed Directory Number

Message Center Interface

MF receiver / MFC receiver/sender

Phase Locked Oscillator

Key systems are operating directly on

Equipment hardware Address : PIM nbr (0 ~

Microphone or its key

OM terminal window, part of MATWorX

Kind of Cluster ID; for originating office

Shelf : comparable with CSM and PM

Property Management System (in hotel

NEC wireless system

Abbr. NEC Description

Abbr. PBC Description / Remarks

Registration Admission Status

Registration Admission Status

Basic Service Profile ID (ISDN)

Pickup incoming calls in night mode

Line numbers of trunk lines

Basic ACD. Distribution of calls based on

For Wireless system

NEAX 2000 IPS

PBX System Designation ...................................................................................................

REFERENCE MANUAL ...............................................................................................

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION ...........................................................................

SYSTEM CONDITIONS ...............................................................................................

Conditions for Overall System ..........................................................................................

SYSTEM CAPACITY ...................................................................................................

Grounding Requirements ..................................................................................................

REQUIRED EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................

Mounting ETHER Card/MP Card ........................................................................................